Manual C-631 - Searcheable

BIM
M.TM.K
BUTEHOFFNUNOSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLErCHAFT
Blatt
Operating Instructions
Turbo Compressor Set
for NO Gas
through
Foster. Wheeler Ltda.
to
Petrobrs Quimica S.A.
(PETROQUISA)
Rio de Janeiro / Brazil
Petroquisa Fafer Contract Number: 01/70

Foster Wheeler Ltda. Contract Number: 95-3100
Foster Wheeler Ltda. Requisition Number: 3100-1321 A/B
P.C. Number: 3100-1321-83
Item or Tag Number: C-631, C-632,8: TC-631
Clients Name: Petroquisa-Petrobras Quimica S/A
Project location: Cubatao, Sao Paulo
GHH Job No.: 410 020/29

GHH Code word: "Cuno"
GHH Machine No.: Compressor = 4730
Tail-Gas Expansion Turbine
0
4717
Year of construction: 1973
z Operating instructions No.: M69.0090.1117
No 3062
BUTEHILIFFIRJUNGSHILITTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Survey of Units Described
0 Complete Set
2 Radial Compressor
4 Tail-Gas Expansion Turbine
5 Motor, Gearbox
8 Lube/Control Oil System
9 Control
MIN GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
• m.TM.K Blatt
0.0.1117 List of Attachments
0.8.0.01 General plan M60.9030.1245

0.8.1.01 List of units and auxiliaries M63.9030.1245.01
0.8.2.01 List of valves M63.9030.1245.11/12/
13
0.8.3.01 Instrument list M63.9030.1245.21/22/
23/24/25/
26
0.2.0.1117 Oil piping M60.2600.1202
Monitoring M64.9060.1038
Monitoring, first-up
acquisition M64.9060.1038.01
Audible alarms M64.9060.1038.02
Visual alarms M64.9060.1038.03
Terminal connection diagram - m64.9060.1038.04
Main panel
Power supply / main drive M64.9060.1038.05
Pressure/temperature indi-
cator
_z
1":
.6
No 3062
71;
M.TM.S Bro/Ar
Ferrostaal Essen
zur Weiterleitung an Ferrostaal-Sao Paulo
z.Hd. Herrn Renner
Petroquisa
Turboverdichter "Cuno", Masch.-Nr. 4730
Ihr FS 11.2X
1)SpUlung von 1-2 Std. Dauer wahrend kritischer Betriebspunkte,

d.h. Anfahrzeitraum, ZUndvorgang, Lastpunktwechsel bzw. Ab-
fahrvorgang usw. sind zuldssig.
Stetige, kontinuierliche SpUlung wegen zu groBen VerschleiBes

(Erosion) an den Radern nicht zuldssig.
Die Einzelheit der Olspuren am Platingitter ist uns unbekannt.
Bitten um Angabe naherer Einzelheiten.
2)Stellungnahme zum Schaufelschaden

Anlage "Cosax" nach Erhalt der Informationen durch takobs.
(B r o fi )
AV.A, M.TM., M.TM.S 4x, M.TM,K, M.TM.KV, .KA, MO.M,

FS-Essen, M.TM.K.T, FS-SaoPaulo M.r
I. -4.4 71...4A-
L.0
L z'‘
131HIIHI G• UTEHOFFN•UNGSHUTTE
• M.TM.K
0.0.0.1117 Index to Unit 0

Watt
0.1.0.01 General
0.2.0.1117 Technical data
0.3.0.76 Description of the NO compressor set
0.3.1.04 Non-return valve, type, "Erhard"
0.3.1.08 Operating instructions for piston oil brake,
type "Erhard"
0.4.0.05 Checking the set before start-uo

0.4.1.02 Oil supply
0.4.1.1117 Starting position of the main shut-off and change-
over valves in the lube/control oil suPP1,Ysystem
0.4.3.13 Steam piping for oil-pump drive turbine

0.4.3.07 Steam piping for Plug-in heater of oil collecting
reservoir
0.4.4.36 Suction and discharge pipes of compressor, inlet
and discharge pipes of tail-gas expansion turbine
0.4.7.32 Seal/extraction system
0.4.8.18 NO compressor and tail-gas turbine (drainage)
0.4.6.03 Auxiliary energy
0.5.0.04 Start-up of set.

0.5.2.78 Lube and control oil supply
0.5.2.1117 Set-point values of oil pressures and oil
temperatures in oil supply system
0.5.3.08 Tail-gas expansion turbine
0.5.4.63 Control (adjustment) with starting
0.5.5.27 Seal-extraction system
0.6.0.03 Operation and maintenance

0 0.6.0.1117 Operating data
N 0.6.1.01 Steam piping
N--
0.6.1.02 Steam piping for plug-in heater of oil collecting
reservoir
0.6.2.02 Gas piping
t•-•
0.6.3.01 Water piping
0.6.4.01 Oil piping
0 0.6.5.10 Steam turbine
No 3062
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt

0.6.6.17 Compressor (general maintenance)
0.6.6.03 Compressor (purging while in operation)

0.6.6.43 Compressor (measures in case of surging)
0.6.7.14 Oil supply system
0.6.8.03 Alarms and emergency shutdowns
0.6.8.1117 Locking, alarms and emergency shutdowns
0.7.0.78 Shutdown of set

0.8.0.01 Compressor diagram M 60.9030.1245 (attached)
0.8.1.01 List of units and
auxiliaries M 63.9030.1245.01(attached)
0.8.2.01 List of valves M63.9030 .1245.11/12/13
(attached)
0.8.3.01 Instrument list M 63.9030.1245.21/22/23/24/
25/26
(attached)
0.9.0.01 Instrumentation
0.9.1.01 Pressure gauge, type "Wika"
0.9.1.26 Differential pressure gauge, type "Wika"
0.9.1.07 Pressure controller, "M&J", F 5
0.9:1.54 Remote transmission pressure gauge, type "Invex",
with remote transmission system PT7555, "Phillips"
0.9.1.65 Indicator, "Siemens" 144 x 72
0.9.2.05 Resistor thermometer Pt 100 ohm, "Joens", SK 1152 c
0.9.2.20 Resistor thermometer Pt 100 ohm, "Hoens", SK 1147 c
0.9.2.02 Thermometer "Rueger", heavy duty
0.9.2.39 Operating instructions for electric heating
equipment."Joens"
0.9.2.43 Norfa controller, type RN "Joens"
0.9.4.15 Magnet controlled liquid level gauge, "PhUnix" 71,
100 K
0.9.4.22 ' Adjustable electrical contact equipment, "Phbnix"
TK 413
0.9.4.03 Axial displacement gauge with thrust bearing-
protection, type "GHH"
511111.1 GIIIITEHOFFNALINGSHEITTIE
M.TM.K ''' Blatt
0.1.0.01 General
The information given in these instructions refers
to the operation and maintenance of the machine set
and its equipment as described under 0.3. As these
instructions cannot cover every situation in respect
of operation, maintenance and overhaul of the set and
equipment supplied, it is expedient to contact
GutehoffnungshUtte for clarification of any specific
• questions.
The wording of the instructions, including the layout

information and data, has been tried to be made as
clear as possible. Nevertheless it is necessary that
at the time of handing over of the set and its
equipment the personnel in charge of operation and
maintenance have sufficient knowledge and experience
enabling them to notice and remedy irregularities
immediately. This applies also to parts which cannot
be referred to in detail in these instructions.
GutehoffnungshUtte cannot assume any responsibility

for damage due to improper handling and operation of
the set.
For incorporation into the production plant system of

the set and equipment supplied by GutehoffnungshUtte
it may be necessary to revise certain points of
these instructions with regard to specific requirements.
In such cases it is expedient to approach Gutehoffriuns-
hUtte for advice.
Oi
No 2960
GHH OUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
• M.TM.K
0.2.0.1117 (NO)
Blatt
Technical Data
Radial Compressor Design Normal Reduced (purging)
Operation
(=105%) (=100%) (=55%)
Machine No. 4730

Type Gvn 8/5L
Gas handled NO
Flow rate 40,341 38,420. 21,266 Nm3/h
Flow rate 40,055 38,147 18,532 m3/h
Suction pressure 1.25 1.25 1.424 kp/cm2abs
(=PACN)
Suction temperature 55 55 55 °C
Humidity moist moist moist
Specific weight at
suction conditions 1.268 1.268 1.454 kg/m3
Discharge pressure 5 5 4.799 kp/cm2 abs
(=PACN)
Discharge temperature, oC
abt. 257 257 256
Speed 6,458 6,458 6,458 rpm
Critical speednki 2,745 rpm
Critical speednk2 9,010 rpm
Power taken up by com-
pressor including
gearbox 3,170 3,060 1,680 kW
Gearbox
Manufacturer Renk, Augsburg
Type PA 40 p
Transmission ratio i = 3.63 = 1780/6458 rpm
O
Power transmission (design) 2300 kW
Ne 3062
HHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSMITTE
M.TM.K Blatt
Tail-gas turbine Design Maximum Reduced(purging)

Operation
(=100%) (=105%) (=55%)
Machine No. 4717

Type GTVn 6/70
Gas handled NO tail gas
Flow rate 31,443 33,015 17,293 Nm3/h
Gas pressure at intake 4.0 4.0 /1,292 icp/erif dxs
(=PA TD)
Gas temperature at oC
intake 220 220 213
(=PATD)
Specific weight at
suction conditions 1.248 1.248 1.248 kg/Nm3
Discharge pressure 1.06 1.06 1.06 kp/criQabs
Discharge temperature, oC
abt. . 107 107 107
Power 1,334 1,1.1.90 788 kW
Speed it is referred to compressor
Critical speeds it is referred to compressor
Main drive motor (furnished by purchaser)
•Iar
No 3062
GEM GUITEHOFFNUNBSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELL'SCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
Mail oil tank

Manufacturer GHH Sterkrade AG
Capacity 5000 liters
Pluir-in heater for oil tank.

Manufacturer CHH Sterkrade- AG
Type of heating Steam heating
Main oil DUMP set

Mounted on common. base plate together with steam turbine,
inclusive of flexible coupling with coupling guard,
consisting of:
a) Main oil pump

Manufacturer Neiding, Mannheim
Type N5/175
Form of construction A, group 1
Bearing type compound sleeves
Shaft sealing adjustable threaded sleeves
Delivery volume approx. 700 1/min
Operation Pressure 12 1=g/cm2 gge
Speed approx. 1800 rpm
b) Steam turbine driving the main oil pump

Manufacturer KKK, Frankenthal
Type BF 4/50
2
Live-steam pressure 21 'kp/cm gge
Live-steam temperature dry saturated
Exhaust-steam pressure 4.5 kp/cm- abs
Power, normal 23 kW
Power, max. 27 111
0 Steam consumption - normal power 2100 Icg/h
z
Steam consumption - max. power 2330 kc/h
0, 2.0. 1119 (0
No 30E2
IBUTEHOFFNUNIRSHILITTE
STERKRADE AKTiENGESELLSCHAFT
• N.TM.K Blatt
Auxiliary oil pump set

Mounted on common base.plate together with electric motor,
inclusive of flexible coupling with coupling guard,
consisting of:
A) Auxiliary oil pump

Manufacturer Neidig. Mannheim
Type N5/175
Form of construction A, group 1
Bearing type compound sleeves
Shaft sealing adjustable threaded sleeves
• Delivery volume
Operating pressure
Speed
approx.
approx.
approx.
700
12
1800
1/min
kp/cm2 gge
rpm
B) Electric motor driving the auxiliary oil pump (furnished

by purchaser)
Manufacturer General Electric, Contorno
Type 365 U
Twin oil cooler with change-over valve

Manufacturer Wabco Westinghouse, Gronau/Leine
Type CP 1006 - two-way
Heat transmission 150000 kcal/h
Oil quantity, normal 600 1/min
Oil quantity, max. 750 1/min
Oil cooling 60/45
Water heat up 30/35 0C
Water quantity 30 m/h
Operation pressure - oil side 12 kp/cm2 gge
Operation pressure - water side 5 kp/cm2 gge
Design pressure - oil/water side 12/10 kp/cm2 gge
0
z Design temperature 100
Pressure drop - oil/water side - max. 10 m.W.G.
Each cooler is rated to handle the entire oil volume so that one
cooler is always available as a reserve.
• cs;
No.3062
GHH BUTEHICIFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Men
Twin oil filter with change-over valve (for tube and control
oil)
Manufacturer Boll & Kirch, Cologne

Type 161-I, NB 100; NP 16
Oil quantity 750 1/Min
Operation pressure 12 kp/cm2 gge
Design pressure 12 kp/cm2 gge
Design temperature 100 °C
Operation temperature 60 o c
Filter fineness 25 microns
Max. pressure loss across clean filter 0.5 m W.G.
Each filter is rated to handle the entire oil volume being

circulated so that one filter is always available as a
reserve.
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUITTE
M.TM.K Blatt
0.).0.76 Description of the NO Compressor set

The radial compressor set for nitrous gas is part
of the overall plant for the production of nitric
acid. The plant includes also an air compressor
set. Both compressor sets can either be operated
jointly as well as separately. Their common oil
supply system is suitable to be changed over for
these operation modes.
The radial compressor takes in nitrous gas from

the chemical process and compresses it for use
• in a further process from which the residual gas
is delivered- into the tail-gas expansion turbine.
Seal air at over-pressure is directed to one
chamber each of the shaft exit seals of the
compressor and the tail-gas turbine to prevent
leakage of nitrous gas from these shaft exit seals.
To avoid surging the compressor is equipped with

a pneumatically operated surge limit volume
control which acts on a hydraulically operated
blow-off valve. The flow rate and/or the discharge
pressure is controlled by means , of an inlet guide
blade control to be operated by hand.
• A tail-gas expansion turbine serves as auxiliary
drive of the compressor. The tail-gas expansion
turbine is flanged to the bearing pad of the
compressor. The turbine impeller is mounted to the
shaft end of the compressor and forms an integral
unit with the compressor rotor. The intake volume
0 can be controlled through a manually operated,
oil-hydraulically driven high-speed throttle valve.
Two nozzle groups of different size which can be
cut in or off to requirement. ensure economical
operation when the set runs at partial load.
No 3062
GHH GUTEHEIFFNUNGSHIATTE
STEFIKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
binti
A manually operated, oil-hydraulically driven bypass valve

is installed in a bypass line to the turbine.
The compressor set is driven by an. electric motor the speed

of which is increased to that of the compressor by an
intermediate earbox. The compact oil supply system supplies
the lube oil to the bearings and other lubrication points
on the motor, gearbox and Compressor as well as the control
and power oil for all hydraulic control devices and actuators.
The main oil pump driven by a steam turbine and the auxiliary
oil pump which is driven by an electric motor suck the oil
from the oil tank through separate pipes and feed it via the
change-over twin oil cooler and change-over twin oil filter
to the consumer points on the machines. A branch pipe past the
filters, however, before the coolers directs a flow to the
hydraulic control devices and actuators. The pressure in the
lube oil branch and in the control/power oil branch is kept
constant by control valves.
The set is equipped with the measuring, control and alarm

instruments necessary for smooth and trouble-free operation.
Moreover, the main switch of the drive motor is connected to
• an interlockingchain by which the compressor set is automatical-

ly shut down if certain irregularities occur.
In this case the blow-off valve of the compressor is opened,

via a three-port solenoid valve, and. the discharge pipe is
relieved from pressure. Another three-port solenoid valve
causes at same time the. blow-off valve to' open and the throttle
valve of the tail-gas turbine to close, thereby disconnecting
the said turbine from the network and interrupting its
generation of drive power. The set thus runs down to standstill
without delay.
•
No 3062
BUTEHOFFNUNISSElliTTE
• M.TM,K
0.3.1, 04-
STERKRADE AKTIENa - E•SELLEICHAFT
HARD CHECK VALVE.

Blatt
F REIGN. PAT.
drive over a worm gea . The electric drive is switched off by means
of a limit switch. in case of current failure or interruption of the
current supply of the electro-magnetic clutch the valve closes auto-
matically. Electro-magnetic clutch and gear are protected by a built-
in freewheeling which enables the unhindered movement of the
valve disc in: the opening direction when the electro-magnetic clutch
is energized.. With a hydraulic or pneumatic full-opening device the
valve disc.'s moved into the fully open position by pressurizing a
piston. The control is effected by means of a solenoid valve. If the
control Is performed by oil pressure, the operating cylinder can be
designed simultaneously as brake cylinder. When the piston is
pressurized in closing direction, the closing tendency can be
Function: The function of the ERHARD Swing Check Valve corre- increased, if necessary, thus Increasing the closing speed.
sponds to that of normal swing check valves. The valve disc is kept In small sizes the weight lever can be lifted manually and locked
in open position by the flow. The valve opening depends on the in open position. The valve is closed when the lifting magnet is
velocity of flow. On interruption of the delivery, the valve closes, de-energized or when it is energized, according to design.
thus preventing a reflux of the flow medium. Each construction 'of a special design must be adapted to tne
service requirements. For this reason, all relevant data and infor-
mation about the required function should be given with. the order.
Design: The valve disc rotation axis is located in the upper half of
the valve. Shafts are off-set from body and disc sealing rings, an
interruption of the sealing surface thus being avoided.
Conical design of body and disc sealing rings ensures absolutely
leaktight closure and smooth swing-in and swing-out of the valve
disc. Wear is eliminated as there is no sliding of the sealing rings
over each other, one sealing ring being lifted from the other.
The shaft bearings are protected from the flow medium, contami-
nation thus being eliminated and permanent function ensured.
Available sizes from 150 mm for all working pressures and flow
media, overall length as for flat type gate valves. ..• • -•
Comparison .01 the structural dimensions of an ERHARD Check Valve
The valves are generally equipped with lever and weight. The shafts
nom. die 1000 mm with those of a nornial check valve of the same size
protrude at both sides, lever and weight can be mounted to the right
or the left. Cast iron and cast steel valves in sizes 1300 mm and
larger are provided with lever and weight at each side. Body with
feet to order.
Flange connections to DIN, on request to .B.S., ASA, and other
specifications.
• Materials: According to the application, body and valve disc are

made of cast iron, cast steel, fabricated steel, brass, bronze, or
stainless steel. Cast iron valves are normally supplied with brass
sealing rings, for corrosive flow media with bronze sealing rings,
while fabricated steel valves are provided with sealing rings of
stainless steel. The shaft trunnions are of stainless steel, supported
in bearing bushes of brass. Special selection of materials is made
for particular service conditions. ERHARD Check Valve
with piston oil brake
Special-Purpose Types: For gaseous media the fabricated construc-
tion is preferred as more favourable flow values are attained owing
to lighter weight. For locking the valve disc, the ERHARD. Swing
Check Valve can be provided with a plug-in or screwed device.
Design with Oil Brake: If a reflux of.the flow is expected to occur

cJ before the valve is closed. the provision of an oil brake is recom-
mended to prevent water hammer or closing strokes. For use with
high pressures and in large sizes an oil brake is required at each
side of the valve.
Design with Full-Opening Device: If the pressure loss must be kept

extremely low, it. is recommended to provide the ERHARD Check
Valve with a full-opening device. This is mostly necessary in the
case of low flow velocities, when the valve disc does not reach its
fully open position.
If a mechanical-electric full-opening device ie used, the valve is
opened by moans of an electro-magnetic clutch and an eloctric
O
No 3062
611111 OUTEHICIFFNUINGSHUTTE
• M,TM,K
STERN R ADE
. .
AKTIEN GESE LLSCHAFT
Einbaubeispiele der ERHARD-Rucksablagklappe Installation Examples for ERHARD Check Valves

Blatt
Bei Bestellung- bitte Hebelanordnung nach FigUr-Nr. angeben. When ordering, please stale figure number for arrangement of the lever.
Horizontale Leitung ' orizontal M;:in
— - .
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 -I-
., -- Fig. 3
Hebei links in Druchflugrichtung Hebei rechts in Durchflu8richtung Hebei beldseing
4 Leve, on tla! left.
t.een in th, direction of flow
- •I Lever on the right,
seen in the direction'of flow .
Lever on both sides
1,
1
. Vertika e Leltung Vertical Main

Durchflufirichtung von unten nach oben Vertically upward direction of flow
I Fig. 4 4 Fig 5 Fig. 8
Hebei links in Durchflu8richtung I Hebei rechts In DurchflugrIchtung •Hebel beidseitig
-.164-
-.- Lever on the lett, Lever on the right. Lever on troth sides
1,.. t seen in the direction of flow • • i seen in the direction of flow
p 41\Q
ji
k, I
Durchflul3richtung von oben nach unten Vertically downward direction of flow
Fig 7 I Fig 8 Flg. 9

Mil Hebei links In DurchflugrIchtung cffitifi,..-.-_-_a Hebei rechts in DurchfluBrIchtung Hebei beidseitig
Lover on the left. . Lever on the right, Level on both Sides
..,
.../ ., •r.ri•ifl the direction of flow ' ..,,n 0 th. d. Inn it flow
tlir 411 -
e1 e2
0
i.
,,......
,, ..
, ,
..
.. II
f ,1 ,, _....1
......,.,,
,
CV i ,., / iI
.c
co
(1
:;<
<- -:
\ \' I ---
L11 :11
- P ,
1.1._.4z_lf
__ __
-jai -.]-- 2-
b3 _
Characteristic Features of the ERHARD Swing Check Valve: Short ing condi ions • Shafts protruding from the body on both sides, per-
overall length • Low height . Light weight • Low pressure loss - milting the weighted lever to be mounted to the right or to the left.
No vibration of the valve disc in the flow - Gentle closure • Eccentric ERHARD Check Valves are normally supplied without supporting
bearings and therefore no interruption of the sealing rings • Conical feet. On request and at an additional charge, the valve body can be
sealing rings. ensuring an absolutely leaktight closure • Lifting of supplied with supporting feet. Connecting flanges according to DIN.
one sealing surface from the other when the valve opens or closes • ERHARD Check Valves can a so be supplied with flanges accord-
Adjustable weight and therefore adaptability to the individual working. to British, American and o her Standards.
. .._. .. . . . .,.. . .. .. .. . .
Flanschanschlu8ma80 Ausleclungsma8e.. Fu5me8e9 Gewicht
flange dimensions') projecting.perts • .feet') weight '
Nennweite Bau-
ldnge
size overall krels 0
length Flansch 0 bolt Loch- -
flange 0 holes NDIO ND/8
circle 0
NW L D b k 0 e, e, e, e, 'h, h, b, b, b, h,
ca. Zoll •
Anzehl I
mm. inch mm mm mm mm number mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg kg
150 6 210 285 26 240 • 8 23 212 220 230 5 205 140 45
200 8 230 340 26. 295 8 23 241 255 230 20 215 130 60
250 10 250 395 28 350 12 23 291 310 250 45 240 135 80
300 12 270 •445 28 . 400 12 23 320 • 345 300 70 285 160 115 70 300 240 . 100
tJ 350 14 290 505 30 460 16 .23 350 380 350 95 335 190 120 80 350 270 135 145
400 16 310 565 32 515 ' 16 27 380 410 400 115 380 210 130 90 400 300 180 195
450 18 330 615 32 565 20 • 27 414 440 4.5.0 145 430 240 140 90 WO 330 210 290
500 20 350 670 34 620 20 27 444 480 500 170 475 260 150 100 500 370 270 430
600 24 390 780 36 725 20 30 509 540 600 220 565 315 170 110 600 430 400 570
700 28 430 895 40 840 24 • 30 579 615 700 265 655 370 190 120 700 460 530 755
600 32 470 1015 44 950 24 •33 655 680 800 320 760 420 210 130 800_520 700 990
- 900 36 510 . 1115 46 1050 28 33 723 780 900 370 850 470 230 140 900570 920 12907
1000 40 550 1230 50 1160 28 •36 . 793 825 1000 415 945 525 250 150 1000 640 1200 1610
1100 44 590 • 1340 52 1270 32 36 861 895 1000 460 970 510 290 170 1100 690 1500 2150
•1200 48 630 1455 56 1380 32 39 ____,_ 954 975 1000 515 990 490 290 170 1200 750 2000 2480
1300"52 670 .1575 60 1490 32 42 1060 1060 1000 560 1000 470 310 185 1300 800 2300 2900
1400 56 710 1675 62 1590 36 42. 1062 1100 1000 615 1045 460 310 185 1400 850 2700 3650
1503 60 750 1785 64 1700 36 42 1190 1190 1000 660 1100 500 350 225 1500 920 3200 4450.
1600 64 790 1915 58 1820 40 48 1230 1230 1000 705 1220 560 350 225 1600 970. .3800- ,.„.
No 3062 - - - •--- ---
GHH BISTEEMIFFNIIINGSIIIITTE-
•
STER•K,R.ADE AKTIENGESEL1-SCHAFT
M.TM.K
Blatt
ERHARD-NUck.schlapklappe
mit &lbremze
fdr gasfdrmige Medien fiber + 200°C
Montaganweisung:
Vor dem Einbau der ERHARD-RUckschlagklappe miissen die Leitungen von

jeglichem Schmutz,.Fremdkdrpern usw. gereinigt werden.
Beim Einbau in das Rohrleitungssystem ist darauf zu achten, daB die

zum AbschluBkommenden Flansche parallel zueinander stehen. Es clUrfen
keine groBen Verzugskrdfte auf das Klappemgehduse wirken. Die Schrau-
ben zum AnschluB der Rohrteitung an den Flanschverbindungen sind
gteichmd8ig anzuz• iehen.
• Wartung:
Die dellen aus nichtrostendem Staht sind in . selbstschmierenden

Gleitbuchsen gelagert. Die Abdichtung der WellendurchfUhrungim
Gehduse erfotgt durch Gewebe-Packungen in Stop fbuchsenbauart.
Mit Ausnahme einer gelegentlichen Nachstellung der Stopfbuchsen bei

auftretender Undichtheit, erfordert die Klappe keine .lartung.
Wirkungsweise:
Die Klappenscheibe doppett exzentrisch oelagert, wird durch die

Strdmung geOffnet. Der sick hierbei ergebende StraMungswiderstand
kann durch Verschieben des Gewichtes nach der Hebelnabe zu verringert
werden. Dabei darf das Gewicht nur soweit nach innen geschoben werden,
daB ein SchlieBen der Klappenscheibe in unbeaufschlagtem Lustand
bis ca. 45° gewdhrteistet bleibt.Bei Aufhdren der Durchstrdmung wird
das SchlieGen der Kleppe durch das Gewicht eingeieitet. Der vollkom-.
mene AbschluB erfolgt durch die Beaufschlagung der Klappenscheibe
durch das expandierende Medium.
JOHANNES ERHARD; H. WALDENMAIER ERBEN

S'..iddeutsche Armaturer.;%;bril.: F:::!der.1^.err: or. der Brara 4.64.001 BI.7
SIUTENUFFNUNISSEINITTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGES - ELCSCHAFT
M TM.K Blatt
. Kothen61:::remzen
zu ERHARD-Riickschlagktappen
!dr gasfOrmige Hz..dien dber 150° C ! Eimricts:nkitunQ
Beim SchlieDen der Klappe durch dos expandierende Medium kcnn ein
Schl-reAschlag entsteheh. Um diese nachteilige Erscheinung zu ddmpfen,
ist der Anbau von Otbremsen erforderlich.
In einer am Klappengehduse angeflanschten Konsote ist die Kolbentilbremse

schwenkbar getagert. Die Kolbenstange ist an den Gewichtshebet cngelenkt,
• welcher dber die Welle mit der Klappenscheibe lest verbunden ist.
Beim Offnungsvorgang der Ktappenscheibe kann das at in der Kolkendtbremse

ungehindert von einer Kolbenseite auf die andere stromen, wodurch ein
leichtes Offnen gegeben ist.
Wdhrend des SchlieDvorganges kann die Mlappenscheibe etwa 2/3 des Schlie3-
weges frei schlieBen, ohne dap eine wesentliche Bremsung erfolgt.
ist der Umfahrungskanal am Bremszylinder ungedrosselt, so dal das 01 unge-
bremst den Kolben umstrOmen kann. Hierdurch soil eine mdglichst geringe
RUcklaufmenge des FOrdermediums erreicht werden. Im letzten Drittel des
SchlieDweges erfolgt eine Bremswirkung, welche dber die Drosselschraube
eingestellt werden kann. Gr6Dere Otbremsen besitzen im Bremsweg2-Dross'el-
schrauben. Somit ist der Bremsweg gestuft einstellbar. Bei ganz geschloisener
Drosselschraube ist eine maximale Bremswirkung, jedoch keine absolute Dichi-
heit des Kotbens vorhonden.
Im Work wird die SchlieBzeit unter der vorhandenen Gewichtsbelastung ohne

BerUcksichtigung eines RUckdruckes auf die Ktappenscheibe 5 - 10 sec einge-
• stellt. de naph eetriebsbedingungen tritt im Betrieb ein Verkdrzen dieser

Schlietizeit ein. Ein Nachregulieren ist eventuell erforderlich.
Vor dem Verstetten der Drosselschraube ist die Kontermutter zu 16sen

und danach wieder fest anzuziehen, um ein selbsttdtiges Verstetten zu
vermeiden.
Sind beiderseits albremsen vorhonden, so mu/ die Einstellung gleiehmaAig

erfolgen, so dad in jeder albremie die gleichen BremsdrOcke herrschen.
Dieskenn beim Verstetten der Drosselschrauben durch gleiche Teilum-
drehungen erreicht werden.
Die Kolben6Lbremse wird betriebsfertig mit OtfUtlung geliefert. Des Brems-

Ot hat eine Viskositdt von ca. 34 E bei 50° C. Die Ko1bentilbremse ist in
regelmdBigen Abstdnden auf Leckvertuste zu Uberpr6fen. Sie besitzt an den
2ylinderdeckeln Fultschrauben, die zum Nachfallen zu entfernen und
anschlieBend wieder fest zu verschrauben sind. Die gr63eren Olbremsen
verfUgen auDerdem am hinteren Zylinderdeckel dber einen dt-Ausgleichsbehdlter,
fiber den das.Nachfullen der Olbremse vorgenommen werden kann.
413
O
4.6L; 001 81.71
No 2960
13111111 BILITEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
Checking the set before start-up
The checks described in the following sections

are to be thoroughly made before every start-up.
They do not only serve to ensure proper starting
conditions but also to examine whether all se-
condary equipment, control and measuring devices
and valves are in proper working order.
With the check lists attached to the relevant sections

relating to the starting positions of the shut-off'
and change-over valves it is possible to ensure per-
fect checks throughout.
41-1-1
0
No 2960
SIM BUTEHEIFFINUNIGSNUTTE
S . TERKRADE •AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT .
M.TM.K Blatt
0.4.1.02 Oil supply
The shut-off valve at the bottom of the oil tank

serves to check whether the oil contains any water.
The valve is to be opened and kept opened until
any water has run off and only clear oil comes
out.
The level in the oil tank is to be checked at the

oil level indicator. When the oil pump is not yet
in operation the oil level should be at the filling
mark. If necessary, oil should be added, which
should always be available in sufficient quanti-
ty. For this a sieve with a mesh width below
250 micron should be used.
All shut-off and change-over valves are to be

brought into their starting positions. Refer to
the relevant check list.
ts.)
Ogi
No 2960
HHH- BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
8TERKRA•DE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
.0.4.1.1117 Starting positions of the main shut-off and

change-over valves in the lube oil supply
system
Job No.: 410 020 - 29

Code word: "Cuno"
Drain of oil tank closed
Upstream auxiliary oil pum open
Downstream main oil pump throttled
Downstream auxiliary oil pump open
Water-side drains at oil coolers closed
Oil-side drains at oil coolers closed
Water-side vents at oil coolers closed
• Oil-side vents at oil coolers
Change-over valves at oil coolers

closed
end positions
A or B
Filling valve for standby oil cooler open
Filling valve for standby oil filter open
Drains at oil filters closed
Vents of oil filters closed
.„„
GHH BUTEHOFFNILIN6SHUTTE
EITERKRADE AKTIENGESELL8CHAFT
M.TM.K Man .
Change-over valves of oil filters end positions

A or B
Bypass valve for lube oil control

valve PCV 8000.1 closed
Shut-off valve in simulation pipe closed
Operation of air compressor set only:

F 8605.1 opened
F 8605.2 closed
• Operation of NO compressor set only:

F 6605.1 closed
F 8605.2 opened
Operation of air and NO compressor sets:

F 8605.1 and F 8605.2 opened
The control/power oil feed to the set at standstill is

automatically blocked when either only the air or only the
NO compressor set is in operation.
The cooling water feed to the oil coolers is opened and at

same time the cooling water compartments of the oil coolers
are to be properly vented by temporarily opening the water-side
vent valves. The cooling water drain valves of the oil coolers
remain closed for the time being. They will be opened only
subsequent to start-up of the set when the oil temperature rises.
All oil return and vent pipes must be free of obstructions.
of
P
-
No 3062
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
0.4.3.13 Steam pipes for oil pump driving turbine
All shut-off valves in the steam pipes have

to be checked for operability. Valves difficult
to operate or ,..uatight valves have to be
overhauled before start-up.
The driving turbine for the oil pump is to be

connected to the back-pressure steam system by
opening the steam outlet valve. The steam
admission pipe of the driving turbine is to be
slowly pressurized as far as the operating valve,
duly draining it at the same time.
• M
No-3062
OUTEHEIFFNUNGEHUTTE
M.TM.K. STERKFIADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Matt
0.4.3.07 Steam pipes for the heating system

of the main oil tank
The feed valve remains closed for some time. The

free direct drain of the tube bundle is opened.
It is not closed again until after a required
operation of the heating system the function of
continuous drainage has been transferred to the
trap.
>1%,
O
O
No 2960
M.TM.K Blatt
0.4.4.3 Suction and Discharge pipes of compressor

Intake and exhaust pipes of tail-gas expansion
turbine
The suction pipe of the compressor and the intake pipe

of the tail-gas turbine must be checked for soiling
as impurities entrained may be a danger for the machine:
The shut-off valves in the pipes to and from the mauhines
are to be opened. (On its discharge end, the compressor
is protected by a non-return valve.)
Since no oil pressure has built up yet, all valves on

the machine set are in their safety position, i.e.
1. the blow-off valve in the bypass of the compressor
discharge pipe in open position;
2. the blow-off valve in the bypass of the tail-gas
turbine exhaust pipe in open position;
3. the throttle valve in the intake pipe of the tail-
gas turbine in closed position.
The manually operated inlet guide blade positioner is

to be set to start-up position (slightly open) by
turning the handwheel clockwise as far as it will go.
To ensure that the valves maintain their set positions

on start up of oil supply, i.e. to prevent them from
closing or opening, the hand actuators at the positioners
are to be moved to their corresponding end positions, i.e
1. blow-off valve of compressor: handwheel of positioner
to be completely turned out anti-clockwise.
GHH IBUTEHOFFNUNOSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGERELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
2. blow-off valve of tail-gas turbine: handwheel of

positioner to be completely turned out anti-
clockwise.
3. throttle valve of tail-gas turbine: handwheel of
positioner to be completely turned in clockwise.
The two hand valves of the tail-gas turbine to be

fully opened by turning out the handwheels anti-
clockwise.
cl)
m
•
No 3062
BHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K STERKRADE
Blatt
0.4.7.32 Sealing and extraction system
As a precautionary measure, sealing with gas

from an external source should be effected at
the shaft passage openings (sometimes called
'shaft exits') of the compressor and of the tail-
gas expansion turbine as well as at the passage
openings of the hand valve stems, even when
inspecting the plant. To achieve this, the hand
valve installed in the external-gas pipe is to
be opened. The hand valve installed in the
seal-gas pipe from the discharge pipe of the air
compressor, this seal-gas pipe is protected by a
non-return valve, can likewise be opened. This
measure ensures positively the sealing with
system gas upon start-up of the air compressor.
When only the NO compressor operates, the hand
valve for internal gas remains closed.
With the aid of the hand valve F 8605.5 for the

compressor and F 8605.6 for the tail-gas turbine,
the seal-gas pressure for theshaft-passage
openings of the compressor is to be set to 0.4 kp/
cm2 gge. and for that of the tail-gas turbine
with openings for hand-valve steam passage to 0.2
kg/cm2 gge.(Reading on PI 9842.22 and PI 9842.30).
Upon start-up, the specified settings are to be
by means of the mentioned valves
(set-point temperature of seal gas = 80-100°0.
0
Since no shut-off valvesare installed in the
extraction pipes, extraction at the hand valves
and at the high-speed throttle valve is effected
positively only upon start-up of the set or,
respectively, when the necessary quantity of tail
gas is available.
No .306'1
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNIESHUTTE
m.TM-K Blatt
o.4.8.18 NO Compressor and tail-gas expansion turbine

(drainage)
Before starting up the set the compressor and

turbine casings must be drained by opening the
valves on the bottom of the casings. When all
liquid has been drained, the valves have to be
closed again.
The valves must be closed completely tight as.
they are subject to nitrous gas druing operatipn.
• r
CO
O
No NW
BUTEHOFFNUNESHUTTE
STERK•RAOE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K
0.4.6.03 Auxiliary energy
The electric and pneumatic auxiliary energy is

allowed to flow as far as the relevant equipment.
The automatic starting equipment of the auxiliary
oil pump must be kept locked. It is not released
until, after start-up of the oil supply system,
the lube oil system is at the specified pressure.
Ns.
ro
0
z
Cit
No 1960
614111 BUTEIHIGIFFNUNGSHUTTE
S.TERKIVADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M. TM. K MM .
0.5.0.04 Start-up of the Set
The set may only be started up taking into consider-

ation the specific conditions prevailing in the plant
system.
As the start-up instructions given in the following .

sections refer only to the machine set and equipment
supplied by Giffi, it is advisable to combine them with
the regulations relating.to the plant syStem to form
comprehensive start-up instructions.
0.)
‘-•
O
O
No 3062
Mill BUTEHOFFNILINGSHLITTE
Blatt
0.5.2.78 Lube/Control Oil Supply

The main oil pump (driven by a small steam
turbine) is to be put in operation and the oil
cooling inbuilt in the bearing casing is to be
supplied with cooling water. Then the oil
temperature in the oil supply system of the set
must be checked. If the value measured is below
the minimum required for start up, the heater
installed in the main oil tank must be switched
on. The oil heater may only be used when the oil
pump is running to ensure that the oil is evenly
heated up.
While being filled- the oil cooler and oil filter

must be well vented. The vent valves and the
filling valves for the standby cooler and filter
are to be closed as soon as oil escaping at the
vent valves indicates that the oil cooler and
filter have been completely filled with oil.
The shut-off valve in the delivery pipe downstream

the main oil pump, which has been throttled up till
now to prevent the filter inserts being damaged by
pressure shocks during filling, now has to be
completely opened.
The degree of soiling in the oil filters is to be

checked. If the pressure difference between the
oil inlet and outlet exceeds the admissible max.
value the filter has to be cleaned after changing
over to the standby filter.
The settings of the pressure control valves for

lube oil and control oil are to be checked and
corrected if necessary.
to
t4c;poi9
DHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AK'TIENGESELLSCHAFT
m.TM.K
•
Blatt
The correct setting of the safety valve for the

main and auxiliary oil pumps is to be checked
and adjusted if necessary. The response value
of the valve is obtained by carefully throttling
the shut-off valves installed in the delivery
pipe downstream the main and auxiliary oil pumps.
After making this check the shut-off valves should
be fully opened again.
The automatic starting mechanism for the auxiliary
• oil pump (driven by electric motor) which is still

blocked must now be released. The auxiliary oil
pump must be ready to be switched on via the auto-
matic starting mechanism at low control oil pressure.
Its readiness to go into operation can be checked by
lowering the oil pressure in the test pipe which
branches off the lube oil circuit downstream the oil
filters and coolers and drains into the main oil
tank. The oil pressure in the test pipe is reduced
by opening the shut-off valve separating the test
pipe from the drain pipe.
The shut-off valve in the test pipe for the aux.

oil pump automatic starting mechanism is to be
closed and the auxiliary oil pump to be shut off
by hand.
During the preparations described above the oil

temperature should be checked often. The heating
up of the oil should be stopped when the tempera-
ture of the oil downstream the cooler has reached
the set value required for starting up the set.
When the set has been started up the cooling water
feed valve at the oil cooler has to be opened and
the cooling water flow regulated by the valve so
that the oil leaves the cooler at the right tem-
BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELL8CHAFT
Blatt
perature. As a steady oil temperature is not

established until after a certain period of
operation it may be necessary to readjust the
cooling water flow.
The set-point values of the oil pressures and

oil temperatures can be seen from the relevant
list.
co
41 .t•_!
Ln
0
No 3062
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNESHUTTE
EITERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
• M.TM.K Blett
0.5.2.1117 Oil Supply System

Set-Point Values of Oil Pressures and Temperatures
Job No.: 420 020-29
Code :lord: ”Cuno 11
PSV 0890.1/PSV 0890.2

Response pressure of pump safety valve
for auxiliary oil pump/main oil pump 12 A.e cm2
• PCV 8810.1 and PI 9842.23 and 24

Oil pressure at control-oil pressure
control valve 11 kp/cm2
PCV 8800.1
Outlet pressure at lube-oil pressure
control valve 3.0 kp/cm2
PI 9842.2 and 20;PIE 9641.1
Control-oil pressure past the
filter 10.0 kp/cm2
PI 9042.4 and 5; PIE 9841.2

Lube oil pressure in distributor pipe 3.0 kp/cm2
PdIAh 9842.6
Maximum permissible pressure differential
at oil filters 0.8 kp/cm2
PA1 9844.1
Response pressure for the auxiliary
oil-puMPcut in automatics = 2.5 hp/cm2
PA1 9844.:5'
Response pressure for cut-off
automatics of the motor and tail-gas
turbine drivers of the NO compressor 2.0 kp/cm2
t••••
r• PA1 9844.2
•
Response pressure for cut-off automatics
1,1
1
of the motor driver of the air compressor 2.0 kp/cm2
No 3062
GHH BUTEHEIFFNUNGSHIIITTE
M.TM.K Matt
PI 9042.0 and 11
r r
Oil pressure upstream the gearbox bearings c.:•D kp/cm2
PI 9842.6, 7, 12 and 13
Oil pressure upstream the compressor
bearings (to be set according to
bearing temperature)
0.5 to 1.7 kp/cm2
PI 9842.10 and 21
Oil pressure upstream the motor bearings:
according to instructions of motor supplier.
TI 9852.2 and TI 9852.1

Oil temperature upstream the oil cooler
and in the oil tank,
normal 55°C
TIAlh 9054.1
Oil temperature past the oil cooler
excessive (alarm) >, 55°C
Oil temperature past the oil cooler

• inadmissibly low (alarm and cut-in lock) 30°C
TIAlh 8854.1; TI 9852.3; TE 9851.1

Oil temperature past the oil cooler being
normal approx. 45°C
GHH
M.TM.K
GUTENLIFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
Tail-P.-as expansion turbine
The tail-gas expansion turbine the compressor

are both mounted on the same shaft so that both
are driven by a common electric motor.
Heating up the turbine at standstill by external

gas or steam has to be dispensed with in order
to avoid distortion of the rotor.
• The turbine may also not be idled for any length

of time without some sort of gaseous cooling agent.
When starting up the rate of increase in the gas

temperature should be about 3°C/min.
When starting up the turbine after a short inter-

ruption in operation the following rule must be
strictly observed: The casing temperature must be
the same as that of the gas about to be intro-
duced, and this means that the turbine casing may
have to be cooled down to about gas temperature.
A difference in the casing and gas temperature up
to about +50°C would not represent a danger when
starting up again.
co
0
• cYi:
0
No 3062
M.TM.K 13160
0.5.4.63 Control (adjustment)with startin

The pneumatic surge limit volume control is to be
checked and, if necessary, to be readjusted. The
lever on the control unit is to be shifted to "A"
= Automatic. The surge limit volume controller of
the NO compressor is then available as standby for
start-up of the set.
Upon start-up of the oil supply system, i.e. when

pressure oil is available to the hydraulic actuators
the throttle valve and the blow-off valve of the
tail-gas turbine can be set to starting position;
1. throttle valve: handwheel of positioner to be

turned slowly anti-clockwise as far as it will
go;
2. blow-off valve of tail-gas turbine: handwheel of

positioner to be turned clockwise as far as it
will go.
All control valves of the NO compressor set are now

in starting position, i.e.:
inlet guide blades of compressor = slighly opened;
blow-off valve of compressor = opened (surge limit
volume controller engaged);
throttle valve of tail-gas turbine = opened;
hand valves of tail-gas turbine = opened and
blow-off valve of tail-gas turbine = closed.
Subject to external seal gas being available at the

NO compressor and tail-gas turbine seals and, further-
more, subject to the starting locks being cancelled,
the main drive motor can be started in conformity
with the instructions of the motor manufacturer.
' No 3062
M.TM.K Matt
Subsequent to motor start-up, the throttle and blow-off

valves are to be set to operating position.
1 Inlet guide blades: the inlet guide blades are to be

opened to an extent (negative prewhirl) at which the
delivery of the compressor comes up to the set-point
discharge pressure, by slowly turning the handwheel
(anti-clockwise) of the hand positioner.
2 Blow-off valve of the compressor: the blow-off valve

is to be gradually closed by slowly turning in the
handwheel (clockwise) of the positioner as far as it
will go. With the flow cross-section of the valve
decreasing the discharge pressure of the compressor
slightly rises until the resistance of the non-return
valve in the discharge pipe is overcome and the
compressOr begins to deliver into the network. A non-
complete closure of the blow-off valve can be taken
as evidence that the surge limit volume controller
has come into play. If, however, heavy periodic jerks
occur, although the controller has been cut in, with
the discharge pressure fluctuating at same time, the
blow-off valve must be opened by hand as otherwise
• there is great danger of damaging the compressor.
Subsequent to this, the compressor discharge pressure is

to be readjusted by means of the inlet guide blade
positioner.
The most economical operation of the tail-gas turbine is
to be adjusted according to the quantity of tail gas
available. This can be achieved by means of 2 nozzle
groups of different size which can be cut in or off by.
N
means of hand valves. If the operation conditions permit
only small utilization of an additional group then it
is not economical to have this additional group in opera-
W
tion, with the flow cross-section of the hand valve heavily
restricted (hardly any increase in capacity). In this case
• "4: the hand valve should be fully opened and the total flow
Jr)
should be adjusted for all nozzle groups together.
0
No 3062
MIK GUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRACIE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
•
M.TM.Y Blatt
0.5.5.27 Sealing and extraction system

Subsequent to run-up of the NO compressor set and
to the start-up of the air compressor set the
system seal gas starts positively, via the non-
return valve, sealing of the opening of the shaft
passage on the NO compressor as well as of the
openings of the shaft and of the hand-valve stem
passages on the.tail-gas turbine. The shut-oLC
valve for external seal gas is to be closed.
The seal-gas pressure is to be readjusted, i.e.
1. at the opening of the shaft passage of the NO

compressor to 0.4. kp/cm2 gge, on F 8605.5,
reading on PI 9842.22;
2. at the openings of the shaft and hand-valve

stem passages of the tailgas turbine to 0.2 kp/
cm- gge, on F 8605.5, reading on PI 9842.30.
External-gas sealing must be maintained if the NO

compreSsor set is operated separately, i.e. without
the air compressor set. In this case the readjustment
subsequent to start-up, as described above, is
likewise necessary.
Since no shut-off valves are installed in the

extraction pipes, extraction at the hand valve stems
and at the high-speed throttle valve is effected
positively upon start-up of the set or, respectively,
when the necessary quantity of tail gas is available.
rr
41
In
O
No 7044
GHH 8111TEHOFFNUNGSHIEFTE
K Blatt
• 0.6.0.03 Operation and maintenance
All the alarm and protective equipment can be no

full substitute for vigilant operating staff
acquainted with the machine. Absolute cleanness,
immediate removal of leaks in steam, air, gas,
water and oil pipes, immediate recognition of
changes in the pressure and temperature conditions
and tracing of machine noise sources are basic
requirements to be met to prevent major damage.
Proper observation of the set during operation

includes the watching of the machine itself, checks
for proper functioning of the measuring instruments
and control devices and regular recording of the
values measured.
It is recommended to record the readings in a

graph or log book so that the engineer in charge
can draw conclusions at any time about the working
state of the set.
Further entries to be made stating date and time:

a) every starting operation,
b) every stoppage,
• c)every
d) every
overhaul, repair and revision work,
cleaning of filters and coolers.
Among the regular entries are the hourly readings

of the measuring instruments as per the following
list.
CS
No 2960
M.TM.K Blatt
0.6..0.1117 Operating data
Job No.: 410 020/029

Code Word: "Cuno"
Compressor inlet pressure 1.25 kp/cm2 a s..

Compressor inlet temperature 55 cc
Compressor discharge pressure 5.0 kp/cm2 abs.
Compressor discharge temperature, approx. 257 °C
Tail-gas turbine intake pressure 4.0 kp/cm2 abs.
• Tail-gas turbine intake temperature

Tail-gas turbine exhaust pressure
220 °C
1.06 kp/cm2 abs.
Tail-gas turbine exhaust temperature, approx. 107 °C
Lube-oil pressure 3.0 kp/cm2 gge.
Control/power oil pressure 10 kp/cm2 gge.
55 oc
Oil temperature upstream oil cooler
Oil temperature past oil cooler 45 °C
Pressure loss across oil filters
normal/maximum 0;5/0,8 kp/cm2
Oil pressure upstream compressor bearings 0.5-1.7 kp/cm2 gge.
Oil pressure upstream gearbox 2.5 kp/cm2 gge.
Oil temperatures in compressor bearings -
normal/maximum 50-70/80 °C
Oil temperatures in gearbox bearings -
normal/maximum 50-70/80 °C
Oil temperatures in motor bearings and
temperatures in motor windings, according
to information supplied by motor manufacturer
Oil level in oil tank according to
marking
r-
O
No1M2
®H11 811ITEHEIFFNUNISSECUTTE
STERICRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Matt
0.6.1.01 Steam pipes
The anchorages and fasteners must be in proper

condition to ensure that the piping is not sub-
jected to additional stresses in operation.
Fasteners which have got loose have to be
re-tightened so that vibrations which might
be transmitted to the turbine are positively
prevented.
The constantly working drains (water traps, drain

throttles) must be checked at short intervals for
proper functioning . Wing to the small cross
sections there is the danger of clogging.
All shut-off devices in the steam pipes must

always be in proper condition. Sluggish valves
or untight shut-off devices should be overhauled
as soon as'possible as they constitute a danger
for the turbine (e.g. leakage steam enters when
shut-off devices do not Close properly).
No 2960
611111 SUTEHEIFFRJUNESSHUTTE
M.TM.K STEIFIKRADE AKTIENGES•ECLSCHAFT
Blatt
0.6.1.02 Steam pipes for heating system of main oil tank
The continuously working. drain (trap) must be checked

at short intervals for proper functioning. Owing to
the small cross sections there is the danger of
clogging for various reasons.
All shut-off devices in the steam pipes must always

be in proper condition. Sluggish valves or untight
shut-off valves should be overhauled as soon as
possible.
OS,
•,
IZt
to
0
No 2960
BLITENUFFRUNIVISSHILITTE
Blatt
0.6.2.02 Gas pipes
The anchorages and fasteners are to be checked

at regular intervals for proper condition. The
suspensions of shut-off valves, non-return
flaps and blow-off or bypass valves must not
change in order that no additional forces are
transmitted through the flange connections to
the piping.
The suction pipe must always be kept in ab-

solutely clean condition.
e••N
94)
tsj
JZ.
N;
• O
No 2960
IiHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
•
0.6.3.01 Water pipes
In water piping major soiling which affects

operation is generally experienced only after
several years of operation.
Loose sludge deposits can be removed by inten-

sive flushing, firm sludge or stone deposits
by brushing or by means of chemical solvents.
In water circuits, too, the shut-off devices

have to be kept in proper condition and must
close tightly.
•
No 2960
GHH BUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
0.6.4.01 Oil pipes
Leaks in oil piping have to be removed

immediately as they may easily lead to fire.
Oil fire has to be extinguished using foam
or carbon tetrachloride.
0, 6. 4. 01(a)
No 2960
1311H 6UTEHOFFNUN6SHUTTE
• __m.Tm.K Matt
0.6.5.10 Steam Turbine
Operation, monitoring and maintenance of the

steam turbine in the oil systems shall be
governed by the rules established by the
turbine makers.
Refer to para. 8.9.2.
411\
IP tv
.No 3064
GHH SUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
The tail-gas expansion turbine and the compressor

have a common shaft. Therefore, in most cases both
machines are involved when any abnormal state of
operation occurs.
The instructions for the compressor under 0.0.6—,

therefore, apply to the tail-gas expansion turbine
likewise.
' No 3062
OUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
K AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M STERKRADE Blatt
0.6.6.17 Compressor (General Maintenance)
If the compressor does not run smoothly, this

may be due to various reasons, including:
loose bearing covers and bearing brackets,
excessive bearing clearance,
contact of gaskets,
unbalance of rotor,
shifting of the entire set
or individual parts.
Even minor deviations from smooth running must

be noted.
During operation loose bolts must be tightened

only by hand in order to avoid distortion.
Normal bearing temperatures (steady temperatures)

will only be attained after a certain period of
operation. It is imperative therefore that the
bearing temperatures be monitored with particular
care after start-up. With the aid of the throttle
flanges arranged upstream the bearing points, lube
oil quantity and resp. lube oil pressure are
adjusted in such a way that the oil temperature
inside the bearings is within the temperature
range specified in the service data (0.6.0. ,).
If the bearing temperatures should rise suddenly

or even constantly in spite of sufficient oil
supply and properly working oil cooler, the foreman
in charge or the works engineer must be notified of
this observation immediately, who will shut down
the set, if necessary.
No 2960
GHH GUITEMICIFFNEINGSMITTE
•
M.TH.K 8 au
0.6.6.03 Compressor (Flushing during operation)
An ammonium nitrate deposit tends to form in

110 compressors and this must be washed away
from time to time by injecting water into the
compressor casing. The water is injected through
nozzles built into the casing and this may only
be done while the compressor is in operation in .
• order to use the compression heat to vaporize

the water injected.
The time for water to be injected is always

indicated by a drop An the throughput although
the operating conditions are constant.
No 3062
• M.TM.K Blatt
0.6.6.43 Compressor (measures in case of surging)
The compressor should not be operated with so small

a volume causing surging.
If despite the shut-off valve in the discharge pipe

being fully opened \and despite of the surge limit
volume control intensive periodic jerks are produced
with the discharge pressure varying at the same time
the discharge pipe is to be immediately relieved
from pressure by manually opening the surge limit
control valve, and the inlet guide blades of the
compressor are to be set by hand to their minimum
starting position.
To achieve this, following conditions are to be

fulfilled:
1. blow-off valve
a) on actuator: opening of the blow-off valve by
quickly turning out the handwheel of the
actuator (anti-clockwise) as far as it will
go;
b) on control unit of surge limit controller:

the pointer of the manual set-point setter shall
be moved until it coincides with that of the
automatic set-point setter, by turning the
adjustment knob. Following this the lever is
to be shifted from "A" = Automatic to "H" =
Hand. Upon transmission of the minimum impulse
to the actuator by means of the manual adjusting
knob, the blow-off valve will open.
No3062
GPM BUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
•
Blatt
2. Inlet guide blade adjustment

The inlet guide blades are set to positive prewhirl
as far as starting position, by turning the hand-
wheel of the manual actuator (clockwise).
Upon ceasing of surging, the compressor may be reloaded

by carefully opening the inlet guide blades and by
slowly closing the surge limit control valve.
If despite these measures surging does not cease the

compressor must be stopped for inspection and remedy
of the causes of surging as the hard jerks may easily
cause damage to the machine.
•s N
• N
- •••••-•46
en
0 is):
0
NO 3062
SUTEHEIFFNUNGSHIIITTE
• STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
0.6.714 Oil Supply System

After initial commissioning and after every
complete overhaul the oil should be drained
off and filtered after about 20 hours of
operation. At the same time all parts of the
machine in contact with oil should be cleaned
(these.include oil tanks, filters, piping and
bearings).
Check frequently whether water (cooling water
• or condensation) has entered the oil. If this

is the case, the water must be drained off
(drain valve on oil tank). The cause of the
entry of the water must he found and remedied
without delay.
At least twice a year the oil should be examined

by the oil supplier's technical experts.
Oil coolers and filters must be thoroughly vented

from time to time through the:vent valves..
The auxiliary oil pump must always be ready for
• operation. Regular checks should be made to

ascertain whether the pump is in perfect condition.
It is imperative that the pressure and temperature

measuring instruments in the oil circuit be watched
continuously so that any irregularities occurring
can be recognized and dealt with without delay.
r.
If the temperature in the oil distributing main

rises, more cooling water must be fed to the oil
cooler. Should this method fail, the oil cooler is
probably soiled on water or oil side. In this case
change over to the standby cooler and clean the
dirty cooler.
OUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGES .ELLSCHAFT
Mitt. '''
The degree of soiling of the oil filters must

be inspected at regular intervals. If the
pressure loss across the oil filter rises
inadmissibly, the filter is soiled and must be
cleaned. For this purpose, change over to the
standby filter. When oil coolers and filters
have been cleaned they must be refilled through
the filling valves; during this process the air
venting valves must be open. With the filters.
the filling valve must be opened only slightly
in order to throttle the oil pressure to a great
extent. If filling were done at full oil pressure
the filter inserts might become damaged and
unusable by the sudden load. When oil coolers and
filters are filled again, both the filling and the
air venting valves must be closed.
.No 2960
GHH BUTENCIFFNUNESNUTTE
M.TM. K STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
o.6.8.o3 Alarms and emergency shutdowns

Observation and maintenance of the set should be carried
out regularly and thoroughly enough to ensure that no
alarms and emergency shutdowns occur during operation.
If there is nevertheless an alarm or emergency shutdown

as per the relevant list., immediate checks and, if
necessary,.remedial measures are required.
GHH GUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
0.6.8.1117. Locking of starting mechanism, alarms and emergency

shut-downs
Job No.: 410 020/02)

Code Word: "Cuno"
Locking of starting mechanism:

inadmissibly low oil temperature below or equal to 30 0C:
visual and audible alarm as well as
starting lock of drive motor
via TIAlh 9854.1;
inadmissible low lube oil pressure below or equal to 2.0 kp/cm2:

visual and audible alarm as well as starting lock and
shut-down of drive motor and tail-gas turbine
via PAl 9844.3;
inadmissible position of compressor shaft = oil pressure equal to

or above 1.0 kp/cm2:
visual and audible alarm as well as starting lock and shut-down
of drive motor and tail-gas turbine
via PAh 9844.5 by NI 9865.1).
Alarms and emergency shut-down

oil temperature past the oil cooler above or equal to 55 °C:
visual and audible alarm
via TIAlh 9854.1;
high oil temperature in motor bearings above or equal to

0
z visual and audible alarm;
inadmissible high oil temperature in the motor bearings above or

equal to
visual and audible alarm with shut-down of drive motor and
tail-gas turbine
via TIAhh 9854.9 and TIAhh 9854.11;
co:
tc
0
No 3062
M.TM.K Blatt
high temperature in motor winding above or equal to

visual and audible alarm;
inadmissibly high temperature in motor winding above or equal
to
visual and audible alarm with shut-down of
drive motor and tail-gas turbine
via TSW 9854.10 with TIAhh 9854.11;
high oil discharge temperature on gearbox above or equal to 75°C:

inadmissibly high oil temperature on gearing above or equal to
85°c:
visual and audible alarm with shut-down
via TIAhh 9854.15;
high oil temperature in compressor bearings above or equal to

75°C:
inadmissibly high oil temperature in compressor bearings above
or equal to 85°C:
visual and audible alarm and shut-down
via TIAhh 9854.14 (thrust bearing), TIAhh 9854.15 (combined plain
and thrust bearing) and TIAhh 9854.16 (plain bearing);
high gas intake temperature on compressor above or equal to

inadmissibly high gas intake temperature on compressor above or
equal to•. •
0
visual and audible alarm with shut-down
Cr)
04
via TIAhh 9854.17;
• C0
7:
.
0
No 3064
• M.Ta.K Blatt
high gas discharge temperature on compressor above or equal to

inadmissibly high gas discharge temperature on compressor above
or . equal to
visual and audible alarm with shut-down of
drive motor and tail-gas turbine
via TIAhh 9854.18;
oil pressure in lube-oil header too low, i.e. below or equal

to 2.5 kp/cm2:
visual and audible alarm with cut-in of auxiliary oil pump
via PA1 9844.1;
pressure differential across oil filters excessively high, i.e.

above or equal to 0.8 kp/cm2:
via PdIAh 9844.6;
oil level in oil tank too low;

via LIA1 9814.1;
high-speed throttle valve of tail-gas turbine being closed:

visual and audible alarm.
The temperatures in the motor bearings and windings are specified

in the operating instructions of the motor manufacturer.
The high and inadmissibly high gas intake and discharge temperat-
ures on the compressor are process dependant; they are to be
determined in the plant.
4:13
• ts•
0
No 3062
BUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
• M.TM.K
Blatt
0.7.0.78 Shutdown of the set
On shutdown of the NO compressor set the specific

regulations for the process system are to be observed.
The setting of the pneumatic surge limit volume control

is to be left in position "A" = Automatic. Running
down of the compressor and of the tail-gas turbine
•
should be effected on the machines, if ever possible.
Prerequisits to shutdown are that the burners are

shut-off, nitrous gas is no longer produced and that
the compressor set delivers air for some time there-
after in order to ensure complete purging of the
machines, plant units, valves and pipes.
To permit purging of pipings past the blow-off valves,

the valves must be opened in the following sequence:
1.blow-off valve of tail-gas turbine:
handwheel of actuator to be turned out anti-
clockwise as far as it will go;
• 2. blow-off valve of compressor:

handwheel of actuator to be turned out anti-
clockwise as far as it will go. The blow-off
valve is fully opened thereby, the discharge
pressure of the compressor drops below network
pressure, the non-return valve is actuated and
the compressor (on its discharge side) is discon-
nected from the network.
O Since the remaining pressure in the complete plant

expands through the opened blow-off valves, the
intake side throttle valves can be closed.
CO
c•-•
• 6
O
No 3062
DHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M. TM. K Watt
1. throttle valve of tail-gas turbine:

handwheel of actuator to be turned in clockwise
as far as it will go;
2. inlet guide blade positioning of NC compressor:
handwheel of actuator to be turned clockwise as far
as it will go thereby causing the guide blades to
attatin the minimum opening position.
Stopping of drive motor.
• The oil supply system must continue to operate subse-

quent to shutdown of the NO compressor set, for oil
must be supplied to the machine bearings until no
longer heat from the interior of the casing is trans-
ferred through the shaft ends into the bearings. The
cooling-water drain valve on the oil coolers is to be
slowly throttled and possibly to be closed completely
depending on the bearing temperatures to be observed.
When the set has come to standstill, the shut-off

valves in the intake and discharge pipes of the com-
pressor as well as in the intake and exhaust pipes
of the tail-gas turbine are to be closed so that the
machines are completely disconnected from the network.
All gas spaces of the machine set are to be thoroughly

drained.
The pneumatic and auxiliary energies can be cut off.
z The shut-off valve in the seal-air pipe of the air

compressor is to be closed.
6•1
If there is the danger of frost, all water is to be

drained from coolers, cooling water and drain pipes.
CO
110
No 3062
GHH
M.TM.K
BUTEHOFFNUNUSIIIUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELESDHAFT
Blatt
The instructions for shutdown of the set are to be

applied analogously if the set is stopped as a result
of response of one of the safety devices.
(1)
sn
co
• o
No 3062
KTM.K Blatt
o.9.o.ol Instrumentation
Attached hereto are, for some of the instruments,
complete catalogue pages of the entire series of the
type employed, or comprehensive descriptions and
handbooks as furnished to us by the suppliers.
The exact type designation of the instruments used on

this set can be taken froth the lists under o.8.3:
.4
No
GHH GUTE111131FFIYILINESIHEITTE
STERKRADE
M.TM.K AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
• 0.9.1.01
High quality industrial Bourdon tube gauges
These gauges satisfy the highest demands. Available

designs and materials permit their use wherever Bourdon
tube gauges can be employed (with the exceptions of
highly viscous or cristallising media).
Their range extends from vacuum to pressures of up to

60000 Ibrin2. (4 000 kp/cm2).
Key to type numbers
Shank and Bourdon tube
•
casing type
standard 211
copper alloys (above waterproof'). 212
1000 lb/in2. with filled with
steel Bourdon tube) dampening fluid 213 Watertight Pressure Gauge Type 232.100.10 kp/cm2
rectangular 214 (Universal Gauge)
standard 221
waterproof') 222
alloy steel filled with
dampening fluid 223
rectangular 224
standard 231
waterproof 232
stainless steel'
DIN No. 1.4571 filled with
dampening fluid 233
rectangular 234
1) Type 212 and 222 are only available as contact or

transmitter gauges; the standard waterproof gauge
• is type 232.
Gauges with copper alloy Bourdon tube and connection

are by far the most common used. They are suitable for.
all applications where the media does not attack copper.
or copper alloys (Types 211, 213, 214).
Glycerine-filled Gauge Type 213.100.1000 kp/cm2
Certain media (ammonia) require all parts in contact with
the media made from steel (Types 221, 223, 224).
For media corrosive to copper alloys or steel, stainless

steel is used to specification (DIN Nr. 4571 — x 10
C2NiMoTi 1810) for types 232, 233, 234.
kpicrd 1.
0 qs t5 2 2i5
lo 2960
Rectangular Gauge Type 214.72.2.5 kp/cm2 High Pressure Gauge Type 211.160.400 kp/cm2
SHIN EUTEINDIFFINUNGSFOUTTE
STENKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M• TM. K Blatt
According to requirements and conditions at the measur- Electric transmiffelgTmges .
r
ing point, scan lard, waterproof, glycerine-filled or roc-
permit electric, remote indication of mec.hanicaliy deter-. •
1iingular casings are available.
mnded pressures in conjunction with sultable cleetric in- '
•Waterproof casings are recommended where the ingress
struments. These may be either indicating, recording or
•of liquids is to he prevented or where the gauges are
integrating instruments and can be situated virtrial'y any •
exposed to corrosive atmospheres and/or the weather.
dstance from the transmitter. MoJem process controls
Liquid (glycerine) filled gauges provide excellent
offer a wide field of applications for transmitter gauges.
protection against pressured fluctuations, vibrations and
Capacitator or potentiometric transmitters can he attached
the formation of condensed water.
to or built into most 160 nee (6') and 250 mm (101 dia- ' •
Gauges with rectangular cassings are specifically designed
meter gauges. For further details consult bulletin 86/87.
for use in control panels. •
Glycerine filled gauges have a praCtically unlimited life.
Recommended applications:
Types 211, 212, 213, 214: Compressed air installations,

Gauges with special features
chemical plants, pumps, hydraulic systems, steam plants,
Glycerine filled gauges turbines, refrigeration, plants, locomotives etc. and suitable
for: Air, oils, and other gaseous or liquid media which are
This is the term commonly used for the world renown
not corrosive to copper alloys:
gauges of the types 213 (copper alloy) 223 (steel) and
233 (stainless steel). The casing is filled almost entirely Types 221, 222, 223, 224: Ammonia plants, refrigeration
with Glycerine which eliminates or restricts pointer oscil- installations, gas generators, high pressure installations,
lations due to vibrations and pressure fluctuations and bottling plants etc. suitable for: Ammonia, Acethylene.
prevents premature wear of the movement. There are Creosotes, Dry Chlorines, Ethylene, Kerosene, Steam and
over 1million WIKA glycerine filled gauges in use, no other media not corrosive to alloy steels.
signs of wear have yet been found.
Types 231,232,233,234: Chemical, food and oil industry,
Universal gauge for the chemical and oil industry mineral water works, breweries, plastic industry, nuclear
installations etc., and suitable for: carbonated water, car-
The particular demands of the chemical industry, with anti-
bon dioxide, carbolic acid, citric acid, sulphurous oils and
corrosive Bourdon tube and shank, are met by the type
tar deri :dives, formaldehyde, hydrogen, and hydrogen
232. In view of the various media present at different
peroxide, to media where stainless steel is still resistant.
measuring points throughout a chemical plant, and the
everpresent danger of using a wrong gauge, a universally
applicable gauge has obvious advantages. WIKA gauges 1. Technical specifications
type 232, made entirely from stainless steel (except diet
Accurecy:
and pointer) with waterproof casing and blow-out disc at
the rear are designed to be such an universal gauge. better than 1% of full scale value.
(sizes 2.1/2" x 1" and 3" x LW better than 1.6% of full
Gauges with rectangular casings scale value).
are intended mainly for use in control panels, consoles Temperature range:
'and switchboards. Two special screw-clamps provide
normally up to + 50°, 120°F,
secure fastening.
but temperatures up to 100°C, 210°F,
are permissible Glycerine filled gauges exposed to low
Gauges for refrigeration plant
temperature are filled with a glycerine-water-mixture in
All type 211 gauges are suitable for use with refrigerants the following ratios:
which are not corrosive to copper alloys. The dial carries in to 0°C ( 32°F) — 90°k glycerine 10% water
addition to the black pressure scale a red temperature to 20°C ( 68 °F) — 80% glycerine 20% water
scale calibrated to the respective refrigerant. 'to 40°C (104°F) — 65% glycerine 35% water
it must be noted that unter normal temperatures the
Ammonia gauges dampening effect of the glycerine decreases in direct
relation to the amount of water added to the mixture.
(mainly used for refrigeration plants) Ammonia type 221
with alloy steel shank and Bourdon tube and highly cor-
Error caused by temperature changes
ts rosion-resistant stainless steel movement is available. •
(Reference temperature for calibration 20°C) (70 °F)
Contact gauges +0.3% or —0.3% of full scale value per 10°C rise or
drop respectively. Reference for correction is the tem-
are equipped with emit switches which either make or
perature of the gauge not the medium.
break a circuit at a given pressure. The contacts are ex-
O ternally adjustable over the full scale. Pressure indication
Duty range
is independent of.set point position and the contact action.
Contact gauges are suitable for use under most operating Up to full scale value (except sizes 63 mm 0 (2.V2")
conditions, including explosive • atmospheres for which 48 x 24 ram (2" x 1") 72 x 36 mm (3" x 1.1/2") where
special types aro available. working pressures should not exceed 3/4 of full scale
For further information refer to bulletin 81/85. value or '/.r it the pressure fluctuates). x •
GUTEIRUFFNUNGSKIIITTE
Blatt
Dimensions and weigthi
Basic model with front flange with rear flange rear connection
sw
b,1
with narrow bezel

watertight casing and clamp bracket
Diem 63 Diam. 100 and 160
Glycerine or oilfilled casing
Diam 63 and 100 Diam. 160 63 Diam. 100 and 160
sizes in mm.
Diam.
a, a2 a3 a4 bl b7 I b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 138 c c2 D D, 02 , d,
63 - - 12 12 33 - 148 - 33 - 32 53 - - 63 - 65 I -
100 19 19,5 15,5 17,5 47 47,5 79 45 45 77 48 75,5 25 50,5 100 107 - 116
160 20,5 22 17 20,5 48 51,5 81,5 499 492) 812) - - - - 160 - - 178
250
sizes in mm. weight in kg

• Diam. ! -1— t
d2 : d3 ; 11,, e 1 e2 Te), f G 1- h 1s 1 s s2 1 s3 1s4 I s5 SW env.
63 - 1 - 1 - - 11 IF 12 6 i- R1/2"4) 1 51±11- - 6 1 1213 5 17 0,16
100 132 1 4,8 1132 4,5 , 12,5 15,5 ; 6 130 R1/2"4) 187±1 1 2 4 10 120 5 16 27 0,75
160 196 r5,8 1192 6- —15 1 24 1 6 1 50 R1/2"3)4)1 118±1 12. 3,5 10 1 20 5 16 27 1,55
. ÷
250 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 - (- ; - R1/2"3)4):162±1,5; - 1 10 1 20 1 5 1 6 27 2,30
For pressure ranges higher than 60 kp/cm2 Dimension b4 increased to 63 mm.

2) For pressure ranges higher than 1000 kp/cm2 Dimension b. increased to 61 mm; b6 to 93 mm.
3) For pressure range 2500 kp/cm2 and higher fitted with lensil sealed shank R3/.". •
O 4) BSP and NPT - thread available according to R1/2", R1/2" and R3/e". j A'
No 3062
4..
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNBSIIUTTE
BTERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHA•FT
tk Blatt
MANOMETER MIT PLATTENFEDER Druaschat raw

Offierenzdruck
Dieu Gerais dlenen zur Anzeige niedrIger Differenzdrikke bei
verhiltnismatig hohen statischen DrOdcen. Skt Omen slch zur
Messung von flOssigen und gastormigen Medlen, sowelt diese
hidtt hodwiskoa oder kristallisierend sind und Kupferleglenm-
gen, Stahl und Chrorn-NIckellStahl nowt. Gummi (Perbunan)
nicht angrelfen.
Vervrendung
Zur Messung von niedrigen Differenzdrikken
mitBlg hohen statischen Dr-Oaken.
Statischer Druck max. 25 kp/cma.
Typenttberstdd
DrudunittelberiThrte Gehtluseart Typ

Tolle
Kupferteglerung In Ver-
bindung mit Stahl und nundgenanno inn
Chrom-Nickel-Stahl 002
' Oberateckring
W.-Nr. 1.4571 sowle
Outrun' (Perbunan)
Meetechnlache Elgenschaften
Araelgegenaulgitelt
Sesser ale 2,5 % vom Skalenendwert
(Masse 2,5 der Eichordnung).
Temperaturbestlindigkaft
Nadi.- DIN 16 255 +50 °C; -
h5hare 'Temperaturen Ws +100 °C rind sulasalg. • • ••
Abwatchungen bei Temperaturinderungen geganOber der Nor-

ndtemperatur +20 °C
Anzelgefehler je 10 °C Temperaturzunahme ca. +0,6 %. bel
Teraperaturedmahme urn je 10°C ca..-0.6% _von Skalenend-'
west
Bel der Korrektur des Meftergebnieses 1st zu berOcksichtigen, •
dab eldi dle Temperatur auf des. Measystern, nkht auf des
Chudonittal bezieht.
ZeilkOger Verwendungsberelch
Obere Grans bet fluhebelastung: Der Skabsnendwert;
bet Wechselbelastung: Der 0,88fadte Skalenendwart.
Obeedruckekberhaft
krafrumente NG 100 elnd beldseitig Oberdrudestcher btu
25 kp/cm1 (Anzelgeberelche 0/0,8;. 0/1; 0/1,6 kp/crni
18 kp/cm3).
Instruments NG 160 aloha 3. (Von der Nonnalbauart abweldien
de Auettihrungen).
Anwendungebeleplele
Feuritgeaniagen, Olgewinnungaantagen, Waseerreinigungsan- DIfferenzdrudurtanorneter
Moen usw. Typ 002.160.1000 mmW8
GHH GUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
TPI,K Blatt
Orueldnannvan
Aufbau, Wlrkungsweise, Inbetrlebnahme
Plattenfeder-Differenzdruckmanometer eind mit r.vel Drudc-

kammern ausgerOstet, die durch eine Plattenfeder getrennt
sind (Abb. 1). Diese Ist In ihrer Starke fOr den Differenzdruck
bemessen. Der Differenzdruck der( den Anzeigebereich nicht
Oberschrelten.
Die Manometer sind fOr einen statischen Druck bis

max. 25 kp/cm' ausgeiegt.
Am mit .,+" gekennzeichneten Anschluezapfen 1st der hotter%

am mit gekennzeichneten AnschluBzapfen der niedrigere
statische Druck anzuschileBen (Abb. 2).
Nichtbeachtung fOhrt zur Beschadigung des Meftwerkes1
Bel wechselseitig auftretenden Druckdifferenzen wird der Ska-

tennullpunkt oben in die Mitte (bet 12 Uhr) gelegt und die
Skate bet einem Gesamtbereich von 270° entsprechend den
maximal auftretenden DifferenzdrOcken in einen Minusbereich
(links vom Nulipunkt) und in einen Plusbereidi (redits vom
Nullpunkt) aufgeteilt. Zeigerstand Im Minusbereich bedeutet Abb. 1
dann hoheren Druck in der am Atinuszapfen" und Zeigerstand
im Plusbereich hoheren Drudc In der am „Pluszapfen" ange-
schlossenen Leltung.
Abb. 2
Anschlue
niedrigerer hoherer
NG 160
statlacher Drudc .
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Manometers 1st unbedIngt das Drudc-
ausglelchsventil durch Linksdrehen des Handrades (Abb. 3) zu
offnen, dart* das MeBglied (Plattenfeder) beidseitig gleich-
maklig vom Drudgnittel beiastet wird. Der Zelger eteht bel dle-
sem Vorgang auf Null.
Sollte eine Nullpunktkorrektur erforderlich warden, 1st die Ver-

schluBsdiraube am Gehause links oben zu offnen. Mit beige- Abb. 3.
ffigtem SchlOssel wird die Nullpunktkorrektur vorgenommen. Vor Inbetrlebnahme
Ventil offnen, Drudc-
Sind die Kammem gleichmaltig gef011t, 1st des Ventil durch unterschiede gleichen
Rechtsdrehen des Handrades (Abb. 4) zu schlieBen. Jetzt wirkt etch aus und belasten
In leder Kammer nur der Drudc der angeschiossenen Leitung Me8glied glelchmaBig,
auf die Plattenfeder. Die DrOdce heben sick bis auf den Druck- Zelger auf Null
unterschled auf. Des Manometer zeigt den DIfferenzdrtick'an. (evtl. Korrektur).
Abb. 4
Betriebsetellung
v Ventil geschlossen.
NG 100
Drudcunterschiede
Manometer der NG 100 konnen ohne besondere Vorsithtsma8- wirken auf Mettglied,
nehmen in Betrieb genommen werden, da das MeBglIed bis Anzeige des
• ca.:
; zum max. zulassIgen statischen Druck beidseitig Oberdruck-
_. Cifferenzdrudces. _
etcher ist.
O
No 2960
Blatt
4. Anzelgebereiche (nach DIN 16128) MaBe und Gewichte

x e lieferbar mit Oblicher Lieferzeit und Mindestauftragswert
pro Typ und Anzeigebereich von DM 250,—.
Typ ' 002 NO 100
NG 100 160
Anzeige-
bereiche
AusfOhrung
Q
Genaulg-
keit In % ±2,5
vom Endwert
Anschlu8 R h"
0,8 x x
1 x x
1,6 X x
2,5 x x
4 kp/cm' x x
6 x x
10 x x
16 x x NO 160
25 x x
6 x x
10 x - x
16 X X
mWS
25 x x
40 x x
60 x x
400 x
600 , x
1000 x
1600 mmWS x
2500 x
4000 x
6000 X
MaBe in mm Gewicht
NG in kg
a, a3 a. b2 D d, d2 ' d3 G h ±1 m p s, S. 83 s, s, SW ca.
100 — 18,5 26 101 100 116 132 4,8 R'/2" 85 — — 8 10 20 5 6 27 3,0
160 57,5 — — 115,5 160 178 196 5,8 FIV2" 172 37 78,51 5,5 10 20 5 6 27 6,5
1 Bei Ueferung mit Frontring DIN 16280A oder losem Einbauring DIN 18280E p = 88,5 min;
6
bel Ueferung mit elektrischen Grenzwertschaftem oder Ferngebern p — 138,5 mm.
No 2960
611111 BUTEHILIFFINUNGSHEITTE
M.TM. K
• 0.9.1.07 Pressiostat
Blatt
figure 1 flours 2
92
40
is
pressure connection R 3/8' inside
pressure connection .R 3/8' inside
wiring diagram of all the types
types F5 and F10 figure 1 types dE15/FE5 and dE154FE10 figure 2
technical data of the change-over switch

switching curves for
alternating current alternating current
direct current
without quenching condenser
Amp
admissible series voltage 500 V admissible series voltage 500 V
max. admissible continuous current 6A switching capacity 3 A
cut—in capacity 15 A
24 42
cut—out capacity 6 A
with quenching condenser 0.1 N F
A nor. v000 v
sonophase motors 110 V 0.25HP
220 V 0,5 HP
connections 3x
protection P 44 prcitectiOn Ex d 3 n 6 5
weight 0.5 kg 29 da 110 nor eight 6.1 kg

kece2g, F5 and dE15iFE S F10 and dE 15/4 10
z
O
e.g. F5: If the oil pressure decreases, the
L
lover switching pressure will be
1.8 kg/cm2gg; if the oil pressure
11. 2
a increases, the upper 'switching pres-
4.4
AC
2 sure will be at least 2.2 kg/ce2gg,
0
a adjustable up to max. 5 kg/ce2gg
0 2 1 4 5 o 2 4 6 f tokg/cm2gg
E upper switching pressure topper switching pressure
M 64. 1373.02
No 3062
0111111 If RITEINCIFFAIIIMEISEiliTTE
M TM K STERK•RADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
•
Blatt
0.94.59
I NVEX-Ferngeber-Manometer
fiir Druckfernanzeige und Datenerfassung
PT 7555
Beriihrungs- und yerschleififreier Abgriff

der elektrischen Messung direkt an der
Bourdonfeder
Parallele Abgriffe fiir elektrische und
mechanische Messung
Hohe Genauigkeit des el. Ausgangssignals
Elektronik im Manometer eingebaut
0... 20 mA Ausgangssignal
Nullpunktunterdriidwng und
Bereichsspreizung
Einheitliche Bausteine fiir elle MeObereiche
Einfache Installation
Typentest GL
In
Stromversorgung 24V= Signotousgang 2 OmA

abeleinfiihrung Pg 16 Kabeleintiihrung Pg 16
o 2910
Druckanschluil PHILIPS
IIIITEDICIFFNIANIMENIUTTE
M.T M. K SITERKRADE AKT1ENGESELLSCUAFT
Ellen
• — .
Beschreibung des INVEX-Manometers Der Wegaufnehmer besteht aus einer Spule I Spulen, die mit externen Widerstanden zu
mit 2 Wicklungen, in die ein ferromagne- einer Brake geschaltet sind.
PT 7555 m tischer Kern, der mit der Bourdonfeder des Die Elektronik speist die Bracke • mit. einer
Das INVEX-Manometer besteht aus eine
m Manometers direkt gekoppelt ist, vollig be- Tragerfrequenz und verstdrkt die BrOcken-
.wasserdichten V2H Manometer mit eine ,
e_ - rahrungslos und verschleiBfrei eintaucht. le Diagonal-Spannung. Diese Spannung ist
Au6endurchmesser von 160 mm mit •eing
nach Stellung des Taststiftes ergibt sich eine proportional zu dem Tauchweg des mit der
bautem Fernabertragungssystem (Bild 2
Vertinderung der Scheinwidersitinde der Bourdonfeder feet verbundenen Kerns. Die
Bild 3).
1. Der Wegaufnehmer PT 7553/01 verstarkte Spannung ist somit auch propor-
tional dem Druck. Diese Spannung wird von
2. Der MeBverstarker PT 7551/01
einem phasenempfindlichen Gleichrichter in
eine Gleichspannung umgewandelt und auf
einen eingeprdgten MeBstrom von 20 mA ver-
stdrkt. Empfindlichkeit und Nullpunkt des
Aufnehmers sind kontinuierlich einsteilbar
(Bild 4).
Der Me6strom ist geeignet als Eingangs-

signal far Anzeigeinstrumente. Schreiber,
Oberwachungs- und Datenerfassungsanlagen.
Bild 2 Bild 3
Technisthe Daten MignelfeldeinfluB auf die Empfindlichkeli

Abmessungen (des INVEX-Manometers)
siehe auch Bild 8
bei 15 GauB und bei 50 Hz: 50,5 %,
Manometer Typ 232 NG 160 bezogen auf Vollausschlag
Ferngeber-Manometer farAufbau:
Gehause 160 0 (mm)
Wegaufnehmer PR 9314 A/05 Linewitatsfehler der Elektronik 0,5 % ohne Befestigungsrand:.
(Einbauausfahrung: PT 7553/01) (siehe Bild 5) • AnschluBzapfen R 1/2" radial nach unten,
Skalenlange 300 mm
Ferngeber-Elektronik PT 7551/01 ' Reshvelligkeit an 500 SI Barde bei Nennaus-
steuerung: < 1 % U„ von Nennaussteuerung Gewicht ca. 2,2 kg
Zulassung u. a. Germanischer Lloyd
Innenwiderstand des Signalausgangs
Me6bereiche (kp/cm2) < 100 k-Ohm
0...0.6 0...10 0...60
Signalleitung
0 0 . 16 0 ... 100
dauerkurzschlu6 und -leerlauffest
0...2.5 0...25 0 ... 160
0...6 0...40 0 ... 250 Kabellangen
(Andere MeBbereiche auf Anfrage) Speiseleitungi 2adrig
Zesatzlich lieferbar
nicht abgeschirmt
Speisung 24 V Gleichspannung, ± 20 %, 50 mA Lange unbegrenzt Manometerhalter PT 7555 A (Bild 9)
desgl.. Drosselvorrichtung PT 7555 B (Bild 10)
Signalleitung:
Ausgangesignal 0 ... 20 mA
Absperrhahn Fr 7555 C (Bild 11)
Alle Anschlasse verpolungssicher Absperrventil PT 7555 D (Bild 12)
mit PrufanschlufS
In Burde 500 Q max. iWassersackrohr PT 7555E (Bild 13)
Bezugstemperatur 25° C
Wassersackrohr PT 7555 F (Bild 14)
TemperatureinfluB Speisegerat PT 7555 G
Toleranzbereich 0...60° C
auf die Empfindlichkeit < 0,05 % / °C (kw 1-5 Manometer)
of den Nullpunkt < 0,01 % / Speisegerate mit grOBerer Leistung
Arbeitsbereich —25° + 70° C
Anzeigeinstrumente
EinfluB der Speisespannungsanderung L Schreiber u-Punktdrudicer
Vibrationsfestigkeit u. a. geprOft nach • .
auf Empfindlichkeit Regler
BaUvorschrift Bd. IV, Kap. 9, Automation,
< 0,3 % / 10 % Speisespa ,gsanderung Grenzwertmelder
o•2940 Kennlinie 2:25 Hz
0111H SIUTENICIFFRAUNIOSNINITTE
STEAKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Mae
170 50
111101111111
H
1111
simi•
Pg16
Is SV/22
MIN" 111113
is
lie
SO
Bild 8 Bild 12
Melitgeratehalter Zwischenstildc
Ausla- MaBe in mm Gew.

dung in kg
in mina b c h d G; G, s s, SW ca.
63 72 52 45 65 7 R'/," R'/,' 8 50 30 0,45
100 85 65 56 76 - 7 R'/," R'/,' 8 50 30 0,85
160 98 78 67,5 87,5 7 R'/," R'/," 8 50 30 1,16

Bild 9 Bild 13
-
!••• - - -
101
11 a.- 200..
Bild 11 BM 14 i Anderungen vorbehalten

&IC' :14 %.;•
No 29110
GHH littiTENIKIFFNUNISIEIHRITTE
STERK ', ADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
Deregungsrichtung
der Bourdanfeder / .31
Spaltung
•13
Speisung
5,611Hz 24Y. I .175—€76 6 / 9019669
S 40E11
Anschtuabild I NV
I "
Ferngeber - Elektronik I 1
-0110-
Aneeigegeral I
Warnstalion
Oatenerfassung I
— yerstarker Bild 6
Vershnier eater — 20mA
Oatearmarbeituag
3 Regeltreis
Wegaufnehme
717553
•
Fleitronik
P37555 I
Bild 4
litalvititsleAter and Hyst

To•.03 66
o ---Cattostaag
_
.17.
Illastaag
20 26 21 36 40 Plaid}
WI. 607. 70%. 007. 907. 1.prozadactla
0...20mA
Anzeigegerote
O... 20mA Warnstot i on
tlotenertossung
Prozerirechner
fs)
0... 20 mA
`4331.7_
NW 7 Ferngeber-Manomete;
GHH
GUTENUFFRIIIMPENINITTE
• M.TM.K STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT

Blatt
o. 9,1.65
Rechteckige Anzeigeinstrumente Siemens"

mit Schmalrahmen DINs
Abmessungen nach DIN 43718
Geeignet zur Anzeige von veranderlichen Mefigroben, die ale'
Spannung, Strom oder Widerstand dargestellt werden kanrien.
Typ: AAH ... P DIN s DrehsptrImeBwerk

AAB...P DIN s KreuzspulmeBwerk
Normalausfiihrung
Gehause: Stahlblechgehause fur Schalttafel-
oder Raster-Einbau Ty pe n be r sic ht
Abmessungen siehe MaBbilder •
Mefiwerk: Drehspulmel3werk fur mV oder mA Format
Kreuzspulme6werk fur Q • Skalen- Aus-
Typ L-Nr.
Spitzenlagerung mit federnden Lagersteinen lange fiihrung
sto8fest nach VDE 0410/10.64 Gewicht
K!asse: 1 oder 1,5 (siehe Tabelle Obernachste Selte) AAH 192P DINs 192 mm N 1285-190
gema6 VDE 0410/10.64 § 29
X 96mm
TU 1285-110
Ternperatureinflu6: ±0,5 %/10 grd 122 mm
Skala: mit maximal 2 Teilungen AAB 192P DINs 3,5 kg B • 1285-290
Skalenlange siehe Tabelle AAH 144 P DINs 144 mm N . 1294-190
Me6bereiche: gema6 Tabelle und Vorblatt 9.0 X 72 mm
TU 1284-110
96mm
Emstellzeit: siehe MeOwerktabelle AAB 144 P DINs 2,5 kg B 1284-290
Leitungswiderstand: 10 cl bei Widerstandsthermometer AAH 96P DINs 96mm N 1283-190
2 X 10 Q bei Dreileiterschaltung und X 48 mm
Widerstandsferngeber TU 1283-110
60 mm
10 oder 20 52 bei Thermoelementen AAB 96P DINs '0.6 kg B 1283-290
Leitungsabgleich: durch mitgelieferte Abgleichlocken AAH 72 P DINs 72 mm N 1282-190
10 oder 20 52 • • X 36 mm
TU 1282-110
Hilfsenergie: 6 V- oder 24 V- bei Kreuzspulgeraten 44 mm
AAB 72 P DINs 0,35 kgB 1282-290
Thermometerstrom: normal 10 mA
Prufspannung: 2000 V gema8 VDE 0410/10.64 § 21 Ausfiihrungen:
N = fur mV-Messungen zum AnschluB an Thermoelemente, Gasenalyeen-
Elektrische - gerate und ahnliche Geber
Anschlusse: fur Ex zugelassene Schraubklemmen fiir mA-Messungen zum Anschlu8 an entsprechende Gebergerate
•
max. 2,5 mm2 (siehe such Ausfuhrung TU)
. mit einem MeBbereich gemal) Vorblatt 9.0 und Me8werktabelle
Farbe des
Frontrahmens +): normal schwarz TU = far AnschluB an MeBumformer. MeBwerk far halben Nennstrom,
eingebauter Nebenwiderstand.
Glasscheibe +): normales Tafelglas
Me8bereiche Ri (0] Elnatellzeit ndu ktiVitat
Gehause- [mA] (ca. a] [m1-1]
schutzart +): P43 nach DIN 40 050
Anschlu6klemmen fur MeBleitung P00 0... 5 <60 <5,5
<15 <0.5
Gehause- <6 <0.1
befestigung: mit 2 Befestigungselementen
nach DIN 43 835 Skala 0...100, andere Teilungen Mehrpreis
Mindestabstand B (Kreuzspul) = fur Wideratandsmessung zum Anschlu6 an Widerstands-

ferneeber und -Thermometer ohne mechanischen Zeigerrucksteller.
benachbarten MoBbuieiche gemaB Vorblatt 9.0 und MeBwerktabollo
Geraten: horizontal and vertikal 0...10 mm
nach DIN 43835
Bestelltext GewOnschtes einsetzen)
Gebrauchslage +): 2 b gemGB Skizze Einbaulagon
Klimatische AA ...P DINs L-Nr. 128 .-... Preis
Beanspruchung: Klimagruppe 2 fi&B-Werksnorm
(nach Anwendungsklasse KWF DIN 40040) Anzeigeinstrument
Temperatur 0...50 °C fur (Schalttafel- oder Raster-) einbau
rel. Feuchte < 75 % mit (Drehspul- od. Kreuzspul-) MeOwerk Nr
Betauung ist zu vermeiden (a. Me6werktabelle, evil. MeOwerk-Mehrpreis beachten:
bei TU keine Angabe)
Gewicht: siehe Typenithersicht
Ausfuhrung (N oder TU; nur bet AAH...)
+) Mogliche Abweichungen siehe ..fiestelltest far Sesonderhoiten- Me6bereich (siehe MeBbereichtabelle)

Skala (Angabe nur erforderlich, wenn abweich. vom MeBber.)
zum Anschluei an Pos.
Ausfahrungen Widerstand fOr Leitung (bzw. El + Ltg) 52
(bei Ferngeber- und Dreileiterschaltung 2%
fiir olektrische GroBen wie V; A: W siehe Elima-Llste
mit Grenzkontaktcn siehe Lista 4 Hilfsenergie (6 oder 24)V- (nur bet AAB ...)
Menstellenumschalter siehe Lietenblatt AZ 3.1 Schaltb:id Nr. (siehe Schaltbilder)
Netzgleichriater f9r Kreusepulgor..:r. siehe Listenblatt AZ 2.1 Besonderheiten Mehrpreis
No 2960
IIIIITEHIGIFFMARISSFAIRITTE
STEAK RADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
Bevorzugte Mel3be eiche und -Skalen
AAH ...P AIs Erstausatattung warden mitgelleferh

re-Kunst DIN NiCr-Ni DIN Spannung Strom 2 Befestlgungselemente
20.. att.;"C 20... 600'C 0...10mV 0... 3 rnA Gebrauchsenwelsung
20 ...400 'C 20... 900 •C 0...20 mV 0... 5 rnA
1 Schaltbild
• 20...600 'C 20...1200 °C 0...50 mV 0...10 mA
20 . 900 C ... 600 • C 0...20 mA Widerstandslocken Wm den Leitungsabglelch
Skala: in mV 1 bzw. 2 PrUfwiderstSnde far den Leitungsabglelch
3C0 ... 600 'C ') od. .100 linear 0 mA
Ltg.-WId.
0.. 100 Skala:0...100 (nur bei ThermometermeObereich)
0.,Rh-Pt DIN
20 ... 1200 'C oder 202 linear oder "C
20.:. 1600 'C wie Thermo-El.
600...1600 'C') •
Einbaulagen
Skala: gema0 MeOberelch
Widerstand fOr El +Ltg
10 !I oder 202
AAB...P
Widerstandsthermorneter Widerstandsferngeber
P1100 DIN
0... 303'C 50... 30...50
0...100 °C 0... 400'C 5...100... 52 DI. L__,J, 0I a
-30... +60 'C
0 ... 200 'C
Skala: gema0 Mef3bereich Skala: 0 ...100 linear
Leitungswiderstand 10 Leitungswiderstand 2X 10. 4
LiCI-Feuchtegeber
-20... +30'C Taupunkt
Skala: gema6 MeObereich
Leitungswiderstand 104
Mehrpreis fur NullpunktunterdrOckung beachten, auDerdem Konstant-
spannungsquelle AZKZ 3 oder AZKZ 5 (Listenblatt AZ 2.2) erforderlich.
Weitere Me5bereiche gem513 Vorblatt 9.0 und Me6werktabelle
Mehrprels NormalausKihrung 2b. Hiervon abweichende
Kenn- I = L 0t > 90° AusfOhrungen bei Bestellung angeben
Bestelltext fur Besonderheiten zahl Om (z. B. Nennlage 3a. a = 70 ')
2: 1a = 90°
Me6bereich nicht nach Vorblatt 9.0 3:La <90°
Typ 192P, 144 P 211 20,— 4 : r—,cc 0°
Typ 96 P. 72 P 206 10,—
(einschlie0lich Sondertellung bel Temp.
oder Taupunkt) Kenn. V '''''Prets
rahl Dtvt
Skala nach beliebiger Kurve oder
Gleichung (z. B. in kp/cm2, ppmCO2o. 206 10,— Drehspulmeflwerk
Zusatzliche Skalenteilung nach Vorblatt 9. 211 20,-
(Imtte angebemob Haupt- oder Hilfsteilung) mit zusatzlichem Me(Sbereich nach
Vorblatt 9.0 ein--.h1. Skal,
nteilung 222 50.—
Zusatzliche andere Skalenteilungen 211 .
mit zusatzlicher Wcklung Typ 144 P; 192 P 226
Zusatzliche Skalenaufschriften 206 10,- fur Summen oder D;fferenzs-Oaltung
(siehe SkalenausfOhrungen und
Beschriftungsmaglichkeiten) mit elek:r. Unterdrdckung des
mit Bezeichnungsschild auf Frontglas- 208 15,— Anfangsbereiches 3) 215 30,-
Konstantspannungsquelle nach AZ 2.2
scheibe (Naheres siehe enter Skalen- erforderlich
ausluhrungen und Beschriftungs-
mcglichkeiten) mit einem eingebauten Mefigleich- 216 32,—
MeBwerkmehrpreis ftir entsprechend • 211 20,— richter fifr Wechselspannungsmessung
bezehnete Mel3werke nach Tabelle Minderpreis
Einbaulage abweichend 2b Skala ohne Teilung, Me6werk
soweit ausfOhrbar
Typ 192P und 144 P Ausfdhrung N 215 abgeglichen 4) 219 10,-
einschlieBllch Mehrpreis far MeOwerk . Skala ohne Teilung, Me6werk nicht
166-2 oder 169-2 abgeglichen °) 229 20,--
Typ 192 P u. 144 P Ausfuhrung TU 206 10,—
und Kreuzspul Mehra:via
Typ 96 P und 72 P ohne Kreuzspulmel3werk
Rackseitiger Anschlu6kasten mit mechanischem Zeigerrucksteller 2 ) 215 30,-
Typ 192 P: 144 P: 96 P 221 45,—
Anschlunkiernmen in Schutzart P 43 mit zusatzlichem Mel3hereich nach
Vorblatt 9.0 elnschl. Skalentei lung 226 70,-
Frontglasscheibe reflexarm
Typ 144 13: 192 P; 208 15,—
mit Bracken-Kreuzspulmellwerk 2) 3) 222 50.-
Mallhoretch zwinchen 0 ... 15 "C
Typ 96 P: 72 P 206 10,— and 11...40 "C Pt 1(10 UIN
mit breitem Frontrahmen DIN b ohno Sonderschaltung (Pt nake-Schaltua(1) 2) 3)
mit grauem Frontrahmen RAL 7037 206 10,— fin-relative Feuchte mit Li-CI FOhler
:wen mit btettem grauem Frontrahmen •oder Psychometer
mit blauem (Vergleichsstellentemperatur) oder fur Temp.-Differenzmessung 264 280,-
oder rotem (Gefahrenpunkt) Strich 203 Sonderschaltung fur Verhaltnis-•
auf der Skala messung von 2 Stromen 2) 3) 264 280.—
N Magnetsystem permanent magnetisiert 208 15,- Minderpreis
Typ 192 P; 144 P
Skala ohne Teilung Me6werk
in erschutterungsfester Ausfuhrung 211 20,— abgeglichen 4) 219 10,-
bei Ausfuhrung Kreuzspul und TU:
bei Ausfuhrung N nur roil Me6werk 169-2 Skala ohne Teilung Me6werk nicht
oder 166-2. MeOwerkmehrpreis beachten abgeglichen 4) 239
Klasse 1.5 oder 2.51e nach MeObereich 30,-
2) nur bei Typen 144P und 192P
Explosionsgeschutzte Ausfiihrung
3) nur bei Einbaulage 2b
Anschlu6 an eigensichere Stromkreise 208 15,— 9 Minderpreis nur bei Typen 144P und 192P.
Normalaustiihrung, jedoch mit bifilar
gewickelten Spulen und Angabe von LI
und RI auf der Skala
Anschluil an nicht' eigensichere Strom-
kreise-in Vorbereitung
io 2960
GHH •
anemias OUTIENCIFFIVIIIMISISHEITTE
• M.TM.K
. _
Me6werktabelle
.
STERKRADE
Drehspulmeawerke fin. Ausfiihrung N, KreuzspUlmelSwerke fOr Ausfuhrung B

AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Matt
Typ Klasse be i Me6werk-Nr. Mehrpreis Anwendung ' 0/mV Einstelizeit Me5werkdaten

Einbaulage fur bzw. je nach
2b andere Dreh- Kreuz- Mawerk 5) Verhaltnis- Maberelch R .1 Li
(Mehrpr. 5)) spul spul . empfind- IS] (ca. 11) [ca. mA] Ica. mill
Iichkeit ca.
192P 1 - 169-1 nein Th.-El. ab 8 mV 20 7... 18 62 0.05 7.7

t 1.5 169-2 ja Th.-El. ab 24 mV 5 69 0.2 10,8
1 1. 169-7 nein Strom ab 1 mA to. 2 170 1,0 20.8
I - 169-3 ja fir 5 mV 72 0 - 15 13.5 0.05 1.9
1 - 169-6 ja for 50 µA 800 0 - 5 340 0,05 47.5
1 2.5 184-1 nein ab 0... 40 °C Pt 100 -: 7% 2,5 47 2x10 2
1 1,5 184-3 nein ab O... 120*C Pt 100 18% 2,5 47 2 / 10 2
------- - - '
144 P 1 - 166-1 nein Th.-El. ab 8 mV 20 6... 15 25 0.05 3.4
1 1,5 166-2 ja Th.-El. ab 24 mV 5 65 0.2 108
1 1 166-6 nein Strom at, 1 mA - ca. 2 170 1.0 20.8
1 - 166-3 ja fin- 5 mV 72 12 - ca. 15 23 0.063 2.7
I - 166-5 ja fOr 50 µA 800 0 , - :- ca. 5 310 0.05 42.0
•
1 1.5 180-1 nein ab 0... 40 'C Pt 100 9%d 2,5 47 2/10 3,5
1 1.5 8354 nein ab 0...100 °C P11110 15%. 2.5 65 2x10 5
96P 1.5 2.5 161-1 6) ja Th.-El. ab 10 mV 6 ca. 3 35 0.166 6

1,5 2,5 161-2 nein Th.-El. ab 15 mV 8 ca. 3 55 ... 250 0,125 12...45
1,5 2,5 138-2 nein ab 0... 40 °C Pt 100 6% ca. 3 70 2x10 5
1,5 1,5' 138-1 nein ab O... 60 'C Pt103 11% ca. 3 70 2x10 5
72 P 1,5 2,5 78-1 ja Th.-El. ab 15 mV 3 - ca. 3 14 0.333 6

1,5 2.5 78-5 nein Th.-El. ab 40 mV 5 ' ca. 3 40 0.200 12...45
1.5 2.5 ' 136-1 nein ab O... 40 °C Pt 100 10% ca. 3 26 2/10 2
1.5 1.5 136-2 nein ab 0... 100 'C Pt 100 16% ca. 3 26 2x10 2
: i) sithe Besenderheiten
. 6,i max_ 100 kir El. + Leitg.
Met3werk-Schaltbilder
Schaltbild Nr. Schaltbild Nr.

Schaltbild Schaltbild
Anwendung Anwendung
99225/19 99250/17 .
Drehspul-Me f3werk • Kreuzspul-Me6werk
Spannungs- oder Strommessung I I Widerstandsmessung

bei alien Typen ' Zweileiterschaltung
bet alien Typen
I
• 99 251/6
Kreuzspul-Me6werk
.
99255/3/1
Kreuzspul-Me6werk
Widerstandsmessung I Widerstandsferngebermessung
Dreileiterschaltung I bet Typ 72P: 96P
oei Typ 72 P; 96 P
99251/7 . -1 99255/1
Krouznpul-Me6werk Krouzspul-Me6werk
With:rulandsmeubung
1. Widerstandsferngebermessung IOW
Dr..,11,:rturachaltui.g l..•i Typ 144 la; 192 P
bat Typ 144P; 192 P
L,... _...._._
- 0 ft 0 0 0
24 1
No 2940
GHH
SIMMIRStai BUTEN! IFFNEENIEBRIETTE
M.TM.K STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
Manbild Gehauseabmessungen
. Form 192P 144P 96P 72P .
Befeatinungselement A. 3
(
Ma8e [mm]
a 192 144 96
a b 96 72 48 . a;
e. 230 168 108 92
d 8 8 5 5
e — — 62 62
f 103 100 87 87
Schalttafelausbruch __. 186X92 138x68 92)(45 63x33
MaBblatt Nr. • Ausfahrung
N 1285-190 1284-190 1283-190 1282-190
Ma2 Mat Ma 1 Ma 1
TU 1285-100 1284-100 1283-100 1282-100
Ma2 Ma2 Ma2 Ma2
B 1285-290 1284-290 1283-290 1282-2901., .
Ma2 Mat Ma 1 Mal
"t •
Befestigungselement A fur Normalausfuhrung (bis Schalttafeldicke 3 mm);
Bei extremen Beanspruchungen (z. B. riittelsichei-) Belestinungss:ement'B
(bis Schalttafeldicke 40 mm).
Abbildwigen und Mahe rind unverbindlich. Verbindliche MaBbsatter •
Anforderung.
GroI3e Ein- Anzahl der Beschriftungsart Schrift- Anzahl der
Skalenausfuhrungen und Beschriftungsmoglichkeiten bau- Skalen- crofie Schriftzeichen
- lege teilungen [mm] (Zwischenraume
-=Schriftzeichen)
192P .b 1 1 Skalenaufschrift
Feld Y 40
Feld! 2 1 Bezeichniings-
schild oaf der Unter- 5
a 1 od.2 28
0 - 10 '300 400 500 i 500
kante Glasscheibe
600 144 P b 1 • 1 Skalenaufschrift
36
f1111111111 tli11.41 4111.111 11 11[1\ 2 1 Bezeichnungs-
schild auf der tinter-. 4
1 6 .a 1 od. 2 25
20 40 50 kante Glasscheibe
Feld 4 5
Lr 96P .b 1 1 Skalenaufschrift
_ -- 32
1 Bezeichnungs-
2 schild auf der Unter- 3
.a 1 od. 2 kante GlasscheIbei 20
Hauptleilung I lloupttellunguililfsteilung[26auptteilungent
72 P .b 1 1 Skalenaufschrift
Feld fur Mel3gr66e; Feld III: fur Me8kreissymbole 28
Feld V: hit' Angaben Ober Anschlul3gerate. Ex-Beschelnlgung usw. 2 1 Bezeichnungs- •
schild euf der Unter- 2
.a 1 od.2 kante Glasscheibe 18
bet DIN b euf Unterkante Frontrahmen
GrOBenvergleich
rechteckiger Skaien
in naturlicher GroBe
°
• 0 20 40 60 00 100
192 P
N m3/h
0 20 40 60 80 100 600 —=
,111111111111!1111!111.1!IIIItAII!1111!IIII! 144P
400
ifs
kr) 0 50 100 °C
IIIIII1h I 1 I 1 I I I I 96 P 200 - E
o mA
MEN--
o so leo 72 P
• Hochformat •
(III lid P
lo 29O
MA II OBUDVIZOCEDIFFRIUNSOMEIMITIE
STENKNADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M. TM.K
e
4tt
114 %
V^s
•"It•-•
..,t
Af• ay ,0 •ftric• ,• - . • • •.•
" •.
Nil,
. • • 4-i
sUn ft.•••to.
•on...4s ;');f.
..4•P;*•:; • oks%
MVO
• • z,
„:••••er- qt:
,• ••••• •Azit, • :1/.4.1
-i•••••1:0t **
•k::•!,!. ..t.‘••••:**trt ' 4: .
•.‘i•••4.;.
a • • •••TIC' 1:1/2 ,s,
4.w4601.' •; • (".
•;13,
Pl* • Y.
:•II
N"".
• •
. .
JR
• ••••
•
• .
V.
•.•.• .t:
• •• e I
•
wi?Tiaki
im
kl•
4:44004 .. :. SCIlfO W04?01-0-rqfe rs
MIr-. 11.:.•-•
•t: • ta • ,„ yI 00
4 7A066;441 .115V .":1
I4.
No 3062
r,
•- " -ore
• 'a... V4•••/(4(;`'
7,4 iV.C;Ar•VI: 1.4 v.: 2.i •
GHH OUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
rel•TM•K
•
&Mt
o.9. 2.20 Widerstandsthermometer Pt 100 Ohm Uoens
\as— 75 —.op
Sk 114 7 C
I Pg 16
eo
110
• SW 30
Ln
•• SW 32
CO
I R1/2"
300
max. Temperalur : 500 ° C
Pos. Benennung Typ/Zeichg. WerksIo If Bemerkung
(wohlweise) Federhiilse im MessIngrohr

1 Melleinsatz P1100 Ohm spez. belesligl
PI 2x100 Ohm spez. erschiillerungsfes1
X10 CrNi Ti 18 9
2 Schulzrohr Rohr 11x 1
W-Nr. 1.4541
3 Verschraubung Mz 1680 B St 34.11 verschiebbor
Schrauben vom Klemmensockel

4 Anschlunkopf KA ! /2S GD AISi 13 and Deckel mil Federschei ben
gesicherI
No 3062
•
STERKRAGE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M. TIA.K Ellett • •
0.9.2.02
° 1 :1
"Heavy- uty" thermometers t (_--
for hydrocarbon, chemical and gas processing
industries and vibrating machinery
with adjustable indicating pointer Group Types HD/HCAt
(See also data sheet T4.2, types HD...D/H DV .D)
Heads
H D 100 and 160/HDV 100 and 160: stainless steel.
HD 80/H DV 80: die-cast aluminium anodized finish (HD 80) or
black hammered finish (HDV 80).
Glasses
Optical plate glass.
On request:
•
safety glass "Secure.
Dials
(anti-parallax for HD/HDV 100)
— brushed aluminium (for ranges up to 120° C --
+ 30 + 250° F) black printed markings; Co-axial models
— anodized aluminium (for higher ranges). (back connected)
(HD 100 — HD 80)
HD 80 (dia. 3") HD;100 (dia.:4") HD 160 (dia. 6")
Standard
(with threaded
connection).
Other connections
see overleaf.
H DA...
Model with
unthreaded
shoulder in
steel; to
order: stain-
less steel.
• Heads
Glasses
Dials
See above.
HDV...
Angular transmission spring
The angular transmission is assured by a flexible
edgewise wound spring which overcomes friction
and wear and therefore indicates immediate response. Vertical models
(bottom connected)
(H DV 100 — HDV 80)
HDV... ' H DV 80 (dia..3") HDV 100 (dia. 4") HDV 160 (dia. 6") HDV 80/100/160
Standard -4-7.3Tr.17.-sr4-71
(with threaded
connection).
Other connections
see overleaf.
HDVA... •••;••;...:: •
Model with Met p••m,i111.1
unthreaded
shouldet in ' tib'Tpe 11,1 pntilituto
in (0':41.11I tt
t • ••• r.° 770.
' I. • ,•ito•
stool; In Ilia 110111110 I dittt to•ktituo
order: stain-
less St.:0
No 3062
ISHII SUTEHICIFFINUNg SIHUTTE
STERKRACE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M. TTII .K Blatt
Standard temperature ranges _

Group I Group II Group III
Ranges .D;v. Ranges .Div Ranges . Ranges Ranges .Div. Ranges

•C T Div. 'Div. Div.
' • F ' • 'C •F •C •F
0+ 60* 3 /4 +30+140* 1 -70+ 40 1 -100+100 .2 -30+270** 2 +30+ 570 10

0+120* 1 +30+250* 2 -30+ 70* 1 - 40+160* 2 0+300 5 +30+ 750 10
-30+170** 2 + 30+300*. 5 0+400 5 -
-10+150* 2 + 501.400* 5 0+500 5 4-30+1100 20
0+200* 2 + 50+500 5 0+600 10
0+260 2
Other temperature ranges available on request at extra Cost. The ranges in ° F ore not always available from stock.
• The helix of the thermometers with these ranges can be protected from shock and vibration by silicone dampening on request. lo be stated when ordering
HD...-e" or HDV...-c". ••Only for HD 1001HDV 100.
Back and bottom connections ____

• HD.:./HDV... HDt.../HDVt... HDtn.../HDVtn... HDu 100/HDVu 100 HDm.../HDVm... _
• «
c
o
a
I I
,
ti
•
I2
.
i
I 7
-a
u 1 =1.5-• ,.,_
. 0 -i-4_,--
• i__- -
c
.c
o Standard with With threaded With threaded fixed With fixed position With adjustable
u
fixed screwed . fixed position position swivel gland cap swivel gland union.
connection. swivel gland. with lock nut. connection.
•
Steel or stainless 1. Chrome plated 1. Swivel connection 1. Screwcap: Steel,
steel. ---- steel or • gland: chromium galvanized steel stainless steel
*0 stainless steel.' platedsteel or or chromium or brass.
stainless steel. . _plated steel.
C3
«
0 _. Compression collar ., 2. Lock nut: Compression fitting
according to chromium plated according to
2 stem-material. steel or stainless stem-material.
- steel.
a- R 3/4" x15 mm 1. R 3/4"x12 rum 1. R 3/4" x12 mm 1. R %" R 3/4" x15 mm

vi R 3/4* R 3/4*x18 ram
R. 3/4" x 18 mm
r41 NPT 3/4* ... . NPT IV
•
.61 II . M 24x1,5
ro 0
a; 2. R %"x15 mm
:6 II -
R %"x18 mm
I- ac
NPf %"-
,
72 g E 6.5 (.255") 6.5 (.255") 6.5 (.255") 6.5 (.255")
2 45
,,, E 8 (.315') 8 (.315') 8 (.315") 8 (.315") ' 8 (.315")
a -' • '..: 10 (.393")
'6 <1
10 (.393") 10 (.393")
'Other materials and threads available on request.
Stems
Standard lengths (I_ =- ... mm or ...") Materials available
dia. mm (in.) (for all diameters and lengths).
(Other longths available to order)
• 60, 95, 120, 160, 200, 300. 400, 500

6.5 (.255") (2',r, 4", 6", 9", 12", 15", 18") - steel
8, (.315") 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 (24") - stainless steel 18/8 (AISI 304).
10 (.393") 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500, 1600, 1700. -stainless steel 18/8 MO (AISI 316 L)
1800, 1900, 2000
•
Observation: We advise the use of stem diameters in accordance with the standard lengths.
On request, we can also supply stems with other diameters and materials according to your requirements.
O All sterns can be supplied on request,with spear point for easy piercing of soft material to be measured. _ ...- -
' When ordering please specify HDp... or HDAp... ,
No 3062
BUTEIIIIFFRAILINSSINUTTE
STERKRAD.E AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Technical Manual 1543 b
Installation and Operating

Instructions of Thermoelectric
Measuring Systems
ioi, 3 g zizo • •
Zp
Content 7. Factors Affecting Systems Using Resistance Thermometers . . .

7.1 Self-Heating
1. Introduction
7.2 Lead Resistance
7.3 Internal Wire Resistance
2. Sensors
2.1 Thermocouples 8. Installation Considerations
2.2 Resistance Thermometers (RTD's) 8.1 General Installation Rules
2.3 Potentiometer Transducers 8.2 Measurements In Gases
8.3 Measurements In Fluids and Vapors
3. Processing The Variable
8.4 Measurements On Solid Materials
3.1 By Deflection (Movement)
3.2 By Deflection (Cross Coil Movement) 9. Safety Precautions for Contactors.
3.3 Bridge Circuits (By Deflection) 9.1 Creation and Effect of Surge Voltages
3.4 By Deflection With Partial Compensation 9.2 Resistor - Condenser - Combination
(Supression of Measuring Range)
9.3 Protective Diode '
3.5 Multi Point Selection
3.6 Considerations of Errors
4. Lead Wires
4.1 Extension Wires
4.2 Compensating Extension Leads
4.3 Identification of Wiring
5. Checking and Compensating Lead Wires

1
5.1 Lead Resistance
5.2 Resistance Adjustment
5.3 Insulation Resistance
5.4 Trouble Shooting for Faulty Grounds, Shone, and Open Loops
5.5 Pin Pointing Trouble Spots
6. Factors Affecting Systems Using Thermocouples

6.1 External Resistance
6.2 Internal Resistance w
6.3 Temperature of Reference Junction a
1. Introduction between hot and cold junction. The most common industrial thermocouples are
iron-constantan (ISA-1), chromel-alumel (ISA-K), platinum rhodium-platinum
(ISA-S). The first listed metal wire 'is always the positive element. The so
called basic thermocouple temperature millivolt table shows the millivolts of the
This technical manual tries to present basic guidelines only and contains hints thermocouple at the hot junction when the reference junction is at 0° C or 32:r F
with respect to the installation and troubleshooting of Thermoelectric systems. (figure 1). The basic millivolts and tolerances for industrial thermocouples.are
It is not intended here to • discuss special application problems such as the described in DIN 43 710.
temperature measurement on plastic processing equipment, steel melt, or gas •
turbines, nor the technical details of different processing techniques for the The tolerances for thermocouples according to DIN 43 710 and the errors
resulting from these tolerances are listed •in Tables 1-3. If these errors are
measured variable (i.e. by deflection with and without partial compensation).
above the required process accuracy, thermocouples with lesser tolerances
Technical magazines and literature deal with these special problems. Many should be used.
guidelines regarding proper selection of sensor location, factors influencing on
proper mounting of electrical contact thermometers and suitability of circuitry The corresponding millivolts for a temperature of 500° C (932° F) is for iron-
constontan -27.85 mV, for chromel-alumel -20.65 mV, for platinum rhodium- -1 lug
installation are given in the VDE/VDI Instructions 3511 "Technische Temperatur-
messungen". platinum -.4.221 mV. Thus, a compensating pre-amplifier with a 'sensitivity of m C
• 6.5 times greater has to be used if the same resolution is required for a pla-
Thermoelectric Measuring Systeins are installations whereby measured-or process tinum rhodium-platinum thermocouple as that of an iron-donstantan thermo- • X 71
variables are detected, transmitted and processed electrically. The measured-or couple.
process variable Is detected in the process through suitable sensors (i.e. Ther-
rtioucouples resistance thermometers). The detected signal is then transmitted
via lead wires from process to instrument where the variable is processed in•a O
•
0 OP
d'Arsonual or cross coil movement, in a multipoint or line recorder, in a control 6w O

system, or in suitable transformers (i.e. pre-amplifiers especially when signals
are transmitted over great distances).
The variable detected through a sensor in the process should create an action x.
in the instrument which Is dependent on the definite and reproducable value of
the variable. The correlation .between true value of the variable and its effect -
m
on the instrument does not necessarily depend on the properties of the instru-
ment used. The correlation between true value of the variable and the signal
z
which occurs at the output of the sensor depends on the installation require-
mV
60
OZE
ments of the element, especially when using electrical contact thermometers. m
Furthermore, the effect of the signal on the instrument can be influenced by the Iron -Canst
resistance of the lead wire, insulation resistance between twin leads or against m on
ground, as well as the reference temperature in the thermoelectric system. /w66166-.46arnitt r
When using solid state instruments (those without galvanometers), it is especially r
important to observe influences which ere caused from the outside of •the co
measuring system in addition to those which are caused from within. This be- A
comes very critical for companies where a multitude of electrical circuits and x
instrumentation is connected with each other or even coupled. Many times, msq
however, it is impossible to eliminate these disturbing sources. It is, however,
possible to reduce the magnitude and' intensity of these effects by proper coun- 20
ter measures.
Ple6nehodos.rktin
10
2. Sensors
0 200 400 600 003 1000 1200 1400 1600 "C
2.1 Thermocouples a—
TEMPERATURE
Thermocouple action is due to the following fact: When two dissimilar metals
are either soldered or welded on one end (hot junction) and the other ends
form a second junction (cold or reference junction) there will be a potential Figure 1 Thermocouple millivolts for iron-constantan, chromel-alumel, and pla-
difference between them when both are at different temperatures. The magnitude tinum rhodium-platinum plotted against temperatures; according to
of this potential or thermal EMF depends on the difference of temperature DIN 43 710 (Reference Temperature 0° C [32° F]).
4 '
0
0,10't • '-)) g (6 ) • •
Tolerances Basic millivolts Tolerances
Basic millivolts Relative Error
Relative Error Temperature Thermal EMF Absolut Error
Temperature Thermal EMF Absolut Error C ,mV 6 °C - - Imv
O°C-..-z - A mV -.- mV °C mV 1°C A mV 41 mV .=
°C % mV
°C mV .I°C A mV
%
°C % %
' ±3 ± 0,17 ± 3,0 + 3,1 100 0,643 ±3 ± 0,0219 ±3 ± 3,41

100 5,37
10,95 ±3 + 0,17 ' ± 1,5 ±1,5 200 1,436 ±3 ± 0,0254 ±1,5 ± 1,77
200
16,56 ±3 ± 0,17 ± 1,0 ±1,0 300 2,316 ±3 ±0,0275 ± 1,0 ± 1,19
300
±3 ± 0,17 ± 0,8 ± 0,76 400 3,251 ±3 ± 0,0287 ± 0,8 ± 0,88
400 22,16
27,85 ± 3,6 ± 0,21 ± 0,72 ± 0,75 500 4,221 ±3 ± 0,0296 ± 0,6 ± 0,70
500
± 4,3 ± 0,25 ± 0,72 ± 0,75 600 5,224 ±3 ± 0,0306 ± 0,5 ± 0,59
600 33,67
± 4,7 ± 0,30 ± 0,67 ± 0,75 700 6,260 ± 3,0 ± 0,0313 ± 0,43 ± 0,50
700 39,72
46,22 ± 5,2 ± 0,35 ± 0,65 ± 0,75 800 7,329 ± 3,4 ± 0,0366 ± 0,42 • ± 0,50
800
53,14 ± 5,6 ± 0,40 ± 0,62 ± 0,75 900 8,432 ± 3,7 ± 0,0422 ± 0,42 + 0,50
900
1000 9,570 + 4,1 ± 0,0479 : ± 0,41 ± 0,50
Table 1 Bas'c millivolts and tolerances for iron-constentan .according to 1100 10,741 ± 4,5 ± 0,0537 ± 0,41 ± 0,50
DIN 43 710 (Reference Temperature 0° C [32°F]). 1200 11,935 ± 5,0 ± 0,0597 ± 0,41 ± 0,50
1300 13,138 ± 5,5 ± 0,0657 ± 0,42 ± 0,50
1400 14,337 + 6,0 ± 0,0717 ± 0,43 ± 0,50
1500 15,530 ± 6,5. ± 0,0777 ± 0,44 ± 0,50
1600 16,716 ± 7,0 ± 0,0836 ± 0,44 ± 0,50
Table 3 Basic millivolts and tolerances for platinum rhodium-platinum according

to DIN 43 710 (Reference Temperature 0° C [32° F)).
Basic millivolts Tolerances Type and polarity of the thermocouple wires must be observed when connecting
R elative Error it to the instrument. Furthermore, it should be noted that the polarity of the
Temperature Thermal EMF Absolut Error A°C tirsV
A°C=-- A mV = mV thermal EMF changes when process temperature goes below reference tempera-
°C mV I
rC A mV
%
°C
.
% ture. This is important for d'Arsonval movements or compensating pre-amplifiers.
Normally, the positive element Is marked for precious metals in case of non-
100 4,10 ±3 ±0,12 ±3 ±3 precious metals the negative element is marked also.
200 8,13 ±3 ±0,12 ±1,5 ±1,5 Industrial thermocouples•usually have either metal or ceramic protection tubes.
300 12,21 ±3 ±0,12 ± 1,0 ± 1,0 These protect the thermocouple wires from flows, pressures and corrosion, etc.
400 16,40 ±3 ± 0,13 ± 0,8 ± 0,77 Both the mechanic and thermal resistance requirements for metal protection
± 0,15 ± 0,74 ± 0,75 tubes can be found in DIN 43 763. Guidelines for the selection of metal according
500 20,65 ± 3,7 to the application and temperature range is detailed in DIN 43 720. DIN 43 724
600 24,91 ± 4,4 ± 0,19 ± 0,74 ± 0,75 lists properties such as maximum • resistance, temperature changes, tightness
700 29,14 ± 5,2 ± 0,22 ± 0,74 ± 0,75 against gaseous environment for ceramic protection tubes and the corresponding
800 33,30 ± 6,1 ± 0,25 ± 0,76 ± 0,75 guidelines for the ceramic selection according to application and temperature
± 0,78 ± 0,75 range, The Dechema-Werkstoff Tabellen (Dechema-Veriag, Frankfurt) and The
900 37,36 ± 7,0 ± 0,28
Stahleisen-Werkstoffblatter 400 and 472 (Gtahleisen-Verlag, Duesseldorf) list the
1000 41,31 ± 7,9 ± 0,31 ± 0,79 ± 0,75 chemical resistances of the different protective tube materials.
1100 45,16 ± 8,9 ± 0,34 ± 0,81 ± 0,75
When thermocouples are installed, note that the temperature of the connection
1200 48,89 ± 9,9 ± 0,37 ± 0,83 ± 0,75 head never exceeds 200° C (382° F). This maximum permissible temperature Is
1300 52,46 ± 11,2 ± 0,39 ± 0,86 ± 0,75 derived from the properties of the gasket and those of the extension lead wires.
Usually we find two or three position controllers in thermo-electric processes
which indicate the process variable through a movement. If it is important to
Table 2 Bas'c millivolts and tolerances for chromel-alumel according to
continuously record the process variable, it is better to• use double thermocaup-
• DIN 43 710 (Reference Temperature 0° C [32° F]).
Dit,36 (f.) 6/zo
• •
les. One pair of thermocouple wires is used for the controller and the other The normally used industrial RTD has a metal protection tube which encloses a
for the recording unit. This guarantees process safety as each measuring loop is single or double resistance element thus protecting it from pressures, flows,
independent from each other. Furthermore, it is warranted that the temperature or chemical corrosion. (Refer to section 2.1).
is sensed at one and the same location.
It is important to prevent electrical shunts in either the RID element or the
The thermal EMF created by the thermocouple should theoretically always 'cor- connection head. Electrical shunts are caused by condensation inside the head
respond to the temperature difference between reference temperature and that when temperatures are measured outside, in moist or wet rooms, or in rooms
of the sensing spot either in solid materials or fluids or gases or pressures. where the dewpoint is reached (that is when the air is saturated with water
vapor). This problem can create rahter large errors.
However, we find that temperature changes at the sensing spot are indicated
with a time lag. This is a characteristic of thermocouples and holds true for all. Electrical shunts can be prevented by embedding the resistance wire and the
The phenomena is called indication lag. The degree of indication lag depends leads to the connection head in appropriate liquids or a solid material. Embedd-
on the design and the internal characteristic of the thermocouple and on the ing in proper liquids will also reduce or possibly eliminate heat transfer
heat exchange between it and its surroundings. •
resistance, thus, indication lag.
Normally we find that the thermal process in solid materials or fluids is sluggish Explosion Proof RTD's: Those which do not require intrinsically safe circuits are
and shown on measuring or controling systems which use contact sensors. to be used for hazardous installations.
However, when measuring the temperature of gases, vapors, or solid materials
as in the case of hardening processes which are heated up rapidly, we find the
above statement not always true. Yet it is important to consider the indication
lag when planning a measuring or control system installation used for rapid
thermal processes. •
Usually it is possible to reduce the heat transfer resistance and thus the indi-
cation lag by using high thermally conductive materials such as contact liquids
or metal gauze between protective tube and thermometer well.
Sheathed Thermocouples usually react quicker to temperature changes due to
their smallness and design than those that are often used for industrial measure-
ments. The thermocouple wires of sheathed thermocouples (i.e. iron-constantan, OH"
chromel-alumel, platinum rhodium-platinum) are embedded in magnesium or al- 300
luminium oxydes. Thenn they are covered with a sheath i.e. stainless steel or
inconel. There are insulated sheathed thermocouples which have a specific Insu-
lation resistance of more than 108 OHM meter (between wire and sheath) for a
temperature range from 0--900:C (refer to section 5.3). R
Nickel Picainun
200
2.2 Resistance Thermometers (RTD's)
The electrical resistance of Conductors and semiconductors depends on its tem- 100
perature. This phenonema is utilized when measuring temperatures with RTD's.
Industrial RTD's usually consist of platinum, nickel, or copper.
The basic value table shows how the electrical resistance depends on the temperature
( " d
whereby the international reference point is at 0° C (32° F), (Figure 2). The basic -200 -100 0 100 200 300 °C 500
value tables and the corresponding tolerances for platinum and nickel RTD's
are described In DIN 43 760.
T EMPERATURE
Tables 4 and 5 show the relative errors derived from the tolerances according
to DIN 43 760, Should these errors be above required process accuracy RTD's
with lesser tolerances have to be used.
Platinum or nickel RTD's have a positive temperature coefficient in the range
from 0-100° C (32-212'. F). These are 3.85 x 10-3 for platinum and 6.17 x 10-3
per degree for nickel, This means that the resistance value for an industrial Figure 2 Resistance valves for platinum 100 and nickel 100 RTD's plotted against
platinum RTD increases by 3.85 °10 for -1-10 degree change and that of nickel temperatures according to DIN 43 760
by 6.17 Vo. (Reference Temperature,0° C [32° F)).
‘.11
•
Basic Resistances Tolerances partial resistances can be changed by 30 OHM's maximum depending on the
Temperature Resistance Relative Error wiper position. A potentiometer transdUcer without resistors in series and parallel
Absolut Error J°C JR
VC .= - 6R -- (figure 4) has a total resistance of about 220 OHM's and the partial resistances
°C R, A°C .1R TI can be changed by about 200 OHM's.
-200 18,53 ± 1,2 ± 0,5 ± 0,60 ± 2,7 Several interconnected potentiometer, transducers serve to transmit one signal
to several receiving units with independent measuring systems.
-100 60,20 ± 0,7 ± 0,3 ± 0,70 ± 0,50
0 100,00 ±0,3 ±0,1 ± ± 0,10 Explosion proof potentiometer transducers can be used in hazardous environ-
ments. Potentiometer transducers (single or double) in housings .which conform
100 138,50 ± 0,5 ± 0,2 ± 0,50 ± 0,14 to the classification "Pressure Tight Housing" offer enough explosion protection
200 175,84 ± 1,1 ± 0,4 ± 0,55 ± 0,23 for all explosion and ignition groups.
300 212,03 ± 1,7 ± 0,6 ± 0,57 ± 0,28
400 247,06 ± 2,3 ± 0,8 ± 0,58 ± 0,32
500 280,93 ± 3,0 ± 1,0 ± 0,60 ± 0,36 3. Processing The Variable
600 313,65 ± 3,7 ± 1,2 ± 0,62 ± 0,38
3.1 By Deflection (Movement)
700 345,21 ± 4,5 ± 1,4 ± 0,64 ± 0,41
750 360,55 ± 4,85 ± 1,5 ± 0,65 ± 0,42 Figure 5 shows the basic wiring of a thermoelectric measuring system with a
800 375,61 ± 5,4 ± 1,6 ± 0,68 ± 0,43 d'Arsonval movement. The indicated thermal EMF depends on the difference
19.-0., of the temperature 0 at the sensing spot and of the reference junction
850 390,38 ± 5,8 ± 1,6 . ± 0,68 ± 0,41 . temperature
Table 4 Basic Resistances and Tolerances for platinum 100 RTD according to
DIN 43 760.
Basic Resistances Tolerances

Absolut Error Relative Error
Temperature Resistance J`C JR
,5°C= - a11 =
°C R - A°C AR O 71
-60 69,5 ±2,1 ±1,0 ±3,5 ±1,4

0 100,0 ±0,2 ±0,1 - ±0,1
100 161,7 ±1,1 ±0,8 ±1,1 ±0,5
180 223,1 .± 1,5 , ±1,3 .±0,8 ±0,6 .
Table 5 Basic Resistances and Tolerances for nickel 100 RTD according to
DIN 43 760.
z
2.3 Potentiometer Transducers WN
•
Potentiometer transducers convert the angular shaft position into nearly propor-
tional resistances which can be measured electrically. Thus, these transducers ma ei
measure the position of valves butterfly valves, slide valves, motor operators,
floats, pressure gauges, or ring balances. They are used in applications of z-so/
pressure, flow, quantity, and level measurement. ,
<E1
The potentiometer transducer consists of a circular slide wire and usually has akrij 50 sa.
3 electric connectors (standard). Total resistance lies between connections 1 and WIPER POSITION
3, (figures 3 and 4). The ratio of resistance between connections 1 and 2 and 2
and 3 changes when the position of the wiper arm is changed. The total resistance Figure 3 Potentiometer Transducer with Resistors in Series and Parallel
of the standard potentiometer transducer (figure 3) measures 130 OHM's; the
(Standard).
0,42,s9 7ho
• •
Figure 5 shows that it is necessary that the temperature at the reference junc-
tion must be known and also constant (see also section 6.3). The compensating
resistor compensates for differences between the resistance of the total loop
(thermocouple, compensating extension leads, line wires, and compensating
resistor) and the external resistance for which the instrument is calibrated (see
also section 5.2 and 6.1). The instrument is connected after the proper compen-
sation adjustment has been made.
When hooking up a multichannel recorder, for example, it is necessary to com-
pensate each loop separately.
0
METER MOVEMENT METER MOVEMENT
200
COMPENSATING
100 RESISTOR
0 EXTENSION WIRES COMPENSATING
I — RESISTOR
WIPER POSITION CONSTANT VOLTAGE
SOURCE EXTENSION WIRES
Figure 4 Potentiometer Transducer as a Voltage Divider.

REFERENCE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ,-14.- THERMOCOUPLE
COMPENSATION
TERMINALS 1,
WITH IDENTICAL L THERMOSTAT
TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATING
EXTENSION LEADS COMPENSATING
EXTENSION LEADS
CONNECTION HEAD.
. CONNECTION HEAD
SENSING SPOT L_
THERMOCOUPLE
SENSING SPOT.
Figure 6 Figure 7
METER MOVEMENT
Figure 6 Basic Wiring of a Thermoelectric Measuring System with d'Arsonval
,COMPENSATING RESISTOR. movement and ambient temperature compensation circuitry. Terminals
K1 and K2 must be kept at same temperature. This is done through
EXTENSION WIRES proper design inside the instrument.
Figure 7 Basic Wiring of a Thermoelectric Measuring System with d'Arsonval
— REFERENCE JUNCTION
(REFERENCE JUNCTION movement and reference thermostat.
TEMPERATURE /9,,)
COMPENSATING EXTENSION LEADS
— CONNECTION HEAD Figure 6 shows a basic wiring of a thermoelectric measuring system with an
THERMOCOUPLE ambient temperature compensation circuit, whereby Figure 7 shows a system
with a reference thermocouple circuit. The ambient temperature compensation
SENSING SPOT circuitry or the reference thermostat are used to compensate for temperature
(TEMPERATURE ei)
changes at the reference junction, (see also Section 6.3). When adjusting the
total loop resistance it is necessary to account for the resistance of the bridge
Figure 5 Basic Wiring of a Thermoelectric Measuring System with a d'Arsonval diagonal of the ambient temperature compensation or the resistance of the
movement. reference thermocouple inside the thermostat.
; 0,9. 39 (c) e/zo • •
Figure 9 shows a basic wiring of a temperature measuring system utilizing a
For small differences between temperature at the sensing spot and reference cross- coil movement and a two wire resistance thermometer.
junction, it is possible to increase the thermal EMF by the factor two through
connecting two (or more) thermocouples in series. This is shown in Figure 8, CROSS-COIL MOVEMENT.
however, the thermocouples must be sufficiently insulated electrically and
measure about the same temperature.
METER MOVEMENT
EXTENSION WIRES
CONSTANT VOLTAGE SOURCE
COMPENSATING RESISTOR
-- COMPENSATING RESISTORS
1 REFERENCE JUNCTION
WITH THERMOCOUPLES EXTENSION WIRES
RTD
Figure 9 Measuring System with Cross-Coil Movement and Two Wire RTD.
SENSING SPOT
Procedures for adjusting the loop resistance are the same as described in
Section 5.2.Temperature changes causing errors of the extension wire resistance
are not critical for relatively short extension wires.
Figure 8 Thermoelectric Measuring System with Two Thermocouples connected When extension wires are long or temperature changes large (i.e. when the
in series. instrument cannot be close to the sensing spot), three wireRTD's 'must be used.
A three wire RTD compensates for temperature changes and thus resistance
changes in the extension wires..
Figure 10 shows a temperature measuring system with cross-coil movement and
The temperature at the reference junction must be known and constant. There-
three wire RTD. Adjustment of loop resistance and installation of instrument
fore, a reference thermostat is usually used for such a circuit.
according to section 5.2.
Automatically compensating pre-amplifiers should be used when the loop resist- CROSS-COIL MOVEMENT
ance without instrument is considerably larger than 20 OHM's (i.e. when measur-
ing with sheathed thermocouples) or if the signal is transmitted over great
distances, instead of the movement alone (see also Section 6.1). The pre-
amplifier transforms the thermal EMF wattless and therefore resistance adjust-
ment of the loop is not necessary. Automatically compensating pre-aMplifiers
convert the thermal EMF into a proportional and fixed current signal..Thus even
large resistance changes in the external circuit of the pre-amplifier do Not CONSTANT VOLTAGE SOURCE
influence the measured result. Several rugged instruments (i.e. indicators,
signaling indicators, recorders, controllers) can be connected in series without COMPENSATING RESISTORS
resistance adjustment when using pre-amplifiers. Furthermore, large distance
signal transmitting is possible. EXTENSION WIRES
3.2 By Deflection (Cross-Coll Movement)
The cross-coil movement consists, of two coils which cross each other and are
RTD
fixed. The current flows in opposite direction in each coil which are called
"positioning coil" and "measuring coil". The measured variable depends on the
Figure 10 Measuring System with Cross-Coil Movement and Three Wire RTD.
current ratio flowing through the positioning and measuring coil. If both currents
change by the same percentage, the indicated variable will not change. Normal
deviations inherent in constant voltage supplies will not affect the indicated Potentiometer transducers are usually connected to a cross-coil movement (indi-
variable when both coils are fed by the same DC constant voltage supply. cator, point recorder, etc.) utilizing three wire circuitry.
D, :39 9/zo
•
CROSS-COIL MOVEMENT
Contrary to this we find that the sensitivity mV/degree for thermocouples is

constant. DIN 43 710 describes the sensitivities of the different thermocouples.
CONSTANT VOLTAGE SOURCE
Constant current sources should be used to feed bridge circuits which use
COMPENSATING RESISTORS d'Arsonval movements, because bridges are calculated easily and can be pro-
Ral perly adapted to the process problem. Furthermore, constant current sources
warranty to supply only a specific current to the sensor no matter what the
EXTENSION WIRES process temperature is (see also section 7.1).
Figure 12 shows a temperature measuring system using a 2' wire RTD and
03 gm
-I IN
d'Arsonval movement with bridge circuit.
The current across the bridge going through the movement is a measure of the m C
POTENTIOMETER TRANSDUCER
2 resistance of the RTD and therefore also a measure of the temperature. Further-
more, it is known that the current across the bridge is proportional to the
Figure 11 Measuring System with Cross-Coil Movement and Potentiometer voltage or current which feeds the bridge. Therefore, we have to feed the bridge • Ifi
• Transducer Utilizing Three Wire Circuitry. with either a constant voltage or current source. A constant current source
should be used whenever possible. O
• do
When using a three wire circuit; it is possible to transmit signals up to a • 111
The resistance of the extension wires should be adjusted to 10 OHM's according
distance of about 50 km (31 miles) between sensing area and instrument, (long
to DIN 43 709 whenever bridge-circuits are connected to 2 wire RTDs (see also
distance signal transmitting). Resistance adjustment of the loop and installation
section 5.2). Temperature changes causing resistance variations of the extension
of instrument according to section 5.2. 7k on
wires create errors influencing the measured variable. To eliminate or reduce •
this influence either Bridge-circuits with 3 wire RTD's (figure 13) or 2 wire RTD's
3.3,.Bridge CircUits (By Deflection) with additional loop (figure 14) must be used. — 6
m
Resistance thermometers are often connected with Bridge Circuits (most especi- The voltage across the bridge is measured wattless whenever the movement in z
ally •Wheatstone-Bridge) arid this bridge itself bedomes the sensing element. circuits according to figure 12 and 14 is substituted by a preamplifier. Using
The RTD (mostly platinum 100 according to DIN 43760) is wired into the variable such a preamplifier circuit guarantees also a high sensitivity (mV/degree) even OZ
m
bridge leg. The sensitivity (mV/ degrees) across • the bridge potential can be when only small currents flow through the • RTD. This means the RTD has a
made relatively large especially when using pre-amplifier and proper bridge negligibly small self-heating error. Furthermore, it is possible to connect several • m
dimensioning guarantees high adaptability to the process. indicators, fast printing recorders, controllers, etc. in series to the preamplifier
even if the measuring range is very small. r
r
RTD
co
3.4. By Deflection with Partial Compensation (Supression of Measuring Range)
EXTENSION WIRES A
Some processes require indication or. control with partial compensation when DC x
COMPENSATING RESISTOR voltages with given polarities are measured. This has two reasons: First, the
error as a percentage of full-scale can be reduced markedly, and, second, the
scale resolution can be increased. Such a system with partial compensation is
also called a "Process Variable Magnifier".
ERIDGE RESISTORS
A' known and constant reference voltage is added directly or indirectly to the
-measured voltage in such a partial compensation circuitry.
METER MOVEMENT Figure 15 shows a temperature measuring system with the thermocouple, refe-
rence thermocouple, and d'Arsonval movement which has as• separate, non
coupled second coil.
-CONSTANT CURRENT SOURCE
Figure 12 Measuring System with 2 Wire RTD and d'Arsonval Movement with a
Bridge Circuit
o
01 •. 3 9 ( I%o • L
•
CONSTANT CURRENT SOURCE
RTD
EXTENSION WIRES METER MOVEMENT
COMPENSATING RESISTORS WITH ADDITIONAL COIL
ERIDGE RESISTORS COMPENSATING RESISTOR
METER MOVEMENT
EXTENSION WIRES
THERMOSTAT
REFERENCE THERMOCOUPLE
COMPENSATING EXTENSION LEADS
THERMOCOUPLE
Figure 13 Measuring System with 3 Wire RTD and Meter Movement with Bridge
Circuit
SENSING SPOT
Figure 15 Partial Compensation (Supression of Measuring Range) through ad-
. ditional Coil added to Meter Movement
A constant current flows through the additional coil and causes a constant partial
compeniation of the meter movement torque created by the thermal EMF. Ther-
mal EMF's which are greater than the torque brought against the meter move-
ment by the constant current source are indicated only. The scales of these
instruments usually show only the starting temperature in °C or °F instead of
that range which is suppressed.
Figure 16 shows a temperature measuring system with partial compensation con-
taining thermocouple, reference thermostat, compensating amplifier-converter,
and indicator. The thermal EMF to be measured is partially compensated through
the voltage drop across a precision wire wound resistor (manganin wire) through
RTD which the constant current flows. The polarities of the thermal EMF and the
compensating voltage have to be checked before operating such a system.
EXTENSION WIRES RECEIVING INSTRUMENT

' (i. e. INDICATOR)
COMPENSATING RESISTORS PRE-AMPLIFIER

PRECISION RESISTOR
ERIDGE RESISTORS
EXTENSION WIRES
METER MOVEMENT
THERMOSTAT
j,—.REFERENCE THERMOCOUPLE
— CONSTANT CURRENT SOURCE e
JI
THERMOCOUPLE
SPOT
— — SENSING
Figure 14 Measuring System with 2 Wire RTD plus Additional Loop and Meter Figure 16 Partial Compensation (Supression of Measuring Range) through a
Movement with Bridge Circuit known and constant current opposite to the Thermal EMF
0, 4)2,3 9 (& ) "LO
• •
Nominal Tolerances Tolerance at Ambient
Temperature
3.5 Multipoint Selection of 40° C (104° F)
Thermocouple ± C (± 5.4° F) ± 3° C (± 5.4° F)
The Multi-Selector• Switch serves to connect one single instrument (indicator,
at 400° C (752° F) according to DIN 43 710
recorder, controller, amplifier, etc.) with several sensing areas. These switches
are used most often when instrumentation has to be kept at a minimum. They Compensating Extension Compensated,' therefore, only those tempera-
ere employed in central stations where the variables of several sensing areas Lead tures which differ from the compensating
are indicated, recorded, or calculated. conditions enter into the error
Selector switches need to have relatively small and constant contact resistances
Temperature of ± .2° C (± .36° F) ± .4° C (± .72° F)
(through precious metal contacts) and high insulation resistances such that they
Reference Thermostat
are free of thermoelectric errors.
Thermal EMF of
0
-4
Double pole selector switches should be used when switching thermocouples or
resistance thermometers. This is especially important when measuring very high Reference Thermocouples + 1.5° C (+
2.7° F) ' + 1.5° C (± 2.7° F)
ni C
temperatures with thermocouples because the Insulation resistance of the Insu- (Half Tolerance
lating protection tube decreases sharply with Increasing temperature, causing DIN 43 710) x
erroneous variables through electrical shunts against ground in the separate x
sensing elements. Measuring Range
Suppression
• up
O Ili
Sudden bouncing of the indicator needle must be prevented through proper
safeguards when switching from one to the other sensing area, especially when
(250° C Iron Constantan:
13.91 mV, Precision ± .8° C (± 1.44° F) ± 1.5° C (± 2.7° F) al el
using FiTD's or systems with partial compensation. Resistor 2.782 OHMs/1°/o,
Each system loop has to be adjusted, individually with respect to total lobo
resistance.
Constant Current
Source 5 mA/2V0) • on
Meter Movement, Class 1
(1°/o of Full Scale)
+ 2° C (± 3.6° F) + 4° C (± 7.2° F)
m"a
3.6 Considerations of Errors (According to VDE 0410,
200 - 400° C) ,
Many times It is necessary to judge the maximum, possible error of a complete
thermoelectric system in order to predict the reproducability of a process. Inductive Coil System: ± .2° C (± .36° F)
°
± 1.2? C (± 2.16° F)
(Drift) 0 ER
▪
In principle, it must be assumed that all. components of a system add to the .
total error of the measurement.
ni gm
. + 7.7° C (+ 13.86° F) ± 11.6° C (± 20.88° F) r
Practically, however, we find that a series of errors nulifY themselves. r
This example does not include so-called "Control Disturbances" nor does it
Let us analyze a simple measuring system and calculate its maximum error.
consider errors resulting from improper installations (see also section 8). •A G
The system consists of the following components:
Thermocouple,. (iron-constantan)
x mi
Compensating extension leads
Reference Thermostat for 50° C (122° F) 4. Lead Wires -4M
Measuring Range Suppression (partial compensation)
Signaling instrument with meter movement and inductive coil system 4.1 Extension Wires
Measuring Range. 300-500° C (572-932° F)
is calculated as follows: Symmetrical double conductors are used often in thermoelectric measuring loops
(see Figure 5). Both cables must be the same conductor material.
The maximum error for the above (at 40° C [104° F] ambient temperature) is
calculated as follows: Multi-conductors should be color coded or numbered such that installation
mistakes can be prevented. When noncoded conductors are used, it is necessary
to check each conductor separately with an OHM meter or similar device to
make sure that each wire is connected properly. This, of course, is time con-
suming for large installations.
In addition, it is important to use extension wires which have twisted and paired
conductors.
The resistance of an extension wire depends on the conductor material and its
temperature. Copper extension .wires according to VDE 0201 ("Vorschriften fur Temperature of Temperature of
Kupfer fur die Elektrotechnik") are used to keep the resistance at a minimum. Conduktor Factor Conductur Factor
Table 6 shows the resistance R20 for copper extension wire at conductor tem-
perature 20' C (68" F). Table 7 contains the factors necessary to multiply the
°C °C
.resistance 19;t with the conductor temperature 19, to get R20,
0 1,080 40 0,929
Furthermore, the extension wires must be aged and should have sufficient
5 1,060 45 0,913
' .electrical and mechanical strength. When selecting extension wires, consider the
process environment with regard to mechanical stress, outside temperature 10 1,040 50 0,897
influence, humidity, and chemically agressive atmosphere. The following guide- 15 1,020 55 0,882
lines are provided for the selection and installation of extension wires: 20 1,000 60 0,867
VDE 0250 "Vorschriften fur isolierte Starkstromleitungen" (Guidelines for 25 0,981 65 0,854
Power Cables).
VDE 0283 "Vorschriften fur probeweise verwendbare isolierte Starkstrom-
leitungen" (Guidelines for Tentaviely Usuable Insulated Power
30
35
0,963
0,945
70 0,840
c
Cables).
Table 7 To Arrive at he DC Resistance Fin of a Copper Conductor, multiply , -9
VDE 0880 "Vorschriften fur probeweise verwendbare isolierte Leitungen R. with Factor according to Conductor Temperature
R
und Kabel fur Fernmeldeanlagen" (Guidelines for Tentatively
Usable Insulated Extension Wires and Cables in Telecommuni-
•
cations). „,
VDE 0890 "Richtlinien fur den Aufbau und die Verwendung isolierter Lei-
tungen und Kabel fur Fernmeldeanlagen (Hints for Installing Specific insulation resistance
1111
and Use of Insulated Extension Wires and Cables in Tele- Insulation material
communications). R0180 20 (OHMR1Oter) (Guides)
The Insulation Resistance of an extension wire is measured in OHM'S between Paper, untreated 1011 m-
the conductor and another. one or the metal shield.
Polyvinyl chloride 1011...1012 z
Polyethylene .
n
1014 ' m
Diameter Cross Section DC Resistance at 20° C Temperature
mm' - Mg/M Styroflex Foam 1015 to En
RIM
137,2 Table 8 Specific Insulation Resistance R iniStho for Insulation Materials at 20° C
0,4 0,126 r
Temperature. A Conductor with length 1 has an Insulation Resistance of
0,5 0,196 87,8 RINSU 20 = R*INSU 2011
0,6 0,283 61,0
0,7 0,385 44,8 X oti
0,8 0,503 34,3 ung
,„
0,9 0,636 27,1 -11
The insulation resistance. depends. on the material, thickness, and conductor -t M
1,0 0,785 22,0 temperature. The resistance is about inverse proportional to the conductor length.
1,1 0,951 18,1 Table 8 shows a few specific insulation resistances Frinist.120 of some materials.
15,2 The insulation resistance of tentatively usuable telecommunication wires and
1,2 1,131
cables according to VDE 0880 is not smaller than 2 x 1010 OHM meter for 20° C.
1,3 1,329 13,0
11,2 Insulation materials made of paper, natural or synthetic silk, cotton and cellulose
1,4 1,540 are. hygroscopic (attract water) and must be soaked, impregnated or laquered.
1,5 1,770 9,76 Insulation materials made of rubber, guttapercha and paragutta (synthetic rubber)
1,38 1,500 11,9 are water resistant. Insulation materials made of polyvinyl-chlorid are wheather-
proof,' resistant to moisture, chemical or electrolytic corrosion, petroleum, ab-
rasion and have low flamability characteristics. They can be used in tropical
Table 6 DC Fesistas ce R.20 of a Copper Conductor 20°C Temperature. A Copper
Conductor with Length 1 has a DC Resistance of R 20 = R.20 x environments. However, at temperatures below -5° C (23° F) they become
sensitive to shocks, (brittlit).
•
I ( e) /2t
• •
4.2 Compensating Extension Leads 8. Checking and Compensating Lead Wires .•
The leads must be made from material which have the same thermoelectric pro-
5.1 Lead Resistance
perties as the thermocouple. When connecting compensating extension leads, it
is important to observe the type and polarity of the thermocouple. Compensating When measuring the resistance of a double leadwire, it is necessary to shorten
extension leads are color coded with respect to type and polarity to help one end and connect a proper bridge to the other. Differences occur between
simplify Installation procedures. measured and calculated resistances because of the conductor's temperature.
Price considerations and low DC resistances justify compensating extension
Multi-conductor leads are measured with respect to resistance by using two
leads manufactured out of special alloys. These leads have about the same
conductors at a time to make a loop. Properly manufactured extension wires
thermal EMF and tolerance properties as the thermocouple Itself.
should have equal conductor resistances for equal length.
This holds true for conductor. temperatures not exceeding 200° C (392° F) (see
also DIN 43 713 and 43714).
5.2 Resistance Adjustment
However, it should be noted that tolerances are kept Only if wires are used
which are coded and paired by the manufacturer. Measurements of thermal EMF or small DC voltages with meter movements are
Compensating extension leads with-cross'sections of 1.5 mm' and at 20°C (68°F) have correct when external resistance has been adjusted to the instrument calibra-
a DC resistance of about .4 OHM/meter for iron-constantan, .25 OHM/meter for tion. This is done by resistance adjustment.
chromel-alumel, .03 OHM/meter for platinum rhodium-platinum. The DC resistan- The thermoelectric measuring system of Figure 5 has an external resistance of
ces are the total of both conductors. Rr Rc Rw,
Compensating extension leads to be used with industrial thermocouples have Rr = Resistance of the Thermocouple •
electrical insulations against heat and moisture in addition to resistance against Rc = Resistance of the Compensating Extension Leads
mechanical stress. Rw= Resistance of the Extension Wire with Compensating Resistor
Compensating extension leads with heat resistant plastic insulation can be used The external resistance RE should not be larger than Rr Rc Rw in order
between —40 to 200° C (-40 to 392° F) according to DIN 43 7t4. The specific to 'eliminate errors. (The instrument usually shows this as 20 OHM's according
insulation resistance is not smaller than 10° OHM met r at 20° C (68° F) or 107 to DIN 43709).
OHM meter at 200° C (392° F). Compensating leads dth thermoplastic insula-
tions can be used between —10 to 70° C (14 to 158° F). Compensating extension Resistance adjustment of the thermoelectric measuring system in Figure 5:
leads with asbestos insulation cannot be used for moist or wet sensing areas, or Disconnect the meter movement instrument. Connect a suitable bridge to
areas in which the dewpoint is reached (see VDE 0100). This is caused by the the loop and measure the restistance at the median measuring temperature
asbestos characteristic of water 'absorption. Therefore, asbestos insulations and proper 'immersion depth of the thermocouple. If the resistance just
should always have an additional moisture protection. The insulation resistance measured is larger than indicated on the instrument scale, shorten the
of an asbestos insulated compensating lead with additional leadshield depends compensating resistor spool until corrected. After checking the installation,
markedly on the mechanical stress, Furthermore, it can happen that parasitic connect the meter movement instrument. Observe the polarity.
voltages exist between either steel braided cover or lead shield and the com-
pensating conductors. • Thermoelectric measuring system according to Figures 8 to 8 are adjusted In
the same'manner.
4.3 Identification of Wiring Measuring systems with multi-selectors are adjusted' for each loop separately
using the same method as above.
It is recommended to draw a proper wiring diagram to aid the installation of line
wires, compensating extension leads, etc. The diagram should contain the Resistance adjustment for a measuring system with 2 wire resistance thermo-
following information: meter detector and cross-coil movement as in Figure 9:
Installation date Disconnect the constant current source to prevent sudden bouncing of
Material of Conductors, Conductor's Cross Section and Length the indicator needle. Shorten the RTD at the sensing area. Connect the
Position of Wires and Branching Points which can be easily identified calibration resistor (shipped with the cross-coil movement instrument)
Conductor's Identification Code at the beginning and end and, if possible, anywhere in the loop. This calibration resistor has a value according to
in the middle (see also section 4.1) the RTD used (i. e. platinum 100 or Nickel 100). The resistance value
Position of Conductors with respect to Power Cables and other disturbing corresponds to the check temperature according to the basic resistance
influences values as shown in DIN 43 760. (The Resistor is marked with the resist-
Such a diagram will help trememdously in locating trouble spots and aid to ance and temperature value). Should the indicated temperature be larger
and
quickly restore the process. Furthermore, they help in judging the degree than stated on the calibration resistor, (after it has been connected and
intensity of disturbances on the system. The costs involved in drawing such a the constant current source be turned on) shorten the compensating
digram is small in relation to the tedious and timeconsuming Job of trouble resistor until corrected. After successfull resistance adjustment, disconnect
shooting through the wire maze without one. or shorten the calibration resistor and connect the RTD again.
o, 2 3 'Y2c • •
Do save the calibration resistor if it has been disconnected. (Attach it to The external resistance for instruments with cross-coil movement and potentio-
the Instrument with tape). meter tranducers is Imprinted on the scale. Resistance adjustment of the external
loop Is done after potentiometer transducer and instrument are . connected. The
The scale of a cross-coil movement instrument shows the resistance value of constant current source, however, must be disconnected before opening the loop.
the lead wires for which it was calibrated. In addition, it carries a symbol
indicating the RTD to be used with the instrument.. Resistance adjustments of measuring systems as to Figure 11:
•
It is possible to adjust the loop resistance for cross-coil movements even if the Adjust the potentiometer transducer to correspond to scale beginning. The
calibration resistor is lost or if other temperatures have to be checked for method of adjusting depends on the type of mechanical instrument (valve,
measuring systems as in Figure 9. However, the following steps have to be servo motor, etc.) used and hints are given in the respective Instruction
taken: and operating manuals. After connecting the constant current source
Disconnect the constant current source. Shorten the RTD at the sensing to the measuring loop, we find that the indicator positions, itself a bit to
area. the right of scale beginning. Now, disconnect the constant current source
again and shorten compensating resistor Ra 1 until indicator corresponds
Connect a calibrated resistance decade or other precision resistor (Helipot,
to scale beginning when constant current source is connected.
etc.) anywhere in the external loop. Adjust the resistor such that the total
resistance is: The same procedure is applied for compensating resistor Ra 2 after the
mechanical instrument is set up such that the Indicator needle corresponds
19„„' = Rw + RT. AT = Resistance of Basic value according to DIN 43 760
at temperature to be checked to the scale end. This method is repeated for both scale beginning and
end until mechanical and 'measuring Instruments show the proper scale
Rw = Resistance of Extension Wires (i. e. 200 OHM's
indicated on scale). values.
The measuring system with 2 wire, resistance thermometer detector and meter
After reconnecting the constant current source the indicated temperature
movement according to Figure 12 has a "three-quarter" bridge consisting' of the
on the cross-coil movement should be correct if the instrument Is in
calibration. resistors R2, 133, and R4. Resistance adjustment for this system is as follows:
The use of a Resistance Decade allows prediction of certain temperature influen- Shorten the RTD at its sensing area (connection head) and keep the bridge loop
ces in the extension .wireS•which will cause indication deviation. To judge these open (do not shorten the terminals). The resistance of the loop consisting of
deviations, adjust the resistance decade such that the total resistance 19„„, extension wires and compensating resistor is adjusted to 10 OHM's (according
R. + Rw R. = Resistance little smaller than A. When the constant current to DIN 43 709) as indicated on the scale with a proper resistance bridge (i. e.
source is connected, we will' have an indication deviation corresponding to' the Wheatstone Bridge). Then connect RTD, constant current source and measuring
• resistance difference R, — R. After finding the proper resistance change R, — Rw instrument.
which corresponds to a temperature of a copper wire from Table 6 and 7, it The calibration of such a system (Figure 12) can be checked by substituting a
is possible to predict the influences temperature changes have on the measuring precision resistance decade for the bridge loop consisting of extension wires,
system. RTD and compensating resistor. Adjust the decade such that the resistance
Instruments with cross-coil movement and 3 wire Resistance Thermometer are corresponds to R„, = Rw + RT.
supplied with two calibration resistors. Calibration resistor "A" corresponds to Whereby RT = Resistance of Basic Value according to DIN 43 760 at tempera-
the scale beginning and calibration resistor "E" to the scale end. Both. resistors ture to be checked
are marked with the corresponding temperature and resistance value. and ' R w-= Resistance of Extension .Wires
Resistance adjustment of a measuring system with 3 wire RTD and cross-coil The indicator needle should correspond to the scale value being checked after
movement as in Figure 10 is as follows: the constant current source has been connected.
' Disconnect the constant current source. Shorten the RTD' at the sensing
Calibration check and resistance adjustment is done in the same manner as
area (inside connection head). Connect the calibration resistor "A" any-
above when the measuring system as in Figure 12 Incorporates a preamplifier.
where between RTD and compensating resistor Ra 1. After connecting the
constant current source, the indicator needle should correspond with the
scale's beginning. If the needle is to the right, shorten the compensating 5.3 Insulation Resistance
resistor until corrected. Disconnect the constant current source again and
substitute calibration Resistor "E" for "A". Connect the constant current In order to measure the insulation resistance of lead wires, extension wires,
source again. The indicator needle should correspond to the scale's end. compensating.extension leads, it Is necessary to disconnect all wires and.insulate
If not, change the compensating resistor Ra 2 until corrected. Both ad- them against each other, against the metal protection tube, and ground if pos.-
justments are repeated so long as there is no deviation. between indicated sible. A proper insulation Instrument will then Indicate the insulation resistance
values at scale's beginning and end. After successful resistance adjust- of two conductors, one conductor with respect to its metal surroundings or one
ment, disconnect or shorten the calibration resistor and connect the RTD conductor against ground. VDE 0472 "Leitsatze fur die Durchfuhrung von PrO-
again. fungen an isolierten Leitungen and Kabeln' (Guidelines for Checking Insulated w
Do save the calibration resistors "A" and "E" if they have been discon- Wires and Power Cables) shows the proper method for measuring and checking
the insulation resistance.
nected. (Tape them to the instrument).
0,411.2.3g (e) /2_0 •
Usually the resistance of a completely installed lead wire with connection head
contacts etc. is smaller than the specific insulation resistance of a non-installed
lead wire. Furthermore, we know that the insulation resistance is influenced
strongly by temperature changes.
5.4 Trouble Shooting for Faulty Grounds, Shorts and Open Loops
When trouble shooting for faulty grounds or shorts, it is necessary to disconnect

all wires and insulate them against each other and against ground or metal
surroundings respectively. Measure the Insulation resistance between the con-
ductors and ground or metal surrounding (shorts aganist ground) or between two
conductors (shorts between conductors) with a proper insulation instrument. A
short against ground exists usually if the resistance is smaller then .1 . meg OHM. Figure 17 Pinpointing Trouble Spot Through Voltage Comparison
A short between conductors can be expected If the resistance is a few kilo
OHM's. When checking for broken or separated conductors, disconnect all
conductors and shorten at one end.
Then, using a bridge, measure the resistance of a conductor loop at the other
end. A broken conductor shows a resistance markedly larger than the calculated
value or that of one loop.
5.5 Pinpointing Trouble Spots
The method to be used in locating trouble spots in cable installations depends

on the type of error and the installation Itself (number of usable return leads).
There are no instruments available today which enable us to locate the trouble
spot precisely. Furthermore,•we are unable with the presently known method to
pinpoint the spot especially when there exists a large contact resistance between
the two conductors or between one and an electrical conducting metal shield. To
eliminate the contact resistance, we use a cable burning instrument capable of H2
sending a properly dimensioned current, through the conductors. After this has
been done, we should have a contact resistance of less than .1 OHM. Figure 18 Pinpointing Trouble Spot Through Three Point Method (Graf).
To pinpoint cable trouble spots, we can choose among a multitude of Instru-

ments. The bridge method or plus-reflection method is used often. However, we
must distinguish between a preliminary measurement used to identify the kind of
trouble (see section 5.4) and the actual pinpointing. The following formula prevails for wiper positions L., Lb, and At switch
In cases where the conductor is not broken, but a short between conductors or positions a, b, and c, when the bridge is balanced.
ground exists, we can pinpoint the trouble spot either through a voltage com- Lb — La
parison method as in Figure 17 or by employing a three point method. Two X =L
auxiliary wires H1 and H2 are necessary for both methods. The following formula Lc— La .
'prevails if values V„ and Vb on the voltmeter V are obtained for switch positions X corresponds to the trouble spot location for a conductor with length L.
a and b.
X -7L
v. In cases where the conductor is not broken, but a short between Conductors or
ground exists, we can use the bridge method according to Murray (also called
Va+Vb wiper method). It is necessary to have equal return leads (same (ength and
X corresponds to the trouble spot location for a conductor with length L. How- cross section as the faulty conductor), or an auxiliary cable (parahel-cable).
ever, the formula holds true only if V. and Vb was read off at equal currents for When using equal return leads, we adjust the wiper such that no c,-rent flows
through the galvanometer G. The following formula prevails for the balanced
switch position a and b. To accomplish equal currents, the variable resistor "Fl"
was used. bridge:
La
The three point method according to Graf as in Figure 18 requires a balanced X 2L
bridge (no current flows through the galvanometer G) at all three switch La + Lb ,
positions a, b, and c.
ere
t •ro' • • te • I.'
611. 2 1 3 (4 )
16 20
•
The trouble spot location X at noise minimum or no noise in the telephone
X corresponds to the locetion of the trouble spot. However, if the length and receiver T is as follows:
the cross-section of the auxiliary leads are different from the faulty conductor,
Lb
we must use the formula:- • X=2L-
Lh La -F. Lb
L Given that the capacities nearly equal the conductors length. Using the same
q
q method, we can find X with the help of a capacitance bridge according to
equation:
Where Lc, = the length of the auxiliary lead converted to the cross-section of Cx
the faulty conductor X L
L„ = Legth of the auxiliary lead C
Q = Cross-Section of the faulty conductor
q = Cross-Bection of the Auxiliary lead CD MI
and substitute it into the above equation for 2L.
6. Factors Affecting Systems Using Thermodouples
M.
In cases where the conductor is broken but no shorts between conductors or 6.1 External Resistance en C
against ground exist (well insulated) we can use the AC bridge to pinpoint the
trouble spot (see Figure 20). Thermal EMF's are often measured directly with a d'Arsonval movement (see a 19
• section 3.1). The indicated variable depends on the internal resistance RI of the
instrument and the total external resistance that is R, Rc Rw. Rt = Resist- aid
ance of the extension wire with compensating resistor. a Ro
l
Meter movement calibration requires observance of the external resistance.
O MI
Normally millivolt meters are calibrated according to DIN 43 709 such that the
indicated variable is correct when R, Rc Rw equals 20 OHM's.
An indication error appears when the external resistance 1=1,, deviates from Rt 74 in
Rc Rw which has been accounted for during calibration. (see section 5.2). The
indication error can be calculated as follows:
Vehould—Vindicated All + tIFIc + .114w M
Vindicated RI + Rt 'ARt Rc .119c Rw Z
Vanecia refers to the. thermal EMF (respective temperature) shich should have
been indicated and Vindicated the actual indicated thermal EMF given that the m
resistances of the thermocouple, the compensating extension leads and the
extension wires deviated by the factors ARt, ARc, and .11:1w. m
ThUs if the external resistance is 'smaller. (larger) than the amount calibrated ✓ ou
Into the instrument, the indicated thermal EMF Vindicated is larger (smaller) r
Figure 19 Pinpointing Trouble Spot through method by Murray (Wiper Method). than the thermal EMF Vol ,de. The larger the internal resistance Ri of the in- so
strument, the smaller the effect on the indication.
Therefore, millivolt Instruments for temperature measurement, control, etc. should x4
have a high internal resistance to eliminate the aforementioned influences caused 7. id
by corrosion or damages to the thermocouple or ambient temperature fluctuations
affecting the extension leads. On the other hand, millivolt instruments should 111
have a high degree of Indication response or short meter movement adjustment
times. Short adjustment times, however, are dependent on the power factor
which is converted in the meter movement. Both requirements — high degree
of indication response and high Internal resistance — cannot be met, thus, a
compromise has to be found.
The maximum error caused by. ambient temperature fluctuation can be estimated
if the resistance adjustments have been made according to section 5.2 as follows:
Measure the maximum temperature fluctuations affecting the thermocouple (ob-
serve the thermocouples immersion length), the compensating leads and the
extension wires at normal operating conditions. The resistance changes caused Ia
by these fluctuations can be calculated from the tolerances given in Tables 1 F
a
Figure 20 Pinpointing Trouble Spot through an A.C. Bridge through 3 according to DIN 43 710, the tolerances for compensating extension
OOP2.39 (e) i /2 0 • •
leads according to DIN 43 713 and the tolerances for copper extension wires Thermocouple Iron-Constantan Chromel-Alumel Platinum Rhodium
given in Table 7. The indication error is then calculated by inserting the resist- •Platinum
ance changes in the above formula. .........."•-........... Ref. Temp. Ref. Temp. Ref. Temp.
The indication error is very small when using iron-constantan or chromel-alumel
thermocouples and does not need calculations even when the resistance adjust- 113 In °C 0° C 20° C 50° C 0° C 20° C 50° C 0° C 20° C 50° C
ment has been made at ambient temperatures. For platinum rhodium-platinum
or shielded thermocouples, however, it is essential to estimate the indicator -200 1,78 1,83 1,86
error. -100 1,26 1,29 1,32
Compensating pre-amplifiers should be used if the external resistance is larger 0 1,00 0,97 0,95 1,00 1,00 1,03 1,00 • 1,04 1,15
than 20 OHM's or the temperature fluctuations change the resistances of the 100 0,94 0,96 0,98 . 0,96 0,96 0,99 0,77 0,80 0,88
thermocouple or extension leads drastically. Compensating pre amplifiers measure 0,76
200 0,92 0,95 0,96 0,99 0,99 1,01 0,66 0,70
the thermal EMF's practically wetness, therefore, no external resistance adjust-
ment is needed (see section 3.2). 300 0,92 0,95 0,96 0,96 0,96 0,99 0,61 0,64. 0,70
400 0,92 0,95 0,96 0,95 0,95 0,98 0,59 0,61 0,68
8.2 Internal Resistance 500 0,90 0,92 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,96 0,57 0,59 0,65
600 0,87 0,90 0,92 0,94 0,94 0,96 0,55 0,57 0,63
The internal resistance of a meter movement affects the indicated variable if the 0,56 0,61
700 0,82 0,84 0,86 0,95 0,95 0,98 0,53
resistance changes with the instruments temperature. This error factor has to
be stated on the scale of the instrument according to VDE 0410 "Regeln fur 800 0,77 0,79 0,81 0,98 0,98 1,00 0,51 0,54 0,59
elektrische Met3instrumente" (Guidelines for Electrical. Measuring Instruments) 900 1,00 1,00 1,03 0,50 0,52 0,57
and DIN 43 709. ' • 1000 1,03 1,03 1,05 0,48 0,51 0,56
Compensating pre• amplifiers convert the thermal EMF into a proportional DC 1100 1,05 1,05 1,08 0,47 0,49 0,54
current. If the current is used to deflect the meter movement internal resistance 1200 .1,10 1,10 1,12 0,47 0,49 0,54
changes will not affect the indication. 0,47 0,49 0,54
1300
1400 0,47 0,49 0,54
8.3 Temperature of Reference Junction 0,54
1500 0,47 0,49
The thermal EMF is always dependent on the temperature of the reference 1600 0,47 0,49 0,54
junction. This temperature is called reference temperature and is denoted as OR.
If the junction temperature 0.1 deviates from On when measuring a thermal EMF Table- 10 Factor C depending on' he process tempera ure OP and type of
with a compensating pre •amplifier we find the actual Indicated thermal EMF thermocouple at reference temperature Oa. Thermocouples according
to be: to DIN 43 710,
Vindicated = Vshould K ( - f}J )
= Thermal EMF which should be indicated 'if OR ()%1
Normally we find that those millivolt instruments used to indicate. temperature
K = Factor depending on the type of thermocouple and reference temperature. have .a temperature scale. These are calibrated such that the indication is accurate
K is measured in mV/degree and Is shown In Table. 9. This table aides to after resistance adjustment has been made and junction OJ is equal to reference
calculate the thermal EMF change Vindicated - Vshotild which exists when refer- temperature OR = 0, 20 or 50° C. If there is a deviation between OJ and
ence temperature deviates from junction temperature.' lie, we find the actually indicated temperature to - be:
•
illndicated = C ( 1In - (1'.1 )
Reference Temperature II-J in °C
Thermocouple Nhould is the temperature which should be indicated if OJ
0° C 20° C 50° C 100' C The factor C (without dimension) depends on the type of thermocouple, process OP
and the reference temperature OR. Table 10 shows the' factors C which aid in
Iron-Constantan 0,052 0,053 0,054 0,055 estimating the indication change (temperature change) if junction and reference
0,040 0,040 0,041 . 0,041 temperature deviate. For millivolt instruments with temperature scales, we find
Chromel-Alumel
the indicated temperature - O Indicated smaller (larger) as 00..id if the junction
Platinumrhodium-Platinum 0,0056 0,0060 0,0065 0,0074 temperature 0 J is larger (smaller) than the reference temperature On which was
accounted for during calibration of the instrument. This indication error can be
Table 9 Factor K in mV/degree depend ng on the reference temperature 1.1,1 eliminated however, by turning the zero adjustment to set the indicator to the
and type of Thermocouple. Thermocouples according to DIN 43 710 temperature found to be at the junction. This must be done by shortening the
DIP z, ( 18/2. • • •
"w and riFITD are temperature coefficients of the extension wire and. the RTD.
thermocouple input terminals. Yet to indicate correctly, the thermocouple or the Ro is the nominal resistance of the RTD (I. e. 100 OHM's for Pt 100). The factor
compensating extension wires must be connected directly to the instrument ter- aw
minals. This cannot be done easily in industrial applications, 1 for platinum RTD and copper extension wires.
"RTD
To eliminate the fluctuations of the junction, either an electronic ambient tem- aw
perature compensation or a reference thermostat must be used. The ambient = .65 for nickel RTD's and copper extension wires.
temperature compensation (Figure 6) utelizes a bridge circuit which creates a "RTD
bridge diagonal voltage proportional to the temperature change on the junction. Rw.should
The compensation units are matched. to a specific thermocouple. The polarity
The factor — .1 if a platinum RTD is used and the instrument is call-
Ro
must be observed when hooking up the thermocouple. These compensators can brated for 10 OHM's according to DIN 43 709.
be either built into the instrument or be housed separately.
A two wire copper conductor with a length of 420 mm and a cross-section of
The compensating extension leads must be hooked directly to the terminals for 1.5 square mm has a resistance of approximately 10 OHM's (see Table 6).
built-in ambient temperature compensators. A 1 degree Indication error results from a 10 degree temperature variation when
The Instrument must be mounted such that the terminals do not have different the above conductor serves as the extension wire for the circuit in Figure 12
temperatures, as this would create large errors. and a platinum 100 OHM RTD is used. However, only a .2 degree error is
The ,reference thermostat (Figures 7, 15, and 16) contains a reference thermo- caused when a platinum 500 OHM RTD Is used instead of the platinum 100 RTD.
couple which must always be matched to the process thermocouple. The refer- The indication error caused by temperature fluctuations on the extension wire
ence thermocouple is kept at a known and constant temperature. Again, the can be eliminated completely if the 3/4 bridge in Figure 12 consisting of R2, RI
therniostat can be built in or housed separately If it is housed separately, it and R4 Is placed extremely close to the sensing spot (I. e. mounting It into the
contains 6 reference thermocouples. The compensating extension leads must be connection head). Such an installation makes It possible to mount the constant
hooked directly to the terminals for built-in thermostats. current source also close to the sensing spot.. However, if the temperature
The reference temperature according to DIN 43 710 should be at 50° C. However, variations are large at the sensing spot, it is better to mount the constant current
some process needs require different temperatures. Therefore, the thermostat . source close to or inside the instrument as in Figure 21. The extension wires do
can be equipped with reference temperatures of 50 or 60 or .100°C. not need a resistance adjustment if a compensating pre-amplifier is used.
Three wire RTD circuits as in Figure 13 compensate the indication error caused
by the temperature fluctuations and thus the error is .smaller than for two wire
7. Factors Affecting Systems Using RTD circuits given equal extension wire lengths.
Resistance Thermometers Two wire RTD circuits with additional loops as in Figure 14 eliminate. the Indi-
cation error almost totally.
7.1 Self Heating
The current flowing through the RTD causes a selfheating error. This error 7.3 Internal Wire Resistance
depends on the construction of the RTD and the temperature exchange proper- The Internal wire resistance that is the resistance of the wires between the
ties between it and the material to be measured. platinum resistor itself and the terminals in the connection head can cause an
The current should not exceed 10 mA for commercial RTD's according to indication error for two wire RTD circuits.
DIN 43 709. This is especially true when high temperatures are to be measured and the
.The current flowing through the RTD' is always smaller at all points throughout connection wires are either nickel or chromnickel.
the range than the nominal current when constant current sources are used to
The internal wire resistance can be accounted for during the resistance adjust-
feed the bridge. Constant voltage sources are used also but it is important to
ment of the extension wire if the RTD has three wires at the connection head
calculate the maximum current flowing through the RTD (I. e. 5 mA or 10 mA) terminals. Resistance adjustment is made according to Figure 22 and afterwards
at all points of the range. the extension wires are switched around.
7.2 Lead Resistance

Deviations of the extension lead resistance cause faulty indication for 2 wire 8. Installation Considerations
RTD's (see Figure 12). These errors occur at all times even if a compensating
preamplifier measures the voltage accross the bridge. The error is calculated 8.1 General Installation Rules
for deviations between the median temperature 19w. actual and the temperature
The signal created by either a thermocouple or resistance thermometer cor-
should which the instrument was calibrated for as follows: responds alsways to the temperature of ,the sensor. Therefore, it is absolutely
aw R ,, should necessary to choose a sensing spot where the sensor has the exact temperature
X (1).‘4, should — actual) to be measured. Large errors result if the sensor location is poorly chosen even
"RID Ro
if precision instrumentation is used.
a 02,39 (.6) 20 •
RTO To keep the error small, it is important to have a high degree of heat exchange
between material and sensor, a small degree of heat dissipation from the sens-
ing spot (i. e. through a protection tube), and a small degree of heat radiation
CONSTANT CURRENT SOURCE on the sensor. These conditions are achieved by choosing a thin protection tube
and a large immersion depth of the sensor. The protection tube and the connec-
tion head should be thermally insulated expecially if the head is in the open.
Heat dissipation from the sensor can be kept at a minimum by using an inter,
EXTENSION WIRES mediate tubing with a small heat exchange factor. A shiny piece of metal mounted
(NOT ADJUSTED)
around the sensing spot will reduce the influence of heat radiation.
8.2 Measurements in Gases

COMPENSATING PRE-AMPLIFIERS
Large errors are caused when the immersion length of the sensor is too small.
An immersion length of 10 or 15 times for non flowing gases, and for flowing
gases 5 to 10 times of the protection tube 'diameter is recommended.
CONTROLLER
INDICATOR The larger the flow velocity of the gas, the greater the intensity of the heat
RECORDER
exchange between sensor and gas. Therefore, the sensor should be located at
a point where the flow velocity of the gas is largest.
Figure 21 Bridge Resistor and Constant Current Source Inside Connection Head Corners where the gas does not flow are unsuitable as sensing spots.
of the RTD
Sensors which are used for high temperatures should be installed vertically if
possible. Horizontally installed thermocouples need to be supported which can
cause errors through heat dissipation.
•
It is possible to estimate the error effects when the conditions are changed
drastically (i. e. sensing spot, Immersion length, etc.) and the results .are com-
pared..
8.3 Measurements in Fluids and Vapors
The largest errors for temperature measurements in fluids and vapors are caused
by too small an immersion depths- and poor heat insulation at the sensor loca-
tion. According to DIN 43 763 (metal protection tubes) and then following in-
stallation rules satisfies the immersion depths for contact thermocouples.
The flow velocity is usually large enough in pipelines guaranteeing a high
degree of heat exchange between sensor and fluid or vapor. The sensor should
be installed on a slant and positioned such that the fluid or vapor touches the
element (thermocouple junction or platinum resistor) first. '
RTD
8.4 Measurements on Solid Materials

Thermocouples without protection tubes or shielded thermocouples are used
EXTENSION WIRE
most often to sense the temperature on solid materials. It is important to ensure
proper thermal contact either through spring tension or soldering between
material and sensor.
COMPENSATING RESISTOR A thermocouple port is required when temperature is sensed in solid materials.
The port size causes errors depending on the relation between size of port and
object to be measured and heat exchange characteristics of the object and
sensor.
It is good policy to keep the total thermocouple at an equal temperature inside
Figure 22 Resistance Adjustment Considering the Internal Wire Resistance the solid material.
062).39 (a. )
, 201 /
72. 19 • • RESISTOR-CONDENSER
•
CONTACT COMBINATION
A
VOLTAGE SOURCE
L INDUCTIVE LOAD
9. Safety Precautions for Contactors R RESISTOR
9.1 Creation and Effect of Surge Voltages

FIGURE 23 tO
The voltage existing when switching an electromagnetic relay contactor in
circuits with resistive or resistive-capacitative loads is not larger than the applied
voltage. No surge voltages exist in such circuits during the switching process. c
Current and voltage peaks, however, are created on the contacts which can RESISTOR-CONDENSER
3, ml
cause Radio interferences. CONTACT COMBINATION
Circuits with resistive-inductive load can create surge voltages on the contactors
during the switching process. These surge voltages can be a multiple of the
applied voltage. Sparks can be observed at the contacts during the switching
causing Radio interference and especially quick wear of the contacts. These nl
surge voltages can be reduced by additional circuitry. VOLTAGE SOURCE L INDUCTIVE LOAD
).
9.2 Resistor-Condenser Combinations
R RESISTOR
A contact protection and longer contact life is warranted by either connecting
a resistor-condenser combination parallel to the contacts (see Figure 23) or ;c
parallel to the resistive-inductive load, i.e. contactor (see Figure 24). The micro- FIGURE 24
farad capacitance of the condenser should not be smaller than the current in O
Ampere if at all possible. Yet, contact sparks are reduced markedly with smaller
condensers. The resistance of the resistor should approximately be the same as
that of the load.
511
CONTACT DIRECTION OF CURRENT
M ps
r Igo
9.3 Protective Diode r
The surge voltages caused by switching resistive-inductive loads (i. e. contactors) CO in
in DC current circuits can be markedly reduced through the use of protective DC SOURCE L INDUCTIVE LOAD n
diodes, (Germanium or silizium diodes). The diode is connected in parallel and x
its polarity as in Figure 25. The selection of the proper diode should be made s
in accordance with the manufacturers specifications. R RESISTOR
▪ M
PROTECTIVE DIODE
FIGURE 25
Figure 23 1
. Contact Protection Through RC Combination
Figure 24 I
Figure 25 Contact Protection Through Diode
GHH
OTOMMONME
GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft shin
• 0.9,2.113 Operating instructions 1560 a
measuring + controlling rely on Joens
ORFA.REELER
• '20 1
100 - 200
111! 1111111 1111111111 , 11
NORFA Controller Type RN
The Dial glass is coated on both sides

with an antistatic, reflection-reducing layer.
The coating will. Withstand wiping and is
waterproof.
The glass must only be cleaned with a
clean cloth. Teepol, soapy water or spirit
can be used for cleaning.
Please read , through this operating

instruction carefully.
0
No 2960
5.73
SHIM
SITIRERIWE
M.TM.K A ktienoeuelischaft
Blatt
Page
1. General 4
2. Location 4
• 3. Mounting
3.1. Flushmounting
3.2. Surface mounting 5
4
4
3.3. Installation and Balancing of Line Resistance 5

3.4. Connection
4. Service 5
4.1. Blocking during Transport 6
4.2. Adjustment of Zero
4.3. Adjustment of Set Point 7 •
4.4. Adjustment of Impulse Duration 7
4.5. Starting Operation 8
5. Maintenance and Chedcs
6. Dispatch 9
Illustrations on pages 5,10, 11 and 12
l
O
No 2960
5.73
2
F. 0
15 0.4.3(¢) 317
1. General For Norfa controllers with microswitches instead of mercury tubes the
mounting position is stated on the scale. This statement refers to the angle
For a detailed description of application, technical data, design, and that the panel forms to the horizontal.
operation of the Norfa controller please refer to Leaflet RNe.
A quick-mounting frame is available for Norfa controllers type RN. For
Norfa controllers are provided for flush mounting (with open terminals the installation of this item into panels please refer to Operating Instructions
or closed terming' box) or for surface mounting. The dimensions of the No. 1570.
different design types and of the panel cut-out can be seen from the
drawings on pages 10 to .12.
3.2. Surface Mounting
The List of Spare Parts, Leaflet No. 1561; gives the order numbers for each
single component part of the controller. This eaflet is supplied free of Controllers for surface mounting are delivered with open terminal box and
charge on special request. two supports (brackets) for fastening at a wall.
C
The Serial Number of the instrument must be stated when entering into
any correspondence with the supplier regarding a certain controller. This 3.3. Installation and Balancing of Line Resistance m
number is noted in the right bottom corner of the scale. Previous to any Operating Instructions No. 1543 apply for the installation and the balancing
transportation of the controller the hints of Sect. 4.1. (Transportation) and of the line resistance. These instructions are attached to the controller. 0
of Sect. 6 (Dispotch) should be paid special attention to. -n
-n
3A. Connection z
2. Location Connections should be made in accordance with the attached wiring diagram. C
The location of the Norfa controller should comply with the following Good earthing is essential in any case. z
demands: Zero adjustment (Sect. 4.2) should be made at controllers with moving coil
Ambient temperature between —10 and. + 50° C element before the element is finally connected (usually at terminals 1 and 2). 0
0
No direct heat or cold radiation on the instrument • Cr
Surrounding atmosphere free from oily or acideous vapours 4. Service • _.,
If necessary mounting in a cabinet with separate ventilation or even All adjusting devices of the controller (set point, zero adjustment, impulse
a ;g
in a separate room. duration) are secured against stripping the thread At turning over the final
No continuous severe shocks which might impair the accuracy of the position the motional transmission is stopped. —
• Tn
instrument. Commercial rubber-metal disks or foam-rubber washers may m
be used for dampening means. Set point adjustment must not be made when the yellow warning sign in
a cut-out in the middle of the scale is visible (see Fig. 2 and Sect. 4.3).
3. Mounting
Norfa-controllers are sensitive electro-mechanical instruments. As all elec-
trical measuring instruments they should be handled carefully.
3.1. Flushmounting
The mercury tubes of Norfa controllers only operate satisfactorily if .the
instruments are flushmounted in a vertical panel. Deviations of ± 2° are
admissible. Greater deviations can easily be noticed with the bare eyes.
When the controller is pushed into the panel cut-out from the front, both
the mounting brackets are hung into the supporting studs and the bolts are Yellow mark visible: Yellow mark not visible:
then fastened to hold the instrument fixed in a straight position.
If a terminal box for the controller is furnished, this box with cover is No transport! Transport!
removed and fastened again when the controller is mounted in the operating No adjustments! Adjust!
poSition. Ng. 1 Blocking during Transport of Norfo Controllers (Details see sect. 4.1)
•
0 , 9 ,111R(gD 417
4.1. Blocking during Transport •

Controllers with crossed-coil element do not require a zero adjustment, as
the measuring element has no mechanical directive force when de-energized.
No mechanical blocking device is provided. To avoid damages of the The pointer thus will indicate any value on the scale.
measuring and sensing element, only the controller motor need be stopped
at a time, when the pointer can move freely underneath the sensing segment.
The scale is provided with a small cut-out, where a yellow warning sign 4.3. Adjustment of Set Point
appears during each sensing period to indicate a dangerous position of the
pointer for transportation of the instrument (Fig. 1). Before any transportation The set point adjusters are arranged at the right and at the left in the
upper part of the front frame.
of the controller is carried out, special attention must be paid to this sign
disappearing behind the scale and thus being not visible. Eventually the No adjustment of the set pointer must be made during the sensing process
motor is switched on by supplying mains voltage to the terminals u and v, as the pointer might be damaged by being dragged along on the fixed
until the yellow sign has completely disappeared behind the scale. counter-stop. The fine edges of the pointer could never stand such a
treatment. Furthermore the pointer could be pressed against the stale
support if the controller is furnished with step arrangements below the set
4.2. Adjustment of Zero point.
The screw for zero adjustment is arranged in the'middle of the lower part The sensing process is indicated by a yellow warning sign in a cut-out in the
of the front frame. middle of the scale. Immediately after the sensing process the yellow sign
Before an adjustment is made, the measuring voltage source must be disappears behind the scale. Adjustment of the set pointer should then be
ti eti Osil e Se Buenly

disconnected. The terminals of the element must be shorted. The pointer should made without any difficulties.
be able to move freely 'underneath the sensing segment. If the yellow For controllers with several and further apart switching steps, all steps below
—warning sign is visible in the scale cut-out the motor is switched on until the or above the set point should still stay within the scale range. The set
sign disappears. pointer should only be adjusted until the first step has reached the scale
The .scale value to which the pointer is adjusted depends on the type of initial value and the last step the scale final value. The same applies for
voltage source and the additions to the controller (compensating circuit, limit controllers with opposing arrangement of the sensing segments and for
thermostat). double controllers.
If the d. c. voltage source shows the initial value "zero" independently from For limit controllers with synonymous arrangement of the sensing segments
the surrounding temperature the pointer is adjusted to the scale value zero. the range between the set pointers amounts to 0 ... 30% of the measuring
range. If this range is set out for a certain minimum or maximum value,
For a thermocouple, the reference point of which is subject to fluctuations e.g. 200/0 to 500/0, the pointers cannot, be adjusted otherwise.
of the surrounding temperature, the pointer is adjusted to the medium•value
of the ambient temperature. If the reference point of the thermocouple is
kept at a constant temperature value (e. g. 50°C) by means of a thermostat, 4.4. Adjustment of Impulse• Dpration
adjustment of the pointer on the scale should be made to 50°C. Impulse duration is adjusted by means 'of the setting screws I and II and is
If the reference point of a thermocouple is subject to changing surrounding indicated at the lateral scales.
'temperatures but these are compensated by means of a compensating circuit The determinative factor for the duration and the repetition of the impulses
the pointer is adjusted to the scale initial value e.g. 20°C. is the sensing period of the controller. Usually this amounts to 15 seconds.
A complete sensing period corresponds to an impulse duration of 1000/0
Sometimes scale initial value (e. g. O'C) and reference temperature of the
(continuous contact giving). Thus a controller with a sensing period of 15
compensating circuit (e.g. 50"C) are not the same. In this case the reference
seconds and an adjusted impulse duration of 20% would give an On-impulse
temperature is marked on the scale by a red mark being designated "0" of 3 seconds duration once in 15 seconds.
(mechanical zero). The pointer is then adjusted to this red mark.
The limitation of the adjusting range to 5 ... 90% is given by the time
For all controllers with built-in compensating circuit the mains must be • required by the tube for its mechanical actuation.
disconnected before zero adjustment is made. An "A" on the scale of the
controller indicates this built-in compensating circuit. For controllers with sensing periods below 15 seconds, the smallest possible
impulse duration being obtainable by means of a mercury tube amounts to
At separate compensating circuits (type A 6, ZA 6) the mains supply of the 0,8 seconds approx. The percent value corresponding to this small impulse
box must be connected. duration is not especially designated on the impulse duration scales.
0.9240) 5_17
S
--- 10---
•- .• - •
If an adjustment of the impulse duration is made at a controller which is out
of operation, it might happen that the impulse duration pointer cannot be For a check of the switching elements the motor is moved until the release
turned further in one direction when a certain scale value is reached. This ball of the checked switching element assumes a position at the highest
occurs when the cam of the adjusting disk hits the resting release ball thus point of the cam disk and thus the relevant spring blade reaches its greatest
causing an increased mechanical resistance. lateral deviation. The switching lever can then move the mercury tube to the
final position without any difficully. If the fever is lifted the tube must
If the controller. is operating, the ball moves continuously and the meeting return immediately to the other final position.
of ball and cam is only felt as a hardly noticeable stopping during the
adjustment. The mechanical properties of the moving coil element are checked when
The adjustment of the impulse duration to the optimum percentage value the case is mounted and the terminals shorted.
should be settled by experimenting.
An inclination of the instrument in several directions for 5% should not
A simple adjusting principle for On-Off controllers with intermittent contact
cause a balancing fault of more than 1,50/0 f. s. d. The fault caused by
giving for the control of an electric heating consists in finding the "critical"
adjustment first. friction is ascertained by slightly knocking at the case when the pointer has
come to rest. Generally the deviation should amount to 0,10/0 of the length
The set pointer being set to the required value, the impulse duration is of scale or less.
adjusted until the pointer just reaches the set point.
The optimum impulse duration should be above the critical value. The Crossed-coil elements should be checked in the same way, and resistance
required addition is a pure empirical value and depends on the disturbing transmitter and measuring voltage must be connected. The pointer con then
influences. Usually an adjustment to a value 5 to 10°/0 above the critical be adjusted to an optional value on the scale.
value should be sufficient for optimalizing control.
The important factor for the adjustment of the impulse duration of an Open-
Neutral-Closed controller with servomotor or motor valve is the adjusting 6. Dispatch
speed of the motor. Too small impulse •durations cause a too slow decline
period of disturbances; at too long impulse durations great deviations of The mains voltage of a controller must be disconnected at a time when the
the controlled variable might occur. yellow warning sign is- not visible in the scale cut-out (Fig. 1), as the blocking
for transportation is only effective at that time (see Sect. 4.1).
CS. Starting Operation
The controller is dispatched in a special packing case made of styropor.
Principally Norfa controllers should only be put into operation in their.
prescribed operating position, even if only test operations are made with This case is suitable for instruments with and without quick-mounting frame.
the instruments. Filling pieces are available for eventual gaps, also at subsequent order.
This may become necessary if a controller has been delivered with mount-
When the mains voltage is switched on the mercury tubes assume — during
ing frame, but shall be dispatched without it.
the first sensing period — a position of the pointer. The further course of
switching is to be seen from the functional flow diagram of the drawing.
At the dispatch of single instruments, the controller is additionnally wrappend
in a case of cardboard. For several instruments being dispatch in a larger
5. Maintenance and Checks box, eventual gaps must be fillecl with woodwool or the like to avoid
shifting within the box.
If the dtritroller is handled carefully it need no regular maintenance. After' • -
some years of operation a re-greasing of the bearings with special oil, e. g. Packing for dispatch overseas is made by following special instructions.
type "Lusin 12" is required. The bearings of controllers of the date of
production from September 1961 on have been greased with Molycote paste. The box should be designated "Attention, fragile". A transportation insurance
A further greasing is not required at oll. is recommended.
This is the best opportunity to check the mechanical function of the different Order No. of packing case: 0 860 447 000
component parts. For this purpose the motor is moved slowly by hand. The
chopperbar should reach securely the lowest position purely by its own Order No. of filling pieces: 0 860 458 000
weight. (2 pieces ore required)
-0
15 0.9043(e) 642
Fig. 2 Design with open. terminals
liBti OSII GSG BUOMIV

Fig. 4 Design with terminal box
192
96
'
98
270
El erliT lull] -
1.4 at
" 14 0.
IF' cle
El Atazilim
i •ICI a —
rol • ,i
1._
nri ,-i,
Fig. 3 Drawing. Panel cut-out 186- 'X92-1, DIN 43 700 •„,
1:1 Eqici•
Dimensions in mm a r
i9.5 Drawing. Panel cut-out
Dimensions in mm
GUTEHOFFNUNGSH OTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K" Aktiengesellschaft
Blatt
8,4
Fig. 6 Norfa Controller for Surface Mounting, Drawing
Dimensions in mm
All illustrations, dimensions and other data

are diven without commitment.
&1-
-J
vr•,I
40
le 2960
5.73
11.
OHM
STIRIERINUE
G UTE HOFFNUNG SH OTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft Blatt
0.3,4.15
PHONIX LIQUID LEVEL. GAUGES
General surview :
1)Function and description of the instrument
2) Application
3)Installation
4) Commissioning
5) Ball-check in the shut-off valves
6) Maintenance and service instructions
7) Choice of type, accessories
8) Order-data.
1) Function and description of the instrument
There are two types of PHONIX liquid level gauges available :

a) liquid level gauges with reflexion glass
b) liquid level gauges with transparent glass.
The reflexion glass of the liquid level gauges reflects the
arriving light-rays in such a manner that they are absorbed
by the liquid zone which, therefore, appears darker. But in
the gas or steam zones there is a complete reflection of the
ligth, so that the empty space appears bright. For this pur-
pose the reflexion glass is provided with grooves on that
part which is contacted by the liquid.
Transparent glasses on the other hand allow a perfect vision •
through the inspection slot of the liquid level gauge. The
arriving of light on two sides enable the observer to read
the exact liquid level. Every inspection slot of a transpa-
rent liquid level gauge is, therefore, provided with two
glasses in order to guarantee the transparency.
Both types consist of the glass-holder or backpart and the
coverlid. In the backpart are incorporated the channel for
the liquid and the touch-surface for the'glasses. The cover,
is fixed with bolts on both sides of the liquid's channel
assuring that glasses and gaskets are fixed absolutely tight
after the tightening of the nuts.
Except for special arrangement all liquid level gauges are
normally provided on top and bottom with a shut-off valve
which connects the tanicwith the liquid level gauge. Both
valves have to lockup the liquid level gauge against the
tank.
13) it
Un - 2
PHONIX ARMATUREN-WERKE BREGEL GMBH

FRANKFURT/M-RODELHEIM
No 7960
5.73
GHH
STORK/NM
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft matt
PHONIX LIQUID LEVEL GAUGES
Reflexion Type Transparent Type
3
• 5
• 2
6
Components
1 = glassholder or ba•ckpart
2 = coverlid
3 = glass
4 = gasket of It
5 = asbestos cushion
6 = bolts
7 = nuts
The shut-off valves are provided with a quick-action-trim

which gives the facility to open and to close the valves
in very short time. The corresponding closing angle is 120°.
• For safety purpose in case of glass-damage, the ball-check

inside the shut-off valves stops a possible escape of the
liquid. At the bottom of the liquid level gauge is installed
a drain valve for discharging.
2) Application
Normally PHONIX liquid level gauges are produced in carbon

steel, the stop valves- of forged carbon steel with renewable
internals of 13 %chromium steel. This arrangementcan be used
for all liquids, gases and all kinds of steams except for
aggressive medias, where other materials like 1.4571, 1.4541,
0
Nickel, Monel, Hastelloy, Titanium, Aluminium or even synthe-
1,4 tic materials must be applied. it is also possible to line
the level gauges with rubber. Transparent level gauges might
also be lined with lead.
76
' For reasons of safety the glasses ougth not to be charged
with temperatures of more than 500°F especially if the liquid
• level gauges are installed in open air. If there are higher
temperatures is is necessary to insert mica-shields or a
o complete mica-set. - 3 - . 1
No 290
5.73
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNG SH OTTE STERK RADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft — Blatt
PHUNIX LIQUID LEVEL GAUGES .

SL=31====
For temperatures below Zero a frost protection acc. to

data-sheet TK 421 - Plexitherm must be provided that will
be fixed on the glass in order to read clearly the level
inside the gauge in case of fodmation of ice or insulation.
For temperatures of more .than 229F below Zero must be used
antifreezing materials.
• 3) Installation
PHONIX liquid level gauges are manufactured according to

the specifications of the client. In case that the tank
connections (center-to-center connection) correspond to.
those of the level gauge it can be installed immediately.
In any case one must care that the gauge is not tilted
or deformed.
4) Commissionin&
To avoid internal stress - especially with hot liquids -

the liquid level gauge has to be warmed up slowly. This
action is not necessary if the liquid is at ambient tem-
peratures.
• The warming up of the liquid level gauge has to take place

as follows : open the drain valve and the upper shut-off
valve just a little, so that the ball-check remains in its
position and stays out of action. In this manner the liquid
level gauge will be warmed up slowly to the operating tem-
perature. During the warming-up process the lower shut-off
valve keeps closed.
If there are hydrocarbon products or other dangerous liquids

the drain valve should be opened only in short intervals to
discharge any condensate formed. For this action one has to
pay great attention. After the warming-up period the drain
valve has to be closed and the lower shut-off valve can be
opened a little in order to enable the liquid to penetrate
inside the level gauge. If there is a clear readable liquid
level both valves can be opened completely.
Liquid level gauges, which are provided with heat tracing
can be warmed up with the tracing tube in the same manner.
LP
•
cn
ci
4cs 2960
5.73
Gang
eirsmssimm
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft elan

ZP'22”=2M:=3:== .
After commissioning a liquid level gauge the lidnuts have

to be tightened up a couple of turns because the gaskets
and the pads settle after a certain period. The tightening.
of the bolts starts in the middle of every inspection slot
and proceeds crosswise right to the ends. The use of a
torque key is recommended and the value of 3,5 mkp should
not be exceeded.
The tightening of the nuts should be done at least twice
or three times in intervals of twenty-four hours starting
right after the warming-up process.
5 The picture beside shows

how tithening should be
carried out.
Endnuts 7, 8. 9, 10
1 should not be screwed
too hard.
Torque setting of
3 3,5 mkp recommended.
7 10
For commissioning of the liquid level gauge please take in

0 consideration : inside of new tanks and pipes or also after
their repairing have contamination like oil and grease or
small particles be deposited on the glasses. To remove these.
obstructions the gauge can be purged shortly. This action
takes place in the same way as the commissioning procedure.
In case of very heavy contamination that cannot be removed
by purging the shut-off valves must get closed. Next the
drain valve has to be opened and the plug at the upper
•
-5-
No 2960
s.73
wmmmun GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft
frontside of the liquid level gauge must be removed. With

a brush that will be introduced through the top plughole
the glasses and the liquid's channel can be cleaned. If
necessary add a grease solvent liquid. After the cleaning
action the plug is replaced in the hole at the top front-
side of the level gauge.
5) Ball-check incorporated
The ball-check is a safety device

inside the shut-off valves of the
PHONIX liquid level gauges. It pre-
vents the escape of steam, gase and
1 liquids out off the level gauge in
case of glass damage when shut-off
valves are completely opened.
Execution and function of the ball-

check are guaranteed as follows :
Under the valve seat there is a ball

of 13 % chromium steel. At the moment
of leakage (glass rupture) the flow
carries along the ball out of the
trough, and places it in front of the
valve seat. A further escape of the
liquid is prevented because the ball
in front of the valve seat remains
seated due to the liquid pressure.
Now the shut-off valves can be closed.
Pay attention during the action of
closing as the ball will be pushed
back and for a moment the passage of
the seat will be open again so that
the liquid is allowed to pass momen-
tarily. After the complete closing
of the shut-off valves the broken
glass can be replaced.
1 = ball check in
action. Commissioning a PHONIX liquid level
gauge whose valves are provided with
2 = ball check at a ball-check one must pay attention
commissioning to the fact that the valves are opend
only about 20 so that the pin at the
ball check not
in` action 6 -
lo 2960
5.73
GHH GUTEHOFFN UNGSH OTTE STERKRADE
•
DTEDfDRDE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft Matt
•PHONIX LIQUID LEVEL GAUGES
at the cone keeps the ball at distance and the liquid en-
ters the level gauge. The shut-off valves can be opened com-
pletely if the pressure compensation has taken place.
Attention ! The ball-check is only effective . with completely
opened shut-off valves and by at least 3 kp/cm2: operating
pressure.
• 6) Maintenance instructions
PHbNIX liquid level gauges should be serviced regularily.

Some liquids e.g. distilled water corrode the glass very
quickly, and for this reason it is necessary to check the
glasses frequently, and ensure that special attention is
given to keeping the glass clean.
Glass chang!s.should
, be done only by trained and skilled
personnel with care and attention;
Glass-change :
Loosen the coverlid and remove it together with the broken
glass and loose packing*. Next the glass bearing surface
of the glassholder and lid have to be cleaned, but pay
attention that the contact surface does not get any damages.
The new packing is to adjust into the backpart.
Before final adjustment spread a graphite/oil mixture on the
contact surfaces. Next place the asbestos cushion together
with the glass into the lid.
Pay attention that right glasses are used (size, quality);
Place the reflecting glass so that the grooves look inside

the liquid's channel direction. The glass shall have in any
direction the same free motion.
Pill up the clearance with asbestos cord to prevent glass
moving. The assembling takes place by passing-through of
the bolts respectively fixing of the nuts. The tightening
ry of the nuts has to be carried out crosswise starting at
In the middle of the inspection slot (see under 4 commissioning)
40
Vo 2960
5.73
6HH
mmmmans
GUTEHOFFNUNGPHOTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft Blatt
ONIX LIQUID LEVEL GAUGES
If a replacement of the
C:60 622--nuts internals of the shut-off
valves is necessary, re-
7/
lsshOlder lease and remove the top
part of the shut-off valves.
The seat has to be removed
"•=1=311"-- --gasket of It by aid of a spanner. The
seat screwed into the body
_glass has to be cleaned.
1:
asbestos The thread of the new
seat needs a film of a
N coverlid graphite/oil mixture or
Molykote and must be
screwed into the body.
bolts
Replacement of cone :
Remove the locking plate
of the cone screwing off
the stem.
Loosen the cone fixation

and remove all loosened
parts (cone, fixation,
and locking plate).
Replacement of the new
parts in reverse order.
After installation of
the top part into the
body, the new joint
should be replaced.
In case of orders for

spare parts it is abso-
lutely necessary to in-
dicate the part nUmber
of the concerning spare
part.
The figure below shows

a shut-off valve,
straight-way type
No 2960
5.73
SIM
YTEYfRNYE GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE STERKRADE
— Blatt
7) Choice of types - Accessories
PHONIX liquid level gauges are produced as reflexion and trans-

parent types. Both models are available with heat tracing, too.
All models can be manufactured with interrupted visibility, i.e.
glasses are installed directly one under the other with space
between. Furthermore, models with non interrupted visibility
can also be offered, that means glasses installed directly one
under the other with a bridge unit that laps over the space
between the different inspection slots.
For transparent level gauges illumination devices are available
in normal, ex-proof and/or water proof execution.
Liquid level gauges with particular arrangement must be indivi-
dually requested.
Illustrations of all types are in our partial catalogue "Liquid
level gauges".
0
03
rn
No 2960
5.73
GHH GUTEHOFFNYNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
SITIMMIERUE
M.TM.K AktiengeselisChatt
71.100 K /NP40
Magnetic Type Level Gauges
..115r6
material
)
i.1 1.45711
2 11.04021
1.0402
• 1 U
4 lAiMgSii
dimensions C
0
a ' 1000
70
CO
U
1000
C
2'75
d 100
275
3
100 U
1375
connection R5/8"
female
drain valve
• 1 K0 2 (TK 4 1 4/ex.—proof)
arrangement
H.5C1.19.14.08.09
liquid :Oil
0 op.press 1 atu
spez.gray. 0,9
temp. 55°
arrangement (for A,8 a.0 possible)
float ,closed (magnetic vertical unled )
flanges ND 20/"1P 40 DIN 2655
07
0
PHONIX ARMATUREN-WERKE BREGEL GMBH
o 2960
5.73
FRANKFURT/M-RODELHEIM
Er-J CZ C-3 BUTE
STER•K•RADE
OFFNUNIBBINUTTE
AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
0.9.4.15 Magnetgesteuerter FlUssigkeitsstandanzeiger

(DBP und Auslandspatente) mit elekir.Kontaktvorrichtungen
Elektr.KontaklverrIchlungen: TK 413 (wlo dargeroleUH 0
71 10 0 K
115
' TK 414 •x.geschOtzt
gisb.75 0 • 4 •14 8
1
Cr
1
ae
CO
to
a
0
2 e_ 0
36
18 0
•
41) O
• Durch VersbrIltin der Anzelgevorrichtung Tell Nr.14

und des Schwimmers Teil Nr.13 urn 90° kann
12
7
0
•
•
to
bellebig nach A,8 oder C ongeerenet wereon !

1310 Best ellung !elite Fragebogen TK 415 fiir •
Hillenentlernung fletriebsmilt el, Spez.DeivIcht, •
Befriebsdruck,Temperatur u. a . A ngaben tHmutzon.
Werkstoff -Tabelle •
DIN- Bez . bz w.Wer ksloff Nr. z
11d
Nr. Normal, Slureleste
Ausliihrung Ausliihrung Plaltchen
1 1.4571 1.4571 sehadlutt
2 1.0112 1.0112
3 1.0112 1.0112
4 1.0112 1.4571
, 5 1.4571
6 1.0112 1.4571
7 1.0308 1.4571 tip/ SAP 10
VI
8 1.0112 1.4571
9 8G 8G
•
9'
10. 65 6S
11 1.4571 1.4571
12 Ms58 Ms58 Am&
13 1.4571 1.4571
14 AlM9S1 AlMg5i It
15 Glas Glas
Sonderausliihrungen der Anzeiger und Absperrvenlile auf Anfrage . — 140 ----
C je nach Mittenentfernung ME= Schautan e St. (brischenma00 aul Wunsch)
Belriebsdruck , 200 350
spersmcht 500 800 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000- 6000
uno remperatur. Gewicht ca. kg
200 13,0 13,6 14,3 15,7 16,7 19,0 21,3 26,0 30,7 35 4 40,1
300 13,5 14,1 14 8 16 2 17,2 19 5 21,8 26 5 31_2 35,9 40y6
400 14,0 14,6 15,3 16,7 1717 20,0 22,_3 27 0 31,7 36,4 41y1_
500 14,5 15,1 1518 1712 18 2 20,5 22,8 27,5 32,3 36,9 41,6
600 15,0 15,6 16,3 17,7 18,7 21, 0 23,3 28,0 32,7 . 37,4 . 42,1
700 ., 16,1-16 8 18,2 19,2 21 5 218 _ 28 5 33.2 42,6
A bsperrorgane NW 20 - ND 40 s lehe TH 416
Verwendungsbereich:
Nenndruck 40 nach DIN 2401 AblaOventil 556.19.34.08.001-1.0402 } SpindelgewInd•
Anschlurl 556 19.59.08 001-1.4571 innenliegend
Der Schwimmer dart auch bei der Abnehm• •
om Anzeiger 506 25.34.08 25 • 1 0402 } 5pind•Igewinde
(FrobodrucK) nicht ub•r 40atil birleitAel w•rden.
Muffe R 5/8' 506 25 59.08 25 • 1 4571 auKentiegend
4.63(1)
PHONIX ARMATUREN-WERKE BREGEL G.M.B.H.

N. 3002 FRANKFURT/M-RODELHEIM
6111111 BUTEFIEIFFIVIIIIIYISSINIATTE
EST•ERKSADE AKTIENGESELL8CHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
TK413
Verstellbare etektrische Konfaktvorrichtung
fiir magnetgesteuerte Fttissigkeitsstandanzeiger
100 70
11
Kabelverschraubung
co
Pg 9 co
Halterungen
60
fiir 71. 200 71. 323
Schaltbild
v'
1
L. ._1
aufwitrls schliegen fur 71.100 .4- 71. 120
abwarts of fnen
zum Signalgebet.
0 0-
Regelorgan.oder delta.
Werkstoffe:
abwarts schlierien
Gehause G -AlSiMg
autwa Is cif fnen Einbautei le
N
Ms 58
Stromart : Wechselstrom Hattebitgel 1. 4571
Nennspannung : bts 220V 50Hz Klemmschraube M s 58
max. zutAssige Stromstarke bis 2A - Gewicht : ca 0,7 kg
6.63
PHCINIX ARMATUREN-WERKE BREGEL GMBH

No :i062
GUT_EHOFFNIIIINSSHUTTE
M. TM• K
0 .9.4 .03 Short ,Displacernent Regulator

with Thrust Bearing Protection
- QG
44 a
- 0. 2
es: 0 8
0.2
- 0, 4Q Tripping position
(Thrust direction y)
- 0,6
-11
• Tripping device
17
-1.LJ1S
• Q
T
a
NO 3062
GHH BUTIENEBEFFNUNISSEI
•
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAVT
M.Tm-K Matt
Shaft Displacement Regulator with Thrust Bearing

Protection
Description and Operation

The oil-hydraulic shaft displacement regulator in-
dicates the axial position of the turbo machine shaft.
In the event of an inadmissible displacement due to
wear and tear of the thrust bearing, it stops the
electric motor through the pressiostat or the steam
turbine through the trip gear.
• Through the pipe 12 pressure oil flows into the casing

7. Part of the oil acts upon the differential piston
4, another part flows through the dosing throttle 14
and acts upon the piston bottom sides and the rest
flows through the bore of the articulated lever to
the outlet nozzle, where it flows at the gap "S" into
a pressureless space.
The oil above the piston 4 produces a force P1 =

pressure p1 x circular face F1, and the oil below the
piston produces a force P2 = pressure p2 x piston
face F2. In the state of rest the two forces are
• equal, i.e. the ratio p2/p1 is constant. Consequently,

the flow-off cross section and thus also the gap "S"
must be constant in the state of rest.
When the rotor moves in the direction x, the gap "S"

increases, while the.pressure p2 and thus also the
force P2 decrease. The equilibrium of the forces act-
ing upon the piston is interrupted and the piston
moves downwards. The piston 4 has the form of a cone
at its top end. The spring 18 forces the set screw 5
against the cone 17; therefore, during the downward
movement of the differential piston 4 the flow-off
opening 19 follows the rotor displacement until the
6
No 2960
GHH BUTEKOFFNUNGSHaiTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAF'
M K BUM
gap e nas_reached again size ehice it lermalie

Ln the state of rest. Due to the ever ratio b/c and
taper of cone 17 the piston stroxe is a multie,
rotor disc movement (re.. . of roe:or). The eiston
stroke is tranSmitte,:: L- measuring gear of the gauge 1.
At the pointer 9 of gauge 1 the axial displacement of the
rotor can then be read after another mageifIcation
retor coves the direction v, the inverse

movement of the piston 4 aed thus of the peliter in
caused analogously.
• Uhe, the rotor disc. 20 ha::; covered Li dist:a-c..,

, direction x, the pistd
.1t,
, reacid.
mm
trippi.ig position. Pressure oil 17Thws. Lito the spacc, 21

and through the line 22 to a device which stoeo the set.
AFter a movement of the rotor disc 20 over ..); uml the
directien y the upper tripping positic)n is reached and
the set similarly stopped.
If before reaching the tripping position a small leak oil

eneetity enters chamber 16, this can fiewoff through-the
small bere 2) and cannot pressurize chamber 16,
The (:sition of piston 4 is iidepet of tfF: - .ressure
• - 1 , IV p1 changes, there is only a change in the oil quan-

tity fIow;ing through.
The shaft displacement regulator offers the advantage that
there cannot occur any metallic contact between the flow-off
oPening 19 and the disc 2o. The only function of the weak
spring 8 is to neutralize the falling weight of piston 4 to
prevent that in case of oil failure the flow-off opening is
forced against the rotor disc.
The accuracy of indicat on and the tripping effect can be

easily checked with the rotor position unchanged. By turning
the set screw 5, the differential piston 4 changes its
cr: position so that there is an indication on scale 1.
• 1:
No 2960
GHH BUTEIREIFFNUNGSIBUTTEE
• M.Tm-K STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT%

Blatt
Installation and Adjustment

a) Prior to installation, remove clock 1 and insert
shim 2 (12 mm thick) so that its upper face is
flush with the top edge 3 of the casing. Keep shim
2 and thus slide valve 4 in this position by apply-
ing a weight load. With the slide valve in this
position, set screw 5 should be so adjusted that
the dimension "a" is 24 ± 0.5, the apparatus
• should be set up accurately, and the nozzle front

face should be brought into contact with the rotor
disc. The casing 7 of the shaft displacement
regulator should be stud-connected to the bearing-
cover, the rotor disc checked, through a coat of
paint applied thereto, for proper contact with
the nozzle front face, and the said nozzle front
race remachined, if necessary.
b) Remove shim 2 in order that slide valve 4 may take

its upper limit position. Check, by lifting the
slide valve, whether the limit position has been
reached (slide valve 4 must be easily movable and
• raised by the force of the spring 8_only). Now

turn in clock 1 so deep that the pointer 9 is on
about graduation line 0.6 of the upper half of
the scale.
c) Tripping test in the direction.X

Put shaft displacement regulator under oil pressure
when the rotor is at a standstill : Pointer 9
now moves to a point near B. Turn set screw 5 to
the left until the pointer jerks into its lower
limit position. Note down the position of the
pointer at which such a jerk occurs. When the
jerk sets in the pointer should point to A. When
there is a difference between the position noted
• 1:
No 2960
6111111 OUTEEMIFFNLINGISHEITTE 2
•
STERKRADE AKTIENGESECISCHAFT
M Tm-K Wen
down and point A0 the position of the pointer should

be corrected, by lowering or raising the clock
or, in the case of minor differences, by turning
the set screw 10. By a full turn of the clock the
position of the pointer can be corrected by 0.075
mm and by turning the set screw 10 it can be
corrected by a maximum of ± 0.1 mm. Before that.
correction the slide valve 4 and thus the pointer 9
should be brough back into a suitable position of
• rest (any position above the lower and below the
upper tripping point),by turning the set screw 5 to
the right.
Example of a correction :
The pointer at 0.22 between B ard A jerks. into its

lower limit position. The position of the pointer
has to be corrected by the amount of difference
between the tripping point and point A, i.e. 0.4
- 0,22 = 0.18. When raising the clock by two
turns, the position of the pointer is corrected
by 2 x 0,075 = 0.15 mm. By turning the set screw
10 the scale is raised by the remaining 0.03 mm.
Repeat tripping test and check whether the pointer

jerks at A. Correct again, if necessary. Mark
position of clock and tighten lock-nut 11.
Now clock 1 and set-screw 10 must not be

adjusted any more.
d) Tripping test in the direction y

By turning the set screw 5 to the right, move the
pointer in the direction of "a" until the tripping
operation takes place. At this point there is no
No 2960
GHH BUTEHOFFNILINGSHRITTE 3•
...
•
STERKHADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
jerking of the pointer into the limit position.

The difference, if any, between the upper tripping
position and point "a" cannot be avoided. No
correction is possible by readjusting the clock or
turning the screw 10.
e) By turning set screw 5,move pointer 9 60 as to

point to B. This should be done with the rotor
being in contact with the thrust bearing in the
direction X. When there is a slight deviation of
the pointer from B with the machine in heated-up
and working conditions, the pointer has to be
moved again to B by turning set screw 5.
Lock screw should be tightened,
M,
O
O
No 2960
GHH BUTEHIOFFINIIINGSHUTTE
M.Tm-K
Maintenance and examination during service

a) During service the pointer should be constantly
watched and the position noted down together with
the other working data. A shifting of the pointer
by one graduation line corresponds to a shifting of
the shaft by 0.1 mm The distance between the
pointer and B shows to what extent the rotor has
been displaced since the first adjustment. A
• movement of the pointer in the direction of A shows

that the shaft has eeen displaced in the direction
x,A movement in the direction of "a" shows a
displacement in Gee direction y.
et intervals of 2 to 3 weeks, the apparatus should

be checked for rrooer functioning, mee should be
doge preferably with the set ready to be shut down.
The set screw e, le turned to the left or right by
ea .f a. tuer. The device is all right when the
position of Lee eeo-ttee thereby changes by about
1.e eraduation Then the pointer should be
hroueh nacv leto lee origina positioR, It should
• ee eeen it teat the top of the set screw 5 is

not removed from the cone of the slide valve 4, as
etnerwiee uhere the danger of tripping. For this,
reason no screw driver should be used which can get
jammed in the slit of the set screw 5.
c) et greater intervals, .about every quarter of a year,

the tripping gear should be checked for proper
functioning. Only with the set ready to be shut
down should the set screw 5 be turned to the left
••• ent11, on A, the tripping operation takes place.
vi
es:
O
No 2960
GHH BUTEHEIFFNUNISSICAITTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELL . SCHAFT
M.Tm-K Blatt
d) The position of the pointer should always show the

position of the shaft as compared to the first
adjustment. Therefore, after the tests as per 4.1.2a
and b, the pointer 9 should be brought back, by
Means of set screw 5, into the position it had
before these tests. This should be observed also
when removing and re-mounting the bearing cover.
A'new setting at point B may be only after in-
stallation of a new thrust bearing and only by means
of set screw 5. After every readjustment the set
screw 5 should be secured by means of lock-screw 6.
e) The clock 1 must not be removed unless the set is

:it a standstilin Afterwards it has to be brought
back into its old position, to be duly marked.
r) The thrnst bearing protection reacts upon Inad-

missible shaft displacement both in the x. and y
directions. In most of the machines the axial
thrust and thus the shaft displacement, If any, is
in the dlrection
There are ai.su some ,:,feeding and two stage turbines

in which at certain ioad conditions the thrust ma.
be in the direction y.
ft;
No 7960
GHH SUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESEL .LSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
2.0.0.1117 List 'of Contents of Unit No. 2 (NO Compressor)
2.1.0.39 Description of the NO radial compressor
2.2.0 Sectional drawing of radial compressor with

spare parts schedule, M60.4071.1016
2.2.1 Spare parts list,

M60.4071.1016, sheets 1 through 5
1.2.2.01 Keeping spare parts in stock
2.3.1 Compressor characteristics,

M64.2003.1541
2.1.2 Inlet guide blade control,

M60.2180.1056
Linkage of inlet guide blade control,

M61.2189.1036
Throttle valve actuator,

M62.2812.1003
N-•
• N"
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNGSHWITTE
11.TM.K Matt
2.1.0.9 Description of the radial compressor

The radial compressor is a machine designed to
increase the pressure of nitrous gas. Within a
chemical process.
The gas passes through the machine from the

suction to the discharge nozzle. It enters the
impellers axially and leaves them radially. The
impellers themselves are divided by blades into
separate channels, and it is in these that the
gas is subjected to the high-speed rotation of
the rotor. This centrifugal motion hurls the gas
outwards, creating a partial vacuum at the inlet
which in turn draws in a steady supply of fresh
gas.
Part- of the energy transmitted by the impellers is

directly converted into pressure, while another
part of it is converted into speed. This is the
speed at which the gas then enters the diffusor,
where as a result of a decrease in the flow
velocity the conversion to pressure takes place.
The compressed gas is then guided to the subsequent
stage.
For a wide range of control the compressor is

equipped with Adjustable guide blades, whose
adjusting mechanism requires practically no
maintenance.
The special advantages of the machine are outlined

below:
even and pulse-free flow,
considerable insensitivity to gas impurities,
little risk of overloading the driver,
no oil impurification of the gas,
. No 3062
GH14 IBUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
few wearing parts,

simple maintenance.
The compressor consists of the following main

componensts:
All nitrous-gas bearing parts of the machine have
been made from acid-resistant material, for the
nitrous gas delivered by the compressor is highly
agressive.
a) With its brackets cast on to the lower section

of the horizontally split casing, the whole
casing with intake and discharge nozzle is
mounted on two bearing pedestals to which it is
connected by casing guides front and rear. By
mounting the loose bearing pedestal in such a
way as to allow axial movement on the base
plate it is ensured that the casing is free to
expand when heated.
b) The fron end shaft seals have the form of

labyrinth stuffing boxes. These prevent the
medium being handled from escaping. In addition,
the outer chambers of the shaft seals are
changed with seal air.
c) The casing rings and cast-in guide ribs are

fitted centrically in the casing and held in
position at the joint by check screws.
0
2
m d) To prevent any return flow to a point of lower
C•1 pressure, labyrinth-type seals are proveded for
both shaft and impellers.
e) A balancing drum absorbs most of the axial

o thrust of the compressor rotor and thus prevents
• overstressing of the thrust bearings.
No 3062
GHH BUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
f) The adjustable guide blades are moved by .

a gear ring engagirg with the indiVidual
blades which is operated by a linkage whose
shaft passes through the casing wall. The
outer end of the pinion shaft is provided with
a lever which is attached to a hand actuator
and which transforms the straight-line
movement of the actuator into a turning
movement of the pinion shaft, via the linkage.
The compressor shaft is forged from one piece

and dynamically balanced after the shrink-
fitting of the impellers and the balance
drum of the compressor as well as of the
shaft sleeve with tail-gas turbine impeller
and subsequent to assembly with all shaft
sleeves.
h) The compressor rotor has force-feed lubricated

plain bearings with white metal lining. It is
axially fixed in the bearing pedestal by
means of a double-action tilting pad thrust
bearing which is suitable for both directiars
of rotation and thrust.
rn
01
.01
•
T—
C\I
No 3062
28112
27199
23181 21180 2170 21/71 21/72 21/73 27/74 23/82 23/83 41/50
22/71-1 22/77-2 221713 221714 22/71-5 23111 42/01
98/52-12
Einzelheit ,A6
•
Einzelheit
98/52-11
23111 98/65-1
98152-10 ' Einzelheit ,G6
Einzelheit ,C6
OL, _ I
I A
41150 - —44171-5 •
Einzelheitp'
.t5
7IV
Einzelheit E.
•
Schnitt 11-d
2101-34
/77'
•/
•\ ' ' --(====te-sba
Enzetheit .tir=te"-te.a.
23/41 23/42
Bei alien Dichtungen beziehen sich die eingetragenen

Spiele auf den Spalt, bei den Lagern auf die Durchmesserdifferenz.
1 •••• 4041
1_ 1171 I
I _ —•- rz&NH arreArn.....09unt;
P,
ri •
rb Zusammerestelking
60
: 4071.1016
mit Ersatzteiliibersicht
411
I "A •=.1"
ESC-2C1 IGUTEHOFFNUNGSHILITTE
m"...
.. - .
I'l Tr-/ K... A/1 7
Reserveteinism zu Zeichnungs-Nr: M60.4071.1016
Kennwort: Cuno-NO - Aufuns-Nr: 410 021 Blatt: 1 Forts:BI.: 2

.• -: .
Gruppan•Nr L Id.Nr Stuckzehi Senennung and Abmessung Gewlcht Sernerkung

kg/Stiiek
21/01 34, 25 Lfd. m RundsChnur 0 5

Metres round cord, dia. 5
21/80 13 36 Lagerbuchsen 042/19 x 25
bearing bushes . •
21/89 7 1 Sealol-Gleitringdichtung - (
• " 10 2-
Typ E-605-13k-M35
Sealol contact ring seal
Lagerbuchse 057/30 x 21
bearing bushes
.,
It 11 1 Lagerbuchse 050/38 x 30
bearing bushes
22/01 1 1 Stopfbuchse 2-tie. komplett
0458/190 x 188.-:'
gland' bi-partite, complete . -
II 2 .1 Stopfbuchse 2-t1g. komplett
0390/188 x 85
gland bi-partite, complete .
il 3 15 m j-Dichtstreifen 0,25 x 12 wahlweise
"j" sealing strip optional
1, 4 15m Stemmdraht 1,3 x 1,3 II
caulking wire
. - .
22/04 1 2 Stopfblichse 2-t1g. komplett
0390/198'.x 85
- glands bi-partite, Complete
". -2 •-11 M - j,
.Dichtstreifen 0,25 x 12' wahlweise
"j" sealing•strip - optional
" •. 3 11. m SOemmdraht 1,3 x 1,3- II
caulking wire
•
22/91 1-3: 1 Buchae zum Entlastungskolben 2-ti:..
10590/368 x 120 komplett • .
-. bush for balancing drum, bi-parti
. complete
te 2 14 m .j-Dichtstreifen 0,25 x 12 wahlweise
"j" sealing strip- . optional
u 3- 14 m z.-,Stemmdraht 1,3 x 1,3 , . ii
caulking wire
••-. • . .
is m rrn IG UTEHOFFNUNGSHLITTE
MosshInon - Nr
4717
• .PA TM. r. ..
STERK RADE
Reserveteilliste zu Zeichnungs-Nr:
AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M60.4071.1016
Kennwort: Cuno-NO Auftrags-Nr: 410 021 Blatt: 2 Forts.411.: 3
Gruppen.Nr Lid.Nr Sthckzahl 13enannung and Abmessung Gewlcht Elomotkung

kg/Stack
22/61 1 1 Wellendichtung 2-t1g. komplett

0430/214 x 105
shaft seal bi-partite, complete
o 2 1 Wellendichtung. 2-t1g. komplett
0430/214 x 96 .
shaft seal bi-partite;- complete
ft 1 Wellendichtung 2-t1g. komplett,
3
0430/214 x 96
- shaft seal bi-partite, complete
I' 1 Wellendichtung 2-t1g. komplett
4
.043(1/214 z 96
=art seal bi-partite, complete
" 5 47 m Dichtstreifen 0,25'x 12 . wahlweise
sealing strip optional
n 6 23 m Stemmdraht 3,5 x 3,5 n
caulking wire
22/71 1 Laufraddichtung 2-tig. komplett
0620/478 x 85 ' -
impeller seal . bi-partite, compl.
o 2 1 Laufraddichtung 2-t1g. komplett
0590/430 . x 53
impeller seal bi-partite, compl.
I, 3: •1 Laufraddichtung 2-.0.g. komplett .
0590/430 x 53 .
impeller . seal bi-partite, compl. •
n. A Laufraddichtung 2-t1g..komplett
1 •
0590/415 x 53 ' _
.
•• Impeller seal bi-partite, compl.
.
It
5 1 .Laufraddichtung 2t1g. koMplett
059(11397
irmpelle seal bi-partite, compl
6 '39 :
,.m Dichtstreifen 0,25 x 12. - 6 . wahiweise
sealing strip optional
is
7 16,5. • m Stemmdraht 3,5 x. 3,5
caulking vire
• o 9 6 m. Stemmdraht 1,3 x 1,3 .
"caulking wire
‘. II
No 3056
2.68
23/61. 9 1,1 l Lfd. m Rundschnur 0 7 round col+
m.thi...w
66-X-1 SUTEHLIFFNUNIGSHUTTE
• . Is4i :".r!!!_ K
Reserveteilliste zu Zeichnungs-Nr:
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT 4717
A60.4071.1016
Kennwort: Cuno-NO Auftrags-Nr: 410 021 Blatt: 3 Forts.-BI.: 4
Gruppen-N, Lid.Nr Stiickzehl Benennung and Abmessung Gewlcht Bemerkung
kg/Stock .
23/71 1-15 1 Traglager 0 160 komplett M61.0031.09(

plain bearing complete
23/73 Doppeldrucklager 0 110 'komplett
double thrust bearing complete
23/74 1 Segment-Drucklager 0 110
segmental thrust bearing
23/75 Segment-Drucklager 0 110
segmental thrust bearing
•.
%./ 1 Spritzring komplett 0240/145
23/81
splash ring complete
23/82 1-5 1 Spritzrihg kothiplett 0335/180 x 51
- splash ring complete
•
23/83 1-5 1 Spritzring komplett 0335/180 x 5I
splash ring complete
24/01 1 Verdichterwelle komplett mit Lauf
radern, Buchsen, E-Kolben and .
Kupplungsnabe 0800 x 2719
compressor shaft compl. with impe ler
wheels, bushes, balancing drum & oupling hub
41150 - 1 Turbinenleitrad vollstandig
turbine-guide rim complete
tt • 109 DUsenschaufel T25/16,8 wahiweise.
nozzles . - optional
2 108. Beilage T25/1.6,8 a. Fl.St.40 x 25 ii -
shims i -
' ..
42/01 .Wellenbuchse 2-tig. vollst4ndig%
02W x 90
shaft bush bid-partite, complete'
' -,- •
42/01 3 5 Lfd..m Dichtstreif.en 0,25 x 12 wahiweise
metres sealing strip' optional
42/01: 5 5 Lfd. m Stemmdraht 1,3 x 1,3 . ii
'metres caulking wire
1
42/61' Wellenbuchse.vollstdndig
0175/90 x 139
shaft bush complete
No 3056
2.68 . .
MoichInen -Nr
(BC-2 El GUTEHUFFNUI NGSHUTTE
• STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
4717
.1'74 IT l')... ri.
Reserveteilliste zu Zeichnungs-Nr: M60.4071.1016,!
Kennwort: Cuno-NO Auftrags-Nr:• 410 024 ' Blatt: 4 Forts.-81.: 5
Gruppon•Nr 1 Lld,Nr Stuckzaht Bononnung and Atressung Gewlcht Bomorkung

kg/Stack
42/61 2 7 Lfd. m DiChtstreifen 0,251x 12 wahlweise

metres sealihg strip ; optional
i . ll
II 7 ' Lfd. m Stemmdraht 1,3 x.1,3
3
metres sealing strip
- 1
44/71 - 1 Turbinenlaufrad vollst4ndig

0589 x 70 -
turbine rotor complete
. _
vl 5 128 ,Laufschaufe1:25 b 50 wahlweise
yo11., abger. Tlg.. 15,3 optional
rotor blades - rounded off
II
44/71 13 5 Lfd. m Stemmdraht 3,5 x 3,5
metres caulking wire
48/01 - 2 Handventil vollstandig
. hand valve complete
.
ti 2 2 Ventilkegel 0216 x 70 wahlweise
valve cone - optional
•
it 3 2- Flansch 120 x.18 Ts
flange • .
It_ 4 2 Haltering 2-t1g. 049,5 x 1.5 II
holding ring bi-partite •

It 5 Ventilspindel 036 x 698 . . 11
valve spine
dl
,I • it
6 2 : ,Blichse 080 x 145 . .
bush
. _
II
" ' .8 "1 Fluflex-RundSchnur.05
Fluflex round Cord .
tl 13 2 ' Abetreifer 36-45-7/10 ti
strippers . . •
1. 15 . - 6 Zylinderschraube M12 x 20 II
cylinder bolts
!, '. 18 2 GewindebUthse 068 x 65 I,
• •
. threaded bushes' i.
98/52 10 Atieger-Thermometer HDVm80 to
No 3056 Rtieger thermometer , . .
2.66 •
Matchinon • Nr
(3 C-0 C2 GUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
• Reserveteilliste zu Zeichnungs-Nr:
STE AKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M60.4071.1016
4717
Kennwort: Cuno-NO Auftrags-Nr: 410 021 Blatt: 5 Forts:W.: —
Gruppen•N r LId.Nr Sliickzahl Benonnung and Abrnessung Gewicht Bemerkung

kg/StOck
98/52 1* neger-Thermometer HDVm80

Rileger thermometer
it 12 Rileger-Thermometer HDVm80
Meger thermometer
98/65 1 Axialmeemorrichtung komplett
axial displacement measuring
device complete
• .
. .
•
- .
•
•
•
, .
•
. •
ry .
• •.
•
.
No3056
2.68
•
GHH
SRRRRRHUE GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
Blatt
1.C.2.01
Storage of Spare Parts

(annex to spare parts list)
closed rooms with a dry, neutral atmosphere (-20°C to +40°C

•!;tout the formation of condensed moisture) spare parts with
• original packing and preservation paint are kept for years
In a state allowing immediate installation, without the need
fox' special cleaning.
Ti.0 above statement is normally valid also for spare rotors,

q-
- :e accuracy of shape does not change to an inadmissible
y.,ent provided they are kept in their original position in
• GHH packing.
• unsurveyable transport operations it may be necessary in

•racial cases to have the spare rotors checked by•0HH personnel
or proper preservation and accuracy of shape before putting
%hem in the store.
'riv such examination the shafts are provided with a yellow

larking showing where an eccentricity measurement can be taken.
The maximum admissible indication is 0.02 to 0.04 mm, depending
• the rotor size. This measurement refers to a bearing journal
;,Aignment (max. indication 0.01) in a double antifriction-
bearing pedestal or a lathe back rest.
As the GHH packing allows several cases to be stacked, we

•
recommend horizontal storage. If for space or other reasons
vertical storage is required, this will cause considerable
cost for special packing and special devices.
M 6.4 1
Bla
955
o 2993
5.73
•
:_.._ .... • •
- 1:-..:ft::•4,t1"-* :-...1::.• ::., :7•:::-:ii..71-..:-.F.7.: '.i:,.i
t - .•
17::ZI.f.•----Iir-.-. 1 . . 4, ALL 2=
'-...: L:.•-...t,..-, ar:.1-t-PX
.11C.11 -tWiiii2rie_itt-li -2 ,-. - I.....'1 t..-••
----
. r rF. ';.4:-.,... • .7
. . ...... ..a......i.........„,..-:;elaa.
..." • -• -:.-311.1.1•••_ 4.,.. 1
•••••+ ..I.....••• •Lt. 1
:-:••_ .•,...;; •• i .... .' , , .:-.774:7-.53,1t2re -;••-•- ;r1•=r 1:: "" • 4 'r
• '
:%'1- . .A• 1.: Th . • ...,:. A: 1........
•
.,.
'Piesii047-Er-,1,-'n" 'CiLtita.i=z
....••• • .t.-- • ir•4 -- :m4r1I----
-r: (.25.alia;
. . .. • 4 ...Sacti6n v r•••
:r 4."
...-M.
--.1-:::,....-4-4...; -2...-1
- 1:: • :I.- - .-... t :17';• a ' :••14 :I s• ^ f• t-tr.„47
-•- "m*". ••"'•
.1:::.---
r .... 4:.• ... .:1147-r.1 ' . 1. 7...1,1 t... ....4 t., ..". i..17 ‘.".77 .."
• :_.,.t ...,t,.,,.tioii..7.:,,,,Air-a444- ,,a....11:::t, . = ...,..
...i,,,:.,.1.„..:-: ..ti-
„.:_,...11=-
...1.
4 _.. .. .. ,2?.
r
i.i . „.,
:„.,....,.... ..1 . 4.•:•*-r
_.-..=-•-r7-=1-4
--.1:4.:..,:T...
. . ; ....-3Fr.. • •• • •• • •••• ,.,.. ,---W-
-'-'•• •••• 4. 41•4331
.„...., .r, ":17.--7-*;
-r.,-:-
. .4-...• .- ..:.. •-1
•
-,--."
tat:
1'1N-7P:444$" I:. !S.
ri.41.4-_:....,.::..1.‘f.eitietin•E2 -'-'4-...r ':-R I,N r+-‘
• irE'&
• 7 • •-•.'t • •• .f.q.I -3 44'491.1 g..'
7::31'j4. -i.7.:•:iitff :•.30;••, ..4. 4 !Al i..:...4.3711 .1•21. • • .r.2-•:tri: 11..r.' gmit.t
-2L-34...1132 H .. •
1.A
•
1..:47.r•..... ... ,.. Pe•ati'• •.4.. fi7tt•M 4t=r 4tr i

. .: ....-1:.:...•
t. ... . .....„ A 1177.1..:7r± .: 744
. ..+7..
.....r.FI L .••
•••'*C4. • t•••;•,3.3122.1E4thr .p.... . ....41 -
4f.\:,,.4z..... ...L. itit •21 :. .
•
l_•__ ;........_...; • 1•••• - 3 1.- 3 1 •• 3. .:::;: • •21: A:71!11.--:=:r.fir...i.:; ta.4-44.-.1:Fki4•174-.,-r..."r g-:,,,c_., . .u i . .7:
ri:-..::•:.: - -7 • • 1... 1...mirm.-: ••:
..1 : v -.:t.,-,.,-r,.-1.,.-:•,•.::.:1:.r:. '.:! i:'•!«. `.;!**4-- t= 4.; •a.:4
..k&-....471
...4•••43.4.4"1•13/E... -4. r.4.--l.tit:c-.
:i...... ::..;.i.......t.... .:.....j..„ ,......:. 621 .:: . : • :17::.' r.1: -=..:-.:• .• .7. :.:.:44.:.t. - •...: 4T-P.....
: +:-
":7-7)::- 4. ......U.• eTi :11.:110..... . .• «.1.- ' . '1....:-.1:, :-
- - • .....1 -. - ...:.. :.• • "•• :•"::"•!••77.... , ..
-r--i-:=4177. .n „. . .1 „,„_ • •• . .T-2-44;4-441: -413---!
• • Curit./..."7":. •'' . ... :44....pre. • t•
"......,.. .: 1.7.
fanteel-A:n % ."-1=1.
- I.
: 1- 71.4". -211.
11:7:F.-2
•.•:: ••••::::.,- • •
_
.4096 '4PCLC/ :17T.
1..••••
. .: r 47•;.,
1“: • ...r*
•:Ia.....••
f..t..- '[. •„/:;.. _toP. - ...!.. ,, eM
.-1 -• • rr--:4.--'..7ir:76- .
. :-• % • . • - -.-.1- • :...- :.-.:-
•..-..... .
- ,• ,,-,•-• -
. .• .. ,. :.: -• • ••
... ..
•. : Jr • •• •-
. ••
t: :!*
t..
. I• 1.
s771
Isli
r.ASZE'41
.... HT. .
PE. 7 I.-
.41141 PAM •614 14 17:

:1- * •
2: ••••••• 1:41•7•••• •1 •
.;;;4.7.•• • 4..•
•;n• 4 4-
.4 .L111:I
-ff.-rt . 3
—• . ..
;•
• 0 •
•
• t
'kr -rmi • . .• :'..73••
It
!• • Datum: 16.2.72 At
Tathobtower Type 6vn8/SL

WWI M61/ 2003.1541a:
No3584 Characteristic Curves
12.70
i7-7,7troxfacr X 62W 70
10_
1
22
17
11.••••••• orowtow
• /
19
18
12
;'
1
/
• 21
20 ‘1, HI 101101a ••••••••
/
6 1:1 23/24
••••,••••••• 1.
•-••••••• q.akka. 11314H 1311100M1MOSPICIllf
I11144C
--gli-e&chcufelregating!M6Q218Q1056
'.
23
6 18
17
22
17
19
14
•••ffloo I•••• &W.., YIN.
121- 4+-2
,0 RAH
1:7 Fade
"1"1
Geskinge zur M6121141036

Eintrittsleitschaufel
V
350
6 20 9 11 12 13 14. 8 io 15 18 15 •
%.; /I; • / / / / 7/ // / //l/%/////
kL
etefee_
,4,e_
'kellieweeecenbeee,„.„
ste1erostsel***1. _c
"\,̀
. \\.\\ \\\:\;\ \-\•N‘N:
b.
-- •
fa kite--
• r
Z.174,7.,,t4
.• JN ••• Amortry Mow
t Ltfi_j{ c%_! **".
"• Zwoll Gutehoifnungshatle
, es*,..***"—
$0, sbrivaa.
Stimibeht demykhen 72.4 ben .4./Pbrui 4•Av,
mit mo/rar/e bolreithell , j lemt
T.Stelliverk zur,
1-1 ,
t Dro:sselirlap,the- 1& 2812.10031!1
t;zr 1•1
24_ a _L.__ • \ 2 • *. 1— !.
M.TM.K Blatt ' •
4.0:0.1117 List of Contents of Unit No. 4
4.1.0.10 Description of the tail-gas expalsion turbine
4.2.0 Sectional drawing with spare parts schedule,

M60.4071.1016, it is referred to 2.2.0
4.2.1 Spare parts list,

M60.4071.1016, it is referred to 22.1
1.2.2.01 Keeping spare parts in stock,

it is referred to 2.2.1
4.3.1 Performance graph,

M64.4004.1019
4.1.3 Hand valve,

M62.4801.1018
NO 9064
DHH BUTEHEIFFNUNGSHLITTE
M.TM.K Watt
4.1.0.10 Description of the tail-gas expansion turbine
The tail-gas expansion turbine is a driving

machine in which the return flow tail-gas from
a chemical process is expanded and converted
into kinetic energy. Part of the available
pressure drop is converted into velocity and
thereby expanded in the guide vanes and the rest
in the rotor blades.
The power of the turbine is dependent on the gas

flow rate and the available heat gradient. The
heat gradient is determined by the gas condition
upstream the turbine and by the pressure in the
gas discharge nozzle.
The turbine has no control system of its own.

apart from passing through the nozzle group, which
is fed direct, the gas also flows to the turbine
through two inlet valves operated by hand. The gas
leaves the turbine at the exhaust gas nozzle and is
led off through a chimney or for further use in the
process.
The turbine consists of the following main

components:
a) The horizontally split turbine casing with

flanged-on exhaust gas nozzle for axial
discharge, which rests with its side brackets
on the pads of a base plate. On its front end
0
the casing is firmly bolted up to the base of
the compressor bearing pedestal; on the gas
discharge end it is guided on the base plate,
via a fitted key, to compensate for thermal
0
expansion.
0
•
No 3064
GHH BUTEHEIFFNUNISSINUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
b) On its front end the turbine casing is

furnished with a shaft exit seal of labyrinth
type, chaged with compressed air to seal against
the gas leaking through the casing.
c) A shaft sleeve which carries the rotating seal

strips of the shaft exit seal is shrink fitted
to the shaft end of the compressor rotor. At this
shaft sleeve the impeller is mounted in overhung
position. The rotor blades are secured at their
feet in the grooves of the impeller and fixed.
by means of a lock piece. The completely
assembled rotor common for the turbine and for
the compressor is dynamically balanced.
d) The axial thrust force of the turbine impeller

is part, compensated by the thrust force acting
on the balance drum of the compressor and partly
taken up by the compressor thrust bearing.
e) The turbine rotor has force-feed lubricated plain

bearings with white metal lining and is axially
fixed in a bearing pedestal of the compressor by
a double-acting tilting pad thrust bearing
suitable for both directions of thrust and
rotation.
'41
.4.-_,,c. •_- _:-.:E.7.• .,-''..- 27 ---,-

4
.. .,_ .• ..! : --t •,.."4 : 11. v"..:'.4-4 :V.E.-.-:.'4.-,4-:-.::;,,---2:::
-::- ...,...-.---
. :-'-'-:. '1'..:-. L., ' • i .- l''...-• ,
'--,--7,-
''',,,-..'---2-_-_.1-,•:_0. _ -,..‘..."_„_-.... ,....':!- --117....---. •
• !•11. :7-'7 I I- _ -._.
.7.-'1'-. t:--4. _ ,. . ,
. .. I- .,..,_ -..
1= -1$-:-..-:-:::
---;.-1.-- " ......
---..3 .....
•-• I."
_ - 941e/...9 Po *. t 220 ??0,

Pa,' 1,48
99.3" iYnoi
14; I:252 4/Aeirjs
Aufk. Angeb. Nr.: 9(0029 rtaschim;: 87Vn 6/7 Kennwort: CL[/7o ET Dalum: 29. 08. 7.I 1Z
abi.../f7/1•X
ra H 1 LeislungsaVagramin 4Wf.
/2 •
§chnittA—Lif
I Aims bed IferneAscht si.rhelw
Verdichterseite
- 18
/4 •
7-
8•
.$11=1 an TurbineneintriNszeile
6 •
6' t eketrdesliffe Me Kimerseht :rehire
1
las P 13 An lonniibenbivenden %Wen rastennnl
15 [horn Heft sehweillung gesichert
Ansichtivvvorclen
4M, 1111•I16 flommi
AIM!. Immwmar,
M62.480/. roe a
01.111(1.1
nano \
610 024
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNOSHUTTE
elan
5.0.0.1117 List of Contents of Unit No. 5

For NO Compressor Set
5.1.0.03 General (epicyclic gearbox)
5.1.2.01 Operating instructions for the "Renk" epicyclic

gearbox, type PA 40 p
5.1.7.1117/2 Installation drawing

0906901 /1
5.1.8.1117/2 Spare parts drawing with spare parts list,

0907817/3
8.4.0.04 "Renk" oil instructions.
No 3362
61111 OUT,ENCIFFNURIBB.HUTTE
EITENKNAI:9E - AKTIEN GEESE 1.1.•C HAFT
..... mAtimc am
5.1.0.03 General (gearbox)
Drive of the compressor by the electric motor is

via a planetary gearing of Stoeckicht design.
For mounting, operation and maintenance of the

gearing the special instructions of the gear
manufacturer are to be followed.
In addition the following should be noted:
The couplings may only be pulled on and off with .

the aid of special devices.
If a gearing is to absorb axial thrust, the

manufacturer should be consulted.
Lubrication of the gearing is from the oil circuit

of the set as a whole. The maximum admissible oil
temperature in the bearings is 70°C.
Before the gearing is delivered it is run-in in
• the stated direction of rotation. Nevertheless

the load should be increased slowly on the first
start-up.
•' NO 2960
GHH
1O111111•1111= BEITEDIMIFFRIUNSONEITTM
M.TM.K STERKRADE .AKTIENGE . SE•LLSCHART
5", 1. Z.01
KiroMS
Operating Instructions
for Planetary Gear Units Type
PA .. p
Conditions at Delivery
The gear unit is supplied ready for installation, with parting joints sealed. Bright parts, such as shaft
journals, etc. are protected by a rust preventive coating, which can be removed by a solvent, e.g. trichlor-
ethylene.
The gear unit is preserved; the preservation lasting about 2 months.
Installation •
1.Foundation: The planetary gear unit must be set up on a robust, vibration free and plane base. It is nec-
essary to use machined cast iron or steel frames embedded in concrete. The foundation should be such that
the centre of the machine shaft is about 1 mm (0.040') higher than the centre of the gear shaft. Perfect
alignment can then be achieved by putting suitable shims underneath the gear unit.
2.Alignment: The shafts to be coupled must be accurately in line in service condition. To achieve this,
axial and angular misalignment must be checked by means of the gauging attachment shown below. Even when
flexible couplings are used, the same precautions for careful trueing-up must be taken. The alignment values
for the gear unit (when cold) are determined by RENK in each case and they will be given on demand. The
estimate of the alignment tolerances refers to the condition ready mounted (foundation bolts tightened and
locating pins fitted).
Trouble-free operation and service life of the gear unit will depend essentially on this alignment work being
carried out accurately.
low speed Gear side high speed gear side
with gear type coupling with torsional shaft
't—
O
c•3
LA
No 2960
GHH
ammo= 11111111TENUFFNIIIIN 6111,11TE
m.T BTERKRADIE AKTIENGESIILLSCHAFT
Blatt
Estimated alignment tolerances
kgular misalignment
Type of Coupling Axial misalignment
Distance r = 200 mm (8")
Hold coupling 0.01 mm (0.0004") 0.01 mm (0.0004")
(Joe type coupling 0.0? mm (0.0008") 0.01 mm (0.0004")
Flexible coupling 0.04 mm (0.0016") 0.03 mm (0.0012")
When r larger or smaller than 200 mm (B"), the dial gauge readings vary proportionally with constant angular
misalignment tolerance.
High speed gear side: The coupling hood or the sealing cover are removed and the axle journal of the planet
carrier is used for alignment purposes. The shaft of the machine with the dial gauges attached is rotated
and the maximum dial readings are noted. Half of the sue of the maximum deflections of the two dial gauges
is the angular misalignment.
Low speed gear side: The correct alignment of the gear shaft with the shaft of the driven machine should be
checked by dial gauges. The two shafts are rotated together. Half the sum of the maximum deflections of the
two dial gauges is the angular misalignment.
To rotate the two shafts together, it is recommended to connect flange couplings by temporary pins with
sufficient clearance in the holes. With gear type couplings, the coupling sleeve should be in mesh.
When aligning the unit in cold condition (room temperature), the different heat expansion of the coupling
ends (foundation, machine, etc.) must be taken into account, so that the best alignment is ensured in hot
service condition.
If possible, the alignment of the gear unit with the prime mover and with the driven machine must be checked
after the first run under load.
After alignment, the gear unit is to be bolted and dowel-pinned to the foundation frame.
If the gear case had to be opened (housing cover, coupling hood), it must be re-sealed with "Teroson Atmosit°
or a similar high grade sealing compound. The contact surfaces must be clean and covered with a layer of
sufficiently diluted sealing to guarantee a faying seat of the surfaces.
3.Couplings: Only balanced couplings may be used.They must not be fitted until the shaft ends and hub bores
have been thoroughly cleaned. Pulling-on and pulling-off the couplings is to be done by proper means (hubs
may be heated-up). Striking tools must not be used. The slow speed shaft of the gear unit runs in an axial
bearing. With rigid couplings, care should be taken that the shaft of the coupled machine has enough axial
freedom to take-up the heat extension of the shaft. The driving and coupling details of the contract and of
the installation drawing must not be changed.
4.Accessories: In order to protect from damage during shipping such accessories as pressure gauges, thermo-
meters, etc. these are packed separately. They are to be connected oil-tight to the points provided for them
on the gear case.
5.Oil pump: The pressure oil supplied to the gear unit by the built-on or separate oil pump must first pass
through an oil filter and an oil cooler. Gears with a flanged single-acting oil pump can be run in one direc-
tion of rotation only.
For the first start of an epicyclic gear unit, a separate oil pump aggregate is necessary on principle. The
electric wiring should ensure that the oil pump will automatically work before the gear unit is started.
The suction head is not to exceed 3 metres (10 feet) and the suction line should have a maximum diameter, be
as short as possible, and have a minimum number of bends. It is recommended to fit a non-return valve at the
foot of the suction line, and a filler at a suitable point of the suction line. Built-on oil pumps have no
overpressure valve. A safety device must be provided for in the pressure line. Fit a pressure regulating
valve or an orifice into the oil inlet line to the gear unit, which is to be set to the definitive oil pres-
U,
No 2960
GHH
WRIMUNKM 81113TEN113FFIMILINSEMILITTEE
ISA:TM.K STERKRADE AKTIE- NGESELLSCHAFT
Watt
sure (as specified on the data plate of the gear unit) if the oil is pre-heated; without pre-heating of the
oil (oil temperature about 20 deg. C) it should be set to a correspondingly higher value.
The capacity of the oil pump, the pressure, and the required quantity of lubricating and cooling oil for the
gear unit are specified on the installation drawing.
6.Oil filter cooler, oil collecting tank: The oil must be fine filtered before being introduced into the
gear unit. For constant cleaning of the oil, a fine filter screen with 8,000 to 10,000 meshes per cm2 (site
of meshes 0.06 mm) is required. (The pressure decrease in the clean filter shall not exceed a maximum of
0.5 atii.)
The oil cooler shall be dimensioned to safely dissipate the heat specified on the installation drawing with
an oil outlet temperature from the gear unit of 60 deg. C.
The oil cooler must be installed so that during service no air cushions will build-up in the cooler.
The oil collecting tank must be capable of holding at least five times the quantity del'vered per minute by
the oil pump and it must be located as to satisfy the conditions set forth in section 5 (oil pump).
The container must, moreover, be sufficiently de-aerated.
7.Piping: All pipe connections on the gear unit are provided with blind flanges. These must be removed and
the pipings connected oil-tight and air-proof. The finished pipings must be thoroughly cleaned by pickling
and with brushes. Rinsing and blowing alone are not sufficient. The oil cooler must also be cleaned before
assembly.
If possible, the oil return piping from the gear unit to the oil collecting tank should be without bends and
in a regular slope. The pipe diameter specified on the installation drawing may not be reduced.
B. Safeguarding the gear unit: The equipment shall be protected by a contact pressure gauge or a manometric
switch that trips a visible or audible alarm. If a contact thermometer is used it must be mounted into the
oil return pipe close by the gear unit.
The contact pressure gauge must be located away from the gear in a vibrationfree place. It is recommended to
connect the gauge so that, with an excessive increase or decrease of pressure, it cuts out the prime mover.
Where separate oil pumps are used, the electrical wiring of the pump motor must be arranged that the prime
mover is automatically cut out when the current, the motor, or the pump fail.
Starting the Gear Unit
The gear unit may be started only if the unsupported high speed pinion is connected by a gear type coupling
(or a torsion shaft) to a machine with the connecting shaft radially guided in two bearings.
1.Oil filling: The oil collecting tank must be filled with the specified quantity of oil in conformity with
the attached oil chart.
It is not allowed to mix different types of oil.
2.Starting: The built-on oil pump must be filled with oil at the suction side before the first start.Before
and during the starting period, the gear unit must be lubricated by a separate oil pump unit until the main
oil pump driven by the gear unit and depending on the number of revolutions has reached the service speed
and the oil pressure at the inlet to the gear unit comes up to the value marked on the data plate, with an
oil inlet temperature of 40 to 45 deg. I:. If the gear unit is started without preheating of the oil, care
should be taken that at least 70 percent of the oil quantity specified on the installation drawing are sup-
plied to the gear unit.
When the gear unit is stopped, lubrication must be ensured by adding the pump aggregate until the gear unit
is actually at standstill.
Before shipment, the gear unit has been submitted to a part load or full load test run at full running speed
for several hours. Therefore, it may be fully.loaded as soon as the rated speed has been reached.
c4_ 3, Maintenance during operation: Maintenance includes checking of the oil pressure by the pressure gauge and
N- • the temperature by the thermometer; both at the oil inlet to the gear unit. With an oil inlet temperature of
LI ----
No 2960
GHH
OTZIMMO011 ISKITEDIGEFFMMISSNOTTE
• M.TM.K STERKRADE AKTIENGESELALSCHAFT -------------

BM"
40 to 45 deg. C, the oil pressure specified on the data plate of the gear unit must be maintained with a to-
lerance of 0.7 ati. Besides the admissible oil inlet temperature of 40 to 45 deg. C, the temperature of the
oil leaving the gear unit must also be continuously checked. If with unchanged service conditions the tem-
perature of the oil leaving the gear unit increases suddenly by 3 to 5 deg. C or more, the gear unit must be
shut down immediately and the reason must be found. This must also be done if, with unchanged service condi-
tions, the smooth running (vibration quality) of the gear unit is reduced.
4. Troubles and their possible causes:
Oil pump not sucking: Too little oil in the oil container,
• Oil pressure insufficient:

Suction pipe leaky,
Oil pump leaky,
Wrong direction of rotation of the oil pump.
Pressure line leaky,

Oil filter dirty,
Oil temperature too high,
Oil viscosity too low,
Relief valve set at too low a pressure.
Oil inlet temperature exceeds Cooling water quantity insufficient for the oil cooler,
the admissible value: Cooling water supply to the cooler interrupted,
Cooling water too hot,
Cooler to small,
Air cushion in the oil cooler.
Oil outlet temperature too high: Oil inlet temperature too high,
Oil flow in the gear unit insufficient,
Oil pressure at the inlet to the gear unit too low,
Service speed exceeded.
5.Cleaning the oil filter and oil cooler: The recommendations of the manufacturers are valid for the main-
tenance.
The filter must be cleaned after the first 50 service hours, if different instructions were not given. Later,
the filter should be checked and cleaned approximately every 100 hours, until the cleanness of the filter
permits longer intervals.
6.Oil change: The oil shall be changed for the first time after about 2,000 service hours. The condition of
the lubricant will govern further oil changes.
7.Notes: It is advisable to check the alignment of the installation after one year's service and to compen-
sate for any possible displacement of the foundation.
The preservation of the gear unit becomes inoperative after the first start. Installations submitted to
periods of shut-down between running periods must be preserved anew. The kind of intermediate preservation
must be decided for each case. On demand, RENK will give further details.
We recommend to inspect the gear unit any 8,000 to 10,000 operating hours.
in
No 2960
. s I t
• Maim leamonagoln on! Joni ON ?Ur
a pat?'
- I 3. dhma C•••••[r
I
Entlater
riCkan - kupP/ung
13 f•017 GS - -YKR
siehe Zeichng.-114 1170 511:switiLiudw. eit.;Drig
PI a 541- 1036 menden son gm: n;FAaicrert:(i 'S
Ku m91
StY.Y.
81.13feoler riarl3.31N68
;a,r en6Nt
filmwkernieter ourle;d1an
&Oen orityich Mitc1- cinverstal
rho! Verinerk is
1.14'.i
cito
by
Erg
+-20014S 1120 durciebohri
SO (Abcbtickjeunde)
'•--100-10
s.
i-
,,,,,„,
r
:4 ,
elbertragungsleistung 1.• 2300 04 3/30PS
N-
Kuppl--141415 G= 7k
7..
.... „,-0,,, . , 0
Antriebsdrehzahl n2- 1780 U/min. -
n,- 64-58 Ufrnin •
1• o,.-t
I 4:1 - —1-.0 Abtriebsdrehzahl
4
1
R I I I ., • befSet7un91
• .p.16-7- - 3'65 is
—,---,------, ' 7 :\--..:\ -\\ -\;.,•,) Erforderliche Schrroeroimen9e fin" day Getriebe Q - 100 bilmir• t
I j '\
:::: '-:.\\"-•' \ 1_1- -' '' . ti 1 • SthrnierOldruak amGebiebeeintritt : aterrperaiut
' Derniixiest-aa'rudi ist au/ den, Getf iebe-LeisturigssthiPJ angeseben !
6ei-Zuseclectel. 1 I-.E 1
2- - beim Anfoh,en)
ditemferatur am Getriebeeintritt 40+45°C (ouch
1
-----------4 -I
S
I
__.._ 10 - _...! 5x45; olviskosit& 36 ±4 cSt (-4,5°E) bei 50°C
i to -- . "..7
405 • &nod-, "RExik-SchmierstofTempfehluog 1)92 Aus9obe 9.68
Schnitt A-B Abzi,Phiende F/6/rneme,ige co. 45.000 kcoilh •
adruck in der I-10:ipidruckleitung bei Otte_rnperafur
for dern Irosset ft onsch 3,5 kqicrn2 .0,2
brischaltOldrud< Fir Hilfs61pumpe u. AlormaislOsung 26 rrt
.117i6,o.y.eboh.e, te, tfuliU‘.7t- d
and Crundruhmen .prsilflet Absdvitelidiock, beidern dos Gebiebe sclol sicppen is! 22kgicir-2(am Gelre4tein tr. 1.
RENK-purk 12046+ GPI - Sesivitsn9 • 2310081'625010 + 52. 2
_. I
35 54.itier
.-100 -.4
Ein b au zeichnung Cana A/c PR 40 40
004.2s.
Drbsselflen*ch NW32; 12enKl.feruti9
N ND10 • wwwww To 1- 5
fa.kirqcsl
(1.-2,5)
Einzeineit bei X'
-
r om PaLEri73.11t
MI St$Ft IS 1m
2324003/.
070690i
1
M1:2,5
.1 232
• G f:.t
o ucnstatv Andorung -
AbsInB wrrn,
Mate ohne Toleranzangabe nach mittel DIN 71611"
.• .
ecr,V.so,rdarz-efe•-lae
6etrlehowelle
Geir,ebekvelie •
6.9h speed 9ear shaft::
19L1 Teed gear shaft
An - ana AVriebskieae hvber7 .91e/cher

• Quanfitper unit Unput and Output shaft somedi'realion of-rotation.
ei1- Nr. 8enennung Snick je Eirsheit
von bis
Lager ibaZzen /comp/.
oi-is
Be- pin
129 Lager 4)180 m.Burcl List of Spo.re rboy.

Picmei-cv,y Ge, Auftrag Nr. 1`20(+61+
leoring 180 dia with collar I
Suuh•I Slack/
i •
. 1 Sach-Nr.
Benen1111119
Nt I Emhult Code Gaze.;:; ZA
155 Lager 56160
learinq 460 otio.. Benennung
Dichtring korripL 2. Planetengetrie- be

151
Sea ling ring rki Tag Name
ZAHNRADERFABRIK Ger- 124212 UNY3

Gegbib -
Kanten.. ... .. gebrochen

Lki Norm-
deprult
• AKII E NG E SELLSCNAFT Abzug: Code:.
AUGSBURG
Obertlachenzeichen Reihe 3 DIN 3141
GHH
WORM= BUTENUFFNUNESOILITTE
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
S, It. O. 04- FOR TURBO AND EPICYCLIC GEAR UNITS
Suitable oils for a common oil circuit with the turbine:
Normally loaded: Steam turbine oils with additives to TOL 36 of DIN 51 515.
,.. _404:40
Suitable oils for a separate oil circuit of the gear unit:

Same oils as for common circuit with the turbine or high-pressure gear unit oils with mild EP-additives.
VIA 80; FZG test A/8,3/90 (DIN 51 354): load stage>8, G -c-0.2 mg/PSh.
s
Common oil circuit with the turbine. Separate oil circuit for the gear unit
Oil
Viscosity at 50 deg. C
Companies
36 +4 cSt (.,,4.5 Engler )
ARAL OEL HTX extra ARAL OG 8
AVILUB Turbinen61 BS AVILUB RSL 9
BP ENERGOL TH 100-HO BP ENERGOL GR 100-EP
CHEVRON
CHEVRON OC Turbine Oil 13 CHEVRON Gear Compound 60
HYSPIN 100
ALPHA 217
QE#kFECTDAEOlVtt
DEA VISCOBIL Eterna 2
DEA VISCOBIL Seramit 4
01100.0took
ECUBSOL-Oel TNM
ECUBSOL-Del HYD e.p.
VY0-f
iCtOSOL-DaT,
TERESSO 52
TERESSO EP-58
klitg.C.Cgg*
RENOLIN DT 2 RENOLIN MR 15
GASOLIN BG 8
41D GASOLIN NTO
Mobi MOBIL D.T.E. Oil Heavy Medium MOBIL Compound AA
5 14L,TP00 al 31 SHELL Tegula Oil 27

SHED.4
VALVOLINE Turbine Oil No. 2S
VALVOLINE VL-C 500
APRESLUBE 60
Each of the above listed refiners maintains a technical service whose engineers are at the customer's disposal
for advice any time, free of charge and without obligation.
: The sequence in which the companies are listed here does not purport anything as to the grade or quality of
their brands of lubricants.
No 2960
GUTEITOOFFIVIaNGSHILITTE..
M.TM.K Blatt
8.0.0.1117 List of Contents of Unit No 8

(applicable to air and NO compressor sets)
8.2.0.1117 Oil pipings M60.8600.1202 (attached)

Oil supply system M60.8100.1223
8.2.0.63 Description of the oil ,.7,upply system
8.4.0.01 Oil specifications
8.9.1.01 Description of oil tank, 5000 liters capacity,
Drawing M60.8200.1119
8.9.5.03 Plug-in steam heater for oil tank
8.9.2.07 Gear oil pump N5/175 "Neiding", Dimension sheet.
8.9.2.24 Operating instructions and spare parts drawing
relating to 8.9.2.07
8.9:2.1117 Dimension sheet of gear pump with motor,
Dimension sheet of gear pump with turbine
Dimension sheet of electric motor "Contorno" General
Electric S.A.
KKK turbine, operating instructions
n n , mounting instructions
, installation drawing 404301 53603 (1)
8.9.3.07 Oil cooler "Westinghouse"
8.9.4.07 Twin oil filter "Boll u. Kirch", type 161-1
8.9.4.04 Cleaning of shell strainers, relating to 8.9.4.07
8.9.4.05 Valve connection, relating to 8.9.4.07
8.9.6.01 Throttle flange
8.9.9.07 Overflow valve with power control "Glyco"
8.9.9.04 Pressure reducer "Samson" 32 E
0.3.1.06 Non-return.valve "Gestra" RK 44
No 3062
stet's". A-
Schnitt A—B
— •
[Inside*** EL -1645
AW250 No 10
2.22•21022
a 3- .45.4 *515
732•.'6: /0 crer
11-1
• • I I 1
es'
-tt
_Susi •-•*s It
.4.5b 1501M
•
..*ss'-; • *•••
ry -r
3 - ASA Z *Os
N
O
I-4
t
, 3" ASA 1m IDs
-
cordong ay.,.
• J I EL.-150
•
•-• Pao Sr wow Yrs
.
qA 2100 MY) 291.0
ELVDEIALISZIENJOIGE
Fkra fox nand
1-----
Ivo 4X I
I I I WON'
Ansicht X
R.,%
b
Mellgereitetafet
71, -[34.6-Fs ELLA tits.*.,
tube od pool
Tu 8325 oftm. wee em
L*41 51515.1
Li-
Ibs---j I
Tr
Frarlsbw,pt
5021bs
t- •••••
4P-tdde-P- r•wa-
. MY FIO ?
Gesamtgewicht ohne 01 7000 kg

V 636 Who Oi To*
TX," fV, CI
•3.1
, LaNr. Nrr:r •
•
I
Gesomtgewicht mit dl 14000 kg
T 8200 S0031
Entleasuni Olboheiltor
NW 1.0 N0 16
Verdichterschemo M60.90301245
E
Na ID Apporate.-uArrnaturenlisten
M639030.1245 .01 1.11
Obbcklout
NW 250 ND V
e—
sa.m.A.,v_Eiti•NcE
•• Coo 1141' /n 25: rip GHH- Liefergrenze
8 E f.43 A`9 Lut,e 0• Ceders
— 1- 4-\
:01 F 633,418
Er4Ies,..n1 [be uner waserserNg Thestellet Petroquisa-Petrobros Alnico S/A
P2222.2c 012.12,!Is
NNE 14:15
ANTS LC $
-7= •ro r? He_ Betreiber Petroquisa Rio de Janeiro
• Ent ecnvo iNt.'ter Pi7rcquao-FAFE4 Cabs* Molts .0•70
7
.2 1
E WIZ Projekt IVr itC•er Wheeler libb[ssrrra Morter95-3102
s. isc.-Let.
Ea,?
c a, , 1:411 • Aufstellungsof '1 Cubah3o Sao Pouf°
V Art der Anlac Ncw.,,l'r ":7;;x0,AR"s°'
,X03 .1•=61••••••••
11.••••••1
3E6
:11 ••••••••• *me.
• *1•••••..--
Ate'
3 •••+.• 411.
33•30.111%* -WFS Coonlyrr WESER - e1/73 ma.

,..-.---
1.13- a-Z3131. iln.C341• tSta 031.-NEACT YAM
r NAV. 1**NE113 U. NE3..mt4s. ak,065
,s -7162 ...No
1.10
tube ed musk
. . r34 - n2.6 v..,
4.131-CG.41.1363S.I.
10 • GalS-(3.1•455011 31C0-13.1a 3.• : 410028 Oiversorgm M 6081011223j*
t WM* • 310C-1321-077171 =Z
rEMO*PS,NNW NIA•111 3100-0:1- 6.? Cuno ._.,„..,
BUTEHUFFNUNGSHILITTE
Blatt
8.2.0.63 Description of the lube oil system
For the set to operate properly it is essential

that the machines are fed a sufficient quantity
of the right grade of lube oil.
The oil supply system is rated for the operation of

both the air compressor and the NO compressor at
the same time. At separate operation of the air or
NO compressor set the lube oil supply to the set
at standstill is blocked by closing a valve
installed in the relating feed line. The passage
of, control oil is thus blocked by the solenoid valve
deenergized when the set is out of operation. The
said solenoid valve is installed in the feed line.
The lube oil supply system comprises the

following:
One pressureless oil tank with steam heater

one main oil pump with steam-turbine drive
one auxiliary oil pump with electric motor drive
one changeover-type twin oil cooler
one changeover-type twin oil filter
During normal operation the turbine driven main

oil pump sucks its supply of oil from the oil tank,
while the electrically-driven auxiliary pump is kept
ready to start up in case of failure.
Return flow of oil through the pump not in operation

is prevented by non-return valves in the delivery
pipe of the pumps. In addition, safety valves
upstream the non-return valves and draining to the
oil tank protect the pump units against inadmissibly
high oil pressures and the pump drivers against
overloading. These safety valves are set to respond
BIM GUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
A4 TM X. Blatt
to a pressure which is at least 1 kp/cd-

above the pump operating pressure.
The oil supply system is a twin circuit system.

Part of the oil is branched off past the oil
filter and upstream the oil cooler to serve as
control oil of the actuators and controllers
whereas the other part of the oil flow paSses
through the oil cooler and serves for lubrication
of the machine bearings, the gear couplings and
of the gearbox.
The pressure in the control oil circuit is kept

constant by • an inlet-pressure responsive
control valve which directs the surplus oil to
the oil collecting tank.
The pressure in the lube oil circuit is kept

constant by an outlet-pressure responsive
overflow valve which reduces the control oil
pressure to the necessary lube oil pressure.
A manually operated control valve installed
in a bypass line ensures operation of the
overflow valve in the economical control range.
Part of the required lube oil quantity flows
over the said manually operated control valve
which at the same time offers the possibility
to adjust the required lube oil pressure by
hand if the outlet-pressure responsive overflow
valve should fail.
No 3062
GHH
M.TM.K
6UTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
S.TESKRADE
Blatt
For the start-up of the compressor set it is

imperative that the oil temperature is not
below a certain minimum value in order to avoid
damage to the bearings and gearbox. In the event
of the temperature being too low the oil heater
is to be cut in. In this case the oil must be
circulated by one of the oil pumps. The Oil heater
must be cut off at the latest when the oil
temperature comes up to operation temperature
• and the cooling-water flow rate of the oil cooler

must be adjusted.
If despite an increase in the quantity of cooling

water, the oil temperature at the cooler outlet
rises inadmissibly, or if the pressure differential
between the oil filter inlet and outlet exceeds
the admissible value, this points to dirt in the
cooler and filter; both should be cleaned.
For this the changeover valve of the filter/cooler

is moved to its alternative end position. This
suffices to bring the standby units into operation.
Once cleaned, the cooler and filter are refilled

with oil to ensure a smooth changeover next time
these units are needed. Filling is done through a
bypass line mounted parallel to the changeover
valve, in which a filling valve is mounted which
must be opened only slightly in order to prevent
a drop of the main oil stream pressure when a
major filling quantity branches off abruptly.
During filling, the vent valves of the cooler and
filter oil compartments must be open. When filling
CO is finished the vent valves are closed again.
0
•
°
co
• No 3012
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNBSHLITTE
BTERKRAD•E AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
The quantity of Tube oil fed to the motor, the

gearbox and its couplings and the machine bearings
is set by adjustment of the throttle flanges that
are located, upstream the gearbox and upstream each
bearing and provided with pressure gauges. The
temperatures at the individual bearings determine
what setting is chosen.
The motor-driven auxiliary oil pump is automatically
• started if the pressure in the lube oil systems

falls inadmissibly. Via a pressure switch the current
circuit for the driving motor of the auxiliary oil
nump is closed. As a result oil is now fed to the
machine by the auxiliary pump.
If despite the cutting in of the auxiliary oil pump

the lube oil pressure continues to fall, the compres-
sor drive motors and the tail-gas turbine are shut
down via two further pressure switches and the entire
compressor set is brought to a standstill.
The set-point and operating values of the control

equipment, valves etc. can be taken from the
paragraphs 0.2.0 .... (technical data), 0.5.2 ....
(set-point values of pressure and temperature), 0.6.0
(operating data) and 0.6.8. .... (cases of
alarm).
er)
CS)
• C;I
:
ao
No 3062
GHH GUTEHEIFFRIUNGSHIATTE
BTERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
•
8.4.0.01 Prescriptions-as-to oil
Use turbine-oil only for the set, .e. oil which has the
following properties:
specific weight at 20°C (68°F) max..0.90 kg/1
o
.3 - 4.0 E )in case of turbine.
viscosity, at 50°C (122°F)
21 - 29cSt )drive
4 - 4.6°E )when using a
29 -34cSt )toothed wheel gear
Flash point for oils with a viscosity, at 50°C, of:
3 - 3.4°E (21 - 25cSt) min. 180°C (356°F)
• 3.4 - 4.5°E (25 34cst) min. 200°C (392°F)
point of solidification max. -8°C (180F)
neutralization coefficient max. 0.05 mg KOH/g of oil
it
saponification coefficient max. 0.15 " "
-moisture - max. 0.1% in weight

ash max. 0.01% "
hard asphalt 0
fat oil addition not - admissible
water segregation-of treatment max..150 sec. (300 sec. for
with steam blended oils)
The coefficients of neutralization and saponification as well

as the ash content may be a little higher fOr blended oils
provided that the basic oil meets:the, above conditions.
Conversion diagram
4' t-- t'-- re\ ap

47 tn mo
o Fr\In VD CO 0 S ul . 00 in E--- 0 tc)
..S .. ek • S O. 5 5 II •
4- a 4.,
i.CV CV N ir\ PrV41 -7-7 4- .4- in to to LINO
El Ni t i t I i
I 1
BD T
q) t'2 00 0 "1 inI . to - - Kl N
C) 4-0 ft .-I N •-• in, .0 • to •
CV Nu 1 C9VeN Pr\ teN t--- 0 .--1 intfl.
'-0 Cu ' - -7
vl N ieN teN -7•
O
•0 t-- o Cu
co o oo re\ in
O o 0.0 co .
•-i 0
O
teN to ko lrl 0 CV •-4 NN CV. Cu
O 1.S1-1*
II I CT 4-1
.
.
• Co l
N0 0 N 0N ,0 N 0 N0 0
O 11 teN In 0 Cu to 0 in cno to 00
v-4 •-1 4-4 N N N . K.\ re17 4
No 2960
GHH GIUTEHOFFNILINISSFIWITE
S T E R K R A D E AKTAENGESELL-SCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
In no case the oil to be used is permitted to be blended

with oil of another quality or with oil of another
Supplier.
The oil must be charged into the tank through a fine-

meshed screen only.
Check in short intervals whether water (cooling water,

sweat-water) has entered into the oil. Water possibly
entered must be discharged (drain connection at oil tank).
Immediately make out and remove the cause.
The oil 'must- not foam and must be capable of being

purified and used several times.
.ft least twice in a year the.oil shall be checked by the

Technical Service of the Supplier of the oil.
Discharge and filter the oil after.a run of twenty hours

following the first putting into operation and following
every general overhauling work. Then clean also all the
oil-leading machine-parts (oil tank, oil filter, pipe
lines, bearings, etc.).
Use faultless cleaning cloth only.
No 2960
GHH GUTEHLIFFNUNGSHIITTE
STERKRADE AKTiENGESE - LLSCHAFT
M Tm-K Blatt
8.9.1.01 Oil tank
4 i\
4
/ \ 10
f Manhole cover
2 Filling opening
3 Vent
4 Oil return
5 Strainer
6 Oil level indicator
7 Level switch
8 For installation of steam-or elektric heater
9 Pump connections
10 Oil -and mud drain
IBUTIEHISFFNUAISIBMITTE
M.Tm-K Blatt
•
Design
The tank of stable construction is made from steel plated
connected by welding. All weld seams were examined for
oil tightness. Removable covers at the top end, fixed by
bolting, ensure easy cleaning and dust-tightness. A
partition wall, permitting oil overflow, divides the tank
into two chambers, which have a sloping bottom with
drain cock at the lowermost point. A tube extending
traversely through the vessel and fixed by welding, offers
the opportunity of installing a heater.
Mode of operation
Any oil flowing back from the bearings is collected in
a trough of plate material, which extends over the entire
width of the vessel. The bottom of this trough consists
partly of 250-micron screem-cloth retaining any dirt
particles and other foreign bodies. While any foam
entrained by the oil is retained at the surface by a
traverse plate, the oil sinks slowly through the cloth,
over the entire width. Any air contained in the oil
escapes. The partition wall forces the oil so de-aerated
to rise again. Mud and water, if any,'6remain at the
bottom and accumulate at the deepest point of the tank,
where they must be drained from time to time by means
of the drain cock.
The cleaned oil flows over the partition wall towards

the suction chamber of the tank.
Proper ventilation of the tank is ensured by a nozzle

provided with a layer of Raschig rings. Any oil vapours
settle at these rings, and are retained as drops.
No 3062
SchrriAt 6 -b
Schni# a -4.
Ansi*, A" Ans-k4/ .3" 6,7zr,'heit,H"
tgXVOIre;5705V
:m841754814, 5454.7:- .
. S C___../ G r C795
elk
1 016
V \ ' ! ---4 64
- --42
.°) 28 43
mvioreas - NW 150 ND 16
70-:'2 5469 6 60,55
56,61,56 • E
535
76 ; [ 150
,200
7- 8"
R 1/2 .
,m6
0 •
•
d
N't V /25 NO16
59,64 •
NW40 N16
-4 •
58, 63 17-21
6 , 77: *; I I
333 3.30 33c .330 4.0 333 Yo
8 • Ag
goo Is-.o
‘5.././Wiff NW kj: la 6,0
Elleerung No 16'
Al7Ski114,, 20
awnwerxstatt .—
Beivite.'mzen atamtonsohreeitsi(o4nsrtlienciailimrititi,
.1404.rw tio gt• don) Auffallc.4 ,,u 112cti Liciffical kfilerertro air •
sh.ee rinse ,
L 141228 enseelt o.4nano4eacipt.e101. , 7 .• •.
Altclr Rcatunj 8.4alstroAerung rink effnungifit ,6 don 111.1aasiaptetit
ectschUeSen. ' .
8c1.88er 'men
Pas 7 ma 8 unterbrochen 3 50/, 250 foinstibg 1 geschwcisft
6‘
: "Pinig#
,,a4
7;
ow. 10....1444re
cs6.c44ga14e~e ovectr 0.42
C 1 • air a, a
werdorf compro:47,9orA".---
,offirol.” noofroifPf. Ce •
Fiornoroofogonotbotfrhar44ffP, Koe kf,.aM-
a. orairiirijoloo. 40eA o..../ordoopsf000t...,
,
kwargunga,. sties' er-100
550
55
ess Achlung !
4.,.[LS, H, 6s .
Au! Kuriclenwunsch 01behalter 50001 mama
9?
MO16 NO
ofbeAri "- '4 6 0 82 00 rig
BUTEHIGIFFRAUNGSHUTTE
GHH ' GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
•
STERKFI'ADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M,TM,K Blatt
I.
;t1
The function of the steam heater is to heat the oil

before start-up of the set to a temperature suitable
for operation.
The tubes (2) are inserted in the tube plate (1)

and connected by welding. Together with the sup-
porting plate (3) they 'are mounted in the fully
closed pipe (4) of the oil tank. The divided
• steam chamber (5) bolted to the oil tank fixes

the tubes (2) with tube plate (1) at one end . and
at the same time provides the sealing against the
shell pipe (4). On the opposite side the shell
pipe is sealed by the cover (8). The steam chamber
has two welded nozzles (6) for steam inlet and
outlet. The nipples (7) are for draining and venting.
Welded to the upper part.of the cover (8) is the
filling nozzle'(10) for the heat transfer liquid.
This has also the function of compensating thermal
expansion of the liquid. The rod (11) in the'filling
nozzle allows the level of the heat transfer liquid
• to be checked. The nipple.(9) welded to the lower

part of the cover (8) serves to empty the shell
pipe (4). The heat transfer liquid must not be water
or a similar liquid which may cause corrosion.
Before- the heating system is put into service the

level of the heat transfer liquid should be checked.
The pipe (4) must be completely filled. Air in-
clusions will reduce the effect considerably. Dirt
deposits on the steam tubes will similarly reduce
the heating effect. Therefore it is necessary to
remove these dirt deposits from the tubes (2) and
the pipe (4) internally and externally from time
to time. Apart from this no maintenance work is
required.
GEM SUITEICEIFFNUNSSINUTTIE
STERKRADE AKTIEN•GESELLSCHAFT
M Blatt
• 8.9.2.07 Zahnradpumpen Typ:

N bzw. NG u. NU bzw NUG 4/130 !pis 5/175
Bauform A Gruppierung 1, Norm E7 Motor nach DIN 42 673
Normal Ausfiihrung: Drehrichtung rechts
• Strichpunktierte AusfUhrung Typ: NU bzw. NUG
MaBanderungen vorbehalten
no-0
* Diese Mafie sind dem Manbtatt des E -Motor Herstellers zu entnehmen.
5augflansch
Pumpen Druck
Moor - Grundplatten- Mahe Bau- Mahe Druckflansch DnxdPkelen
Ums611510°E -
Gra* otii KW 6r08e ol ab.-cefsh,2 nmimno.q us y c d ksgNW Drone
1,8 3,0 112 3 83 - 38 0750-010

520 340 720' 370
3,2 4,0 112 M 14 205
100 25
4,5 5,5 132 s 580 - 780 0830-D10
---- 390 -. 18 200 160 80
420
4/130 6.5 7,5 132 M 640 840 65 205 130 125 283 18 18 4. 0930-o10
185 145 65
10.0 11,o 160 M - So
225 • 10 1010-020
15,0 15,0 160 L 120 660 440 30 90o 480 18
16,0 18,5 180 to,-., 245 + 30 1010-040
2,o 4,0 112 M 520 540 720 570 83 - 38 0740-010
SS 5,5 152 3
100 580 25 780 14 205 _08 30-D10
-390 420 - 18
7.5 152 m
640 84o 8o _____ , 8 200 160 • 8o 0930-U10
4 /150 .222- 65 205 150 455 295
8,0
_.- 11,0 160 M 120 66o 440 50 900 480 225 10 185 145 65 ..!out-Iro
12 5
._.!_-__ ;5,0 460 1, 18 245 i110-02(1
.---
---- 180 600 (490 55 060 540 115
1c;.0 T17,5 1110 m • . 265 4; 50 1110-040
5,0 5.5 152 3 100 ollo 590 25 84D 420 - 43 0950-010
14 230
4,6_ 7.5 132 M 88
_ __.
6.5 11.0 160 m 120 660 440 so 900 480 240 220 180 8 100 1021-010
5/140 75 245 150 137 318 - 15 20 18 ...
9.0 15,0 1°0 1. 600 18 258 200 160 4- 80 1120-010
1110-011
13,0 18,5 180m 180 _____ 490 55 960 540 263
93
• 5
•
16,0 22,0 180 1. 700 ' 1060 • 1210-011
1,T 5,5 132 3
100 64o 390 25 840 42o 14 23o 88 - 43 0950-D10
3.3 7,5 132 m
O 5,4 11,0 160 m 600 960 93 1120-D10'
258 - 15 220 180 8 100
7,0 15,0 160 L 75- 245 150 155 335 20 18 1220-D10
5/175 18,5 180 M 180 540 18 200 160 '4- 80
9.5 490 35 263 1210-D11
700 1060 98 -4- 8
W CI 12,0 22,o 180 L
16,0 30.0 ,200 L 283 + 25 1210-00
CO
* Bei Betrebsd, Ucken fiber 10 atO. Lochanz4hi g = B
No TOST
GHH OUTEHOFFRIIIINGSNUTTIE
Blatt
8. 9. 2. zif Description and Operating Instructions

for
Ff. •ug. N•Ig$g S6on•
MatinlIgoin Gear Pumps
Baureihe N Form N
General Data:
The gear pump consists of the housing, the transfer gears, the cover on the po-
• wer input side and the end cover. Suction and pressure connections are also part
of the housing. According to the type of the pump the shafts can be fitted with
white metal bearings, bearing bushes or roller bearings. The shaft extensions
tliroughthe cover on the power input end are sealed off with either gland packing,
sealing ring or slip ring packing. •
Operation:
The rotation of the drive shaft in the specified direction creates a vacuum on the
suction side with the result that the liquid to be conveyed is dra'wn into the suction
chamber. By means of the spaces in the gearmesh the liquid is then transferred
into the discharge chamber and from there into the discharge line. The direc-
tion of rotation of the drive shaft and the direction of the flow cannot be changed.
The shaft bearings which are fitted within the pump housing are lubricated by the
liquid to be transferred, whereas the shaft bearings which are fitted externally
• are lubricated by means of grease cups.
The term "W" in the type specification indicates that the pump is fitted with au-
tomatic change over valves, which allow the drive shaft to rotate in either di-
rection, but the direction of flow remains constant.
The term. "U" in the type specification indicates that the pump is fitted with a re-
lief valve. This :valve is an adjustable safety valve and is not constructed to act
as a quantity control valve.
nos
The pump must not be used with closed or partly closed discharge lines and the-
-reby 'forcing the whole of the liquid through the relief valve. If the pump is not
provided with a by-pass arrangement, the whole of.the liquid forced through the
relief valve is returned within the pump housing into the suction. chamber.
If the relief valve is fitted with a starter valve the pressure of the relief valve
is decreased by turning the handwheel on the starter valve in clockwise direc-
tion. After the completion of the starting and/or manoeuvring actions the hand-
wheel should be slowly turned anti-clockwise until the relief valve is operating
again to the specified pressure.
GHH BUTEHUFFNUNIBEKUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
•
Operating instructions:
At the initial start the pump should be primed with the liquid to be transferred.
'If the suction decreases all seals .and packing rings, especially on• the shafts
should be checked, and if necessary, renewed; care should be taken that the cover
holding baits are equally arid well tightened.
Important Note:
Gear pumps should never he -allowed to run dry. The pumps should be employed
to transfer only the liquid for which they are constructed. Foreign matters and
impurities, even in small quantities which may be contained in the liquid, will
• lead to loss of efficiency, and ultimately to damage of gears and hearings.
No 2N0 .
O
e 9. 42-, L y (¢) a%3 • '
..enco ere.er pony

-7
1: 1 27 14/39 13/38 30 79 20 41 111 551 40 37 32 25 56.7/1649 561 6.50 15 13/38 63 29 28 41 77 111 31 40 32 33 143//§ 49
rjj
27 55 7
11201A
77;.'502,52.7 39/15 39116 71 12 6179 21 12 461 30 1E01'

57 717 ,55 23 '°2 34 5(1125-7? 31 102 23 40 33 32
,51c 701 2? 49/56,5 73/36 21
.110•rn NIIM VII WI**
•11,
form F with heatina jacket

25 •
j76- /56 2 Mal Misr PPP WO/ • 'gm fl 68 • 8 340 • 40 26 kR
Inver. stool •••••1 11440
. .
$1 I MPIPP•••••41./.1 *PRA moo .tor .11 .. Inver.
VP IC mine 14/4,... ...p.a.,. en.
ra 541
11:
S4
.
/
.
Pow/pp
Aar., aye 'Arno loyal

/410
..,
re• :
•••••1
• ••••10 0..a.••
••••
mine ionnolunan, CI"
1/1.,
I
•••••O
/gm
‘711 rl IIINIVIong SOUS /0 • Men
Iforn. • IMO
1/67 Si
St
I
...411. •
yy
••••••• PPM
/mr••11 .,
• smn 41
NOW." 6.1
00•4 12••••••• .10
CV 1.6 .0000esa
eh, bop
(PAS
r" ••••,.
Om,. MVP
.epps/ won
4•11. pop
.
If / pPer4444P4P1 CO•• ....ta• V .H.0 1 , 0.• 0414 !a as. I, ohnno•••

tOp. • !M.P... 14 OPPskliop sow sio• I Immo.- Mrse*/ Pawl mr••••1
46,477/50' 421 16179 12 4 57 .541 II P
I /41•00
pars, P., *We. • •••: :?...
.••••••1
1
51 541 20 1.1 P PSIP 1$
31 ono,. 110.4 2,4 711/.. 'I I
61
20
19
sc-dr 44.
4/
I
12.
I
11. /1
es*
11410 /4•10
40•9
roon, *On
gm. 2.1
PPS 2 ,
2,
JO
mono rd..
• [:1:/
0 3
S:: 1;4
f :IL ••1
1.1
sou u.
.11.1,1••
22 7411, 45 I* „ ‘ . .101•••••
45 IVA 462 20 •orad.ona. rue

...••••••••
Inv
00•1 14
0 1 1.1
C ..
Id r. •
564 11... 21 ‘," .....,•••••••••• near••••
17 ♦ Is. /mg Rem, Fry.wow.I Imo .mlY Rem
!, $ ...•••••• romps, Jr
21 ols141 is SD 91.
W .v roe
42
02
03
••••
es1/ 4./•• - I- L
/P2
Inn- oppl•••••
31 57 JI 0000 M T
,/open 4,111.11...36. Oft.13.• •
rew
58/59 12 1 53 2.4 3 0 I
20•11.
II.. POMO
L/37
1.,”
90 753 re'
MIR WINN,
., sp, •• pw.IPP IgInt,PrOMPOP repso.p.sr — 1•421.9 //V WS' 3.14 /MP 01/././
5.14 o
•
8,9,2.1117 113
• • •
13 75 •
300
5 150.
155. - • 335 466 / 6 20
--r
Mo or
Gen. Electric
ar CON tORNO DrUcken Saugen
36'60 . •
.r-
OD—
rn
CD
c0
85 018 CD
k_ 200 350 350

1100 450 _
500
!Saugflansch Druck flansch
Gozolchnof -
27.07.72. 4.124—a.-4' Ildff.../19
T
GeprOff
31.07.72. l‘•-- S'Ochlisfor.N1 auft,09,44, 8.1.0. 938 7 2 7
Normgepta ft lus Zchg
:Hi id() H
Zahnradpumpe NG 5/175
180 r Bauform A Gruppierung 1
713 53 9 (4)
220 _ Fr Aug Neidog Sohne MoBsfah ,fs'onden our ft :e l f ur
hlonnheim to'we ;
•
8.9,2.1117 213
• • •
1408 am-
-.1/0zew 913 335 ► 15 5

"I:
400 -I
it
150 150_ 20
KKK
D sicken Turbine
co
c7) BF 4
ti ey o sii ese Et ue! Di v

NW 50
r 1,
NIA
"Th
1
e 90
Leckwasser
200 325 325 200
25
. OW. ...MS 400 • - •-•-• T050
450
Druck/10,73Th favgfia,Isclz
Gezeichnet •
GeprOft
25.07.72. Anderuns,
I
26,07,72. StOckbilen-Alr 8.1.0.938 7 28
Normcept f! .fir
Zahnrocipumpe 1YG 51175Bovform A

Gruppierung 1 rn Turcs/ne 713 53 8 1-) (4)
100 Fr Aug. Netthg Sehhe MoBsint 1 Entsf ,:refun aus
— 160
180 Mannheim 51omni-or.3. 8w 2 2 f' 4,)
200 220
..••••""—(
• •
GENERAL ELECTRIC S. A. I
A
a
1 I I
MILO
OEPAATALCIa0 Ct famPONJ610
DI
244A140
C DIMENSOES EM MILIMETROS CONTORNO 184 a 445U- TRI - CLAD 5
PRI/AEIRO FEITO PARA: CARL
TFVE A PROVA DE' ,EXPLOSL
•
N-W
P. BETA.
AE
I
AA EURO Cl RaSCA FIG, 2 FIG. 5
P/ ELETROOUTO
A
\H_!_4!upoS) FIG, I 8 g MENORES TERAO TOLEPANCIA OE
* OS E1XOS COM 0 DE 36.0
+o,00cio
76LERArciA OE. t"
-0,0127 E OS MAIORES
•
."°
=.CI.025 4
PESO RASSO OE +0.0
FIG. CARC. APROX CHAVETA B C D-0,8 E F G H J K L N-W 0 PTU*VAEBA I - A CA1XA OE LIGACOES PODS SEA MONTAD)t OR MOOD RUE
KG. L ARG. PROP. COMM. A ENTRADA DOS FIOS Si FACA POR. LIMA, BAIXO
1 . 184 40 476 25 35 225 17.9 384 114,3 95,2 698 12 10,7 40 36 186 57 240 245 58 22225 51 110 70 POR OUALOUER DOS LADOS DESDE DUE AS COMDIOOES 4
888 14 10,7 48 _42 . 226 _7;5_ 290. 58 28575 72 130 89 INSTALACAO 0 PERMITAii.
1 215 65 6,35 AS 51 269 215 480 133,4 108.0 .299
2 256U_ 127 .0 7.94 40 70 320 300 592 158,9 127,0 F.276 15, 1351 60 68 262 15 339 345 65 -34125_ 19 . 16.6 108-- 2- OS MOTORES OE ,CAPCACA COM SUFIXO TERPO EiX0
3 , 2860 165 9,53 5,0 95 355 330 668' 1778 139,8 139,8 18 131 70 76:284 124 370 385 65 41275. 117 175 lir CURIO APRORIA00 PARA ACOPLAMENTO DIRETO.
3 326US .285_ _9,53_ 59_48 _40 369_678 ?032 158,8 152.4_ 291 167 e6 _86 310_83 425 440 65. 41,275 76-- 2.6-6- 133
3 32611 285 12,70 6,5 108 405 360 738 203,2 158,8 152 4 20 16,7 80 186 310 145 -425 440 65 -47.6-25 137 200 133
3 365US 400 12.70 5,5 51 455 375 812 2286 177,8 1556 26 167 82 86 412 95 475 495 75 47625 89 200 149
3 -_, 35511 400 12.70 6,5 127 455 375 880 2. 0,e 177,8 155,6 .2616,7 82 .86_ 412 16. 2 475 495 _75 63,_975 156 200 149
,7 el., ___7p__,pp5 425 908 25.1,9.
3.... 405US 55 0_ 120 293,2_ 174,9. 32_20e 88 96__ 456- 193 530 550 . 58 53,975 102_ :0; !
,:.:i 166_
;,..._v 405U 550 1_03_8 13,0 lag 595 425 9130 251:p. 2032_ 174,6_ 32 26,q_ 88 96 456 181 530 559 88. 60,325 175 239 199_
t 3 445US 780,12,70 5,5 70_ 555. 5061929 279,4 229,6 209638- 29,6_98 108__518 Ice §p§, c.) _94 53,975 102- _ 255 190
: 3 445U 780 19,05 9,5 178 555 500 1136 279,4 228,6 - 209,6 38 20,6 98 108 518 2,,3 585 615 94 73,026 213 255 teo
! TFVE A PROVA .DE EXPLO§A0

.• ,,
FIG, CARL M N AA AB AC AF XL XN ZA M. N AM ABACAFXLXNZA DESEF4H0S • PiAP.R.0 VA C AO- Pt1itOttS1 cA cowurro HT.
WHIT. f50EQ WH6E L6 trtql—C.Aartt.11495-140
I. 1 CLIENTE P67R.0 RIOS S.UIMItA S1A - P6111_24.0%‘4
184 138 60 3/4-14 195. 155_65 90 320 138 60 3/4.- 14 205 160 65 120 .116 330
--1CY
pos.ran Mil PEEP v75/-Rt4•N13k°1-131/

PED. NI
1 215 . 176 79 3/4-14 215 175 Q. 90' 360 176 78 3/4 -14 225 x 80 65 120 115 370 "CTEM - MP-1,3V-8
228 102 1'4'11 260 210.- 90 110 435 2,0 102, !I/4:111 265'210 105 175 155 440 RED. INT '71111 "2 31, -ITEM 1 Itr100051(3‘g$AL14 Afoloo-1381-41a
6.• 6.01 cw
t 2' 256U
25611„ 254 _1 4o. 1_1(2-11 285 230 90 110_ _480 254,139 . 114.- 11y2290 239105 .175155 485 t-4/0 CV . YPO 'v. 4 PoLos FOolso Hi vs.:•1100-1314. 15 8i7 L
13
---
3 ,A2.(308 278 9o . 2-11_ 330 270 115 133 • 550 2713 . 90 2-11-1/1 345 275 130 -225 191 565 cARC 4454+ 11POJc.ROL.SKF LP t) 0F, b5fer,„
i A 5294 279!50- .2.1-1 L 330 270 115 135 55b 278 ISO 2 -11/,z 345 275 13.0 225 195 565 'OB8.- C.i.E4--_,W4• CI R04c4" mar
01 0
•
-3- 365Ui 296 104 3;11 410 320,i 165 180 655 296 104 3-8- 415 330 165 275 200 660
.3 3659 2-96 (72 3 -H - 410 320,165 260 1.80 655 296 172 3 - 8 415 330 165 275 20.660
APROv.`--11.-1- DATA 11/i ,
.3 405US 334 11.13 3711 449 34.5 155 260180 715 334_1183.78.__ 449 366 195 275. 299 715
3 405U 334 IpC 3_711 440 345 165 26.180 715, 334'196 3 - 8 440 360 15 - 5 275 20. 715 DATA Nu°
-A
vIGTp
.. ......
......e -ant" Ito -4 -t i EMS 1.75 165 260 1130 775 390 118 '. 3-8 470 390165 275 200775 F El TQ POP *7206•,1 4 /6- A PRO VADO
56 .
I p PEP79,
" _: I 244/414d-
SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
STEAM TURBINE
Index :
1. CHARACTERISTICS
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE TURBINE

2.1 General Features
2.2 Overspeed Trip
2.3 Speed Regulation
3. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 Putting the Turbine into Service
3.2 Supervision of the Turbine
3.3 Stopping- the Turbine
4. MAINTENANCE OF THE TURBINE

4.1 After 500 Hours of Service
4.2 After 10 000 Hours of Service
4.3 Shutting down the turbine for a lengthy interval
5. LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS
b. CAUSES OF TROUBLES AND THEIR ELIMINATION
7. SPARE PARTS
0
0 8. ILLUSTRATIONS
0
— o 9. GOVERNOR DESCRIPTION
0
0
-•
-4042 019 0 043 E
MN.
STEAM TURBINE, TYPE BF 4/50 s
ONO
KKK Job No.:4.. 043.511 Year of construction:
Regulation: Speed Regulation
1". CHARACTERISTICS
Output normal 23 kW
g•m•I
• Speed of the turbine
maximum
1800
27 kW
_ RPM
Speed of the overspeed trip 1070 RPM
Live-steam pressure normal 20 atrn.gg.

maximum atm. gg .
Live-steam temperature
o
normal tr. sett C
maximum
Exhaust-steam pressure maximum 3,5 atrn .gg .

1000000E.m. KKK6. 64
Oil charge 18 litres approx.
•
1111111,
Direction of rotation as seen from the turbine towards the coup-

ling of the driven machine: clockwise
495 1
Assembly drawing of the turbine No.: 404:; 015 3603(.1 )
4043 024 3453(4)
•
2. DESCRIPTION OF TURBINE
1 GENERAL FEATURES (Fig. 001 )
The steam turbine model BF 4 is a direct-drive turbine hav-

ing one pressure stage and two velocity stages. On leaving
the nozzle, steam flows through the single-rim turbine wheel
into a reversing chamber where its flowdirection is reversed
to send the flow of steam again through the turbine wheel for
another work cycle.
A carbon stuffing-box with vapour and leakwater drains serves

to seal the exhaust steam chamber at the point of passage of
the turbine shaft.
The turbine shaft rotates on ball bearings with splash-oil

lubrication.
The bearing casing is constructed as an oil reservoir; cooling

is provided by an oil cooler in coil shape built into the bearing
casing in such away that a temperature of approx. 40 to 5090
is maintained.
Oil temperatures up to 80 °C are admissible if oil of a vis-

cosity of 8 - 9 °Engler is used.
The oil pump as well as the tachometer are driven by the tur-
bine shaft over a helical gear.
2.2 OVERSPEED TRIP ( Fig. 001, 430 )
The overspeed trip provided as a safety device is located in

the turbine shaft near the front turbine bearing. Whenever the
maximum admissible speed is reached, the trip bolt (380.01)
is moved to the outside by centrifugal force, hitting the re-
leasing pawl (390.09) which in turn activates the spring-loaded
i
emergency slide valve. The movement of the emergency slide
2100000E.
valve is transmitted to the catch shaft (430.57) of the emer-

gency and regulating valve by means of a lever system; the
spring-loaded emergency and regulating valve closes imme-
diately shutting off the steam supply to the turbine.
495 1
In an emergency this overspeed trip may also be re-

leased by hand by pulling the lever provided at the emergency
and regulating valve.
2.3 SPEED CONTROL
The turbine speed is hydraulically controlled; variations in

rpm. speed are obtained by setting the needle in the nozzle
in such a way that, by turning the needle to the left, an in-
crease in rpm. speed is obtained while a right turn will slow
the turbine down. Proportional range is about 6 %.
lom
•••••
••=1.
3. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 PUTTING THE TURBINE INTO SERVICE
3.1.1 Check oil level in the oil reservoir; oil level should
be visible in the inspection glass. (As regards re-
filling, see lubrication oil instructions.)
3.1.2 Check handwheel on the regulating and overspeed trip
valve for proper position: wheel should be turned to
the right up to the stop.
3.1.3 Check emergency trip lever system for "in" position
(press down the lever when the regulating and over-
speed trip valve is closed to make the lever system
click into position).
3.1.4 Open drain valves for live and exhaust steam respec-
tively. (The exhaust-steam piping is only to be drained
if it does not show in downward direction.)
3.1.5 Open shutoff element in exhaust line.
3.1.6 Open shutoff element in live steam line.
3.1.7 Turn handwheel for rpm. setting to the right until the
stop is reached when first using the unit. Do not change
the setting if the proper rpm. setting was already
made.
3.1.8 Turn the regulating and overspeed trip valve hand-

wheel slowly to the left until turbine begins to run and
rpm. control unit takes over regulation.
3.1.9 Continue turning the regulating and overspeed trip

valve handwheel to the left until the stop is reached.
3.1.10 Set the desired rpm. speed by turning handwheel for

rpm. adjustment.
3.1.11 Close water drain valves.
0 3.1..12 Open cooling water valve.

0
4.4
ofb
3.2 SUPERVISION OF THE TURBINE
3.2.1 Check rpm. speed in regular intervals of appr. 1 hour

each.
3.3 STOPPING THE TURBINE
3.3.1 Stop turbine by turning the handwheel of the regulating

Y.MI
and emergency valve until the stop to the right is

reached.
In an emergency the turbine may be stopped
quickly by pulling the emergency-trip lever.
• 3.3.2 Close live steam shutoff valve preceding the regulat-

ing and emergency valve.
3.3.3 Clos.e exhaust shutoff device.
3.3.4 Open water drain valves.
3.3.5 Close cooling water valve.
1•••=1
••••••
•Ime
4. MAINTENANCE OF. THE TURBINE
The turbine should be supervised on a continuous basis with par-

ticular care to be, exerted in checking the safety devices.
4.1 AFTER EVERY 500 HOURS OF OPERATION :

(in any case not later than every three months)-
4.1.1 Check the emergency trip unit:

The turbine speed is to be accelerated by the hand-
wheel 430.53 with the fully opened speed-adjusting
device (handwheel 410.12 completely turned to the
left) until the emergency trip reacts. The trip speed
should not be exceeded by more than 10 per cent. If
the emergency trip does not react within this limit,
the entire emergency trip unit is to be checked for
proper functioning of every part.
4.1.2 How to carry out an oil check:

Whenever there is water in the oil, this is to be elim-
inated by a separator. The cause of the water contam-
ination is to be ascertained and removed.
4.2 AFTER EVERY 10,000 HOURS OF OPERATION :

(in any case not later than every 2 years)
4.2.1 Check the shaft sealing.
4.2.2 Check ball bearings and oil pump with drive.
6•4
4.2.3 Check the entire control and emergency trip systern,
•
6,1 4.2.4 Supplement greasing of ball joints at the emergency-
° trip lever system using molybdenum disulphide paste.
0
0
Be sure that these checks as well as any installation of spare
•.1 parts be carried out by experienced specialized personnel only
or by KKK specialists.
4.3 SHUTTING DOWN THE TURBINE FOR A LENGTHY INTERVAL
4.3.1 Protective measures against vapours and condensed water in the)

steam part.
Vapours and condensed water are likely to cause corrosive ac-

tions in the internal elements of the turbine during a lengthy
standstill. Such damage can be avoided by the following preven-
tive measures:
No vapours can penetrate into the steam part provided that the
live steam and exhaust steam lines are tigl toned by a blank flange .
If it is necessary to put the turbine into operation within a very
short time we would recommend to introduce double stops into
the live steam and exhaust steam lines with an intermediary aer-
ation instead of the blank flange. Moreover, the drain lines as
well as the vapour lines should be evacuated to the atmosphere
directly in descent to prevent the vapours from penetrating into
the turbine through these lines.
Corrosive damage caused by condensed water can be avoided by

the following measures :
4.3.1.1 Blast dried hot air into the turbine. In this connection
it will suffice that a small ventilator equipped with a
heating coil and connected to the exhaust line through a
valve is in operation for som, t hours daily.
4.3.1.2 Blast nitrogen into the tightened turbir.e continuously.
4.3.1.3 Introduction of an absorbent for the humidity of the air

(e. g."Silica gel" of Messrs. BASF) into the previously
dried and subsequently closed turbine.
v. tS. )
A relatively large amount of this medium preferably

packed into little cotton sacks can be accommodated in
4951 4400000E. KKK6. 64(S. 1
the exhaust flange of the turbine. The protective action

ceases to be effective after the weight of the absorbent
has been increased by a certain percentage as a result
of the humidity of the al-. absorbed. (32 p.c. for "Silica
gel".) The absorbent becomes ineffective after a consid-
erable period of time only, because the ambient air has
access to the air enclosed in the turbine through the
shaft stuffing box exclusively. For long standstills,
however, the efficacy of the absorbent should be exam-
ined after certain intervals (determine the increase in
weight).
•
Do not forget to remove the absorbent
from the turbine prior to placing the lat-
ter into operation again.
4.3.1.4 In case one of the above mentioned measures cannot be

adopted, the turbine can be given an oil film protection
lasting several months. After the cover of the exhaust
steam casing has been removed the internal elements
should be sprayed with a corrosion inhibitor after thor-
ough dry blowing.
Opening of the steam portion of the turbine for conser-

vation can be omitted by injecting the corrosion inhibi-
tor into the live steam of the slowly running turbine
through special nozzles (refer "Maschinenschaden",
Volume 26, 1953 Issue 3/4).
Prior to renewed placing into operation

the corrosion inhibitor must be removed
by ablution . To this effect it will suffice to have
the turbine run under wet steam for about 1 or 2 hours
(if possible, by cautiously injecting the condensate into
the live steam) at low speed blowing off the back steam
through the safety valve.
'4.3.2 Protective measures for the elements not conveying steam.
o.
.
4.3.2.1 With a view to avoiding corrosion as a result of con-
11) densed water in the gearing and oil reservoir it will be
suitable to adopt the same methods as for the steam
• ev.
u.)
gi*
part of the turbine. The oil should be drained from the
oil reservoir and it should be stored in a clean con-
tainer. The oil reservoir should be cleaned.
• 4.3.2.2 The cooling water should be drained only in case theie

is a risk of damage done by frost.
4 .3 .2 .3 Remove the conservation media before

495 1440 00 0 0E.
the turbine is again put into operation

and clean the oil reservoir once again
prior to filling in the oil.
Moreover, it is recommended to grade the oil prior to
filling the reservoir.
5 .•INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF LUBRICANTS
For KKK steam turbines only guaranteed pure turbine oils free
from acids and resins are to be used which meet the following con-
•••
ditions as per the DIN specifkations 51 515 :
Density at(15 °C) 59 °F up to •0,90 g/m1

0
Cinematic viscosity at(50 C) 122 F 4...6 ° Engler
Flashing point : exceeding (200 °C) 392 °F
c
Solidi :cation point normally! lower than (- 8 °C) 18 ,F
Solidification point for outdoor ::re;. than (-15°C) 5 °F
+ Neutraization number NZ : up to 0,05 mg/KOH/g of oil
Saponification number VZ : up to 0,15 mg/KOH/g of oil
Water content : up to 0,05%
Ash content : up to 0,01%
Hard asphalt : 0
• Additions of grease and oil :

Must nor emulsify
not permissible
+)If the turbine oil contains additions to decrease aging and pre-
vent formation of rust, the numbers of NZ andAi Z may be slightly
increased.
When circulating, the oil must not foam. Frequent purifying and
re-using must be possible.
The oil must be filtered through a fine-meshed
sieve before it is delivered to the oil reservoir.
The oil reservoir and all pipelines mustbe absolutely clean. Solid
foreign matter like sand, flue ash, dust, fibres of cleaning wool,
etc., must be removed from inside the pipe lines, oil cooler and .
reservoir. Newly manufactured connection lines leading to the oil
reservoir should be first cleaned by boiling.
After the turbin?, has been in operation fur the
• first time, and again after overhauls or repairs,

all the oil must be drain. ed and cleaned after 10
to 20 working hours . At the same time, all sludge anddirt
must be removed from the oil reservoir and slit filter. For clean-
ing purposes only non-fuzzing rags are to be used.
If it is found that water, such as "sweat' . condensate or cooling
5 0000 0 0 E. K KK6. 64
water has gained access to the oil reservoir or filter, it must be

removed at once on account of its deteriorating effe :t on the oil.
The cause must be determined and removed at once.
We recommend that you have you- oil f'xamined by the technical

service of your supplier e. ery s':: P.s we kn---,w from ex-
perience, these examinations are made free of charge and help
to increase reliability.
At least once a year all oil should be drained, cleaned and,if pos-
495 1
sible, centrifuged. At the same time check and clean carefully oil
conduits, oil cooler, filter and oil reservoir.
Never mix different types of oil or oil from-se-

veral supplier.
6. CAUSES OF TROUBLES AND THEIR REMOVAL
Trouble Cause Removal
Speed setting being Nozzle (fig. 001 - Clean the nozzle

unaltered. the turbine 410.03 ) clogged
is running at increased
speed
Steam sealing at the Wear and tear Install corresponding

turbine shaft untight spare parts
Water in the oil Steam sealing at the Install relative spare

turbine shaft un- parts
tight
Cooling pipes un- Seal the leakage point
tight
Emergency mechanism Contamination Check and clean. In-

does not trip stall corresponding
MEM
spare parts when
signs of wear are
concerned
- Turbine does not stop Valve seat untight Regrind the valve seat
with closed regulating or install the neces-
and emergency valve sary spare parts
Unsteady running Bearing damage Check the bearings.

Install spare bearings
Rotor deformed Check the rotor for

owing to water proper running
hammer
Unbalance in the Balance the rotor dy-
• N• rotor namically
The max. turbine output Nozzle system Open the turbine and
Wiam, is no longer reached covered with salt clean the nozzle sys-
43
tem
0
0
0
0
0
In
a.
•
7. SPARE PARTS
.011•1111
A complete set of spare parts consists of the parts marked by i-

on the illustrations.
Parts subject to particular wear and tear have been designated by

tt.
All the parts can be ordered individually except those assembled

parts which have been provided with one item only. These parts
can only be supplied as a complete unit. We recommend to order
simultaneously turbine wheel, shaft and all the parts fitted on/in
the shaft since these parts are assembled and dynamically bal-
anced in common in our works.
_• All non-itemised parts are parts as per the German Industrial

Standardization.
In order to ensure a quick dealing with your spare parts order,

we should like to ask you to indicate the turbine No., the item No.
and the designation of the spare part as per the corresponding
illustration in these service instructions when ordering spare
parts.
Turbines being equipped with automitic nozzle-group regulating

valves, the nozzle valve No. is additionally to be indicated when
ordering spare parts for the nozzle group regulating valves.
1=1
sc:
4951 7000000KKK
•
.1
Fig. 001
• BF 4 STEAM TURBINE Fig: 001
12012
. Fog 430 41011 min- 41009 4100 2

100 02
100 05
410.12.,
48000\ 160.13 •
160.16 1-
-- 41005"
16002*
. 00125 *
00113" 00126* 41003 -
29011
18002
/ 25010 39002 \
15005 / 120.21 +
15006'15004 12102* 12103* 12101' 29008 29007 12006'
09 ' \ 001.14" 39009 *" 390.11 390.10 15037
12013 * 120.12*
mm
18004
;12023"
12005 12007*
120 10 •
120.09*
180.05" 120.22'
12300 • • 390.14
.15
.16 *
100.06 ) 1229:2:: .17
.18
180.06" \ 25002" .20
18014 \mm 360 22
18003 15013 150.19"--
• 120.17" 151.02 150.15 "- 150.10 150.20"
gasket 290.08 low-pressure 390.09++ overspeed trip pawl

gasket 120.18++ inclined ball bearing 150.20++
001.13++ 390.10 spring for emergency pawl
distance bushing 150.37 breathing filter flexible tube
001.14++ gasket 120.20+ disk
151.02 suction tube 290.09 screwing 390.11
001.25+ tachometer 120.21+ distance bushing
lubrication pip,. 290.10 lubrication pipe 390.14 lever shaft
spring coupling 120.22+ splash ring 151.06
001.26+ Ermeto type reduction 390.15 - ball pin
120.23++ round shaped rubber ring 160.02+ .reversing chamber 290.11
100.02 turbine casing 390.16+ needle cage
shaft 160.09+ nozzle conn,•ction
100.05++ gasket 121.01+ 390.17 half-moon shaped ring
160.13+f gasket ring I 290.14+ helical wheel
100.06 cover 121.02+ guide bush radial gasket ring
nozzle cap screw 290.15+ helical wheel 390.18
121.03+ threaded plug 160.16+
100.12 stud bolt oil gauge 390.20 adjusting spring
turbine wheel 180.02 stuffing-box flange 360.22
120.05+ adjusting spring 123.00+ 410.02 casing of the speed-
180.03 stuffing-box casing
120.06+ adjusting spring overspeed trip bolt adjusting device
150.01 bearing casing 180.04 chamber ring 380.01+
120.07+ adjusting spring guide hush 410.03 nozzle -
.13 bearing inset 180.05++ carbon ring 380.01+
120.09+ nut 150.04
en annular pressure 380.05+ spring 410.05++ gasket
locking plate 150.05 oil collecting cover 180.06++
O 120.10+ 380.10+ shim 410.08 needle
O nut 150.06++ gasket e prin g
120.11+ 390.02 casing 410.09 base ring
150.09 bearing inset 180.12 distance tube
120.12+ locking plate 390.03+ overspeed trip 410.10++ oil packing
O safety ring 180.14 ventilation plate -
O 120.13+ ventilating disk 150.10 410.11 .cap screw
slide valve
120.15 safety ring 150.13 oil collecting cover
O 290.02+ oil pump 390.04 spring 410.12 handwheel
ut 120.16+ bushing 150.15++ gasket .1 locking screw 480.00 sheeting
290.07 angular screwing 390.05
120.17++ cylindrical roller bearing 150.19 oil cooler
--
• and •• see service Instructions.
J chapter 7
Fig. 430
REGULATING AND 0 VERSPEED TRIP VALVE
••
43003 - 02 43016". 43043 43021 43024 43023 43029'1 43035-02 43036 430.35-03 43045
430.47
43003 -01"
I/
430.52
43011 430 73
•:,,SSVMN4kreie
./ArMiii,5 • 430.74.
, .._,...
Wa1e4• . I
43012 .
.1 :. •learra•••efferai•=a-agi BSI
rilLVIiiii-,iwerawHI , 'a
leWIWI
MVy, man ),
Iril MB IM I HIM 1.11.5
y
.•k r1.1n17 I
,,..
INN
430.53
43002 ---- IIIKV4

VP•
%"gerAMINWRIIIIIMkaL% r. - .w., , .1:;„,6144
.•.,
,,A7.=.011
v.,.., ;wow
• -7mmte
millninEMIW'!illIM4n immill
iW. 430.72
Aar. ..4519WMAIVA41-.'-c.NO -
42/ MTr.g.:Tdr
430.71
430 13
._\
430.51'.
\ N
•• 43041'
1
/ 4
/ ‘'N
43008 43015 11101 43018 43042 .43028h 43031 43035-01 43033 43034 43039 430 44 43040 • 43070
43099 43061. 43060 43057 43062
111.01 valve casing 430.35-02 restoring spring

390.02 lever 430.35-03 cover
390.03 lever 430.36 slotted socket pin
390.04 angle joint 430.39++ gasket
390.08 hollow rods 430.40 stud bolt
430.02 valve seat 430.42 distance bushing
430.03 - 01++ regulating cone 430.43 splash plate
430.03 - 02++ steam strainer 430.44 distance bushing
430.07++ threaded plug 430,45 distance bolt
430.08+ relief cylinder 430.47 tension disk
430.11++ valve spindle 430.48+ axial grooved ball
430.12++ spring bearing
430.13++ spring plate
430.15+ guide bushing 430.51++ threaded bushing
430.16++ gasket 430.52++ adjusting spring
430.18++ gasket 430.53 handwheel
430.21 stop bushing
430.23 spring plate . 430.57++ pawl shaft
430.24 cup spring 430.58++ adjusting spring
495043 00022
430.26 spring 430.60 needle cage

430.27 spring 430.61++ radial gasket ring
430.28') spring 430.62 closing cover
430.29'1 spring 430.70 cover
430.31 spring plate 430.71 threaded spindle
430.33 regulating cylinder 430.72 distance bushing
430.34 regulating piston 430.73 safety ring
430.35 -01 restoring piston 430.74++ radial gasket ring
4. and •• see ..mice instructien•. I) These items are nut

chapter 7 always installed
SPEED REGULATION
B F 4
For the turbine speed control a gear oil pump .( 1 ) is used .. ThiS
oil pump driven by the turbine shaft gives an oil flowproportional
to the sl.:•eetl.
From the oil pump the oil is discharged via nozzle (7) to the pistcin
(4) of the servomotor. The impulse pressure to operate the piston
equals the impact pressure of the oil jet at the nozzle. The oil not
used to operate the piston flows off through ports (2 and 3 ). An
increase of impulse pressure causes the regulating valve to close
• against the spring. The regulating valve is on its steamside near-
ly unloaded.
- Because the impact pressure depends only on.the specific weight

of the oil and the square of the oil flow speed, the friction losses
in the line between oil pump and nozzle dependent on the tempera-
ture are eliminated. Were there no friction in the liozzle between
ports (2 and 3) all the oil flowed off through port (3).
The friction in the bore between ports (2 and 3) increases with oil
• viscosity as temperature falls. Therefore a certain amount of oil
.
flows off through port (2) and is not involved to maintain the im-
pact pressure. This gives a viscosity compensation, which by
correct calibration of the ports compensates the varying dis-
••••4 charge of the gear oil pump at different oil temperatures.
Speed is adjusted by needle valve (8 ), the lowest speed being ob-

•.° tained with the needle valve (8) closed. By opening the bypass the
speed can be continuously adjusted up to the trip speed. The droop
between full load and idling depends on the stiffness of the springs
(5 and 6) acting on the piston and is adjusted to approximately
CD 6 p.c.
0
0
0
0
cr•
--•
SPEED REGULA TION
BF 4
0000000000C•
• • if,
/00000000l:
_• 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 431._
oo00000• 000O
/IG
/////
E 49500110000
3
\
fV
U)
‘1,
L
N
0
0
S.ETTING
FOR THE EMERGENCY LEVE.R SYSTEM

(Figures 001, 430)
1. CI-IECKING THE SETTING
The emergenc, lever system has correctly been. set when the
emergency pawl (390.09) and the pawl shaft (430.57) can be
engaged by pressing on the lever (390.02) and, moreover, when
the lever system (390.08) can still. be moved .elastically by
about 1 f.o 2 mm up to the stop. For this purpose the handwheel
(430.53) must have been turned to the right up to the stop. By •
turning the handwheel to the left, the valve can now be opened.
When the emergency trip is released by hand or by the emer-•
gency governor, the lever system must cover a distance of 3
to 4 mm, the valve being opened.
Z. RESETTING THE T.EVER SYSTEM
If the conditions specified under 1. haVe not been met, the le-
ver system is to be reset as follows (the handwheel must have
been turned to the right up to the stop)
2.1 The lever system is somewhat too long-
The e:-:) ,:rgency pawl cannot be engaged by pressing on the

cf; lever,
Loc:;en the counttrnut and, by screwing the spherical joint
in-place, shorten the lever system in such a way that the
pawl engages. Moreover, the lever system. must keep an
elastic clearance of about 1 to 2 riim up to .the stop. The.
setting having been finished, screw down the -Counternut:
2.2 The lever system is somewhat too short
The emergency pawl can be engaged..However, the pawl .

o shaft does not catch properly so that a lift of the lever
system of less than 3 mm is necessary for releasing. •
By turning or.t the spherical joint, extend the lever system

so far that a lift of the lever system of about 3 to 4 mm is
necessary for releasing. The setting having been carried
out, screw down the counternut.
2.3 The emergency lever system has completely
been displaced
Take care that the lever system must not be set essenti-
ally too long so that the pawl shaft con be engaged but the
emergency pawl does not catch. This happens when the
spherical joints have been turned out too much by totally
6 to 7 turns (about 10 mm). Then the emergency pawl does
not gear a-Ad the emergency mechanism is inefficient. In
the case ou: a completely displaced lever system, the fol-
lowing procedure should therefore be adhered to :
Both the spherical joints are entirely to be screwed in
place. When making a test, you will find that the lever
system will first be too short and it is to be set as per 2.2.
-• After haying finished setting, carry out an emergency trip check-

ing in accordance with paragraph 4.1.1 of the Service Instructions.
.111••••
Aktiengesellschaft •
K •
KK
Kohnte, Kopp & Kausch •
FrankenthatIP/olz • 4 i4 A
tr iv* Ards fief
__ ,.i , _,:.; ....... ' . _
...4....• • - .- II' . • -z 7g1":,11 • - • ti 'It: F;1:
- - igE RIENENERI•,. --•
..:: . :-2 i 1
.... =, • •••• --- ----•• .•-;•••,..-- •::i 1:v. ..,,_ ii..*• .ii.::" iii-:":i.-: •• .-
-_/4 MIEN -7.--m-i 7- .7:: :7r. .,.....„..
--r• :t:: -,
..... Pi
...... ::L•Egz
... . . ,.r ghl1.471:H
__......
-:.: 173 ... •
•••••
_-!:
-'• I.!: :•,1 rir, iii: ....
•-• ..... ME .... .. . il:1 ........i.... .........
:'.;•1:•: I• :::: I::: - :.i'!' ••• •••-
••• •••• ..
•••• iii iiii !n! i.i;: iii! iiii
:I III .I . ::..:.:.....: :::1 :'7:
:_...:..„.:: .... ..
i::: :: :... : :::: •: : :::: •
. .. . ,1 .::: :::i
i•:. ::i .: I •••• •••
=Mb
:: 1:•• iii 1: I::: : . • : : ,, :: :::! iiii 11 1 :::• •:•
lii! iii ilt:. i;:: .: :::::: , •••i J:.
•
:::-;": i•r• ••::
.. I••:. .:.i ;:h ::ii :1Fi : .: •••• •••• •
ite• :4: • ••" :: i •; •
... •-
:77 .:.:1, it:: .:7
... :;.. ... . ."
... . . II . : .. . I
-
:' "" :::-:
r.r: :-• ,,•• ..., .. •••• "71 ..: - • :, • .: ••• -••
::::a.::. a. •••
....• T '••
...• :i.:: ::!: " '" 1li .
...• • :1
V.1
•- • •
.."Emq •.- Plz ...... .
1 .. ME :!'
,--= .7,-E N.:.-1,--_,i

metsmigm ..vimalmOgNEE1 Ei:1 ' Karommismm "gm
-
_FaMtinca = 4- rtxtEAME@EMP_.MENE ._. ....

--.. -.-, :.: ii. . :
iF.:1:--....• -- .-r-
r ..
:..--.1_7.-:: --1:- :.-• .: ..I - •
:1' Ir.ii:=•: 77-..
--....-gEm -1.i; •''
W:7 - E2z:VM -.-.•.:•: 7 •,--:. 'BEM
-EaMEi
aim -..:
•.:..1:•::: -..• ..._. •• „.-•. ,::;:. az .... .,. r- -•.....=1. ..: ..7: E Malli
' • ..!.. .:.. : ... .:...... ....
i: iL EE fi,:H-6- ••-!: ..• •••..-. .....-4. :-..:; .. 1.1. .-..!..... . .1..i.i.,-. czi - NEMER
!ri .. F•:.11
. 11-7:.! .iiii.:7:1132 •iii.i 14.1-, anan
41740. • rc-- nog M:
...
"... ......"•:..:„,,,, At. ...: -....71iii:
.J. i.F. 17.ii :PI i„:11 ::::
MIEN
.... • :;.:: Ill, •: t::: •:-.:
.: .:.
.•..•.
. • ::::: •• :,•
-•:
:-,. • :::: 1-:::
::::::::. ::::•:::::::.::: .•..--
.:;..._-.. . ::...:.- in ::':L: i:-:
•"!•
•• :•-•. ::: "r: ::::
_. _. 7::..iti:.:. .:177.1i is ii i'... -1E ggro ajr sami
.....,....1ffiq . „._._ ,
.:...
•4117
-,--:.-. :13 gi
:171 :::Z
..:-- In 11=
. Iii IL • ii. 7.::...:4
-
••-..... 77Y-1:373 '•.-:::t7:-: ::'• :':.
1.--..•:.:i.7 :.;..:: ÷ ':'" T i:•..:i
•.... I:e±...;:. F,E17...
...... .- prig ::= ::::::L:L.::.:
ar, ....: .....:: =II ...ii-F -F.:4 .0 ,B
7 a ....-_
.. .• _
.....• ,.....,.
. :. '1111rr:
:"':- r.•.- =, •.::...
:..---:.-••-•:: .....- ii''''' .4: -,-
•---•
...„...,..,
., „,
_.
iEt ''''''' -:.: 'i.:i inigiv. a ii
tr2M
..,..Enem
.
:1.1-'7."::
._
_•
:ril
kriC T: :::.
;.T E:.czni
77:ffIEMEERE
121 .:11
g12j ,f•4:;;-; :.F: :•::: .:--- : •gEgrigaztu
...7: 7.:•.•• :::- Zr- ..:!.:.
. _.., .:_. -zti..; .,::-.
_ ..., . ....... •-•,..L:1 :: . =2....417-:•T rAgggS9 Eami -
m•
.712' :
•'" ..E. 1 71....::::: ::.
M Fillol ag
illi: :•;:.47 Ex, ..3.fi•
=zi _ it::: i;F• =r- . - . ' " - -• • • •- - .77 .. : :t: 1.74 ::: ...
•--b r, . -1:'.-ti :::11. ---'• r.. -
•- ,•-- •-•• :•.,•.t :::•:::: -4:: ,..0.11 4P
-. •••- •"- •••:. :.r- •,:::
1:17
. 1 E . . % rte. ::,.. ii:i
..I.J1
1 -•••=• • .. •:I.:: .:s .: ,...i ii.r A.2 .... . . .._.,.';
LE 7 Si :.:-: ;Im
•i:: •:•:, .
t
r
amj.1 '.."4.
... .,-.....1 ••• •-• -. -• :.:-• :•• 7.7 -
:iii
1-•:-.-
OM grar,..
-:-::
• 41.11r :Ili :I:: 1. :r4.E.::...4 igii12,. 2::...!ii' .:::• :::: :1:: 1:1: tit 1.:!.
:... 4 ,.......... :1;
4.; ilil
... ....1-!1.Mtlii
it I::: :::tE
• !••:
7" :.Y.:: :: .., : 7.-:. .`.1.-:i::.•:-ii Hi: .1.,.
-•'-`""!-:. - - .... ••••
• • 1:
,-. :- t•
. rd.; i n j.4.1
t ;..:
:ii: iii4 7.11 - • _I
..: d 1::•
1 IF: iiii 1::. Fil ! 1.::Ir.:...••• I. :III
li7 :T
:14
.. L. : ,•-• trr: : 4....: :::: ;.-• -1•;• :••• :7: ••••rrtl :-,lt to.
••• ....-.: :::. :::
.-... • 1.ir•
ilai :IFF 7:: :.::: ;:;: .ii-i ;1'7' •rn td:
•r:1 ;:l:
7...."1:: il;! EP
:zr.:•• •...: :.,.11, ••- .., -••
...
•,--. 14.1 II; di
"• '
,ili. • , ,•••• .... •.-- :11.: ::: T.:: . . F!.: :...r !iv, i •' F :::
41- vr:i !--:2:i ii-il iiii ' ' ELI T• 1•• • :1•-• 17E. •:::, :-: . ..:.. :-.. , •1::
--,a.l. -,::: •-•: :::: ..-.. ':••••
: -1I14.:r. -.:4L '". LI- -2:-.1• .: i• 14" ::11 -::: ::!•
ft?
}iv
-z......4 it' •,-1 •:-" tati-rix.• '7- :=: •t7i.'
-•, :41::. !-11
t glitill.
F•.. • • •••:.: ,....•: .::•:: ii,.,ria
at 1::. 7::: : .z•, NM-, I:. ::::.•.:1.utig i
E.. _, ... 'AMEN iiii imp. ,-=kriEz-.... ter.:3 .41. ;17i-: ..
-:•Rit:t.: • ;•• -1: RE itli xiiiERE in•,•• :t.4
•:1
.._
Ir. cr rn, . rti. • .. • di..' 115 d!:::ii i--.T: 4-1 :11:i "" :it:
- -
-- i.: . _.r
-. ..
:=•=7 7' .. It-% r:r • -KT: ;
nn 1771. .
.. ir • '
• • l' •-• lil
-• -: ...I:jaiii: iii: i:
!- .:..- ,•• •I :. ...., ir:. .. ir : 't
:7 "11 4.1 ii.' 11: 3E-1 ." r ;...i...
.. : .1- . .11• 1ii
tz
• V.-, :ti• •• •,.. :::: .:-: ..,:: :: : ::•• I .:, r:;. nr: I • ;:
i 1 :!: • :: •• il .IL 43 !;: ::' I •
••• .. : 0 . . :: ..; ::: ::•1 . .. ; .:::. r:1!;i? ,Ii-,Ii: j i::.: :.%!S: : JO Ir ite
.....
: I -, _ ::. :: ..,_ :..,.:::: :1 .' :::2 - .: 77:- . 7-:".:::::;: :ri: ::71.7•71 : . ...:. ..:
„..
.!.. • ::! .... ,. . ...: :
. 1 ... • • . - • ' ::: i:.'. :ii •••• •••• i:I! :::i •:;• •••
Frischdampfdruck: 21.7/4, Frischdampftemperatur: /, ..f0e Entnahmedruck: -

._:.,........_... ._..
. -• -- - .
Abdampfdruck: 4. s a-7‘.0. •
Kupplungsdrehzahl: 1808 ///,n//7 Zchng. Nr. 4 d4./82 4 3453 (X93
MOUNTING INS TRUCTIONS
FOR STEAM TURBINES
FOUNDATION EXECUTION AND MOUNTING
Execute the foundation for turbine and working machine so,

that there will be no resonances with the speeds in question.
Please observe this.particularly, if the turbo-unit will not be
erected on natural ground, but on a stage or a cellared en-
gine-house floor.
The natural foundation vibration is to be kept as far as pos-

sible below the minimum operating speed, to' achieve a suffi-
ciently high degree of absorption for vibration-protected erec-
tion of the turbo-unit. In this case, thecOnnection of ducts and
cables will have to be effected for example via articulated
compensators and hoses, so flexibly, that the degree, of ab-
sorption suffers only inconsiderably.
Arrange turbine and ducts so, that the operating devices, such
as valves and governors, are easily acceF'aible.
•••
ASSEMBLY WITH THE WORKING MACHINE
co Carefully align the shafts of turbine and working machir:: with

water balance and aligning device. Line all points of support
only with smooth sheet metal shims, to avoid distortion, par-
ticularly of the gear casing; when tightening the foundation
bolts. Duly consider the change's of the axle level which may
be the result of unequal heating of tle coupled machine under
operation and standstill conditions.
•
The level difference of turbine and working machine, in the
cold condition, can be computed according to the following
N formula:
re) 1,2 • hT hT 1, hA tA
nh -
X 1 000 100 1 000 100
The symbols have the following meaning:
a, nh = level difference in the cold condition, in mm

0
hT = axle level of the turbine, in mm ,
hA = axle level of the working machine, in mm
ntT= temperature difference between turbine bearing casing

and its surroundings, in °C (centigrades)
EtA = temperature difference between working machine and its
surroundings, in C (centigrades)
4
If the working machine is supported at axle level (feed pump),

the temperature of the bearihg pedestals, on which the work-
ing machine rests, will have to be considered. For feed pumps
with high water temperature, cooling of these bearing pe-
destals is possible.
co Example:
Axle level of turbine 400 mm
U) Axle level of alternator 300 mm

Temperature turbine bearing casing 60°C
Temperature alternator 40°C
Ambient temperature 20°C
h _ 1, 2 • 400 60 - 20 1,2 300 40 - 20 _
KKK3. 70
1 000 100 1 000 100

= 0,48 • 0,4 - 0,36 • 0,2 = 0,192 - 0,072 = 0,120 mm
Therefore, the turbine will have to be mounted approx. 0,12

mm lower than the alternator.
rn
0
Prior to measuring, securely tighten all foundation bolts .After
aligning, bolt turbine and working machine to each other.
rn CONNECTION AND EXECUTION OF LIVE AND EXHAUST STEAM

1.11
PIPINGS
ets
The ducts may not pass too large forces to the turbine.There-
fore, the pipework is to be led in wide bends, as smoothly
as possible. If necessary, it is to be supported. The weight
of the pipework is to be absorbed by spring suspension.
(Examples: sheet 6.) If sufficiently smooth laying of the pipe-
work is not possible, expansion pieces or articulated com-
pensators will have to be installed. (Examples: sheet 7.)
Prestress the pipework in such a way, that only half of the
stesses to be expected in heated condition as result of ther-
mal expansion, in reverse direction, act on the turbine sock-
ets in cold condition. This also refers to the possibly neces-
sary installation of articulated compensators. Fixed points
in the immediate vicinity of the turbine are to be avoided by
all means.
Carefully blow steam through the entire live steam piping be-
fore it is connected to the turbine flange. It is to the purpose
to do so in a series of intervals, to burst off adhering weld
beads and cinder under heating, respectively re - cooling.
(thermo shock! ) We recommend to blow abt. three times,
each time for 5 minutes, and to allow to cool down 15 - 20
minutes each time. In spite of careful blowing-out, damages
to the valve seats and cones may be caused by small parts
loosening subsequently in the piping system.
For that reason, a steam strainer has to be installed shortly

before the live steam enters the turbine. The free passage
space has at least to match the cross-section of the piping.
Max. hole size: 2 mm. There are to be no bores in the range
of the dirt collector.
FITTINGS
Instal a shut-off valve into the live steam piping shortly be-
fore the turbine. We further recommend arrangement of a
water separator with self-acting steam trap before this valve
to protect the turbine against water shocks.
• Instal another t:1)ut-off valve or a shut-off slide even in the

r- exhaust steam piping. A high lift safety valve is to be incor-
porated between turbine and shut-off device for live steam
pressures exceeding the max. pressure permissible for the
exhaust steam casing of the turbine.
Max. permissible pressure for the exhaust steam casing.glit.;

(atm. g. )
cr,
c:) This safety valve must so be rated to blow off all occurring
c, exhaust steam of the turbine without that the back-pressure
rises above this maximum pressure. (at least half of the in-
c, side diameter of the outlet)
cr• If the turbine is ready for immediate operation with open
live and exhaust steam shut-off devices, or if the turbine is
connected with an exhaust steam system having a pressure
of more than 10 atm. g, a non-return flap has to be installed
•
• in the exhaust steam line of the turbine. If the non- return
flap is arranged between turbine and shUt-off device, the
high lift safety valve has to be connected between turbine
and non-return flap.
Non-return flap and high lift safety valve are safety devices
and need to be serviced and checked in regular intervals.
If the machine driven by the turbine conveys into a pressuri-

zed line; it has to be avoided that the driven machine en-
courages the turbine to reversing motion.
EXECUTION OF THE DRAINAGE AND LEAKAGE STEAM PIPING
Drainage: See to it that complete drainage of the turbine is war-

ranted. Arrange drainage device at the lowest spots
between turbine and shut-off parts. Turbines ready
for immediate operation are to be drained via auto-
matic steam traps. These will have to be checked
without difficulties for faultless operation.
Leakage: For higher back pressures, the turbine will be

equipped with a leakage steam connection to be joined
11 via a shut-off valve to a low-pressure system of 1 to,
2 atm.g.
If a low pressure system is not available, a throttle
valve will have to be incorporated into the leakage
00
steam line, with a pressure gauge between it and the
stuffing box. Set a pressure of 1 to 2 atm.g. with the
valve, remove the valve hand wheel. The leakage
steam is to be led off to atmosphere or into a conden-
U) ser.
• If the turbine is connected to a condenser system, a
steam barrier of .5 to 1 atmospheric gauge must be
fed to the stuffing box at the connection point of the
leakage steam line from an appropriate system.
N If there is no such system, throttled live steam will
have to be admitted. A throttle valve will have to be
provided in addition to a shut- off valve. Open the
throttle valve so far that a pressure of abt. 0,5 atm.g.
prevails at a control pressure gauge to be arranged
before the stuffing box and slight vapours are emitted
by the stuffing box vent-pipe.
cis
0
o Vapours: Vapours to be led into vapour condenser, to atmos-
phere or into a lower situated reservoir; as exception
o, only into discharge funnel. If so, as far as possible
• crs
-44
away from the leakage water discharge. Installation
of a shut-off device in the piping is prohibited.
Leakage
Water : Leakage water to be led to atmosphere or via dis-
charge funnel to lower situated reservoir .Installation
of a shut-off device in the piping is prohibited.
Particularly see to it that leakage steam, vapour and leakage wa-

ter pipes are arranged separate from each other . They may not
be led together with drain lines into a common piping.
ARRANGEMENT OF TEMPERATURE MEASURING SOCKETS
Temperature measuring spots beyond reproach for live and

exhaust steam temperature are to be provided for each tur-
bine. These measuring spots are to be situated in the live
• and exhaust steam lines directly before, respectively behind,

the turbine .Both threaded sockets for machine thermometers
and 'nermowells for precision staff-thermometers are to be
welded in. Heat-resistent electrodes (f.e. "Bailer Fox DMO
Ti") are to be used for welding.
Instariation of thermowells is not required if it is certain

that neither steam consumption nor output measuring will be
taken at the turbine.
Please note details to arrangement to the temperature mea-

suring sockets from the examples on sheet 8.
• (1-;
141
495 19 100 009
•
example 1 example 2
high lift
safety valve.
expmple 3 example 4
U)
• high lift
safety valve
O
high lift
safety valve
!,4
sliding layer direction of expansion

example 1 .example
II
ipsimmur iirAreri I'.~ArAir
Ar
high lift
high lift safety valve
safety valve
0.••••.
fA
CO example example 4
r-
• (1)
//// /// //// / / / / / /.
cn.
en
high lift
safety valve
495 19 10 0009
high lift
safety valve
•
• Installation samples to page 5
STEAM FLOW
O
O
Thermowells always welded-in with

cr. slight drop to pipe center Electrodes
u) Bohler Fox DMO Ti or similar heat-
• resistant material.
455
"i•"710 OuS VentilStOPfbUCtat NW/0

ms Frei* Itihren ovitscdki- hand release fir
leakage steam Sam stufFav bat • Hcr:51,3;:5,..; over :weed irto
of the regulating ealveliW10 •
Fre steam lave • . Frachdompf- StutZen r•.-,!.,2chfor..Telger a
sped indicator
11;e steam atainageNW6 bi flivr4'; Ffiscrwomaientwasserung Nw6

to be led *eat into the open alr mit Offal* iris Freie (liken
pg levet lndkalor
Abiempt- Stutter. .-
exhaust steam fkiiige • 52
cooling wafer iF9cdred KZinnvosserbedarf: •
3
0,5-n h by 20•C' WinIh bei 20:C -
• caving seater wife! kikhrosseroustritt

Poillfetier A11,49 DIN 6885
. . . 4 ' Key All.. 9 DIN 68135
cooling wafer title! • KtinNyassereintritt
treeerung
teckdompl cue WelienstoplOuchse Le.kwasser o& Seienstoorbuchse _ nd

oft C•efoke ins Freie I.Pren mit Gef011e Freie Moen
(Flevbfer Schloomonscnio.71 (Flexible?* Schlauchanschlun)
leakage steam of gkeel leakage wafer of gland fliki 913
•
dia bygrarity to by ter/direct/do . . dia by gravity to by led &feet
the open air(fteAible instal base) the openatifleoble melalhose)
8LcchIe;$ 8 Lech r•
Abe:lamp; • Stutten . Frischdarrof-Stutten
8*A5A- 150 lb 2*A9A• 900 lb
exhaust steam flange live steorn flange
Oalerasser - elertee las" eisri

er eratur
-Viseasitat ' •is.r.ri.eLinor•

ruouno • '
Drehzahl .1172iibm
t Srldredatdomeid '7" • 48414107S
,err,
^z " .deseierd7 der: .1rotierenclv T•ile
Kett
ASii ::S5:11.471eirr - Turbine upplung
ao.4!.
• oroenelt:y 4a
Mem
AKTIENCELLLLLCHAIR
• KUNKLE. KOPP A KAUICN
wen FIANKENTHAUPFALZ
Rebid
1:5 BRIM- Turbine 404301536030

ANY •
Aktiengesellschaft
EE ITO
BCF-Warmeaustauscher
WABICCI
Spezifikation und Lieferumfang

•1.0 Normalausfuhrung Innenrohre
Der „BCF" ist ein kompakter Warmeaustauscher mit festem Rohr- Aus nahtlosem Sondermessingrohr — SoMs76 nach DIN 1785
bUndel, der in 110 sinnvoll gestaffelten Bautypen von 0,11 bis 11,45 beiderseitig in die Rohrb6den dicht eingewalzt.
qm Warmeausteuschflache genormt Wurde. Die Bautypen setzen
sich aus 19 Grundeinheiten zusammen, die jeweils in eine 0-Aus- 1.4 Umlenkbleche
fiihrung (enger Umlenkblechabstand) und eine W-Ausfiihrung Aus Messingblech — Ms 63 nach DIN 17660 — gestanzt und mit
(welter Umlenkblechabstand) unterteilt werden sowie in eine 1-weg- aus vollem Material herausgedriickten Kragen versehen, die eine
und, bis auf Bautype BCF 200-8, in eine 2-weg- und 4-weg-AuS- vibrations-, leck- und beschadigungsfreie Fiihrung der Innenrohre
fuhrung gewahrleisten.
Der Warmeaustausdier entspricht der Unfaliverhiltungsvorsthrift
„Druckbehalter" (VGB 17). 1.5 Dedcel
1.1 Mantel . Aus GrauguB — GG22 nach DIN 1691 — komplett mit stromungs-
Aus nahtlosem Messingrohr — MS 63 nach DIN 17660'— und bei- technisch gunstigen Umlenkkammern bzw. AnschluFstutzen ge-
fertigt; mit- auswechselbaren Zinkanoden gegen Korrosion, mit
derseits in Rohrboden hart eingelotet. Er umschlieSt die Umlenk-
Sechskantschrauben an Rohrboden angeschraubt.
bleche spaltverlustfrei.
1.2 Rohrboden 1.6 Flachdichtung
Aus Press-Messing — MS 60 Pb nach DIN 17660 — komplett mit Aus IT 200 — nach DIN 3754.
stromungstechnisch giinstigen AnschluBstutzen.. Entleerung und
Entliiftung mit Stopfen an drei Stellen urn je 90° versetzt, die leicht 1.7 Anstrich
zuganglich angebracht sind. RAL 5012, lichtblau.
2.0 Sondarzubehor 2.3 Doppelstutzen

auf Wunsch des Kunden) Reduziergewindestacke, die das Whitworth-Rohrinnengewinde
auf Whitworth-Rohraunengewinde reduzieren.
2.1 Anbausatz Normalfu0
Ab 5"-Apparat einsetzbar. Aus Flachstahl — St37 nach DIN 1017 2.4 Thermostatisches Wasserventll
mit selbstschneidenden Schrauben,. wahlweise an drei Stellen der Zur Regelung der Kahl- bzw. Heizwassermenge
Rohrboden um je 90° versetzt anschraubbar.
2.5 Schmutzfilter
2.2 Anbausatz Schellenfu0 Geeignet fur den Durchflufl von Wasser, 01, Gas usw.; Filtereinsatz
Aus Stahl. Einsetzbar•fOr alle Typen, Abmessungen siehe Seite 4. leicht austauschbar.
3.0 Sonderausfahrung 3.3 Ausfiihrung „B"

(auf Wunsch des Kunden) Von der Normalausfuhrung abweichender Umlenkblechabstand.
3.1 Innenrohre 3.4 Stehende Ausfiihrung
Aus nahtlosem Kupfer-Nickel-Rohr — CuNi30Fe nach DIN 1785. Mit SpezialfuB aus GrauguB — GG22 nach DIN 1691. Ausfiihrung
3.2.1 Dedcel und Abmessung siehe Seite 3.
Wie unter Pos. 1.5, jedoch innenseitig durch Kunststoffbeschich- 3.5 Bautype SSCF
tung korrosionsgeschiitzt. Komplett aus nichtrostendem Stahl — Werkstoff-Nr. 4401 (316
32.2 Dedcel stainless steel).
Aus GuBbronze — sonst wie unter Pos. 1.5.
Grenzbedingungen fiir Bautyp BCF: Grenzbedingungen fur -Bautyp SSCF:

max. zulassiuii.- " ma ‘. zuiassige max. zulassiper Probedruck
Betriebadrudi BetrIebateMparatur Betrietsdrudc but "iebbiennieratiii
atu 810 •C at0 810 .c
cn 24 151! urn dm Roll., 16 2,1

in den Ruhren 10 15 ' ISO In den Rohren •10 15 230
co
Kundensniion von Dainut nur du: Rolm: zulassig; Kundensation von Dompt iiiir ui I die jl.
o 2960 max. zuiassige Betriebsdruck: 8,0 ata max. zulassige Betriebsdruck: 16 ata
5.73 max. zulassige Betrlebstemperatur: 175 "C. max. zultissige Betrlebstemperatur: 230 -C. ;
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
Blatt
Abmessungen and edgemelne technische Oaten

km- innenrohr- !shalt
Wen- timed.- Madan. Leer- I d. u. d.
Bautyp ,,,,o. 'ache x A BCDEF EtH I J K I. 16 NPR S T U os- RCM- Rah-
444e1 tureen Wender. NPT R R relent ran re
n,2 nun mm mm mm mm mm ern MN MN men mm mm mm mm Zell LA ZOO mm MM kg I 1
2038- -1weg 0.11 54 60 275 158 595 43 - - - - - - - . Ts - 1 10 - 2.3 0,21 0.28

300-8- -1weg 285 68,5 - 1% 9,5.
-26e9 0,22 273 152 64.5 - 1 25 5,4 0,45 0,61
•4w011 274 59,5 - % 255
301.2- -1weg 445 68,5 - 1% 9,5
Alle Beutypen BCFsindmitengem „O"andwe item „W"Umlenkblechabstandlieferbar.
-2weg 0,40 433 312 64.5 - 1 25 8,4 0.66 1,09

-4weg 434 -59.5 - % 25,5 .
302- -1weg 8.35.0.45 695 88,5 - 1% 9.5
' -2weg 0.68 80 108 883 582 64,5 62 - % 111441.5 1 1 25 7,7 0.98 1.83
-4weg --- 684 59,5 5 25.5
303- - Swag 1005 86,5 - 1% 9,5
-2weg 1,03 993 872 64,5 - 1 25 0.4 1.38 2,75
4609 994 50,5 9. 25,5
304- .1we9 1305 68,5 - 1% 9,5
.2we9 1.36 1293 1172 64,5 - 1 25 11,1 1.70 3,67
,.._4weg 1294 • 59,5 IL 25,5
501-2..-twee 475 94 78 2% -
-2weg 0,88 470 287 94 78 323 1% 38 21 231 2,64
-4we9 472 91 73 1 43
502- -1649 725 04 76 2'4 -
-2weg 1,48 720 537 04 • .76 573 38 25 3,29 4.28
Diese Buchstaben geht5ren zur Bautypenbezeichnung.
-4weg 130 165 722 91 92 73 30 69.5 130 106 17418 % 1111115 ' 14 1'4 43
503- -1649 1035 ea 78 2'4 -
-2weg 2,20 1030 647 04 76 883 1% 38 29,5 4,51 8,45
-.twin 1032 91 73 1 43
504- •lweg 1335 94 76 2% -
2,01 1330 1147 94 76 1193 15 38 34 5,88 8,24
•
-4weg 1332 91 73 1 43
802- -1weg 739 109 98,5 3 -
-21°,09 2.11 731 521 109 985 548 2 40 34 4,93 6.04
-4649 738 108.5 06 1% 50
603- -Swag 1049 109 985 3 -
-2weg 918 1041 831 109 96.5 858 2 40 43 809 9.03
-46e9 155 190 1048 108,5 108 98 30 1055 150 125 12419 . 1114415 1'4 2 50
604- -1weg 1349 109 965 3 -
-2weg 4,22 9.540,8 1341 1131 109 98.5 1158 2 40 52.2 8.39 12.0
-4weg 1348 1095 98 1% 50
605- -1weg 1854 109 96,5 . 3 -
-2weg 5,27 1648 1438 109 98,5 1481 2 40 619 10.1 14,9
-:Nag 1653 10.3,5 96 14 50
802- .18e9 789 153 134,5 3 - -
-2weg 3,82 777 483 154 135.5 ' 520 2% 57' - 68 95 10,8
-4weg 783 153 134.5 - 2 67 18
803- -1weg 1099 153 134.5 3 - -
-2weg 5,78 1087 793 154 135.5 830 2% 57 - 84 12.7 15,7
-4weg 1093 153 134.5 - 2 87 la
804- -Swag 1399 153 1345 3 - -
-2weg 7,65 206 250 1387 1093 154 143 135.5 1130 40 137,5 210 180 16422 111445 2% 3 57 - 99.8 15.8 20,6
-4weg 1393 153 134,5 2 67 18
805- -Swag 1704 153 134,5 3 - -
-2weg 9,55 1692 1398 154 135.5 1435 2'4 57 - 1155 19.0 25,7
-4609 1698 153 134.5 2 67 18
806- -Swag 2009 153 134,5 3 - -
-2weg 11.45 1907 1703 154 135.5 1740 2% 57 - 131,5 22,0 30,7
_......._ -4weg 2003 153 1345 2 67 18
Die Anschlgsse ..R" and .S" haben Whitworth-Roh innengewinde, das du ch Doppetstutzen auf Whitworth-Rohrau8engewinde gebracht werden Kann. - Die Bautypen
200-8 bis 304 hind nicht mit am Rohrboden anschraubbaren FOBen lieterbar. - Bei den Bautypen 501-2 bis 806 konnen die FOtte wahlweise and ei Stel en des Rohr -
bodens angeschraubt werden. - Die Bautype 200 8 hat keine mantelseihge Entleerung - Die Bautypen 300-8 bis 304 haben die Entleerung J.- nu an der ge
genilberliegenden Seite der AnschlOsse - Die Bautypen 200-8-1weg bis 806-2weg haben 2 ZinkschutzstSbe. die Bautypen 802-4weg bis 806-4weg haben 4
Zinkschutzstabe.
Liegende Ausfiihrung
1weg-Ausfahrung Typ 200-8 Typ 300-8 bis 304 Typ 501-2 bis 806
c
,
'
8 0
-
2weg-Ausfuhrung Typ 300-8 bis 304 Typ 602 bis 605 Typ 501-2 bis 504
Typ 802 bis 806
- N
15- •
N••••.tivNIN
Q1.0
I
N z.N.Nme —1 — \
I
N terVe*
•.•7
4weg-Ausfahrung Typ 300-8 bis 304 Typ 501-2 bis 605 Typ 802 bis 806
•
00
lo 2960
5.73
GHH
•
ETVRRRRRR
UTE HOFFN U NGSH OTTE STERKRADE
Blatt
Stehende Ausfiihrung
Bautyp. B C D E F G
BCF mm MIT mm mm mm mm
200— 8
300 — 8 343
301 — 2 503
0 302 106 92 42 100 10 140 753 9
303 1003
304 1363
• 501 — 2 558
502 808
I 165 146 62 140 14 177 11
a 503 1118
504 1418
602 835
603 1145
190 172 62 160 15 205 11
604 1445
605 1750
802 870
803 1180
804 250 227 62 170 15 234 1480 11
805 1785
806 2090
Bautyp A I B C D E F G d
mm mm mm mm mm
2-weg-AusfUhrung
BCF mm RIM mm
200 — 8
300 —8 413
: 301 — 2 473
302 106 92 35 ' 80 10 105 723 9
303 1033
304 1333
501 — 2 523
502 773 11
165 146 42 110 14 147 1083
503
504 1383
602 797
603 1107
190 172 50 130 15 175 11
604 1407
605 1712
802 837
803 1147
804 250 227 63 150 15 214 1447 11
805 1752
0, • 806 2057
Bautyp • A B E F G d•
4-weg-Ausfiihrung
BCF mm mm mm mm mm mm
2.00 — 8
300 — 8 334
301 — 2 494
302 106 92 57 95 10 120 744 9
303 1054
304 1354
501 —2 518
502 768 11
165 146 35 110 14 137
503 1078
0 1378
504
602 810
603 1180
190 172 53 135 15 180 11
604 1420
605 1725
802 844
803 1154
804 250 227 63 150 15 214 1454 11
805 1759
806 2064
to 2960
5.13 Alle Obrigen Ma8e siehe Tabelle auf Seite 2
GHH SIUTEHOFFNUNGSHEiTTE
M. TM. lt Blatt
8.9.4.07 Duplex Filter Typ 161-I

Boll & Kirch Filterbau GmbH Köln
Differenidrtickanzeiliar
difference pressure indicator
indioateur de differince depression
Dr uckausgleich
equalization of pressure
6quillbrage de press ion
vidange Osairation
drain RS air escape RE
Entleerung Entliiftung
• Geheuse geschweillt
casing welded
corps soude
1Betriebsdruck in be;
2
ND= working pressure in kp/cm at 120°C
piession de service en Par
Hahere Betriebsdriicke cut Antrage
higher working pressure if demanded
pressions de services ilevi es si demand.
X = A*1- Hobe der gewOnschten Anschlufiflansche •Filtereinsatz and Durchfluerichtung siehe WN 211
.A.11• height of the wanted connection flanges filter element and flow direction look WN 211
X = A. 1 hauteur des brides dirsinies elirrient filtrant et direction de passage voir WN 211
41
NWNDAXBCEF eJL,MS a h q e s RE RS
20 - -4
25 40 100 1302. 375 .225 120 108 55 370 240 750 100 340 14-0-1015- R1/4 "R1/2" me
32 _ 40. _._ 110 160e. 390_ 220 145_ 133 55 450 290 675 120 410 150 12 15 R1/4" R1/2"
40 40 75 160u-460 200 155 133 55 470 310 830 120 -'430 150 12 15 R1/4" R1/2"
50 40 97 2302 483 220 170 159 55 570 340 890 .140 480 155 12 15 R1/4" R1/27
65 —25 88 2702.450 130 190 193,7 55 680 410 860 170 580 155 12 15 R1/2" R1/2"
80 25 114 2702 525 220 205 193,7 55 690 420 950 170 590 170 12 15 RV2" R1/2" s51
80S 25 114 _ 270 ° 605 300 205 193,7 55 690 420 1120 170 590 170 12 15 R1/2" R1/2"
i§1
,
10o7 • 25 134 —360 2748 388 240 267 60 940 580 1315 220 190 18 20 R1/2" R 1"
1005 . ' zc
E,
125 ._...__
16 148 4452 679 ---
.,------- 267 -275 r 355.6 60 1125 680 1230 300 190 0.— R1/2" R 1"
125 S 16 148 . 4457 819 .407 275 355,6 60' 1125 680 1370 300 980 195 23 20 RV2" R 1"
me
r- g
subject to alterations! • Ande ungen vor behatten! modifications reservees ! co
Qriri
2,9i
:41 ni
IGIUTEHOFFNUNISSEIliTTE
8TERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
11.TM.•K Blatt
15 18 25 .12 24 16 28
Bei Besteilung angeben

to be mentioned in case of order
mentionner Tors de la commande
Typ• NW: Auftrags- Nr.:

Type:_ NS: order No.:
Type: DN: No. de commande:
Ersatzteil-Liste: 4-13835 Blatt 2
spare parts list:4-13835 sheet 2
list des parts :4-13835 feuille 2
No 3062
GHH BUTEIHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
ESTERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
m•rm•K Matt
GehAuse caring corps 1 Ft . stecl .

neckel cover .7.ouvcre.le 2. St S tfcl
Kill en cock vanne boi3seau3. CG cast iron • forte
1 SehlUsse] clef 4.G Al aluminium aluminium
2 Anker .axle axe F.,St steel acier
x 53chraube bolt vis steel acier
x %Atter nut 4crou Gt 'steel acier
I Stift pin cheville 8: St steel acier
1 Sri ft pin cheville 9,St. stee] acier
2 Mutter nu, &:rou 10,St steel acier
2 Schraube t;c1•1: vis .14 St. acier
2 Schraube 12 St
•
bolt vis .steel acicr
13
1 Stift pin cheville 14 St steel acier
2 nichtung •gas k.e 15 Gummi rubber cauuthr_)uc
2 nichtung gasket joint 16 Gummi ruber ca3utct;,ouc
2 nichtung gaslret joint 17 ru copper cuivrc,
2 nichtunp. gasket joint 16 r" c:opper cuivz".c
11
20
21
.22
Sieb filter element 23
element filtrant .
•
2 !-!agnet- magnet fil.tre magne-24
Nachfilter secundary tique final
filter
7 Ventil. valve soupape 25
2 !!agne- magnet •filtre mapie-26
Vorfi.iter primary tique pri-
NIter maire
1 'Iruck- pressure campers 27
ausgleich equalizer (!e pression.
1 nifferenz- differential indicateur 28
druck- pressure de difference
anzeiger indicator de pression
•
1 flebel- lever commutation 29
segment- segment a segments
schaltung reversing par levier
device
1 Fandrad- handWheel - commutation 30
segment- segment segments
schaltung reversing pAr manerte
device
No 3062
9e7eichnunR designation, designation pos. Material material material
BUTEIHUFFIVUNISSHUTTE
Blatt
• INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR BOLL TWIN-FILTERS
1. General:
Twin-filters which can be switched over, consist of two filter casings connected
in parallel through a two-stage change-over device. The filter casings are
designed to meet the current regulations for a particular range of pressure, the
filter elements with an appropriate safety factor for the differential pressure quoted
on the filter's name plate. The maximum differential pressure for filters with
filter mesh is 0.b or 1.2 kp/cm2 , and for filters with micro-cartridges 2 kp/cm2.
Twin-filters are used in cases where the regeneration of the dirty filter elements
must be carried out, without shutting down the plant.
The change-over devices, depending on the type and size of the filter, may have
cylindrical plugs, segment shifts or two-stage change-over valves and allow a
change-over without pressure shock, since one filter chamber is switched in at
the same rate as the other is switched out; both filters can consequently be operated
together. A stop, or the design of the change-over device.prevents both filters
. being off at the same time.
II. Installation:
When the filter is fixed to its foundation, the filter casing, and also the connecting
piping, must be free from strain. Pay particular attention that the flow is in the
correct direction through the filter elements; the correct direction is marked on the
filter casing, usually on the flanges.
III. Attachments:
If the filter is equipped with a heating jacket or with base heating, and there is
the possibility that a steam cushion may form, the following attachments are
required:
1. For steam heated filters:

A relieve valve for the filter chamber, set to operate at the maximum
permissible operating pressure of the filter casing.
2. For electrically heated filters:

A thermostat which cuts off the power to the heater plate at the maximum
permissible temperature i.e., 150°C.
IV. Starting up and cleaning:
A. Pressure filters:
1. Set the change-over device at its mid-pcisition, both filter chambers in use.
2. Open the air vents of both chambers.
3. Start the plant up slowly.
4. Close the air vents when the air has escaped and liquid has started issuing.
5. Operate the change-over device to isolate one filter chamber; while one of
o the filter chambers is being used for filtering, the isolated chamber is in
reserve until the maximum permissible differential, pressure has built •u}: by
the operating filter becoming clogged.
414; When the differential pressure reaches 0.8 or 1.2 kp,/crn 2 for filter mesh and
2 kp/cm2 for micro-cartridge filters, the change-over is made as follows •
No 3062
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSFIUTTE
Blatt
to the clean filter chamber ; —
O. IF there is a pressure equalising cock, open it, and by briefly opening the air
vent, check whether the reserve chamber is fu ll.
7. Change-over.
8. Shut the pressure equalising cock.
9. Open the air vent on the isolated filter; this releases the pressure of the. liquid
and it is possible to check whether the change-over'device has stopped the flow
to the filter Chamber.
In contrast to the change-over using valve or segment, when, there is a change-
over by plug-cock, complete sealing is not possible: by opening the sludge
outlet, liquid leaking during the cleaning process, can be drawn off.
10. Take the cover off the casing of the isolated filter chamber.
11. Remove. the filter element vertically upwards.

In doing.so it may be necessary to reduce the liquid level by opening thc-
sludge outlet.
12. Clean the filter element, or fit new micro-cartridges. Clean the filter mesh
with a suitable cleaning agent assisted by blowing through the mesh From the
clean side (see operating instructions "Filter cleaning") •
13. Fix the cleaned filter element.
:4. Put the cover back on the casing, leaving the air vent open. Beiroie putting
hack th• cover, make sure that the seal is in good condition and is propeil y •
seated; if necessary renew the seal.

15. If there is a pressure equcilising cock, open it until the air has be:rn vented
from the filter half. If there is no pressure equalising cock; set the change-over
device to its mid-position until the air has been vented.
la. Close the air vent. One 'of the filter halves is then again in reserve. This
procedure', from para. o on, is repeated as required.
B. Suction filterS:
•
I. Fill up and vent both filter halves.
2. Isolate one of the filter halves by means of the change-over device:.
. Start-up the plant. While one filter chamber is being used for filtering, the
isolated chamber is in reserve. When the press u re drop across the filtei leaches
the maximum allowed by the pump's suction head; achange-over to the othei
filter half must be made.
4. Change over.
5. Open the air vent on the isolated filter half.
O. Remove the cover from the casing.of the isolated' filter half.
7. Remove the filter element vertically upwards.
0
L • Clean the filter element, or change the cartridge (see A.12).
9. Fit the filter element.

1111
10. Fill up the filter casing.
Oo
No 3062
11. Put the cover back on the casing; before doing so, check the condi_tipt) of
GHH GU TEHOFFNEUINGSFAUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT . . ........ .•.
Blatt
the seal and its correct seating; if necessary. change the seal.
12-. The cleaned filter half is ready in reserve: This procedure can be
repeated as required, from para. 4 onwards.
V. Servicing:
Servicing of the twin-filter comprises checking the seals and Filter

mesh, and replacing if necessary. If the filter is painted for protection
against corrosion; touch up the paint, or repaint, as necessary.
04; Boll & Kirch Filterbau GmbH - Koln

No,3062
GHH GUTIEHOFFNUNGSMITTE
M. ________ Blatt
Boll & Kirch Filterbau GmbH - KOIn
8.9.4.04 Reinigung der MantelSiebe
v.!
AnschluB fir
Strahlgerdt ReinigUngsmittel
11
-Dnsen
= a)
ii
•! a) t
I t 1 1 DUse“attand
.
I I
:Z
C.
41
-4
Blld 1 Bild 2
Filterelement Strahlger - i
3. normale ReAnigung
• •
1.1. Bei . m,hrieiligen Mantelsieben wird' jedes Element
einzein gereinigt. •
1.2. Die Etnzelelemente fiber einer Wanne oder einem Refl.el.
mit einer nicht zu harten BUrste und - einem geeignecen
Reinigungsmittel ahbUrsten and spUlen.
1.- 3 Das .so gereiuigte Sieb von der Sauber.seite her mit.
Pre2luft -durchblasen, um den in den Maschen des bewenes
helihdliehen Schmutz zu entfernen. Die Reinigung kann
mit einem_Strahlgei-!it nach Bi ld 2 dutchgefiihrt Werden.
Anwendung nach Punkt 2.3.
2. nei hartnaekigem SehMutz
,
2.1. Gesamtes-Mafileisieb in elnem Definite' It. Reinigungs.-
mittel einige Stunden stehen lassen oder in knrzen
Absttinden mehrmals besprtihen: .
91•11111 2.2. :Siebelemente wie - unter Punkt-1.2 and 1..3.angegebey
behandein,
2,3. Mit.em, StrtIhigertit nach Bild 2 unit einem geeigneten
:le;•;i)iintel von der Saubers::i tr,. fief grUndlich
die :-,
ReinigonE des demontierten Filterelementes

chrauht.er Ausfithrnng
Ner wenh tln:i mit
I 1-• ;ill dem jewiiii!.en 1(e

tmld
. thi lc ve ei)!• /at te (h) a.b.r. ellen .
No 2960
3.:1. t ejten
GHH IBUTEHIEIFFINIUNGSMITTE
eieii
3.4. StUtzrohre (d) entfernen.

3.5. SiebmAntel (c) wie unter Punkt 2.reinigen.
3.6. Alle Teile, Abch obere Siebplatte (g) und
Anker (e) reinigen.
3.7. Alle Dichtungen (f) und SiebMAntel (c) auf
Beschadigungen hin prUfen und evtl. erneuern.
3.8. Siebelemente zusammenbauen und fest verschrauben.
Dabei ist auf richtigen Sitz der SiebmAntel und
Dichtungen zu achten.
4. Reinigungsmittel
Geeignete Reinigungsmittel sind z. B. Luft, Wasser,
Dampf, Tri-, PerchlorAthylen, Vecom B 85 A, Benzin,
Benzol, Diesen1 usw..Ihre Verwendung ist von der
Relnigungskraft und der NertrAglichkeit mit dem
zu filternden Medium abhangig.
No 2960
GHH GUTEHUFFINUNGSHUTTE
M.TM -K Blatt
Boll & Kirch Filterbau GmbH - Koln
Valve-Circuit
8.9.4.05 Installation and removal of the circuit .
General
The valve circuit is incorporated in two change-over housings,
arranged one above the other.. The valve heads are operated by a star
wheel, acting through spindles, one with a right-hand thread, the
other with a left-hand thread.
This opens two passages in the housing simultaneously, while two
other passages are closed. The indicator on top shows which passages
are open, and which way the star wheel has to be turned to switch
over.
11 Operation of the circuit
The position indicator shows which passage has been opened (big arrow).
The small arrow shows in which direction the star wheel must be
turned to switch over. By fitting the switching tube over the star wheel
the sealing forces can easily be overcome. The star wheel can then be
turned by hand up to the stop, and tightened with the switching tube.
This terminates the switching over action.
The position indicator shows the new state.
Installation and removal of the circuit (see Drg. No. 2-9519
Before installing the circuit, make sure that the fluid in the valve
housings is not under pressure.
1) Remove the position indicator..
2) Turn the star wheel to loosen the valve heads.
II/3) Removal of the top cover.
4) Screw out the valve spindle with the valve head.
5) Check the 0-rings and replace if necessary.
,6) Refit the Valve- spindle.with valve heads.
r11 7) Fit the cover back on the housing.
8) Fit the position indicator.
9) Remove the bottom cover.
lo) Screw out the valve spindle with the valve head.
11) Check the 0-rings and replace if necessary
to 12) Refit the valve spindle - with valve head.
to 13) Fit the cover back on the housing.
GHH GUTEHEIFFNUNISSHIITTE,
STERKRADE AKTVENGESELLSCHAFT
TM - Blatt
s.
•
ONO OISE
ai. vir 1' -11
4,AL
••"7 •" IN\
Anil" - •Ai
.• • •
e
• • •
/
„ xy„.:; .
t
•
1/
• • •• •
• •
.00
•
r•
•
NT\
""•••••••..
s.
No 2960
01111 IBUTEHUFFNIUNGSHitiTTE
m• TM . K
8.9.6.01 Drosselflansch
Manometer
Pressure gauges
Spannmufre
Tensioning stewe
Sponnmuffe
Tensioning sieve
_Dichtung
Gasket
.Drosselflansch
Throttling flange M64.5436. 01
Tm -K
HRH BUTEHEIFFNUNISSHUTTE
STERKRADE GESELLOCHAFT
AKTIEN
Blatt
...... pizrm..tc
8.9.9:07 Description and Servicing of the

Overflow Valve with .Dervo Control
Glyco
Series 50
Description
The valve regulates the oil pressure in a piping system and
assures that no undue .rise in pressure occures in the oil plant.
The oil pressure acts on the conical face of the piston (23).
The oil enters the control chamber through the impulse line (12).
Thus, the same oil pressure also acts on the top face of the
piston (23). Dependent on the ball (9) load exerted by the
control spring (4), the pressure rises in the control chamber.
Oil enters the control chamber through the control nozzle (17)
in the impulse line (12)'in the same quantity as it flows off
towards the oil discharge side through the sealing point at the
ball (9). The pressure in the control chamber is determined by
the load exerted by the control spring (4) on the ball. This
procedure brings the valve into a balance between the oil pressure
acting on the top face of the piston (23) and the oil pressure
acting on the conical face of the piston (23). All changes in this
balance are'equalized automatically.
Servicing
The valve casing (20) must be installed without stress in the
pipe. Pay attention to direction of flow being correct. Shut-off
impulse line (12) when flushing the plant to prevent the control
nozzle (17) and the control chamber being fouled.
Prior to initial operation screw the spring-loaded spindle (2)
out as far as possible..A few minutes after starting the oil puma
screw this spring-loaded spindle (2) in until the desired regu-
lating pressure is obtained. Lock in.this position using t;]e
counter nut (3) and close so that it is oil-tight using the
spring-loaded apindle cap (1).
Maintenance
Special maintenance is not required so long as tad fouling does
• not impair the function of the valve. However, should this occur
it will be necessary to dismantle and clean. Should a pressure
drop occur, first check whether the control nozzle (17) is clean
or not.
Part No Designation Part No Designation
1 1 spring-loaded spindle cap 21' 1 cover
2 1 spring-loaded spindle 22 1 cylinder
3 1 counter nut • 23 1 piston
4 1 control spring. 24 1 spring plate
5 1 closing spring 25 1 distance piece
6 2 sealing ring 27 4 bolts with nuts
7 2 sealing ring 28 1 packing
-;› 8 1 sealing ring 29 1 reducing sleeve
9 1 ball 30 1 threaded nipple
10 2 angle union 31 1 packing
11 2 straight union 34 1 packing
12 1 impulse line 35 2 packing'
13 1 oil discharge line 36 2 welding flange
14 1 servo valve casing 37 4 hexagonal nut
11111r. 15
16
2 swivel disc.
1 spring plate
38 4 hexagonal bolt
17 1 control nozzie
No 3062 20 1 valvs casinE
BILITEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
Overflow Valves with Servo Control. of the

straight-way and angle type ND 10/16
Valve casing 001
NO10/16 or ND 25/40
Type-FO / -50 (straight- way type) Series 50
27
29.
21
30.
11
34.
28 -
11
25
35.
24
36
23
—22
31
38
-37
Type: FE..../ ...-50 (angle type) Series 50

2
4
6
3 Part No Designation
6 I 1 Spring-loaded spindle cap
14 2. 1 Spring-loaded spindle
7 3 I Counter nut
16 10 4 1 Control spring
15 5 1 Closing spring
17 6 2 Sealing ring
9 7 2 Sealing ring
10 8 1 Sealing ring
15 9 1 Ball
7 10 2 Angle union
5 11 2 Straight union
29 12. .1 Impulse line
27 13 '1 Oil discharge line
34 14 1 Servo valve casing
30 15 2 Swivel disc
21 1 16 1 Spring plate
28 — 17 1 Control nozzle
25- -- 36 18
24 -4 79
—35 20 1 Valve casing
23 -- 21_ 7 Cover ______ ____ _
31 22 1 Cylinder
23 1 Piston
38 24 1 Spring plate
25 1 Distance piece
-37 26
12 - 27 4 Bolts with nuts .
28 1 Packing
20 - 29 1 Reducing sleeve
30 1 Threaded nipple
37138 31 1 Packing
32
35 33
36 34 I Packing
35 2 Packing
36 2 Welding flange
1WY; 37
38
4
4 '
Hexagonal nut
Hexagonal bolt
Glyco-Metall-4
— erke 39
40
No 3062
Essen
IBISTEIHEIFFNEIBRIEMEIVIITTE
• 8.9,9.04
Blatt
Instajiation and Operating Ins-traction

Pressure Reducing Valve Type 32 E
with balanced single seat valve
- A. Installation
1. Remove padcing material, clean piping carefully.
2. To prevent particles of dirt, grit or other foreign matter that be

present in the pipe line from entering the valve with possible inter-
ruption of its performance; we strongly recommended the fixing of
ci SRMS011-Strainer as ,'protection for it and a - ny "other Valuable
fittings: :that May be installed in the sam pipe line (see leaflet
no. 151 E).
3. Pressure Reducers are in no way to be considered as shut-off valves. In front, of every Pressure Reducer a hand shut-off
•
valve should be provided and in case of long intervalls of service, a saveti valve in the low pressure line.
4. Pour water into valve by inlet flange until overflowing.
5. Fit valve with casing suspended to horizontal pipe line.. Arrow cast on valve will show direction of flow.
6. The impulse main (8) should be connected with at least one meter'i (3.3 ft) distance from valve's outlet to lowpressure
main. In case of fitting the Pressure Reducer in front of a distributor, connection to be effected always to distributor even
if it distant some meters. If the steam piping after the Pressure Reducer is enlarged by an intermediate piece (conical),,
the impulse main has in any case to be connected to the enlarged tubing.
7. The; impulse main is not included in delivery and is to be-procured in sice °Li* by buyer. Only temperatures of 250° C
(480° F) and more will require the-Spiral sbope that„is furnished with .nipple:sh' by us.
B..The impulse main to enter laterally in Center:of tube or distribtior, neither from above nor froM below.
CD R. The steam main in front of and after the valve should be kept free- of condensat by creating a slope• on both sides of
Aik2 •
IMP). • the valve. If it is necessary to lay the maim before or behind the.valve vertically it is essential to provide an automatic
draining to avoid water hammers by condensat flowing bodc. ' - _
CO
No 2960
x.
16111H
INUTEHOFFRANINSEIHILITTE
Blatt
B. Operating Instructions
1. Loosen stoppers (13) and pour water by screw connection (14) until
overflowing, stopper (13) to be screwed in again.
2. Open hand shut-off valve gently to avoid water hammers.
3. Adjustment of required low pressure is done by regulation (11) under

control of a low pressure manometer to be arranged at the same
spot where the impulse main'is entering into the low pressure piping
or the distributor. To control the operation of Pressure Reducer, it
is advisable to arrange a manometer likewise on initial pressure
main.
4. Turn of regulation (11) to the right will increase low pressure and
turning to, the left will reduce it.
C. Interruptions of Operation
If there's a strong rise of low pressure in times of nonconsumption,

there may be the following reasons:
a) seat and cone badly clogged,
b) tight closing prevented by impurities,
Type 32 E c) seat and cone got untight by natural wear and tear.
Remedies: Seat and cone to be cleaned after taking off cover

(or stoppers for sizes 15 to 32 mm)(q,"—V/4 "). Cone may be ground.
Do not enlarge bore of seat.
Non-Fitting of valve's cone: Regulation (11) .to be turned completely to the left. Take off valve's cover or stoppers. Turn
Regulation (11) so much to the right that cone (4) is at abt. 2mm distance (0,08 in.) from seat. Get by cranked key the
hexagon below the valve's cone and take cone with rod out on turning. In case the valve's cone is to be reground, it is
necessary that cone and rod remain in tight connection.
A. Manometer for initial pressure

B. Hand shut-off valve
C. Strainer
D.Pressure Reducer
E. Impulse main
F. Manometer for low pressure
G. Steam Trap
Installation of a Pressure Reducer in front of a distributor
Inquiries should be accompanied by the following details:

cV
1. our order no. on firm plate
2. size and type of Reducer
3. initial and final pressure
4. performance in kg-h (lbs-h)
5. Strainer provided;
6. plan of installation
O
Im •
03
No 2960
GHH S.UTEHEIFFRIIMP:11 SPALITTE
•
STE,RKRADE AKTIENGES ELLSCHAPT
M.37M S:att
o. OG G E STRA® ROckschlogventile
ND 10 / 16
Disco-Ruckschlagventil RK 44 NW 150-10
Verwenciting
FlOssigkeiten, Gale, Dampfe. Bei Verwendung hinter AusfOhrung TemperguB, NW 80 und 100
Kolbenkompressoren oder -pumpen wird der Einsatz Gehause: GTW — S 38 (0.8038), Sitz und
eines ausreichend bemessenen Windkessels zwischen FUhrung gepanzert mit nichtrostendem Stahl.
Pumpe und RK empfohlen. Innenteile: wie Ausfuhrung GuBbronze.
AnschluBart
Mit DIN-Zentrierring passend zu Flanschen Ausfuhrung nichtrostender Stahl, NW 15-100
nach DIN, ND 10/16 Gehause NW 15-25: G — X 35 CrMo 17 (1.4122).
Mit ASA-Zentrierring passend zu Flanschen Gehause NW 32-100: G — X 25 Cr 14 (1.4027).
nach ASA 150/300. Innenteile: wie Ausfuhrung 'Guebronze.
Um dos Ventil zusotzlich fest mit der AbflUBleifung zu
verbinden, kann ein Halteflansch geliefert werden. AusfOhrung austenitischer Stahl, NW 15-100,
Werkstoffe far aggressive Medieh
AusfOhrung GuBbronze, NW 15-65 Gehause: G— X 10 CrNiMoNb 18 10 (1.4580).
Innenteile: X 10 CrNiMoTi 18 10. (1.4571).
Gehause: G — Sn Bz 10 (Werkstoff-Nr. 2.1050).
Innenteile: Feder X 10 CrNiMoTi 18 10 (1.4571), Lieferung mit elastischer Dichtung bei alien drei Ausfuhrungs-
Ventilteller X 40 Cr 13 (1.4034), arten maglich. Ausfuhrung: Ventilplatte mit Perbunon (bis
Federkappe X 12 CrNi 18 8 (1.4300). 110°C) oder mit Viton (bis 200° C).
Einsatzbereich
Ausfuhrung Guf3bronze . Tempergug Nichtr. Stahl Austen. Stahl
NW 15-65 80 und 100 * 15-100 15-100
Hochstbetriebsdruck atii 16 13 16 13 40 35 30 40 32 28 21
Hochsttemperatur 'C 120 250 120 300 250 300 400 120 .250 300 400
* in HeiBwasseranlogen empfiehlt DIN 4752 fur ROcl<schlagventile NW 80-100 Nirostahlgehouse.
Zentrierring
t Zentrierring NW 100
Ma01620= passend zu DIN, ND 10/16
Zentrierringe NW 15 — 80, passend zu DIN,
ND 10 bis 40, zentrieren am AuBenrand Maf3167.= passend zu DIN, ND 25/40
e Nennweite mm 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Zoll 1 1'/, 2 2 '/, 3 4
L 16 19 22. 28 32 40 46 50 60.
D .51 61 71 81 92 107 127 142 162 /167
BaumoBe
43 53 63 75 85 95 115 132 152
4 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 10
Gewicht einschl. Zentrierring etwa kg 0,1 0,2. 0,25 0,5 0,7 1,1 1,4 2 3,2
• Preise Normalausfiihrung
einschl. GuBbronze bzw.Tempergu0
Zentrier-Ausfuhrung nichti. Stahl
ring Ausfiihrung austen. Stahl
Mehrpreis • Perbunan -
fur elastische Dichtung- • Viton
lfl
O
Lieferung serienmaeig mit Zentrierring. Bei Einbau zwischen Flansche nach DIN, ND 6, bitte RK 41 verwenden.
Vergl. ouch dos Angebotsblatt Nu- Halteflansche.
O • Aus verwoitungsteshniSchen GrOnden werden die Preise (Or die Ventile und die Zentrierringe out der Rechnung getrennt aufgetunri
No 3062
GHH GUTEHICIFFNUNISSHUTTE
EITERtcf1ADE AKTIENGE.SELLEICHAFT
Blatt
• leistungsdiagramm tor das GESTRA Disco-Radcschlagventil RK 44.
5000
4000
3000 Durchfluf3
2000
----= von oben nach unten
1000 woogerecht
600 .- = von unten nach oben
400
300
•
200
II I/
100
;•.(1
1
‘101MiiiiiMMONIN
'
=IMMO ....
6. EOMM .0 4;
1
E 40 meop
30
imprii%edill."
-.°-
C
20 implavAssipr-
&to
c geriimci;
Awn.. 2,
0* .
6
4
...
to
• mil
3
2
Die ausgezogenen Kurven gelten fur
Kaltwasser. Deren punktiert dargestellte
Verlangerungen sind Hilfslinien zur Be-
0,5
III
rechnung der Druckverluste bei Gasen. 0,1 0,2.04 2 34 6 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 10002000 4000 10000
4==> Druckverlustp pwiin m WS

Fur Flussigkeiten mit einer kinematischen Zahigkeit, die
etwa der des Kaltwassers entspricht, und fur Gase
{carmen die Druckverluste annahernd nach folgender
Formel errechnet werden:
p tip • Offnungsdrikke
w w
Darin bedeuten: Mittelwerte der Driicke, bei denen dos ROckschlog-
yenta zu offnen beginnt
p = Druckverlust in mWS beim Durch-
stramen des Gases DurchfluBrichtung
oder der FlOssigkeit von unten t waagerecht yen oben I
NW noch oben _•,-›.. noch unten V
p Druckverlust in mWS beim Durch-
mm WS mmWS mm WS
fluf3 von Kaltwasser
(aus vorstehendem Diagramm) 100 220 170 120
y = spez. Gewicht des Gases oder der 80 ' 220 170 120
FlOssigkeit in kp m3 220 170 120
65
y = spez. Gewicht des Wassers
50 220 170 120
w in kp/m3
40 200 160 120
Diese vereinfachte Formel vernachlassigt den Einflue
der kinematischen Zahigkeit. .32 200 160 120
Far andere FlOssigkeiten kannen die Druckverluste 25 180 150 120

Oberschlogig errechnet werden. Defer gilt die noch 20 250 220 190
Versuchen ermittelte Beziehung:
15 360 330. 300
3
d p fl =dp • — (3,79. 10 •Y + 1)
w y Wenn niedrigste OffnungsdrOcke erforderlich sind,
Darin bedeuten: kann das Ventil ohne Feder in senkrechte Leitungen
tip Druckverlust in mWS beim Durch- mit DurChfluB von unten noch oben eingebaut
fl werden.
fluf3 einer anderen FlOssigkeit ols
Wasser
.6p = Druckverlust in mWS beim Durch-
w flue von Kaltwasser Bei Bestellung bitte angeben
(aus vorstehendem Diagramm)
Betriebsmittel und -temperatur, Betriebsdruck, Nenn-
y spez. Gewicht der FlOssigkeit weite, Einsatzstelle, Einbau zwischen Flonschen noch
fl in kp/m' DIN oder ASA.
y = spez. Gewicht des Wossers
cD w in kp/m' Ausfiihrliche Erlauterungen und Einhauboispiele ent-
O = kinematische Zahigkeit der Flossig- halten unsere InformationsblOtter. Gesonderte Unter-
keit in Centistokes (c St) lagen Ober die Bestandigkeit der elastischen Dichtung
%Po Die hiernach errechneten Werte 'carmen bis zu +15% bei aggressiven DurchfluBmitteln Obersenden wir auf
von den totsochlichen Werten obweichen. Wunsch.
No 3062
BINH BUTEHEIFFNIUNOSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLEICAAFT
M.T11.1C Bust
Halteflansche zu den GESTRA® Rucicschlogventile
ND 16
Disco-RudcsdilagventilenRK44 -NW 15-100
Beschreibung
Dos Disco-ROckschlagventil wird normalerweise zwi-
schen zwei Flansche der Rohrleitung eingespannt.
Soil das Ventil ober mit der AbfluBleitung fest ver-
bunden werden, ist ein Halteflansch erforderlich.
Er pre6t mit zusotzlichen Kopfschrauben das Disco-
Ruckschlagventil gegen den Flansch der Abflu6seite,
auch wenn die Vorlaufleitung gelost. wird. So ist es
moglich, Gerote aus dem mit ROckschlagventil ge- Halteflansche zu den Disco-ROdcschlagventilen
sicherten Teil der Anlage selbst bei Gegendrudc RK 44, NW 15-25
auszubauen, zu reparieren oder zu reinigen. rl
AuCerdem wird der Halteflansch zurn Befestigen

• gebraucht, z. B. wenn dos Disco-ROdcschlagventil
als Oberdruckventil in Vakuumanlagen, als BeMier,
VakuumbrecheroderAnsaugfutiventil eingebautwird.
Ausfiihrung
Die kurze Einbaulange des Disco-ROdcschlagventils
wird durch den Halteflansch nicht beeintrachtigt.
AnschluBart Halteflansche zu den Disco-ROdcschlagventilen

RK 44, NW 32 —65
Passend zu Rohrflanschen mid, DIN, ND 10/16;
eckig in den NW 15-65, rund in den NW 80
and 100.
Werkstoffe
Edciger Halteflansch ous Tempergu6 GPM 35.
Runder Halteflansch aus Stahl St 42.
Werden Ruckschlagventile RK 44 mit Halteflansch ein-

gebaut,erObrigt sich der serienmOBig gelieferte Zen-
trierring .Bitte geben Sie bei Ihrer Bestellung der Ruck-
schlagventile ausdnicklich an,wenn ohne Zentrierring.
geliefert werden soil: Der Preis ermaBigt sich dann urn
den Betrag fur den Zentrierring.
Halteflansche zu den Disco-ROdcschlagventilen
RK 44, NW 80 und 100
mm 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
Nennweite 1 1V4 1'/2 2 2'/z 3 4
Zoll V2 V.
L 16 19 22 28 32 40 46 50 60
Li 9,5 12,5 12 20 22 25 25 19 19
BaumoBe 13 18 20 20 20 20 20
1.2 10,5 13
k 65 75 85 100 110 125 145 160 180
Lochzahl 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 16' 16
C,r) davon mit Gewinde 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8' 8
I M12 M12 M12 .M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16
Gewicht ca. etwa kg 0,17 0,24 0,3 0,55 0,65 0,8 1 2 2,8
Preis Halteflansch
(.0 Zentrierring
• 0
• fOr Flansche ND 10 werden davon nur 8 bzw. 4 gebraucht.
.DickPreise Sind freibleibend
O Geringe Anderungen vorbehalten.
No 3062
GHH
YtEQQNOE
GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE STERKRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft .
Bias
9.0.0.1117 List of Contents of Unit No. 9
9.1.0.28 Control by Inlet Guide Blade Positioning (General)

9.1.0.29 Inlet guide blade positioning by means of manual
actuator on compressor
9.1.2 Inlet guide blade positioning M60.2180,1056; see 2.1.2
Linkage for inlet guide blade
positioning M61.2189;1036; see 2.1.2
Actuator for inlet guide
blade positioning M62.2802.1003; see 2.1.2
•
9.2.0.24 Description of Surge Limit Control with Pressure
Adjustment
9.2.0 Control diagram M61.9040.1154
9.9.1.02 Description of the actuator
9.9.1 Actuator of blow-off valve M61 1852.1002
Intermediate piece for blow-
off valve M61.1853.1002
Blow-off valve M61.1851.0616
9.7.0.08 Automatic opening of blow-off valve when the plant
is shut-down
9.9.3.08 Three-port solenoid valve, type "Herion"
9.9.9.09 Supply air station, J.C. Eckardt, - Description
9.9.9.05 Supply air station, J.C. Eckardt, - mounting and
operating instructions
9.9.2.16 Pneumatic pressure transducer, J.C. Eckardt
9.9.2.15 Pneumatic differential pressure transmitter, J.C.
Eckardt
9.9.4.02 Pneumatic controller cross-bellows type, as calcu-
lating relay, J.C. Eckardt
9.9.4.08 Pneumatic controller, cross-bellows type, PID with
PID switch, J.C. Eckardt
0
9.9.5.03 Pneumatic control unit, J.C. Eckardt, - table
z 9.9.5.01 Pneumatic control units, J.C. Eckardt, - mounting
and operating instructions
0.9.1.40 Pneumatic indicator, J.C. Eckardt
9.9.6.01 Pneumatic square root extractor and pneumatic function
C`-
transmitter, J.C. Eckardt; - description, dimension
e--
sheet
0
rn
No 2960
5.73
filfli
UTIMONIROI
GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERXRADE
M.TM.K Aktiengesellschaft •
•
Bias
9.9.6.03 Pneumatic square root extractoi and pneumatic

function transmitter, J.C. Eckai-dt; - mounting
and operating instructions;
9.9.6.02 Pneumatic time-lag relay, J.C. Eckardt
9.9.3.17 Description of High-Speed Throttle Valve for Tail-Gas

Expansion Turbine
• 9.9.1.05 Hydraulic actuator, description

Hydraulic actuator
Drive
M6.15 372
M61.6241.03
Intermediate piece M61.4843.1003
Limit'switch attachment M63.4847.1001
Relating limit switch: see 0.9.4.21
Throttle valve M62.4841.1006
9.9.3.08 Three-port solenoid valve, type "Herion": see Surge
limit control
9.9.3.46 Description of Blow-Off Valve for Tail-Gas Expansion

Turbine
• 9.9.1.38 Description of actuator for manual positioning

Intermediate piece - M61.1853.1002: see Surge limit
control
Blow-off valve - M60.1851.0616: see Surge limit
control
• .2
CV
44)
41Ik
No 2960
5.73
GHH GUTEHOFFNUNGSFIUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt
9.1.0.28 Guide blade control (general)
Adjustable guide blades allow the volume handled by

the compressor to be changed within a certain range.
Guide blade control of the first stage corresponds
to control by a throttle valve in the inlet channel
of the compressor, however with guide blade adjustment
being the more economical method.
Guide blade positioning shall be made use of to the
• greatest possible extent for improvement of the

efficiency at partial-load operation of the compressor
and for its start-up. For this, the shut-off valves
installed in the intake :
,, re to be kept fully open.
Positioning is to be in such a way that the inlet angle
of the air flow into the first stage is changed by
adjustment of the guide blades.
At the zero position of the guide blades the compressor

handles the normal delivery volume. When the guide
blades are moved in the direction of "Positive Pre-
whirl", the volume handled and the power consumption
• of the compressor decrease. The guide blades can be

moved in this direction until the inlet channels are
closed entirely. However, a limitation of this move-
ment prevents full closing of the guide blades.
When the guide blades are moved in the "Negative Pre-

whirl" sense a more favourable direction of rotor.
blade approach is obtained and thus the delivery
volume is increased. This favourable effect is only
achieved up to a certain position of the guide blades.
When this position is passed the friction losses rise
(s)
again, owing to increased turbulence and separation
cc.
at the guide blades. The resultant deterioration of
c
„
at-
No 3062
GEM BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
m.Tm.KA Watt
the approach flow to the rotor blades causes the

delivery volume to decrease again.
ts,
CO
-
‘7,
cn
No 3062
OHII GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
m•
TM•K
Blatt
9.1.0.29 Guide blade positioning on manual actuator at the

compressor
Following directions concerning the positioning of

guide blades aim at keeping the discharge pressure
constant. For keeping the volume constant it is to
be proceeded analogously.
The flow rate is to be increased when the discharge

pressure drops. This requires the guide blades to be
repositioned in the "negative prewhirl" direction as
far as the actual discharge pressure comes up to the
set-point value.
Positioning of the guide blades is done on the actuator

handwheel. Turning the handwheel anti-clockwise, i.e.
to "negative prewhirl" means increase of the flow-rate.
The flow rate is to be reduced when the discharge

pressure rises. This requires the guide blades to be
repositioned in the "positive prewhirl" direction as
far as the actual discharge pressure coincides with
set-point value. Turning the handwheel clockwise,
i.e. to "positive prewhirl" means reduction of flow
rate.
On coming up to the maximum negative prewirl or

positive prewhirl the guide blades have reached
their relative end position and will be blocked
by a stop.
BHH BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M , TM,K
•
Blatt
9.20.24 Description of the surge-limit volume control with

pressure correction
Controller: pneumatic controller, cross-

bellow type, with calculating
relay, for pressure adjustmen
J.C. Eckardt make
Characteristic of
controller: PID behaviour
Controlled variable: discharge pressure
Command variable: intake volume
Correcting variable, on
the left of the surge-
limit curve: blowloff volume
Direction of controller
action: reverse
Actuator: hydraulic actuator with

manual control and pneu-
matic pressure transducer,
GHH make
Control element: blow-off valve, GHH make
• Design and operation
The surge limit curve of radial turbo compressors

resembles a parabola which, however, can be made
approaching straightness at many points if the com-
pressor set is provided with discharge pressure
control by means of a throttle valve or guide blade
positioning. 7y- means of a control circuit it must
be ensured that the delivery volume never drops
below the surge limit volume curve (unstable range).
A blow-off limit curve fixed for safety reasons is
located- at the right of the surge limit curve, i.e.
11H INUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESE.LLSCHAFT
•
M.TM.K Watr
in the stable range and this blow-off limit curve is

to be imitated by means of measuring and control ap-
pliances. The distance between the.surge limit and
the parallel blow-off limit curves is to be established
in such a way that optimal operation is ensured, even
if only small delivery volumes are concerned, and that
surging of the machine is prevented. This is achieved
by the opening of a blow-off or return pipe when this
blow-off curve is approached, thus permitting a minimum
gas volume to be delivered by the machine.
The protection by surge limit control is realized by

the application of transmitters for discharge pressure
and delivery volume, calculators, the surge limit
controller proper and a bypass valve. For this purpose
the delivery volume is determined by an orifice plate
and converted into a standard signal by a differential-
pressure transducer. In order to attain a signal pro-
portional to the flow rate the transducer is followed
by a square root extraction relay by which the delivery
volume is adapted to a straight blow-off line. The
discharge pressure, after conversion into a standard
signal by a pressure transducer, is fed to the inlet
x of an analog calculator.
This calculator works to the eouation
YA = V (X •- Xx) + Yo
and it serves for the adaptation to the current opera-

tion conditions. The set-point values V; XK; Yo are to
be set so that discharge pressure and delivery volume
coincide at the blow-off curve. The inclination of the
blow-off curve is influenced by the factor V whe'reas
shifting of this curve parallel to the surge limit
curve is achieved with the factors XK and -0'
CFI
No 3062
GHH • GUTEHOFFNUNGSHEITTE
sleri
The discharge pressure signal thus adapted is fed into

the surge limit controller as command variable X and
the square-root extracted signal of the differential-
pressure transducer as command variable XK. Reverse
control action is set on the controller. Under normal
operation conditions Xx becomes> X causing the
controller to change to supply air so that the bypass
valve, which is opened by spring force, is closed.
With the delivery volume decreasing and the discharge
pressure increasing the operation point approaches the
blow-off curve until actual and set-point quantities
of the controller coincide. The correcting variable
decreases thereby and the bypass valve opens the blow-
off pipe. The differential volume, i.e. the volume
exceeding the blow-off curve is returned to the intake
pipe or blown off to the atmosphere via the bypass
valve until the.operation conditions ensure that the
full delivery volume is taken by the network. To
permit remaining on the blow-off curve even in the
case of a low load, a controller with integral action
without remaining control deviation is required. Such
a controller, however, would interfere with the
• process too late and alone it could not prevent the
volume from falling below the blow-off curve. There-
fore, the controller is equipped with a PID switch
which causes the controller to work as a PD controller
above a set change-over point (e.g. Y = 0.95 bar)
and which automatically brings in the I action when
this change-over point is not reached. Only this
ensures quick response of the controller and remaining
of the operation point on the blow-off curve.
CV/
The transient behaviour can he influenced by changing

131
4 the characteristic parameters of the controller, pro-
t\J portional band Xp, derivative time Tv and reset time
0§ T11.
N
No 3062
GHH SUTEHOFFNUNIESHUTTE
N.TN.K
•
Blatt..
The proportional component is changed by moving the

nozzle lever at the controller and the integral
component with the aid of the Tr throttle valve. The
output signal YA is fed via the manual/automatic sub-
panel and the time-lag relay to the actuator.
This subpanel allows the effect of the controller to

be eliminated (manual/automatic switsch) and to open
or close the blow-off valve manually with the aid of
the setting knob. To ensure smooth change-over, the
YA (automatic adjustment) should be equal to v
(manual adjustment).
4.
0:9
No 3062
loft -Verclidier AO- Verde/der
Rii-ampressor NO-Compressor
II-
ar
snu
Reglerschionk Air LuFrr rsc 9132.! Reglersdrank kir Ifilrosegas FSC 92.32.2
fiat7Os f2002.509000 070s 110•2s.soosr00
Controller-puma for ai Confroller-pane! 52. NO-Cess
32511gwarqs-
2das4
11.54.4e, AMA Cadovel 2.61.• 000

Fart. *Fr.. Ltd& Corbad 6* 35 400
foster Inwler LSO. ....Ow MOO 02. kie
RC M.. J.00 mow
rrimras. *raw: 00.3100- 02. -O
1kg Itentaer: CC" t. LIM
6 aim. New.: 23.4am IP
Peals. lama* Ckitalis. &WO
A a,
111#51111 063132 41126,61 6251232 Leaser& 6262132 112}171 622122 torgenit 6361231 let4eii1 2 262132
835bparila
Subpertla Arlo Sulaponsis 21,Faral• 2120265
/My
foam/ a -a. A_. OM. Mr Wok*:
f 12
A a
111•2
H. 67111011110111GSNUITI
. .......
kordeakeee.1 RegeIscherna tY6Y.90442 fil4 a

Celk00
Ar ammmy ar
15+0429 arm meg ..••••0 mm mom..
Ory• "...my • InOaal n mom. &metal*kV.
12 0 9 7 V 6 5 3 2 a
IiHH IBLITEHOFFNUNGSHIITTE
STEAK RAGE
M.TM.K AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
9. 9. /. OZ
Description of the adjusting gear.
The adjusting gear comprises two pilot control units

(pressure converters) of Which the one is for automatic
and the other for manual. operation..
The bellowi of the pressure converter for automatic

operation receives an air signal. Each air pressure
within the preset.signel- range corresponds to a partic-
ular impulse put out by the pressure converter and acting
upon the control slide of the adjusting gear.
When the impulse rises, power oil is admitted to the

space above the power pistOn, and when it falls the oil'
leaves the said space. The movement transmitted by the
power piston via the spindle adjusts the valve according
to the deviation from the set value.
When the governor fails, the adjusting gear can be

operated manually. For this purpose the rotary piston
valve fixed at the side of the adjusting gear is switched
from its lead-sealed position to "manual" and the impulse
for the control slide is produced by turning the handwheel
on the manual pressure converter.
During normal operation the rotary piston valve should

remain lead-sealed in its position "automatic" to ensure
full safety for the automatic control system. Under
these conditions, too, the adjusting gear can be operated
by turning the handwheel on the manual pressure converter,
and the spindle can move down to its end position while
it can rise only to the extent admitted by the automatic
system.
No 2960
It r to • 7 •
110 23 24 30 22 33 43 &h2 1‹-J
86
Aufgabe der austauschbaren Te zur 18 84 82
as 80
Vorsteuerung sic& besondere firuppen- ZO 56 81 &AIM
iota tto...c.‘14.4..amoskt)
Zeidmung 112 M62.18523016
• 78 (Reiff IS.?)
Z 39 79
109 77
A" . 27 83
74.5.22.4 74
75 76
a
47 101
50 73
72 102
69 21
54 19
zZ4
F
Schruilf=i
ie
i
r
94 96
2 EAAt_
troalisches SIVIII( 55 93
3164 Kr•Ilk.lben .tiaid
103' 29
Sthrit_tC-D *mit pintfli•lbot hebt)
89
Mat. coal)
98109
51 15" 97
92
90
7.• 16 46 75
91
66 &rust rife mach 74
17— 14 des Abbletaragitcco 72
Ira
rpl_arthurr_ 73
ikuchAtBoldpie740 Ni
28 13 _,A•todO, /Zr r
.PnY Sal
31 6
5
own* jiffrheatz
Rehr 643.2,9 3
Atiki,g0e .10Y dr.(77coosficant uw •1010•11-kra116eruck. 2st•rwg: 1105001.01 Aeotkl•st
SleAttor nS4 AltnetieWri•V c45Cheactxtar 1161.1152.1007 d
0 4
surd r-r/ swe,:
No.**. I
mo jointwwv
Pir lowiteutvng, par7t
p ,02 frva.vocar
pacter.110 one gonefsoSt0tlynictotrat
0157.1002 a
Siat•ert I tof mount Mvstfowsio4ov

12 9ett.e.1 I dote Ifice-icr•erwar
37 914.9.1. I mil 11.14:a14141.41iiciturst
*boot Z ohm .11everunprontrrothm MS11852.1007 a
42
103
ArsichtZ' 11111 ,40112M
26 140111•11,1.1017.e_9olarrt$ Idaisr_01Orelkwrip
13
\ Auftotbe eine PAC,
pot,
L.120-1/
32 1.1142 trawl •
p.21111 66 (^34 . C
C ra•
10 •D -f • i^"?
4 70 65 67 liffrsoyste,iat • mod, Prsta- 42094/11VoTrf
8 2) 1lelovrt 0.1_Perierkliftelleti ITYP'010

ol-Betwe*
A3.111*P7attea11a-
&roc* dry 1Osif
__IvromforrIcv_ razile 1112721A1f7..
170-112" toot?
02-10 tar.)
p.117,1
. . linto7
MOrt
d•pe PM?
47:7011G5XP•117 • roar r..cl• -11729 -10a Itolcrog
5 11.7eltret.12
L• 121-1/E fog
1' AZ-50 Pm?
47oontates-47•0X9-11(9? -Ctfe7.(NI-‘)[0,cfn7
---rfj -' 6..."-cht c..s.",toi • 1.4.%

e 109joigito " 712 H5rel
11 •ielkokohtt9."4•At 1161o1
107 Argehirifeo Zre7:tch•••S 117.t.24;tatnastai et7,167zatt,e.775
, 'Ace*
Zugehdrigec Zerischensli:ck ZehAt- NA Mif 1053.1001
a tR
Zoittly-M: /16-1. 1853. 1002 Robb Loam der tupfecett- Po *7 ml Sz*6jfirctia7 na-scoten,are 9AzEtAttme thag__
Irf Iee bed.r.ong I'm Name Grvra — BOW
actroolorroptrt P. !•177f 6d cc( Astortostrxt.
Yoe-all:
-t-; iwornmencottmaot7 12.4111601. .9.CVIN71/1120;707 morale &tattoo "tows,-
no,a7•7 cattecOmo,09 *Wean .S250 alas apotreotaaotr &mono:pert tr • .o44-.," I GliftIOMIONGIIIMI
IFS us n nn-R
A
108 • .-11 Sha aat clan .12Alatrotliort &he Prehti0Oerung 0.910.1
1.- .1.7002
rectonterper Les mm Arcrld79 t dor, 26reber /Ds "Peoolatfloo, loch Atm
;I: 218 •
1. Platelal
; .Kertava. A
.1
gornefitaytt Caves, me 7.41c11-1147 the AI‘0111,Oon 1cs
Sthnil A-B A...rerq Stellwerk I N61.1852.1002 ,
7 ••••• alkm•
1114
•50; hea., • fit?
•••••••••••••••••••••_•...
taw M.
am 1.• Re. •••••••••... ••••••km.•••••••,. Ansa! aterti:
71 TI 9 I 6 I 7 6 I 5 3 1 2
ISO 4b•1
0 14.2
Venfit sesc Wessell
IC I 83 97 97
Aufgabe nach Span* .a'

74
2
18 12 13-16 11 5 21 23 22 13-16 20 12 18 78
Einzelhella"
• Penh/ yes:Morten ry
97 F Aufgabe noch Spalle ..a" Aufgabe troth Spa/M.6'
Fdr beide Aufgabespallen gill: far for• ende Yenlile nach Zch I& fol • ende Venlife rach Z
A =Ce150-B
E • A- 0-492
f • E -194
Aufgobe nach 6•A- 54
Spalle ../2" Ifierzu Stenwer*e noch Zeichnunss-Afe:
D K • 93
M61 .1852. fool his /1611152.100?
e-Par..42
a ZE•,C•••17•,,Lie-7.9.5 - Air. • /11.63. 1653.1003 b
(1‘r-Ezviidurz9
. .r'v.:cc-hen , olferirinedsp,•7‘..1e1
- neceers, " Zo."4schees . .secick
.Aloco,off.o.t. orgl 3 or
4 18 12 13-16 1 17 10 1 5 A^1"' 4-'71.7 4.ore I. now :Yr Pt V*,

1970 . N000,
• •`• :7 a GCTEHOPINUNGSHUTTI
1 ‘Pmell rap.; is.17 a e a r7:77
a to
sonfolullt soali gggggg
I 4•.v22.1
1
Zwischenslack zurn
I 11611853.100Z
ra.my
Abblasevenfil
M. m,
_ 9 i 6 I 7 V 6 I 5 2
_
7466/Creoe
77: 1
Ave4„74.,4070- ""
i
•
M.TM.K Blatt
9.7.0.08 Automatic opening of the blow-off valve in case of

shut down of the set
The blow-off valve has the task, in addition to the

surge limit volume control, to open instantaneously
in case of shut-down of the set by initiation of a
safety device or in the event of an oil pipe breakage,
in order to relieve the discharge pipe from pressure.
For this purpose a three-port solenoid valve has been
• installed in the oil pipe extending to the impulse
chambers of the controller.
By initiation of one of the safety devices within the

set causing the machine set to stop an impulse is
transmitted to the three-port solenoid valve. Upon
receipt of such an impulse the said valve blocks the
oil supply to the impulse chambers of the controller
and releases at the same time the drain of oil from
these chambers. The control gate valve is then lifted
by its tension spring, the power-oil supply to beneath
the piston is blocked and the drain from this chamber
is released. The opening spring is permitted thereby
to press the piston rod with stem and valve down. The
blow-off valve is now fully open.
Subsequent to remedy of the fault within the set and

upon repositioning of the three-port solenoid valve
by a current impulse, the blow-off valve returns auto-
matically to its closed position. A non-complete clo-
sure of the valve can be taken as evidence for the
manual or, respectively, pneumatic pressure converter
being engaged.
•
No 3012
IIIITEHOIFFNUNGSHILITTE
STERKSADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Tri,K Blatt
Baurelhe: 24000.
9,9. 3.08 Regleter-Nr. A 2.02.04
21/24fli7pEtwogotti0q Katalog: Automatik

Register-Nr. P 2.02.08
Katalog: Pneumatlk •
Xnderungeetand 3.
MEI 5 E13.50 oam.

fik Mrseallafip
Esszprund 6111,
• KenngroBen
Benennung:
Betatigungsart:
Bauart:
3/2-Wegeventile (Mehrzwedwentile)
eiektromagnetisch direkt betatigt
Sitzventile, hermetisch dichtend
Medium: Druckluft, Wasser, Hydraulikal bls 5 °E
Betriebsviskositat sowie sonstige neu-
trale gasfarmige oder dannflassige
DurchfluBmedien
Betriebs- •
druckbereich: genies Tabelle
Statischer
Drudt: m nach Ausfahrung
bis max. 100 kp/cm2
Medium-
temperatur: —10 bis +80 °C
Umgebungs-
temperatur: —5 bis +40 °C
Werkstoffe: Ventilgehause: NW 5 bis 12 mm — Ms
NW 16 Ws 28 mm — Rg
NW 50 mm — GG
Innenteile: Ms/W. Nr. 1.4104
Sitzdichtung: Perbunan
Nennweite: 5 bis 50 mm
Anschlasse: Innengewinde R IA" bis R 2"
Durchflue-
richtung: gemaB Slnnbild (beliebig)
Elnbaulage: beliebIg, vorzugsweise Magnet sank-
resht
NW 8 and 12 mm mit BefestigungsbOgel
Schmutzfanger: nicht eIngebiut, Vorbau empfehtens-
wed
Anwendung
Diese Ventile werden zum fembetatigten Absperren,
Freigeben and Steuem eines Farderstromes in Lei-' .
tungen eingeset;t. Sie sand unIversell far vemchiederte
Funktionen venvendbar:
OHO MIUTEHOFFNUNIMHUTTE
STERKNADS AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TryLK Matt
Betffebedrudt admit-
Angelllull kv-Wert (kp/cm2) I) zeal Gewlcht Bestell-Nr.
min. I (mit
„ Magnet)
We Ventll Magnet Verdll Magnet
(mm] Luft I und DI (kg]
2
elektromegoettsch dIrekt betAtlgt
17:°17)6 In Null-Stellung durch Federkraft AnschluB 3 geSperrt, A schlu8 1 mit 2 verbunden.
I2
5 R 1/2" 0,34 0,40 0 10 10 15 1,2 24 010 10 0801 24 010 100801

8 R 1/2" 065 0,92 0 3 3 100 2,5 24 056 50 1300 24 056 501301
8 0,77 1,02 0 3 3 100 2.5 24 057 50 1300 24 057 501301
8 R 1/2" 0,78 1,10 0 3 3 100 2,5 24 058 50 1300 24 058 501301
8 R 1/2" 0,65 0,92 0 15 15 100 2.5 24 015 50 1300 24 015 501301
8 0,77 1,02 0 15 15 100 2,5 24 016 50 300 24 016 501301
8 R 1/2" 0,78 1,10 0 15 15 100 2,5 24 017 50 300 24 017 501301
12 %" 1,12 1.25 0 3 3 120 4,0 24 081 50 1500 24 081 501501
12 A 1/2" 1,25 1,69 0 3 3 120 4,0 24 082 50 500 24 082 501501
12 R 3/4" 1,12 1,25 0 10 10 100 3,0 24 024 50 300 24 024 501301
12 R I/2" 1,25 1,69 0 10 10 100 3,0 24 025 50 300 24 025 501301
12 R 3/8" 1,56 1,78 0 25 25 120 4,0 24 026 50 500 24 026 501501
12 R 1/2" 1,65 2,17 0 25 25 120 4.0 24 027 50 500 24 027 501501
12 1,12 1,25 --0 40 40 120 4,0 24066 50 500 24 066 501501
12 1/2" 1,25 1,69 0 40 40 120 4,0 24 067 50 500 24 067 501501
12 R %" 1,05 1,15 0 - 100') 120 4,0 24 078 50 500 24 078 541501
12 R 1/2" 1,13 1,27 0 - 100') 120 4,0 24 079 50 500 24 079 501501
18 R 1/2" 1,9 2,0 0 10 10 140 5,0 24 033 50 500 24 033 501501
16 R 3/4" 1,9 2,0 0 10 10 140 5,0 24 034 50 500 24 034 501501
22 R 3/4" 5,0 55 0 6 6 140 5,5 24 035 50 500 24 035 541501
22 R I" 5,0 5,5 0 6 6 140 5,5 24 036 50 500 24036 501501
28 R 3/4" 9,0 10,0 I) 10 10 200 14,0 24 037 50 800 24 037 501801
28 R 1" 9,0 10,0 0 10 10 200 14,0 24 038 50 800 24038 50 1801
28 R 13/4" 9,0 10,0 0 10 10 200 14,0 24 039 50 800 24 039 501801
50 R 11/2 " 25,0 28,5 0 3 3 250 34,0 24 040 00 1900 24 040 001901
50 R 2" 25,0 28,5 0 3 3 34,0 24 041 00 1900 24 041 00 1901
.2) Am Ventilsltz bel gesperrtem Weg.
') Schaltzeit gemessen von) Schaltbefehl ble Drudtaufbau auf 90% bzw. Drudcabbau auf 100/o des Nenndrudces bel Nenntemperatue
20 °C, em Arbelteanschlu8 2.
3) Dlchtung Stahl / Stahl nur ter flOsalge Medlen.
In dieser Druckschrlft sind der ObersidttlIchkelt wegen nur die Bestellnummem der Standard-Elaine enthalten.
Weltere Ventilausfithrungen auf Anfrage.
Kenngroften (Magneto)
Ausffihrung: nach Vorsehritt-VDE 0580 Betriebsart: DB (Dauerbetrieb) bzw. 100% ED (Einschaltdauer),
Normal- Leistungs- Schuti Zul. rel.. Umgebunge- Medium- Ausfahrung Gewicht Magnet-
spannungen aufnahme art Luttfeuchts temperatur temperatur. der Magnate Bestell-Nr.
DIN
Anzug Betrieb 40 060 [3/41 rC) [°C) (kg] - -
Kunststoff-
24 V 50 Hz ummanteit mit
42 V 50 Hz AMP-Fahnen
120 V 60 Hz 50 VA 24 VA . sowie Stecker
mit Kabelver- 0,3
220 V 50 Hz P 54. Ober 80 -5 bis + 40 -10 Ws + 80 - 0801
• schraubung
24 V - 16W 16W P911 0,3 0801 -
24 V- u. 185 V- 22W 22W 1,35 1300 -

24V-u.185 V- 42W 42W .
• 2,5 1500 -
24 V- u. 200 V- 70 W 70 W 11,2 1800
24 V- u. 200 V- 90W 90 W Grundaue. mit 14,3 1900 -
p 43 unter 80 - 5 bis + 40 -10 his + 80 Kabelverschrau-
220 V 40 Ws 60 Hz 28 VA 28 VA") bung Pg 13,5 1.35 _ 1301
220 V 40 bis 60 Hz 55 VA 55 VA") 2,5 - 1501
220V 40 bis 60 Hz 85 VA 85VA') 11,2 - 1801
220 V 40 Ms 60 Hz 105 VA 105 VA') 14,3 - 1901
) Wechselstromanschlu8 Ober eingebauten Gleichrichter.

Sonderepannungen (die Stromart 1st zusatzlich zur Magnetbestell-Nr. anzugeben)
MOglIche Spannungen bet Magnet (08011: Wechseispannungen von 6 Ns 380 V, Frequenzen 40, 50, 60 Hz
Glelchspannungen von 6 bis 220 V
0) [13011,115011: Wechselspannungen von 24 bis 440 V, Frequenzen 40, 50, 60 Hz
(1801), (19011: Wechselspannungen von 30 bis 440 V, Frequenzen 40, 50, 60 Hz
(1300], (15001, 118001: Slelchspannungen von 6 bis 400 V
• Gialoha annun en von 24 Ms 400 V
BUTEHLIFFNUNISSIIIIITTE
EITERKRAGE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
Elektdadie Schaltbilder
Bestellbelsplef:
Bestell-Nr.: 24 015 50 1301
Ventll Magnet
Spannung: Gleldmpannunge- Wechselspannungs- Gleichspannunge-

220 V 50 Hz magnet magnet magnet mit
Stromart/Freguenz:
Oleldirldffer
Welters Ventilaustahrungen (alit Anfrage)

Ventlle: Mit tellautomatischer Betatigung oath Sinnbild E 1.7 und
Mit Dichtwerkstoffen aus Teflon E 1.10
Mit Dichtwerkstoffen aus Viton Mit NPT-AnscislOsaen durch GewIndeatildt
Mit meth. Endschalter Magnate:
Mit liandbetatigung oath SlnnbIld E 1.1 und E 1.2
(verbleibt In eingesteliter Lege) In explosionsgeschatzter Ausfahrung - Schutzart f s G 4
Mit Handhlifsbetatigung nach Sinnbild E 1.5 und E 1.6 In schiagwetter- und explosionsgeschatzter Ausfahrung -
(geht nach Loslassen in Ausgangsstellung zurack) Schutzart ded3nG5
In Klimaschutz sowie far h6here Temperaturen
Schnllizeldmung
Bestell-Nr. 24 015 50 bis 24 017 50
1 Gehause
2 Ventilsitz
3 Buthse
4 0-Ring
5 Magnetschlulthelse 9
10 6 Winkel 10
11 7 Magnet komplett 11
8 Druckteder
12 9 Magnetanker
19 19
10 SIcherung it
14 11 Mutter
13 12 SicherungsrIng
13 13 StOtrrIng
14 Nutting
15 SpIndel komplett
19 0-RIng
Null-Stellung Schalt-Steliung
Gewindestacke far „NPT--Anschlu6
Makeldmungen (mit Olchtkante und aus Werkstoff Ms 58)
Bestell-Nr. 24 010 10
RI R2 Sach-Nr. L I, SW di t
R '/," %" -18 NPT 11.2:1487-2 31 12 19 7 13

R W %" -18 NPT 11.2:1487-3 34 12 22 9,5 14
R 1/2" 1/2" -14 NPT 11.2:1487-4 40 14 27 12 18
R %" W -14 NPT 11.2:1487-5 44 16 36 17 19
R 1" 1" -11'/2 NPT 11.2:1487-8 50 18 41 22 23
R 11/4" 11/4" -11'/2 NPT 11.2:1487-7 55 20 50 30 24
01 R 1V2" 11/2° -11'/2 NPT 11.2:1487-8 60 22 '60 35 24
R 2" r - 11'/2 NPT 11.2:1487-9 65 24 70 45 25
DHH OUTIEHOFFNUNEISHUTTE
M.-111.4.K Bien
MaBzelchnungen
-- F—
_ __
no
moodilloom
I gli
' • . .. ,...
-E -2•-,
... P 13,5
to IIl IN II II 11111111101411110
0 i p...7,
. @jdi
'0
a 1 31 ®
CI 1;
11 als I®.
lemon !int
4•
70—
Bestell-Nr. NW A A.--.JD OC .7.---.13 E F
24 056 50 24 015 50 R'/4"

24 057 50 24 016 50 8 R'/e" 56
24 058, 50 24 017 50 R Y2" 85 41F '
228 . 108 60
- 24 024 50
12
R %" /
- 24 025 50 R'/2" ,
24 081 50 24 026 50 R %"
24 082 50 24 027 50 R
12 R 1/2"
%" 257 108 115 58 70
24 068 50 24 078 SO
24 067 50 24 079 50 R 1/2"
-0
o
it Ili
TI
' ge
1 Pp 13.5
intilal
1111 0 IIIII
r ill;
.61RIE111102%
. - -
1
!
r.ev
I r s• - u It ---.: -
.
L 6.
Best.-Nr. NW A B CO D E F 0 H IK L M N 0 P
24 033 50 R 1/2" 13,5 M 10 44 19,5 30 100 39 76,5 12 70

16 266 106 60 15
24 034 50 R 3/4"
24 035 50 R 74" 15 M 10 120 42 79,5 12 70
22 296 106 • 70 60 SO 15 30
24 036 50 R 1"
24 037 50 R 3/4"
24 038 50 28 R 1" 370 170 100 9 M 12 60 30 20 40 132 57 102 12 108
24 039 50. R 11/4"
24 040 00 A1/2 510 195 130 33 M 16 90 45 40 80 240 98 172 21 115
24 041 00 60
R 2"
/4444.49 440 tac0.4404.1.41.4bp• 4.44 aanrilre44.4
a...* • •.•
1 444,
11.4,444.4..... 44. .••••••••••• —.•••••, •••••••
Mesfischiss sad, 00I 3141 Rear 3
.Sfeli an
bouse.ts
.DATorrerzsdruck- Druck- 044ko-r4

Itolos it
Z.',471.2.44er
Acs 6 132 13f
6 142 221
42- 1A-,040n2 02-1irp/c4r.
:34
L.42trt-ee.E.:eca Ph ? PL 1 Pi 3
Aerso-esruns.sAelais
1 A 6 161. 94:71
Amer;ser Ras •5
Anzo:94..-
6 213 4.21 6 213 42f
Abs 7 Zulu ft f Fos 6 4 4".....t.41:
C - •100
0- dOC
lefraytisairrsoler YA Yo • V (A -.(4.) • Ableuzbolyegier m A/--5.4

6 49, 31f Abs.? 6411 211 Pos. B
Fold Islartoltraonfasoetoicaefe • Wandrrionio9splotte
ROCIZielrefari .11-77 . 6 419 10 f Pos 9
6 419 Sof' , Pos.3
6 1.41 61f
As. 12
0•3;t1, 3m
Afe..43 .; pro• R's ,2

0- e00 ledber.
0- 4,42 /c .n 2 I
I
AnZeigre Zulu!/ 6
2:41.44 4 .24.1.41-1 2
Zulu/I
6 213 421 —r
an • A .2
I kb.S. 19 Pos. e0 sksissso
List A Aborse. #b# # 2•01.229
ft ft a.Pgb Esess.salmiegli
eas imeg 6 96 2 3 2
6 963 132 6 96 22
,
Woncirnonlc?eploite ma 4V0na a rie
At.'onsfer,041030,010fie
Pos 5 , 569 (II P.r.5 If ,
Pos es 6 969 11?
KennWort` Pro .eki Auk', Nr
!Kuno 4 656 560f/653f 703 Auftrogs-Nr:...#10

Kennworl
N. _
M. Tm - K : 3.e14' 3 > 73 IF
LMh, cc; .4.1,7”arq
4.• J. C. ECK ARDT A.D.

CS PC, ae S'UTTGJP7 SIC CANNSIATT
4,
Berohrungsplan EY 13/ 813
go.nr.,;e n.r
x. JrS I Ven.00dang • .5.P,.' Tare :e ,4;• t,ene TOOp.'te
5 4
0.-te,f• . eppe4 4.04.
I V
-4k -416
l......-0.----
V f I 1
11 • I ,4
+
i
I
1
41 .0 029
Curio
.92/32
M. Tm - K — /4/68.9ogo.lf7aoi
AlleiNr der Atriernea

1273 ;Mose
3 1. 'At. Eckardt A.G. 6N11
Stuffirirt-Rad CattastaIt 08 , Steekract*
T
Sesseansavg zdikhattie-pi.
Pneum_ -Anscht EY iiii447

shot .0
fr' 7 0 0 1'
MINI/
V=ICMCVA,
SZt
671.`1
0 - c'erk?-cce
ler% 4650
S7.-1
- Aff7 60(1; 9 Gerdiecnordnung S/ANX. 5721
r==earszszweraficzmirstasemmzvarzsce.r.-..• -1•=5116•4
Idsal-Nr
2 S d-ck °raj.46S0 1.'"rnnw. <-24n 4utì'r 5,90z/ Os 31 703
•
30'Ar.schablone !
, -r
alp O
AL,)
nn. Steck-on scnIt...t/.3
HI-KS .5001;1 •
' pr). ecker-
6 .957 143
PVC. A-'0,10
"7ze:c_ier
os .
„/- .4,445 5003 ctur )1,4 .1.1G 5003
3-
Z e;I-5, .•?.rcii- Z .e.;219.e.-a'1.- Z e:1•19 era"?

Pos. 4% Pt? S . -10 Is. -13
. '
au/ it/onci,r, pl au( 41,4Carn . „al. Q al. 41.'Qf! ci,77 ./...,/.
Pos. .5" • Pos. . 11 - Pos 14
1
Y'errog
Pt/ nzz/ 40 *6-0
Pos. 15
lasmr.,-)en
Hontas4., ic.zile 850 men 70 mm hsc/i ••4

ILL I. • s".
4110 029
Curio
92/32
M, Tit71 - K7/46-6:901/0,11.70.02
.4angefenrq Ch:L f Ger ,an /1.1:.7 ,=.7 14.1=T61241'27=1-425.'
I 42..i/e4.-..( 3 1: 73 - czq- • 4' J. C. ECKARD7 A. G. STig 0 Z..'
GHH BUTEIHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKSADE AKTIEN GESELLSCHAFT
A4 , T M k 11 matt
9.9.9.09
Supply air station Station de filtrage Zuluftstation

et de détente d'air
Application Application Anwendung

•
For adjusting the supply air pressure Pour regler la pression d'air auxiliaire Zum Einstellen des Zuluftdruckes fUr
to pneumatic instruments. An additional destine aux appareils pneumatiques. pneumatische Gerate. Ein zusatzliches
filter retains water, oil and dust residue Un filtre retient les residus d'eau, Filter halt Wasser,- 01- und Staubreste
from the already-purified compressed d'huile et de "poussiere hors de l'air aus der bereits vorgereinigten Versorgungs-
air supply. comprime d'alimentation déjà filtre druckluft zurack.
au prealable.
Principle Principe PrInzip -
Elimination of water and oil: Elimination d'eau et d'huile: Wasser- und Olbeseitigung :
centrifugal action Effet centrifuge Zentrifugalwirkung
Dust removal: Depoussierage: Entstaubung:
sintered metal filter Filtre en metal trate Sinter-Metallfilter
Pressure regulation: Reglage de pression: DrUckregelung :
pressure reducer Mano-detendeur Druckminderer
Special feature Particularites Besonderhelten

Filter and pressure reducer can be Filtre et mano-detendeur realises Filter und Druckminderer einzeln oder als
used individually or as one installation unit. individuellement ou sous forme d'unite Baueinheit ausgefahrt.
Filter bowl transparent de construction. Filterschale durchsichtig
Input pressure up to 10 bar Cuve de filtre transparente. Eingangsdruck bis 10 bar.
Pression d'entree jusqu' a 10 bar.
1
' .. ........
EMI
_ —`
1 :=0I
- a:-
1,fli. '1- Al
b -I
._
' .....
4 oil
cr;
No 3062
C Typenblatt 6 921000
6.71
GHH BUTIEFICIFFNIIINGSMITTE
•
STERK'RADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
toirm.ti Blatt
Techniache Daten
Filter Ausgangsdruck 0,1 bis 2,5 bar oder 0,1 bis 6 bar
Anschluffkorper Aluminium-Druckgu8, stufenlos einstellbar
seewasserbestandig max.Vordruck 10 bar bei 60 °C
Filter Sinterbronze 8 bar Ober 60 °C bls max.70
Leitspiralen Kuntsstoff, durchsichtig Eigenluftverbrauch max.60 In/h
Auffangtchale Kunststoff, durchsichtig max. Luftleistung ca 20 m3n/h beiAp - 3,5 bar
FlUssigkeitsabla8 Schraube unten standige Luftentnahme . min. 80 In/h
max.Vordruck • 10 bar bei 60 °C Vordruckabhangigkeit. 0,1% Ausgangsanderung pro 0,1 bar
8 bar Ober 60°C bis max.70 °C Nullpunktabweichung < 0,4% des Ausgangsdruckes
max. Luftleistung 35 m3 /h Temperaturabhangigkeit <0,03%/°C im Bereich
Luftanschlftsse NPT1/4" Gewindeloch normal') -10 bis 4-70 °C
Druckminderer Gehause aus max. Betriebstemperatur 70°C bei 8 bar Vordruck
Aluminium-Druckgu8, Umgebungstemperatur -20 bis +70 °C
seewasserbestandig
Druckmeftgerat GehAuse 54 mm•0
Anzeigebereich 0 bis 2,5 barn) oder 0 bis 6 bar 11 Schneldring-, Rohr- oder Schlauchverschraubungen warden aut basondere
Bestellung lose mItgeliefert
2) Far Regelkroise mit Strichmante bei .4 .1- 0.1 bar
3) Temperaturen unier 0*C nur bei trockaner Versorgungalutt
Gonnees techniques
W Filtre Pression de sortie 0,1 A 2,5 bar ou 0,1 A 6 bar

Corps de raccordement Aluminium coule sous pression Pression amont max. 10 bar A 60 °C
resistant A l'eau de mer 8 bar au-dessus de 60 °C
Fil tre Bronze fritte Consommation d'air max. 60 Idh
Spirales directrices MatiAre plastique transparente Debit d'air max. env. 20 mon/h
Cuve collettrice Matiere plastique transparente p = 3,5 bar
Vidange de liquide Vis en bas Consommation d'air min. 80 In/h
Pression amont max. 10 bar A 60 °C Dependance de la
8 bar au-dessus de 60 °C pression amont 0,1% de changement de sortie
jusqu'au max. 70°C par 0,1 bar
Debit d'air max. 35 m3 /h Deviation du zero < 0,4% de la pression de sortie
Prises d'air NPT 1/4"taraude normal') Dependance de la
Mano-detendeur Corps en aluminium temperature < 0,03 %/°C dans la plage
coule sous pression de -10 8 +70 °C
ManomAtre Boitier, diam. 54 mm Temperature de
Graduation 0 A 2,5 bare) ou 0 8 6 bar service max. 70 °C A B bar de pression amont
Temperature ambiante -20 a +70 °C3)
Raccorda chantreines, accouplements de tuyau par raccords Metes

at raccords h via pour tuyaux !tont compile dans Is icumiture. detaches,
Oarticuilere.
2) Pour circuits de rootage avec trait de repent A 1,4 4 0,1 bar
3) Temperatures au-desaeus 0•0•C seutement en cas d'allmentation A air sec.
Tdchnicel specification
Filter
Connection Aluminium die casting, Output pressure 0,1 to 2,5 bar or 0,1 to 6 bar
seawater resistant continuously adjustable
Filter Sintered bronze Max. supply 10 bar at 60°C
Helical guides Plastic, transparent pressure 8 bar over 60°Cup to max,70 °C
Collection bowl Plastic, transparent. Air consumption max. 60 I/h
Liquid drainage Plug at bottom Max. air capacity approx. 20 m3n/h at A p = 3,5 bar
Max. supply pressure 10 bar at 60 °C Constant air take delivery min. 80 In/h
<-4 8 bar over 60°C upto max.70 °C Dependence on
Max. air capacity 35 std. rn4fh supply pressure 0,1% output change per 0,1 bar
Air connections NPT 1/4" tapped hole standards Zero deviation. < 0,4% of output pressure
Pressure Reducer Influence of temperature < 0,03%/°C in the range -10 to +70°C
Housing Aluminium die casting, Max. operating temp. 70 °C at 8 bar supply pressure
seawater resistant Ambient temp. -20° to +70 °C
Air connections NPT1/4" tapped hole standard')
Pressure gauge Housing 54 mm
4' 1) Compression type, pipe or hose unions can be supplied loose to special order
Scale range 0 to 2,5 bare) or 0 to 6 bar 2) For control loops with mark at 1,4 + 0.1 bar
3) Temperature <0 °C only with dry supply air
No 3062
hoL
GHH BUTEHEIFFNUNISSINUTTE
ST. ERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
..m.r.m. . .... Blatt
- - '2,..:
Dimension drawing Dimensions Magzelchnungen
Supply air station Station de Mirage Zuluftstation

et de detente d'air
118 74°
.
75 --1 1.1 re--49-1
. s.
ii' :
/4
1V6iiiii 5,50
1111- ""ii n
1 .:-:...i. in
O •
.i, Oa.'--_-_-_
. k...„; ,
:. ., IL'‘\
• • AY 40
:e ri A.
I __let Ile ir,,-.:;•AO2 g NPT 1/4"
NPT 1/4" % / fill:r.
- -- _, 3 4 I tIliT
A n
, NMI :
IN
o '
- -
it
°L." OOP II
r ....
Druckminderer Zubehor
Mono-detendeur Accessolres
Pressure reducer Accessories Absperrhahn Montage
t
Robinet d'arret Mounting
., Stop cock Mounting AnscNue-
verschraubungen
iliff'Mil Lonnectors
NPT1/4" em NPT1/4" mai
Raccords
. Aif ilii
rl ?5
i 1
,i. t 1.1118.4N Val BIAS -
_ 4 Ffit ,;
,,.Lwy4
...41 ,4
°°' IIMil
_a ll VV. AMII
p.ka= meow:ALF
lfirgriIrl Absperrhahn
P111111• - 8
_ 5 Ermeto m 10-L ca 70 . 50 160.. Robinet d'arret
c =1.1111 (DIN 3870 ALIO) Stop cock
.1 5,50 0 (DIN 3881L10)
-
Ermeto m 12-L c874 60 120
11 (DIN 3870 AL 12)
540 (DIN 3861 S12)
/ ' .
I -' -61
L rderIng table 1 Tableau de commando Bestelltabelle 1
Auskihrung Ausgang, einstellbar Gewicht Bestell-Nr Preis Bemerkungen

Execution Sortie, ajustable Poids [kg] Type Prix Remarques
Model Output, adjustable Weight Order No. Price Remarks
. 0,1bIs 2,5 bar (1.5 his 35 psi) 6 921121 -

Zuluftstation 0,1A 2,5 bar (1,5 a 35 psi) 1,0
0,1to 2,5 bar (1,5 to 35 psi) . 6921211 drittw Luttanschlu131)
Station de filtrage 3* prise d'air)
et de detente d'air 0,1Oise bar (1,51ns 90 pal) ird connectiont)
Thirdair
Supply air station 8 bar (1,5 A 90 psi) 1,0 6 923 121
0,1to 8 bar (1,5 to 90 psi)
0,1bis 2,5 bar (1,5 bis 35 PS8

0,1a 2,5 bar (1,5 a 35 psi) 0,7 6 921512
Druckminderer 0,1to 2,5 bar (1,5 to 35 PS8
Mano-detendeur -
Pressure,reducer 0,1bis 8 bar (1,5 Ins 90 psi)
0,1A 6 bar (1;5 a 90 psi) 0,7 6 923 512
0,1to 8 bar (1,5 to 90 pal)
) Rear mounted, for unreduced filtered air 1) Au dos pour a r lino) non redult ) nickseitig, fOr unreduzien gefllterte Lel
No 3062
GHH IBUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT . ... .
m.rm,k(
•
Blatt
Ordering table 2 , Tableau de commando 2 Bestelltabelle 2

Stop cock Robinet d'arret Absperrhahn
Eingang Ausgang ' Bestell-Nr
Entree Sortie Type
Input Output Order No.
Ermeto m 10-L 10 0 ZV1/861
Ermeto m 12-L • 12 0 ZV1/862
Adaptoss for connections Raccords a vis selon fiche AnschluBverschraubungen

in plastic bag technique 6 993.000 dans im Kunststoffbeutel
see data sheet 6 993000 sachet en matiere plastique nach Typenblatt 6 993 000
• Ordering data
Supply air station
Ordering No.
consisting of pressure reducer, with
Indications de commando'
Station de filtrage et de détente d'air
Type
Bestellangaben
Zuluftstation
Bestell-Nr
Comprenant mano-detendeur avec bestehend aus Druckminderer mit
pressure gauge 0 - 2.5 bar/0 - 6 bar manometre 0...2,5 bar/0...6 bar Manometer 0.. 2,5 bar/0 6 bar
Air filter with sintered bronze filter Filtre a air avec element de filtre en Luftfilter mit Filtereinsatz aus Sinterbronze,
element, filter boWl plastic/metal . bronze frill& cuve de filtre en matiere Filterschale aus Kunststoff/Metall
(at extra cost) platsique/metal (au supplement de prix). (gegen Mehrpreis)
Connections NPT1/ 4" internal/with Raccords ctaraudes NPT 1/4" AnschlOsse NPT 1/4" innen/mit Schneid-
compression type unions for pipe interieur pour tuyau a ringverschraubungen filr Rohr
in input mm, in output mm l'entree mm, a la sortie mm im Eingang mm, im Ausgang.. mm
Supply pressure max.10 bar Pression amont max.10 bar Vordruck max.10 bar
Output pressure adjustable Pression de sortie, reglable 0,1...2,5 bar/ Ausgangsdruck einstellbar 0,1...2.5 bar/
0.1- 2.5 bar/0.1-6 bar 0,1...6 bar 0,1...6 bar
Air capacity: approx. 20 m3n/h Debit d'air env. 20 m3n/h Luftleistung : ca 20 m3n/h
Pressure reducer Mano-diatendeur Druckminderer
Order No. Type Bestell-Nr
with pressure gauge 0 -2.5 bar/0 - 6 bar avec manometre 0...2,5 bar/0 6 bar mit Manometer 0...2,5 bar/0...6 bar
Connections NPT1/4'' internal/with corn,. Raccords chanfreines NPT 1/4" interieur Anschlusse NPT1/4" innen/mit Schneid-
pression type unions for pipe 6 mm/10 ram pour tuyau 6 mm/10 mm ringverschraubungen fUr Rohr 8 mm/10 mm
Supply pressure max.10 bar Pression amont max.10 bar Vordruck max.10 bar
Output pressure adjustable 0.1-2.5 bar/ • Pression de sortie reglable 0.1 2,5 bar/ Ausgangsdruck einstellbar 0,1...2,5 bar/
0.1- 6 bar 0,1...6 bar. e 0,1...6 bar
• Stop cock
Order No.
Connections with compression type
unions for pipe 10 mm/12 mm
Robinet d'arret
Type
Raccords chanfreines pour tuyau
10 mm/12 mm
Absperrhahn
Bestell-Nr
Anschliisse mit Schneidringverschraubunge
kir Rohr 10 mm/12 mm
Additional equipment, special model Dispositif complementaire, execution Zusatzausstattung, Sonderausfibrung
speciale
metal filter bowl, up to max.60°C, Cuve de filtre en metal, jusqu'a Filterschale aus Metall, bis max.60 °C,
incl. gasket;when Ordering state: max. 60 °C y compris joint plat. einschl. Flachdichtung.Im Bestellfall angeben
metal filter bowl En cas de commando indiquer: Filterschale aus Metall
Order No.: BHXG 186/1 cuve de labia en metal Bestell-Nr: BHXG 186/1
Type: BHXG 186/1
- 4-
J. C. ECICARDT AG D-7000 Stuttgart 50 • Postfach 50 03 47
Telefon (0711) 5 02-1 • Telex 7 254 445
No 3062
GHH SIUTENICIFFNUNISSIMATTE
M.TM.K Wan
•
y, I. 05
• Mounting and Operating

instructions
MB 6921 a engi.
•
Supply-air Station
J. C. ECKARDT AG 7000 STUTTGART 50

n atlxs Postfach 500347 Telefon (0711) 5021 Telex 72 3838
0
No 2N0
1. GENERAL
With pneumatic transducers, controllers, and transfer and loading
stations, dust-, oil- and water-free supply air is prerequisite to re-
liable functioning of the instruments. In addition, the pressure of the
supply air must be kept constant within narrow limits with varying'air
consumption.
•
Since in most cases the air is taken from a supply system with fluctu-
ating pressure, it must accordingly be cleaned and controlled to the
required pressure in a so-called supply-air station. .
2. DESIGN Fig. 1 and. Fig. 2

Essentially the supply-air station consists of air filter (1), pressure
reducing device (2), and pressure gauge (3). Air filter and pressure re-
ducing device with pressure gauge are also supplied as separate units.
The air filter proper consists of the plastics shell (4) with drain plug
(5), the cup-shaped helical guide (6) of plastics, the sintered-metal
filter (7) and the clamping disk (8). The flange (10) serves for the
attachment of the shell.
MODE OF OPERATION. Fig. 2

As the stream of compressed air enters the plastics shell (4) of the
air filter it is given a twist by built-in helical guides (6) so that oil
and water particles contained in the air are flung against the plastics
shell and collect at its bottom. Via the vent screw (5) the separated
liquid can be drained from time to time.
Before the air enters the pressure reducing device, it is forced by the
high pressure through a sintered-metal filter which retains possibly
existing solid matter. The required output pressure can be set by turn-
ing the spindle (9) on the pressure reducing device and it can be read
from the attached pressure gauge (3).
Fig. 3 shows the functioning of the pressure reducing device.

9,4109.05 ;
• •
4. MOUNTING
r-49 45 Mount the pressure-reducing device in vertical position and as near as

possible to the associated pneumatic instrument where it is not exposed
to vibration. The mounting bracket (11), Fig. 2, is provided for the
attachment of the instrument.
The device must be shielded from sun irradiation and, on the other hand,
protected against ambient temperature below 0°C (32°F) by suitable
measures, because otherwise the vent opening freezes and the pressure
reducing device can no longer function properly.
11
Normally the connections are equipped with Ermeto unions for pipes of
6, 10 or 12 mm o. d. (0.24; 0.39; 0.47 in.). With the instrument type
with NPT 1/4" female thread the necessary reducers must be provided
v. by the customer.
10 5. MAINTENANCE Fig. 3
5.1 Draining of the condensate
6
The condensate must be drained from the plastics shell before it reaches
7 the bottom of the clamping disk (8).
We recommend to proceed as follows:
8
1. Close shut-off valve on the supply-air side.
fo.
2. Open drain screw (5)
3. Slowly open shut-off valve so that the liquid is forced out of the shell
by the compressed air.
4. Close drain screw (5) again.
5.2 Exchange of filter

1. Close shut-off valve on the supply-air side.
2. Drain condensate according to Section 5.1.
3. Unscrew the four screws in flange (10) and take off the plastics
shell (4).
Fig. 2 Note: Don't damage gasket.
4. Unscrew clamping disk (8) by turning it to the left.
5. Exchange filter (7).
S: eg. 0 5( e) 4/ 4. •
Einstellung
8. Screw clamping disk (8) on again and tighten.

7. Put plastics shell (4) with flange (10) back in place and tighten
the four screws. Pay attention to the gasket.
8. Close drain screw.
Entlu ftung 9. Open shut-off valve.
5.3 Cleaning of the filter
1. Soak filter in solvent like alcohol or benzine free from grease.
2. Blow filter out with compressed air and dry.
Ausgang 5.4 Cleaning of the plastics shell

The plastics shell must always be kept clean so that the liquid level
can clearly be seen: If necessary, clean with benzine.
Adjustment Einstellung
Eingang
Vent Entltiftung
Outlet Ausgang
Inlet Eingang
Fig. 3
GHH GUTIENUFFRUUNOSHILITTE
STE.RKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M TM K Blatt
9.9.2.1.6
Mounting and Operating

Instructions
MB 6132 engl.
Pneumatic
Pressure Transducer

Postfach 500347 Telefon (0711)5021 Telex 723838
No 790
GEM lilUTENUFFNUNGSHILITTE
EITE*FIKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M TM.K Blatt
1. GENERAL
The pneumatic pressure transducer serves for the conversion of any
pressure, even of negative pressure into an analog signal in the standard
pressure range from 0.2 to 1 kp/ cm2 (2.8 to 14.2 psi). This signal is con-
ducted to pneumatic standard controllers and signal switching elements
for further processing.
The instrument is not equipped with any data indication. Start and span of
measurement are adjustable. Eight types of measuring mechanism alto-
gether are available for the detection of the measured'variable, namely
for Bourdon-tube and for diaphragm measuring mechanisms. They can
be overloaded by a multiple of their maximum measuring span. The ad-
justment ranges of measurement start and span and the overload limits
for -the individual measuring mechanisms are given in the Ordering Table
of the Data Sheet 6 132 000, page 4. In order to extend the applicability of
this instrument for corrosive media, all measuring systems are made
from material 1.4571.
The pneumatic pressure transducer is marked by its clear construction.

Its components are conveniently accessible. This also applies to the ad-
justing screws for the adaption of start and span of the measurement to
the operating conditions. The zero of the output signal can be corrected
even with the protective cap in place.
The instrument is arranged for simple wall mounting or for mounting on

pipes. The latter method necessitates two studs and two clips in addition.
The JCE pressure transducer offers the following advantanges:

Simple adaption of the transducer to the operating conditions by the selec-
tion of a suitable measuring mechanism.
Stepless adjustment of the measurement span in the ratio 1:10.
Stepless adjustment of the measurement start from 0 to 90 % of each
maximum measuring span concerned.
Applicability for corrosive media without extra cost.
High overload capacity of the various measuring mechanisms.
Mounting in the plant without special protective casing.
2. MODE OF OPERATION (Fig. 1)

The instrument operates in accordance with th-a principle of torque com-
parison, because measured variable and pneumatic output signal are com-
pared on a balance beam (1) under consideration of lever actions. The
measuring mechanism (2) produces the measuring force, and the bellows
(6), which are supplied with the output pressure of the amplifier (4), cre-
ates the compensating force. Via a displaceable support (7) it is possible
to adjust the effective lever length for the compensating force and thereby
No 2N0
z
eti )6 () /6 •
the compensating moment. Changes of the measured variable, i.e. 3. Stick the bolts into the securing bores of clip and transducer.
negative or positive pressure, cause a change of the distance bet- 4. With twb additional nuts (7 and 8) clamp clip (1) and securing strap (2)
ween baffle plate and nozzle (5). This in turn changes the cascade together.
pressure and thereby the output signal of the amplifier. Attention ! Counterhold with wrench.
Thus, there is continuous balancing between the measuring moment, 5. Place transducer on mounting pipe or flat stock according to Fig. 3.
i.e. the product of measuring force times lever arm, and the com- §. Put mating clip (9) in place and-screw on nuts (10 and 11).
pensating moment, i.e. the product of compensating force time the Attention ! When tightening, counterhold at nuts (5 and 6) with
corresponding lever arm. Changes of the effective lever arm on the wrench.
compensating side cause changes of the ratio of measured variable
to output signal, whereby, ultimately, the measuring span can be
adjusted continuously. 4. CONNECTION
The instrument is provided with the following connections:
A tension spring (8), which counteracts the compensating force,
seves for the adjustment of the pneumatic zero of 0.2 kp/cm2 Supply air: NPT 1/8 in. with cutting-edge screw connection
(2.8 psi). Spring (3) is used for the setting of the measurement for 6 mm (0.236 in.) conduits (pipe or hose).
start. If negative pressure is measured this spring is arranged Signal pressure: same as above.
as indicated by dotted lines.
Measuring mechanism: Threaded 1/2 in. pipe nipple with flat or spheri-
cal seal.
3. MOUNTING Attention! For measuring meclianisms, whose pressure
The instrument can be mounted on a wall, a piece of flat stock up span can be adjusted up to the range from
to a width of 80 mm (3.15 in.) or a vertical pipe of 40 to 80 mm 10 to 100 kp/cm2 (140 to 1400 psi) (Ord. No.
(1.57 to 3.15 in.) diameter. 6 132 521) the flat seal (union nut) DIN 16 064
is used.
For measuring mechanisms, whose pressue span
3.1 Wall Mounting (Fig. 2) can be adjusted from 40 to 400 kp/cm2 (570 to
Required mounting accessories are: 5700 psi) and within higher ranges (Ord. No.
6 132 431) spherical seals (screwed-on flange)
2 screws M 12 x 30 (metric thread 12 mm, 1.18 in. lg. ); DIN 16 049 are used. The screwed-on flange
JCE No. 103/176 or does not belong to the standard supply of the
2 rag bolts M 12 (metric thread 12 mm) DIN 529, for mounting transducer. The screwed-on flange and the
on a brick or concrete wall. mating flange are mounting material.
For satisfactory functioning of the instrument the supply air should have
3.2 Mounting on a Piece of Pipe or Flat Stock (Fig. 3) a pressure of 1,4 + 0,1 kp/cm2 (20 + 1.4 psi) and should be free from
Required mounting accessories are: dust, oil and water. The connecting conduits should not be subjected to
any stress.
2 pipe clips, JCE No. CLX 22/1,
2 screw bolts M 12 x 120 (metric thread 12 mm x 4.72 in.), 5. POSSIBLE ADJUSTMENTS
JCE No. STG 249/1,
4 toothed lock washers J 12,5, DIN 6797, JCE No. SBZ 1/15, 5.1 Zero (outlet)
6 nuts M 12 (metric thread 12 mm) DIN 934, JCE No. Mus 53/17. 1. 'To the signal outlet connect a pressure gauge of quality grade 0.6 if
possible.
When mounting it is good practice to proceed as follows: 2. Admit supply air of a pressure of 1.4 + 0.1 kp/cm2 (20 + 1.4 psi)
1. Place clip (1) on the securing strap (2) of the transducer so that at the supply-air inlet.
the corresponding bores are in alignment. 3. Turn the zero adjusting screw (1), Fig. 4, by hand or with a screw
2. Screw the nuts (5 and 6) onto the bolts (3 and 4) respectively to driver, which can be applied even with closed casing (hood passage),
until the pressure gauge indicates 0,2 Icp/cm2 (2.8 psi) or 2000 mm
about half the length of the bolts. (6 ft. 7 in.) WG.
4:
*2.16 ( ,) •
Attention ! For this adjustment the measuring mechanism
must not be subjected to any pressure.
4. Remove the pressure gauge again.
2
5.2 Measuring Span
1. Adjust the pneumatic zero in accordance with Point 5.1. Do Mengrolle
not remove the pressure gauge. Fig. 1

Zuluft Supply air
2. Preselect the measuring span by turning the screw (2), Fig.4. Ausgang Outlet
The scale (3) for the measuring-span adjustment comprises Mefigr6fie Measured variable
the numerals 1 to 10. These correspond to 1 to 10 times the
smallest possible measuring span of the selected measuring
mechanism.
3. Check the pneumatic zero in accordance with Point 5.1. Do
not remove the pressure gauge.
4. Apply pressure of the magnitude of the end value of the meas-
uring span to the measuring mechanism.
5. Turn the screw (2) of the measuring-span adjustment, until
the signal pressure has reached 1.0 kp/cm2 (14.2 psi) or
10 000 mm (33 ft) WG.
6. Recheck the pneumatic zero and, if necessary, repeat the
complete adjusting procedure.
7. Remove the pressure gauge.
5.3 Start of Measurement
1. Adjust the pneumatic zero in accordance with Point 5.1.
With the knurled screw (4), Fig. 4, eliminate an initial stress
possibly existing on the measuring side.
2. Apply a pressure of the magnitude of the desired measurement
start to the measuring mechanism.
3. Turn the knurled screw (4) until the signal pressure again ad-
justs to 0,2 kp/cm2 or 2000 mm WG (2.8 psi or 6 ft. 7 in. WG).
This adjustment instruction applies analogously to the start of
measuremente in the range of negative pressure.
6. MAINTENANCE
The instruments require hardly any maintenance. However, it is
good practice to check the pneumatic zero within longer time inter-
vals (about every six months).
Fig. 2
C
• , . lo (,) 5/6 • • •
11 9 4 6 1 Fig.
Fig. 4 with Tubular-spring Measuring Mechanism
BUTEHICIFFNIUNISBEHITTIE
Blatt
/
/
.7/•
''<,./////////////////////////
Fig. 4 with Diaphragm-type Measuring Mechanism

OHH BUTIENCIFFRILINESHILITTE
M.TM. K Blatt
•
2. 16

Instructions
MB 6152 a engi.
Pneumatic Differential
Pressure Transmitter
(according to Data Sheet 6152000)
9, 02, 1S (e) 4/7 9
ati 1.C. ECKARDT AG 7000 STUTTGART 50

-
m Postfach 500347. Telefon (0711)5021. Telex 72 3838
NoTNO
•
9. g, S1S 2
2. COMPOSITION
The pneumatic differential pressure transmitter consists of a
measuring and a compensation section. Upon special request,
the two oval flanges (Fig. 6/10) for the product lines may be
GENERAL substituted by a directly monted valve block or combination
The pneumatic differential pressure transmitter serves to transduce a cock with special cock wrench.
differential pressure or effective head respectively into an associated
linear pneumatic pressure signal in the standard range from 0.2...1.0 3. METHOD OF OPERATION
Itp 'cm2. Consequently, this transmitter requires compressed air of The instrument operates according to the method of force
1.4 + 0.1 Icp/cm 2 as auxiliary energy. comparison.
It is used to measure the flow rates of gases, vapors or fluids, and to 9.1 Measuring section
measure levels. A measuring diaphragm (Fig. 3/1) serves to transduce the
differential pressure into a measuring force. It is connected
According to the measuring span.range, the pneumatic differential pressure
through the articulation (Fig. 3/2) with the weigh beam (Fig. 3/3)
transmitters may be loaded up to a static pressure of 16 kp/cm2 (Fig. 1)
which is carried in the duct (Fig. 3/4) of the pressure chamber.
and 64 icp/cm2 or 100 kp/cm2 (Fig. 2).
Draw-strings fastened to the weigh beam absorb the static pres-
sure acting upon the duct.
Nominal wessure Measuring span
kp/cm mmWS . Characteristic for the design is the use of an oil-filled meas-
Min. Max. uring system with a measuring diaphragm (Fig. 3/1), two protec-
16 0... 100 0.... 600 tive diaphragms (Fig. 3/5) and a duct diaphragm (Fig. 3/4). This
64 arrangement offers the following advantages:
0..: 500 0... 3500
100 "
a) The measuring fluid does not come into contact neither with
64 0...2500 0...15000
100 the measuring diaphragm nor with the duct diaphragm. As
the properties of the protective diaphragm do not have any
bearing on the measuring accuracy, the material may be
All instruments can carry both from the plus and from the minus side selected exclusively on the principles of chemical resistance
the one-sided permissible rated pressure without detriment to the diaphragm: with respect to the measuring fluid.
b) The flanges (Fig. 3/6) in front of the protective diaphragms

may be easily removed for cleaning. The protective diaph-
ragms are then exposed and may be easily checked for start-
ing corrosion which is important in case of aggressive mean-
9 : 9, .3/i .r
4.1 Zero adjustment

With a differential pressure equal to "Zero", adjust the zero
uring fluids. After re-installation, no adjustment is required, as the
adjustment screw (Fig. 5/12) until the output pressure has
entire oil system remains closed.
reached O. 2 kp/cm 2.
c) The oil system offers an overload protection in a very simple way: •
As soon as the diaphragm is expanded beyond the normal rate, such 4.2 Measuring span adjustment
as for instance in case of overpressure at the H. P.. side, the sealing The measuring span is according to VDE/VDI-Standard 2183
ring (Fig. 3 / 7) attached to the latter abuts against the rim of the opposite the amount of the variation of the input variable which causes
borehole (Fig. 3/8). The chamber (Fig.• 3/ 9) between the borehole and a variation of the output variable of 0.2...1.0 kp/cm2 .
the diaphragms is thus closed and forms an oil cushion which prevents
a further bending of the diaphragm. The instrument maybe overloaded To change the measuring span, remove the protection cap
from both sides up to the full pressing rating. (Fig. 9 and 10). The measuring span may now be adjusted by
means of a screw driver. The measuring span scale (Fig. 9/1
3.2 Compensation section and Fig. 10/1, respectively) is provided with markings for the
In the compensation section, the measuring force acting on the articulation minimum, medium and maximum measuring span. The accurate
(Fig. 3, 2) in compared with a compensating force generated by the output adjustment of the measuring span should, however, be carried
. pressure in a metallic bellows (Fig. 3/10). Both forces act on the weigh out with a test manometer. After an alteration of the measuring
beam (Fig. 3. 3) of the force balance. When the measuring force varies, span, repeat zero adjustment. Special care should be taken that
the balance will deflect.. This causes a variation of the distance between only those screws are loosened which are not secured.
the nozzle (Fig. 3/11) and the baffle plate (Fig. 3/12) and thus of the cas- .
cade pressure in the flow section between choke valve (Fig. 3/13) and 5. INSTALLATION
nozzle (Fig. 3,11). This pressure is increased at the amplifier (Fig. 3/14) The instrument may be installed in any position. It may thus •
to a new output pressure that causes a modified compensating force in the be easily adapted to the 8ifferent feed and differential pressure
metallic bellows (Fig. 3/10). The weight beam will reach a new position lines in case of liquid or gas measurements.
of equilibrium, when the compensating force is again equal th the meas-
The Figs. 11, 12 and 13 show several arrangement examples
uring force.
for measuring the flow rates of gasses, liquids or vapors ac-
cording to the differential pressure method.
4. ADJUSTMENT
Fig. 4 shows the measuring circuit for testing of the differential pressure During installation, care should be taken that the screw (Fig. 6/5)
transmitter. for bleeding or draining respectively, is always located at the
uppermost or undermost point of the measuring chamber, namely:
9. 9,cfai 5 ( ei 1/119 •
With gas measuring: Bleed screw at bottom It is recommended to mount a pressure reducing device with
With liquid measuring: Bleed screw at top. downstream air filter into the air supply line (Order No. of
unit 6 921 111). In case of heavy contaminated air supply, this
In case of dislocation from one installation position into another onern
filter should be frequently cleaned.
loosen only the two outer flanges and turn them by 90°. The fastening
elements may then be screwed in at the cleared connection side. The
6. PUTTING INTO OPERATION
space required and the fastening method may be seen from the dimen-
6.1 Connecting of unit
sioned drawings Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Fig. 7 and Fig. 8.
The connections for air supply (Fig. 6/1) and for the output
After a change of the installation position due to operational require- signal (Fig. 6/3) are located at the narrow side of the unit.
ments, a correction of the zero position will, however, be required. The connection Fig. 6/2 is provided for an additional mano-
meter for testing of the output pressure. The following connec-
The. functions of the valve block and combination cock are shown in tion pipes are to be used:
Figs. 14 and 15.
Air supply and output signal: Copper tube 6 x. 1, 1/8" NPT
female thread, Ermeto pipe
. Special pipe clamps which form part of the accessories are provided fitting
for fastening of the instrument at a pipe line. The threaded staybolts
Product connections: Tube 12 x 1, 3/8" NPT female
required for this purpose may be screwed In laterally or at the bottom (pressure differential lines) thread,. screw union, Ermeto
of the measuring body. (Fig. 6/8). pipe fitting.
•
When selecting the mounting place, take care that the ambient tempera- Prior to connection to the instrument, the product lines should
hire does not exceed, the range from -20 °C...+70 °C. Special attention be well blown out to avoid contamination of the pneumatic system.
should also be paid to the fact that no serious vibrations occur at the A cotton wool filter. in the air supply connection and a sintered
mounting place. The distance between differential pressure transmitter metal' filter upstream the pneumatic amplifier protect the system
and transducer should be kept as small as possible to obtain small delays. from contaminations.
Differential pressure lines with a pipe dimension of 12 x _ 1 mm are best
suited to meet these requirements. 6.2 Setting
Prior to putting into operation check the zero point of the instru-
Use pipes with the dimensions 6 x 1 mm for the air supply and signal ment. The differential pressure must in this case be equal to
lines. "Zero". Now the zero adjustment screw (Fig. 5/12) may be ad-
justed until the output pressure has reached a value of 0.2 kp/cm 2.
The air supply must be free from water, oil, and dust. Air supply pres-
The correction of the zero point may also be performed with in-
sure should be 1.4 + 0.1 kp/cm2.
serted protection cap.
g g, 9 If/ /6) 5/ 7 .9 • •
Control of the zero point of the instrument may also be performed,
when the plant is in operation. For this purpose close both shutoff
REVIEW OF APPENDED FIGURES
valves of the product lines and fully open the compensating valve.
Now the differential pressure is equal to "Zero", and the zero point
Fig. 1 Photo of the transmitter for small measuring spans
may be easily controlled. With this circuit arrangement, the measuring Phbto of the transmitter for medium and high measuring spans
Fig. 2
chambers may also be bled and cleaned. Functional scheme
Fig. 3
Fig. 4 Measuring circuit for testing of zero point and measuring span
7. MAINTENANCE Dimensioned drawing 1, transmitter for small measuring spans.
Fig. 5a
When the unit is being operated with dry and oil-free air supply, it Dimensioned drawing 2, transmitter for small measuring spans
Fig. 5b
requires only a minimum of maintenance. Dimensioned drawing 1, transmitter for medium and high
Fig. 6a
measuring spans
In case of measuring fluids leading to the deposition of dirt particles, Dimensioned drawing 2, transmitter for medium and high
Fig. 6b
the two outer flanges may be removed for cleaning of the measuring measuring spans
chambers (refer to Figs. 17 and 18). No adjustment is required there- Fig. 7 Dimensioned drawing with valve block
after. Fig. 8 Dimensioned drawing with combination cock
Attention ! Do not damage the metallic diaphragms. Fig. 9 Photo of transmitter for small measuring spans,
pressure rating 16 (protection cap removed)
The cotton wool filter located in the air supply connection should be Fig. 10. Photo of transmitter for high measuring spans,
pressure ratings 64/100 (protection cap removed)
checked at regular intervals, depending on the nature of the air supply.
Fig. 11 Measuring arrangement examples for liquids
Replace it in case of heavy contamination! The choke valve in the ampli-
Fig. 12 Measuring arrangement examples for gasses
fier (Fig. 19) should be cleaned, when in case of a differential pressure
Fig. 13 Measuring arrangement examples for vapors
equal to Zero despite adjustment of the zero adjustment screw (Fig. 5/10)
Fig. 14 Functional sheme of valve block
the output pressure of 0.2 kp/cm 2 will not be obtained. The choke valve
Fig. 15 Functional scheme of combination cock
is located in the upper amplifier part and accessible from outside. It
Fig. 16 Mounting suggestions for valve block
may be cleaned after unscrewing with a wire the diameter of which is
Fig. 17 Photo of transmitter for small measuring spans
smaller than 0.2 mm. If the entire amplifier is to be cleaned, remove (protection cap and outer flanges removed)
it first by loosening of the two mounting screws. Then flush the amplifier Photo of transmitter for medium and high measuring spans
Fig. 18
thoroughly in gasoline, trichlorethylene or tetrachloromethane and blow (protection cap and outer flanges removed)
out with air. A complete dismantling of the amplifier is only seldomly Fig. 19 Pneumatic amplifier (choke valve)
required and should be avoided, if possible, as otherwise the amplifier
will be placed out of adjustment.
9 9 • 6/ 79
• •
Transmitter ND 64/100 for medium and high meas-

Transmitter ND 16 for small measuring spans uring spans
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
9 9, .).5(e) 1719 •
Nulipunkteinstellung
Zuluft
13 11 zero adjustment Zulull
air supply
—► 42uecksilber bzw Wosser
Enna lung
Aus gong
Differenzdruck-
output signal ko/cm
MeBurnforrner
span adjustment
Ausgangsdruck • Zulull
Bereichs- 14 _ 0 lko/crn2
einstellung
Zuluft = Air supply

Quecksilber bzw. Wasser = Mercury or water, respectively
Entltiftung = Air vent
Ausgang usw. = Output O. 2...1. 0 ltp/cm 2
Zuluft Differenzdruck-MeBumf. = Differential pressure transmitter
Nulipunkteinstellung Zuluft usw. = Air supply 14 + 0.1 kp/cm2
Ausgangsdruck
Bereichseinstellung Measuring circuit for testing of zero point and
measuring span
Fig. 4
Functional scheme
Fig. 3
I 143
P.iullpunkteinsleltune
85,5
4
4 13-
ProdokkinscAlUa
54!
Nullpunkteinstellung = Zero adjustment

Produktanschlufi = Product connection
Dimensioned drawing 1 - Transmitter ND 16 for small

measuring spans
Fig. 5 a
19, 9,•IS 911,9 •
Anskht in Richtung.A-
113
27
ZuluIf I.< O/cm'
NPT Ira" OE IL
.m m
-4 MP
co.142
M
•
MichWO IJr Monorno or Aim*NO kr Rogtor
ca109 NPT lie" OE IL NPT I/6" OE IL X In
dichf rorschtosson pneum. Ausgange

• lfl
O2 -Ikprern2
EnflOtiong.IFw.Entwasserung
•
O I.
m
Ansicht in Richtung "A" =Ag viewed in direction "A"

•
Zuluft usw. = Air supply 1.4 kp/cm2 NPT 1/8" GE 6 L
Anschlun f. Manometer = Connection for manometer NPT 1/8" GE 6 L
Anschlu8 f. Regler = Connection for controller NPT 1/8" GE 6 L •m Z
n.. dicM verschlossen = tightly closed m
pneum. Ausgange = pneumatic outlets 0.2 - 1 kp/cm2
r
Entliiftung bzw. Ent- = Bleeding or draining, respectively
wasserung „,
Befestigung wahlw. = Selective fastening for pipe or flat material n
x
Dimensioned drawing 2 - Transmitter ND 18 for
Fig. 5 b small measuring spans
ca.102 ▪ rn
9, 9, 24, -) • •
143
113
82 Ansicht ,A"
Nullpunktverstellung
durch die Haube
......,
---; e- A
mit Schraubenzieher. —
4 1Ili' I III
61--120
go-85 22
7
.Si i LL
' c 10.:11 1
• ,r Fp
4
63, IL •
UA
—V
—17
21 4.- 4)Npr3/e.
141111-54t81-10. 4(3f "
64
174
Nullpunktverstellung usw. = Zero adjustment through bonnet Ansicht "A" = View "A"
by means of screw driver Positionsbenennung usw. = For description of items refer
to next page
Dimensioned drawing 1 - Transmitter ND 64/100 Dimensioned drawing 2 - Transmitter ND 64/100 for
for medium and high measuring spans medium and high measuring spans
Fig. 6 a Fig. 6 b
9, 9 niS e-) 4/ iJ •
Design with attached valve block
Description of items
1 Connection for air supply 1.4 + 0.1 Itp/cin2

Ermeto pipe fitting GE 6 - LL 1/8" NPT with cotton wool filter
Connection for test manometer (tightly closed)

Ermeto pipe fitting GE 6 - LL 1/8" NPT co. 165
Connection for signal line

.0111'
4". 4
0
Ermeto pipe fitting GE 6 - LL 1/8" NPT 13
4 Screw-in pipe connection
Ermeto pipe fitting GE 12 - S 3/8" NPT (order separately)
5 Bleeding and draining, respectively 14

•6 Attachment for flat material, max. width 80 mm 20,65
15
7 Attachment for pipe, max. diameter 80 mm 120
54143 --0•141.3tv
8 2 bolts M 12, 4 nuts, 4 washers and 2 clamps
9 Teflon flat gasket 108
10 Oval flange (not applicable when valve block is connected)

13 Valve block NW 5 ND 100 upon request
11 Socket head cap screws M 10 x 40 DIN 912
Depth of engagement in outer flange 13 mm
14 Ermeto pipe fitting GE 12-S R 3/8"
15 4 stud bolts M 10 x 25 DIN 938

4 hexagon nuts M 10 DIN 934
Dimensioned drawing
" Fig. 7
•
Design with attached combination cock
720
14 Ermeto pipe fitting GE 12-S/R 3/8"
15 4 stud bolts M 10 x 25 DIN 938

4 hexagon nuts M 10 DIN 934
475 toa~
ca. 80 —el
Dimensioned drawing
Fig. 8
9, 9; 1. 5. ce) ) 7 3/1g- • eoe
4..-
Transmitter ND 16 for small measuring spans

(Protection cap removed) Transmitter ND 64/100 for medium and high
Fig. 9 measuring spans (Protection cap removed)
Fig. 10
9, 9, (` 14/7 y
Measuring arrangement examples for flow measuring
1.2 Transmitter arranged above throttling device

1. Measuring of liquids
(only in case of sufficient static pressure).
1.1 Transmitter arranged below throttling device This arrangement should possible be avoided, as the pressure
differential lines must be degassed (bled) again after each
This arrangement is to be preferred, as the pressure differential operation.
linos are automatically degassed (bled).
1 Differential pressure transmitter

2 Valve block
3 Throttling device
4 Shutoff valve for throttling device
5 Blow down valve
6 Separating vessel
Fig. 11
ir•
f•
15
.1 9, 9, - 0 is (7 6-1 /1,9
2. Measuring of gasses
For dry gasses, both the arrangement of the transmitter above and
2.2 Transmitter arranged below throttling device
below the throttling device is possible.

If local conditions permit, this arrangement should be preferred
for partly condensed gasses.
1664
akdk
•
6
EEO
3
• • I
• 5 • • • •
• •
1 Differential pressure transmitter 4 Shutoff valve for throttling device

2 Valve block 5 Blow down valve
3 Throttling device 6 Separating vessel
Fig. 12
;''•;Pjt,
• 15 16/19
• 3. Measuring of vapors
The pressure differential lines must be tilled with condensate.

9.1 Transmitter arranged below throttling device Both arrangements should possibly be avoided. The arrangement
shown at right is, however, more convenient as far as the meas-
This arrangement should be preferred. uring technique is concerned, as it is self-degassing.
1 Differential pressure transmitter 4 Shutoff valve for throttling device

2 Valve block 5 Blow down valve
3 Throttling device 6 Separating vessel
7 Equalizing vessel
Fig. 13
.9, 9, • 15 (e) 1 ?/7.9 • •
Functional sheme of valve block
Functional scheme of combination cock
2 1
durch VerschluOschrouben
verschlossen
Differenzdruck-
Drosselgertit Urnformer
AusgleichStellung Z
Differeradruck-
Onformer
Differenzdruck-
Umformer
r-
Anfahrstellung A
-—
J
Differenzdruck- Difterenzdruck- 2
1)ifferenzdruck -
• Urnformer Urntormer Umformer
Ausgleichstellung Z Anfahrstellung A Betriebsstellung
rLtDifferenzdruck-
Urnformer
durch VerschluBschrauben = Locked by screw plugs
verschlossen Betriebsstellung
Drosselgerat = Throttling device = Differential pressure transmitter
Differenzdruck-Umformer
Differenzdruck-Umformer = Differential pressure transmitter Ausgleichsstellung Z Compensating position Z
Differenzdruck-Umformer = Differential pressure transmitter
Ausgleichsstellung Z Compensating position Z Differenzdruck-Umformer = Differential pressure transmitter
Anfahrstellung A Starting position A
Anfahrstellung A Starting position A
Differenzdruck-Umformer = Differential pressure transmitter Betriebestellung B Operating position B
Betriebsstellung B Operating position B
Fig. 15
Fig. 14
,•
g 9.9 2 ( e) Id>79 •
Mounting suggestions for installation in protective casing
to the transmitter for gas measurings. (For liquid measurings

arrange valve block on top.)
Sechskantschraube
M 12 x 20 DIN 933 - 5 D
unterer Anbau
des Ventilblocks
seitlicher Anbau
des Ventilblocks
II
Sechskantschraube = Hexagon head screw

M 12 x 20 DIN 933 - 5 D M 12 x 20 DIN 933 - 5 D
unterer Anbau = Attachment of valve block
des Ventilblocks at bottom Transmitter ND 16 (protection cap and outer
flange removed)
seitlicher Anbau Lateral attachment of
des Ventilblocks valve block Fig. 17
Fig. 16
•
Dichtung
Vordrossel
Zuluft A = Ausgang
Kaskadendruck
(Eingang)
' Vordrossel = Choke valve

Dichtung = Gasket
A = Ausgang = A = Outlet
Kaskadendruck = Cascade pressure (Inlet)
(Eingang)
Zuluft = Supply air
Pneumatic amplifier
(bottom view)
Transmitter ND 84/100 for medium and high
measuring spans (protection cap and outer Fig. 19
flange removed)
Fig. 18
BUTEHOFFNURISSIIIIIITTE
KTM K Eican
• Pneumatischer Einheitsregler
J.C.ECKARDT A.O.
System Kreuzbalg
ANWENDUNG
Fur alle Regelaufgaben in technischen Anlagen, sofern

die Measignale im pneumatischen Einheitssignaldruck-
bereich vorliegen. In Verbindung mit einem Leitgerat
und einem Anzeiger oder Schreiber zu einer Regler-
station erganzungsfahig.
PRINZIP
Kraftvergleich nach dem Kreuzbalgprinzip mit Bildung

des Zeitverhaltens in der Riickfiihrung.
BESONDERHEITEN
Leichte Auswechselbarkeit der einzelnen Baugruppen.

Kann durch Zusatzbauelemente, wie Kanalplatte, An-,
fahrretais oder PI-Schalter leicht an die Regelaufgabe
angepaik werden. Hohe Betriebssicherheit durch einge-
baute Luftfilter.
TECHNISCHE DATEN
RegelgroBe x 0,2 bis 1,0 kp/cm2 bzw. 3 bis 15 psi
• FiihrungsgrOfte w
Stellgrd8e y
Zuluft
0,2 bis 1,0 kp/cm2 bzw. '3 bis 15 psi
0,2 bis 1,0 kp/cm2 bzw. 3 bis 15 psi
3,4 + 0,1 kp/cm 2 bzw. 20 psi
P-Bereich x , einstellbar 2 bis 500 % und dariiber
p
Nachstellzeit Tn' einstellbar 0,01 min bis m
Vorhaltzeit T , einstellbar 0,01 bis 20 thin
Aussteuerbereich 0,5 %
bleibende Regelabweichung < 0, 7 %
Ansprechschwelie < 0,1 %
Temperaturfehler < 0, 01 % / g r d
Verschiebung des Arbeitspunktes bei
Verstellung des P-Bereiches von 2 bis 500 % max. 0,5 %
Luftverbrauch im Gleichgewichtszustand 700 1 /h
n
max. • Luftleistung 1000 1 /h
n
max. Innenwiderstand des Verstarkers 0,2 bis 0,3.% bei 100 I /h
n
O Werkstoff Druckguli fur Grundplatte und Gehause
Anschltisse Gewindeloch NPT 1/8"
0)
Cr;
No 3062
GHH GUITEHOFFNUNOSHIETTE
•STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K Blatt
PD-Regler mit festem Arbeitspunict PID-Regler mit Leitgerat

Beim P-Regler tritt anstelle der T -Drossel Beim PI-Regler tritt anstelle der T -Drossel
v v
eine Festdrossel eine Festdros&el
t4
1
Leitgerit Leitgerat siehe Typenblatt 6 960 000

iiehe Typenblatt
6 960 000 ,
Regler
•
U legelwolung
Blindplatte Blindplatte
Anstelle der Blindplatte am Regler kOnnen folgende Elemente aufgeschraubt werden:
1. Kanalplatte I -S
•
Fur Regler mit gefiihrtem Arbeitspunkt oder bei Verwendung
des Reglers als Rechengerat gemafi der Gleichung
yA =. V (x - w) + y
o'
sowie fiir Regler auf Wandmontageplatte mit 2 PI-Schaltern.
2. Antahrrelai s
Zur Erleichterung des Uberganges von Hand- auf Reglerbetrieb

(stofifreies Umschalten).
Nur anwendbar bei Reglern mit I-Anteil, sowie bei Regelstrecken
die eine lange Nachstellzeit erfordern..
3. PI- Schalter
Zum automatischen Anfahren einer Regelanlage mit PI- oder

PID-Regler, insbesondere bei Chargenprozessen.
Bei Regelstrecken mit grofier Zeitkonstante.
Das erste Oberschwingen wird vermieden.
ErmOglicht ilbergeordnete Steuerungseingriffe in den Regelkreis

GHH 6UTEHOFFNUP4156HUTTE
STERKRAGE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
1. STECKREGiii
,4
\ I. /
k cc .
\ "" se '
:73
O
zp
146
11 12 13
140
-3
14
7 1
r • -0-
1 Balg fur Regelgrofie x

(bei Regelwirkung "Normal")
2 Balg fur Flihrungsgrode w

(bei Regeiwirkung "Normal";
bei Regelwirkung "Umgekehrt" werden
1 und 2 miteinander vertauscht)
3 Riickfuhrungsbalg R + (Mitkopplung) 10 Luftfiihrungsplatte
4 Riickfithrungsbalg R - (Gegenkopplung) 11 BajonettverschluB zur Befestigung

des ReglerS auf der Grundplatte
5 Diisenhebet; durch Schwenken theses
Hebels wird der P43ereich eingestellt 12 Umschaltplatte; durch Drehen der Platte urn 90°
wird die Regelwirkung von "Normal" (Hegel-
grtifie steigt - Stelldruck steigt) in "Umgekehrt"
6 Prallplatte (Ring) (Regelgr013e steigt - Stelldruck fallt) gekndert
O 7 T -Drossel 13 Steckerplatte normal filr PI- und PID-Regler

n
8 Tv -Drciksel- 14 i Steckplatte Fur P- und PD-Regler bzw. fur

PI- und PID-Regler mit innerer Fttickfiihrung
Verstarker
No 3064
GHH •
IBUTEHEIFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
2. ZUBElitiR FUR STECKREGLER
2.1 Wandmontageplatte obne Zusatzbaustethe
Erradglicht ein leichtes Auswechseln der Steckregler eller Ausflihrungen. Die Verbindungen zum
Leitgergt, zum Anzeiger bzw. Schreiber, Bowie zum Stellgerat werden durch Rohre oder Schlauche
hergestellt. Zur Montage in geschtitzten Raumen.
14 1ut x w
t .14
a L—
S 1
4 tut x w
Regler
Bestell- Nr 6 419 111
MASSZEICHNUNG
166
145 79
88
Einschraubver -
schraubungen:
17
nach Bestellung A-14 ! HS
(Zubehor) le I
11
A•
CJ
O
CP
411011 Ansicht gegen A

No 3062
I 9.9.4.02
• •
Multiplikolionsrelais bel Verhallnistegelung Yitiztql-q2 )•q2
Kreuzbalgregler fiir Rechenschaltungeri in Aufsteckausfiihrung V.2
2.4 (Wm.) Val
.
•
to 2X 1
Arbeitspunkt besfimmf
L-41- 17 deck yoxxe42kp/cfnx
06
xxEingangsvarloble,
inners Scholfung
yAsAusgang
alk,o.tartel
srro, R ", 06
Mulfiplikationsrelais bei Kaskadenregelung As V( x-46).46 -8 w

Versfarker— Regelwirkung mC
%fix
Arbeilspunkl beslimmt:
Fesldrosse
durch yovxkx0,6kpice
m
xxEingangsvorioble,•
yAausgoig >491
rrO) •
•
yA=1/.(x-xk 1+Yo
•••-,
X Rechenrelais fur Mulfiplikafion und Addition fAxV(x-xk)410., zC
fi h 10 YA0cia/Cm.) 15 Z
Y4 sl• !WO
I Arbeilspunkt beslimrpl
,
(knobfo
V •-ffli • mechanisch einslellbarer

Para
moral durch kund irk 701.
Xp7. V 0,6
• Multiplikator V.0,4 r1.1
8 Eingang -Ikp/cm!) X Eingonvoriable, to m
xkxEingang(q24kplcini) yo ngtingsktriable
yovEimang (q2 -1kp/cmi )(Anschlun S) yA:Ausgang •
•-k. 111011- YAvAusgang (q2-I kp/cms
a (kprm•)
).
02 OA(felt)
R•fhicklithrung vYA
Kreuzba gregler mil gellihrlem Arbeitspunkf
M
Xp einstellbor 27. bis5007.,Iiir
Signal verknaprung normolerweise tir it
V 20,4 leis 2 1106 Uri I lb U r 4,17 •k
Die Eingangsgrliflen x,xk .undye kannen

Variable ( x.B.Meflgroflen)sein oder Fiihrungsv Foteregler
teilweise ols !este Parameterwerte regler
pneum.Sfeckdose‘ vorgegeben werden.
Anwendungsliille in nebensfehenden
Schonelspielen. ' Arbeitsp .4(14 = xk yo Festwert
sEingangsvariable xk vom Fahrungsregler
lc Eckardt A. 0., Stuttgart-Bad Connslatf; Re I retie x xEincengsvoriablevHilfsregelgriine
GHH INUTEHUFFNUNISSNUTTE
M.TM.K
Blatt
• 9 it, 0 e

Instructions
MB 6411 b engl.
Cross Bellows
Controller

346 Postfach 500347 Telefon (0711)5021 Telex 7 254445
O
a
No 2%0
-'trttV. I
1 9 g •0 8 (e) 2/ 11
1. GENERAL
• g;v:4-
0-qc
1.1 Mode of Operation ti
The cross-bellows controller is a pneumatic standard controller, i.e.
controlled variable and set point are supplied to the controller as
pressure between 0.2 and 1 kp/cm2 (or 3 to 15 psig). The manipulated
variable also lies within thiS range.
The characteristic feature of the cross-bellows controller is the
cross-shaped arrangement of the four bellows springs within a ring,
whose outer surface serves as baffle plate. The nozzle 1, Fig. 1, is
mounted in a lever 2 which pivots around the center of the ring. The .
mode of operation is described in the separate leaflet 3121-2, which,
on request, will be sent free of charge.
The P-range of the controller can be easily set by turning the lever 2.
The sense of action can be changed from "normal" (N) to "umgekehrt"
(reversed = U) by turning a small selector switch 3 on the controller.
This exchanges the connections for the actual-value bellows and the :1
set-point bellows.
1.2 Basic Types

The controller can be supplied as P-, PD-, PI- and PID-action plug-
in or as corresponding screw-on controller. The plug-in controller
is provided with self-sealing plugs on its rear side, which are inser-
ted into the corresponding sockets on the•rear side of a recorder or
on the so-called mounting plate for wall attachment.
The screw-on controller can be mounted directly, for instance, on
Eig.1 a wall or a rack; the mounting plate required for the plug-in con-
troller can be omitted here.
1.3 Modified Types

By exchanging a few components it is possible to produce various
modified types of the plug-in and the screw-on controller at a later
date, e.g. controllers with direct feedback, with starting relay or
arranged for automatic starting with the PI-action switch.
•
• ••••,4i•
z.
,9, g, • 0 Ne) 3/-u More details on the unitized-construction system will be found in the
Type Sheet 6 410 000, and on starting in. the Special Leaflet 1230-4.
1.4 Manual/Automatic Control Station
For the adjustment of the set point and of the manual control pressure
for starting and stopping of the plant, provision must be made for a
Field control er •
manual/automatic control station. With cascade connection or ratio
control the set-point adjuster is mostly omitted. In these cases it
may be advisable to use a double manual/automatic control station
(see Type Sheet 6 610 000)-
1.5 Controller Station
Recorders with plugged-in controller and manual/automatic control
station arranged below are designated "controller station".
Panel Normal controllers can be converted into controllers with plug-and-
1 socket connections by means of a few additional components if they
were not ordered for a controller station to begin with..
1.6 Local Controller Station
If in smaller plants a central control room is omitted, local controller
stations are used which have plug-in controllers and manual/automa-
tic control stations arranged in a common cast-metal housing:
XK t YH 1.7 Field Controllers
Air supply If it is essential that the final control element responds quickly to
manual/automatic control station the changes of the control pressure at the controller output, but the
diStance between control room and final control element it too long
for this requirement, the controller, as field controller, can be
attached directly to the final control element or mounted in its
vicinity. (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2 If the controller is to be operated by hand, the manual/automatic
control station in the control room is switched over accordingly. By•
the switch the supply-air pressure is conducted to the change-over
relay UR of the field controller. The relay separates the connection
controller output to final control element and establishes the Connec-
tion from the control-pressure adjuster in the manual/automatic
control station to the final control element: —The relay is bolted
.*
9; 9; 8(e) 4/// • •
to the base plate below the controller. Arranged on the base plate
Field are four pneumatical connections for the attachment of monitoring
pressure gauges for actual value X, set point XK, control pressure
IZul.
"Hand" YH and control pressure "Automatic" YA. The base plate
X
I YA
together with the cover forms a closed housing.
IR
J The field controller is available either in a sturdy cast-metal hous-
ing with plug-in controller or only with a plexiglass cap as screw-
on controller.
2. MOUNTING
2.1 Mounting Point
If possible, the controller should be installed where it is not ex-
o o
posed to any vibrations nor to temperatures above 70 C (158 F)
and below 0° C (32° F) (danger of formation of ice unless the supply
air is completely dry).
2.2 Application of the Controller in a Controller

Station
2.21 Controller with Recorder 144 x 144 mm
a) Only, if the recorder was not ordered for a controller station:
n r Panel
conversion of the recorder into a recorder for controller station
in accordance with the instructions given on the label pasted to
the rear side of the recorder;
x Air supply
XK
with all recorders:
XI(
b) Mount the recorder into the panel (see instructions for recorders)
Ittolowlion11lid I
x c) Attach the air channel below the end of the recorder
--t
d) Insert the connecting tubes into the connections of the manual/
automatic control station
Air
sui
22(Y
.... e) Slide the manual/automatic control station from the front into the
panel and, at the same time, insert the connecting tubes into the
air channel
f) Insert the pins of the attachment straps into the corresponding
holes of the manual/automatic control station and tighten the
screws.
Fig.3 2.22 Controller with Recorder 192 x 192 mm or 192 x 288 mm
The following operations are only required with recorders which were
not ordered for a controller station:
fYWyfA.:7"--
9 9 11c 8 fe) 67-11 • •

a) On the recorder unscrew those rear Ermeto connections which
are connected to measuring mechanisms and replace them by
Field the plug-and-socket connections SXG 12/1
b) On the additionally required air-channel plate unscrew the screw
AN plugs SXG 11/1 of those connections which are facing the plug-
and-socket connections mentioned above
YA
The following operations are to be carried out with all recorders:
c) Mount the recorder into the panel (see instructions for recorders)
d) Bolt the air-channel plate to the rear side of the recorder
e) Insert the connecting tubes into the connections of the manual/ m
XN automatic control station
1
X f) Slide the manual/automatic control station from the front into the C
1 panel and, at the same time, insert the connecting tubes into the
air channel plate
m
g) Insert the pins of the attachment straps into the corresponding 30 mg
C "A holes in the housing of the manual/automatic control station and a ek
tighten the screws In
2.3. Application of the Controlldr Separated from s• 91
the Manual/Automatic Control Station m
(with exception of the field, controller)
For dynamical reasons the feedback loop of the controller, i.e. the
connecting line between the connections YA and R, must not be any C
1 n Panel longer than 6 m (19ft - Bin). This means that m
Z
m
a) when a manual/automatic control station is used, the distance to
the controller must not exceed 3 m (9ft - 10in)
x Air supply . AK
11.1.1 b) if the distance between manual/automatic control station is r = .
x greater, either the total volume in the Y-conduit inclusive of the, w
volume of the final control element must be larger than 1000 cm'' n
(61 cu. in), or the connections YA and R on the controller must be x 04
bridged (direct feedback). On the plug-in controller this connection
is simply established by exchanging the plate P LXG 389/1. In
Air the second case a starting relay is required m
%RAY V (0
c) if with trial connections the manual/automatic control station is
tAir supply omitted, the connections YA and R must be connected in the same
manner
2.4 Application of the Controller as Field Controller
2.41 Attachment of the base plate from the front
Fig.4 Bolt the mounting brackets on the rear side of the base plate in such
a manner that the brackets project outward. Secure the base plate
on the wall.
9: 9, 00 8,(a) 6/1) •
2.42 Attachment of the Base Plate on a Thin Wall Accessible from the Rear
a) Loosen the mounting brackets on the rear side of the base plate;
place suitable hexagon-head bolts into the holes of the brackets
b) With the inserted bolts fasten the mounting brackets on.the base
plate so that the projecting legs of the brackets point to the center
of the base plate
c) Secure the base plate on the wall
2.5 Application of the Controller in the Local Controller

Station
The local controller station comprises the plug-in controller, a manual/
automatic selector switch and one pressure reducing valve each for set- •
Fig. 5
point and manual control pressure. The output line of the set-point
transmitter is conducted outside to a blank connection. This makes is
possible:
a) to transmit the set point to the control room.
In this case it is advisable to conduct the actual value also to the
control room and to use, for instance, a double indicator (Fig. 3).
b) to introduce the set point from outside, e.g. from a set point
transmitter in the control room or from the main controller, when
the local controller station is used as an auxiliary controller of a
cascade connection. In both cases the built-in set point transmitter
must be removed and the now vacant connection holes must be sealed
with the items SRX 635/1 and DJIC 142/1 (Fig. 4).
2.6 Connection of the Conduits to the Air Channel Plate

or to the Base Plate
The connecting nipples are supplied with Emmet° screw connections
GE 6-LL. The conduits are connected with their aid as follows, Fig. 5:
a) Cut the tube square and debur it
b) Unscrew the union nut from the instrument and slide it over the
conduit; put cutting-edge ring aside for later use
c) Clean tube end with a piece of rag.
Check whether the conduit fits into the cutting-edge ring. If neces-
sary reduce tube-end diameter by filing, carefully avoiding longi-
tudinal grooves!
d) Oil thread and cutting-edge ring well;
slide cutting-edge ring over tube end
Fig. 6 e) Screw union nut on by hand until contact with cutting-edge ring is
felt. Push tube end against the stop in the female cone and carefully
tighten the union nut by about one to two turns; check the junction
with soap suds for leaks.
9. 9, 41,8(e) ?/ j .
Matching Sfi:, .
2.7 Plugging in the Controller `7x sense of action of the controller cblor mark
a) Plug in the controller on the air channel plate or on the base plate
:41of the tield controller or the mounting plate for wall attachment "N" (normal) green
4,01
b) For attachment of the controller turn the securing screws 6 by "U" (reversed) red
about 120° in clockwise direction (bayonet lock) (Fig. 6)
The valve-stem assembly is exchanged as follows:
There are two holes provided in the cap for this purpose. If the
a) On the knob loosen the lateral securing screw and withdraw knob
environment is not too dusty it is recommended to pierce the pre-
b) With the special wrench (Ord. No. CSXG 21/1) reach through the
punched holes for the adjustment of P-band X.p, reset time Tn and opening in the front plate and unscrew the bearing screws;
'rate time T v. exchange the' valve-stem assembly
Note: With removed cap avoid touching of the ring! c) Secure the new valve-stem assembly with the bearing screws;
put knob in place and tighten the securing screw
3. SENSE OF ACTION ("normal'br " umgekehrt" = reversed) On the knob of the pressure reducing valve for the manual control
The controller works in the senses of action "normal" and "umgekehrt" pressure ("Reitelgrofie" = controlled variable) fasten the small plate
(reversed) so that the arrow indicates how the knob must be turned to cause
"N" (normal) = controlled variable rises, control pressure closing of the valve or the damper or the like.
rises or
"U" (reversed) = controlled variable rises, control pressure 4. OPERATION
drops. 4.1 Initial Operation
3.1 Changing the Sense of Action a) Place the Hand-Automatic selector switch into position "Hand";
turn on the supply air to controller and manual/automatic con-
a) Loosen the screw in the selector switch 3, Fig. 6 trol station
b) Turn the selector switch so that the mark ("N" for normal or "U" b) Adjustment on the controller as follows:
for reversed) of the required sense of action faces the arrow '
with PI-controller P-iange to approx. 150 %
c) Tighten the securing screw again reset time Tn to lowest value
3.2 Adoption of the Manual/Automatic Control Station with P1D-controller P-range to approx. 150 %
to the Sense of Action of the Controller reset time Tn to lowest value
rate time Tv to lowest value
The pressure reducing valve for the generation of the manual control
Not e: Do not adjust the P-range by getting a hold of the pivoting
pressure is so designed that its sense of action can be adapted to arm, but by turning the pinion below (P, Fig. 1) with a
the sense of action of the controller. By installing the appropriate screw driver!
valve-stem assembly it is possible to have rising actual value of c) With the pressure reducing valve adjust the manual control pressure
to the valve so that the indicated measured value (actual value) is
the controlled variable for an entire plant, when the knob of the of the required magnitude; adjust the set point of the controller
pressure reducing valve is turned in clockwise direction. This so that the control presslire at the controller output YA lies bet-
ween 0.2 and 1.0 kp/cm‘. Careful adaption of the pressure at
facilitates manual operation of the plant considerably when starting the controller output to the manual control pressure is not
up or in the case of disturbance. necessary, because the control pressure Y to the valve is always
conducted to the I- and D-action bellows via the feedback con- a
The sense of action of the valve-stem assembly is marked by a colo- duit R.
red dot at the front end of the stem. d) Set the reset time Tn for maximum value: place "Hand-Automatic"
selector switch into position "Automatic".
0 8(e) S//7
(5
•
e) If necessary, slowly re-adjust the set point to the value re-
quired by the manufacturing process.
f) If after reversal possibly occuring fluctuations of the actual

Air supply value do not decay, the P-range must be increased until a
tendency to oscillations is no longer noticeable.
When the control loop does not oscillate, reduce the P-range
until a tendency to oscillations is noticeable, then adjust the
P-range to twice its value.
With PI- or PID-controller reduce the reset time T until a

control deviation disappears after sufficiently short-time. It
should be noted that reducing of the reset time increases the
tendency to oscillations. As soon as a tendency to oscillations
XK is noticed, increase the Tn-time somewhat again.
If after a disturbance the overshoot of the actual value is

excessive it is possible with a Pm-controller to try to reduce
the overshoot by carefully increasing the rate time Tv.
4.2 Reversal from "Automatic" to "Hand"

a) With the pressure reducing valve adjust the manual control
pressure so that this pressure is equal to the control pressure
at the controller output.
b) Place the "Hand-Automatic" selector switch into position "Hand"
Damping-
volume 4.3 Reversal from "Hand" to "Automatic"
500 crnP When a control loop was temporarily run by hand, bumpless rever-
sal from "Hand" to "Automatic" can be carried out as follows:
a) Adjustment on the controller as follows:
with PI-controller. on P-range: maintain already deter-
mined value or adjust to approxima-
tely 150 %; reset time Tn to lowest
value
Air supply
1,4 kplsq.cm. • with PID-controller on P-range: maintain already deter-
mined value or adjust to approxima-
t e ly 150 %; reset time Tn to lowest
value
rate time Tv to lowest value
b) With the pressure reducing valve adjust the manual control pres-
Fig. 7 sure to the valve so that the indicated measured value (actual
value) is of the required magnitude; adjust the set point of the
controller so that the control pressure at the controller output
YA lies between 0.2 and 1.0 kp/cm2. Careful adaption of the
pressure at the controller output to the manual control pressure
is not necessary, because the control pressure Y to the valve is
I g. 9, 00 8 (c) 9/
17 • •
always conducted to the I- and D-action bellows via the feedback R.
•
c) Set the reset time T for maximum value; place the "Hand-Auto-
matic" selector switCh into the position "Automatic"
d) If necessary slowly re-adjust the set point to the value required
by the manufacturing process.
e) After reversal, reset time and rate time can be set for those
values again that have been found of advantage during the preceding
automatic operation.
5. ZERO OF THE CONTROLLER
The controller is adjusted before shipment. Normally the zero must
only be checked after a longer period of time or after the spring
bellows have been subjected to overload. The zero is adjusted for
vertical mounting of the instrument. For other mounting positions
the zero must be re-adjusted.
5.1 Measuring Connection (Fig. 7)
a) Loosen the two securing screws 6, Fig. 6 (bayonet lock) and re-
move the cross-bellows controller from the air-channel plate,
base plate or mounting plate; take off the housing cap. • ;
•
b) Set the controller for the sense of action "U" (reversed). If the
JCE test panel for standard controllers is used, the connection
is already installed, with the difference though, that in the panel
in the position "Justierung" (adjustment) not X is connected with
Y, but XK with Y! In the test panel the sense of actions of the
controller then must be set for "N" (normal). Set- the reset time
Tn and the rate time Tv for their lowest values.
c) If the test panel is not used: establish the connection in accordance
with Fig. 7,.interconnecting the connections YA, R and X with
hoses. list a test pressure gagge with the measuring range 0 to
1.6 Itp/cm4 or 0.2 to 1Itp/cm (load the pressure gauge to its
end value) and a water column with a measuring range of 6000 mm.
Attach the connection XK with a hose to a.pressure reducing'valve
and connect it by means of a test pressure gae with, the measu-
Fig. 8 ring range 0 to 1.6 kp/cm2 or 0.2 to 1Itp/cmh.
Attach the connection "Zuluft" (supply air) to a pressure reducing
valve.
5.2 Checking the Zero
a) On the pressure reduciig valve for the supply air adjust for a
pressure of 1 4 Itp/cre. On the pressure reducing valve for the
set point (presstwe gauge XK) adjust for a pressure of 6000 mm
= 0.6 Icp/cm`.
b) On the controller place the lever above the 1. h. mark on the
baffle ring (Xp = 5 %). Swing the lever from the left to the
o
9, g 10/2;
r. h. mark (X„ = 500 %) on the baffle ring, observing at the same
time the indiction of the pressure gauge Y. The indication of
seals the pressure gauge should read 6000 4- 40 mm WC = 0.6 + 0.004
kp/cm 2. If this is not the case the zero should be adjusted in
V accordance with. 5.9.
restriction
5.3 Adjustment of the Controller Zero (Fig. 8) .•.:
Air supply A= Output a) Connect the controller as described under 5.1 "Measuring Con-
nection".
b) Adjust the set point XK to 0.6 kp/cm2; disconnect the water
column (U-shaped tabe), i.e. at first work only with manometers.
c) Place lever into position X! = 100 % and adjust the nozzle until
cascade Pressure X amounts to approximately 0.6 Icp/cm2. Use the adjusting pin
Input 7/Fig. 8 for the adjustment of the nozzle.
d) Place lever into position Xp = 5 % and read the value X.
Place lever into position Xp = 500.% and adjust X to the value
previously read with position Xp = 5 % by turning the screw 8
on the D-action bellows. Counterclockwise turning lowers, clock-
wise turning raises the pressure X. This is done with the adjusting
15 pin 7/Fig. 8.
(If the screw 8 cannot be adjusted sufficiently, give it one turn
in the opposite direction and read the value X, then adjust to this
value for position Xp = 5 % by turning the screw 9).
e) Check wether the value X is the same for the positions Xp = 5 7;
and XP = 500 %; if necessary re-adjust accordingly.
f) Place lever into position X„ = 100 %
If here the value X is high than in the positions X„ = 5 % and
= 500 %, unscrew the screws 8 and 9 uniformly the same
value X is indicated across the entire Xe -range. If X is lower
for the lever position Xp = 100 %, turn e screws 8 and 9
sufficiently in. In both cases re-adjust in accordance with e)
and f), if necessary. .
g) By means of th, adjusting pin 7, Fig. 8 adjust the nozzle for
X = 0.6 lcp/cm4. Turn the lever and check X, if necessary, re-
adjust with the screws 8 and 9, until X remains nearly constant
across the entire range. Re-adjust by means of the water column
until X - XK = + 40 mm WC across the entire range.
5.4 Plugging in the Controller

a) Plug the controller into the air-channel plate or the base plate.
b) To secure the controller, reach through the two openings in the
cap and turn the securing screws 6 clockwise by about 120°
(bayonet lock).
Fig. 9 6. MAINTENANCE
a) Check of the pre-arranged air cleaner with filter. The supply air
must be free from dust, moisture and oil. Therefore the air
9, 9, C 8e •
cleaner must be cleaned as required.

b) Exchange of the cotton-wool filter
The cotton-wool filters in the supply-air and the control-pressure con•
nections must be replaced every six months. With controller stations
these connections are arranged on the air-channel plate, with field
controllers on the base plate and with controllers for mounting near
the control panel on the mounting plate.
c) Cleaning of the amplifier
In the amplifier the preliminary restriction (V) may get soiled. If
this is the case, no signal pressure is indicated with the supply air
turned on. To remedy this trouble unscrew the preliminary restric-
tions on the side of the amplifier, clean it with the supplied nozzle
cleaner 16 or with a piece of wire of less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
diameter, and screw it in again. If the controller does not cover the
complete control range, dismount the amplifier and clean it as fol-
lows:
1. Unscrew the fillister-head screws 15 on the amplifier
2. Remove the amplifier. Pay attention to seals!
3. First rinse at A with pure gasoline or another solvent, Then
blow air through at A (pressure of approx. 1.4 Itp/cm = 20 psi).
Do not disassemble the amplifier, otherwise it might get out of
adjustment.
d) Cleaning of the nozzle
Since only very small air quantities are moved back and forth in the
feedback branch and the feedback conduit is protected by a sintered-
. metal filter against ingress of foreign matter, deaning of the nozzles
is not required under normal operating.condittons.
The nozzles Tv and Tn can be removed from the volume bodies after
loosening the fillister-head screws 10 and 11, Fig. 9. Fully open
the nozzles, dip only the lower section (seat and cone with 0-ring)
into the cleaning gasoline, blow out with filtered air (against the
plane surface on the cylindrical part). Slightly grease the 0-ring
again (with petroleum jelly).
e) Cleanihg of the restrictions in the selector switch
In the base plate below the gasket of the selector switch "Normal" -
"Umgekehrt" (normal - reversed) there are two nozzles, which
can be unscrewed for possibly necessary cleaning with a wire of
less than 0.2 mm (0. 008 in) diameter.
Maintenance of the cross-bellows system is not required. If a bel-
lows starts leaking, the entire bellows system inclusive of ring and
pivoted arm must be replaced (see spare-part list). To do this re-
move one of the nozzles Tv or Tn. Then carry out adjustments in
accordance with Section 5.3.
GHH BUTENOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M TM.K
• 9,9.E.03-
Pneumatische Leitgerate
Anwendung Technieche Daten
Baustein einer anzeigenden oder . Frontplatte Aluminium-Druckgue

schreibenden Reglerstation, mit Bedie- Rahmen schwarz
nungselementen. Zur Kombination mit Frontschlld schwarz oder grau RAL 7035
Kreuzbalg-Aufsteckregler. und Anzeiger
Frontabmessungen
144 mm x 72 mm oder Schreiber Einfachleitgertit 144 x 45 mm
144 mm x144 Men, bzw.192 mm x 288 rnm.. • 144 x 72 mm
Doppelleitgertit
Montageart Schalttafeleinbau Querformat
Besonderheit Einbautlefe — 143 mm
Einfach- oder Doppelleitgerat mit Doppel- LuftanschlOsse Gewindelocher NPT 1/8",
• anzeiger fur Hand- and Automatikstellsigna.

Zum Anfahren and Regeln einer Anlage •
von Hand bzw. zur Kontrolle bei der auto-
matischen Regelung. • DruckmeBgerat
Form 0 DIN 19 212
Einschraubverschraubungen
siehe T.-Bi. 6 993 000
Einfach-DruckmeBgerat
Bei Stellung "Hand" des Hand-Automatik- bei Stellsignalgebern
Schalters kann Ober einen AnschluB Doppel-DruckmeBgerat bei den
eM Drucksignal zum Betatigen pneu- Obrigen AusfOhrungen
matischer Schalter, wie Anfahrrelais des Skalenlange 44 mm
Reglers oder Umschaltrelais des Feld- MeBwerk Rohrfeder aus Bronze
reglers abgenommen werden. Anzeigebereich 0...1,2 bar oder 0...18 psi
Durch einen zusatzlichen Kaskaden-
umschalter beim Doppelleitgerat, kann der Linearitatsabweichung
Hilfsregler OberbrOckt werden, wobei das beider MeBwerke ±-.1% vom Skalenwert
Gieichlaufabweichung ±0,5% vom Skalenendwert
Stellsignal vom 1-lauptregler direkt zum
Stellglied gelangt. Strukturleitgerat fur Druckgeber
Regler mit PI-Schalter, zum automatischen Einstellbereich 0...1,4 bar oder
Anfahren von Regelanlagen. In Stellung 0... 20 psi
"Automatik" des Hand-Automatik-Schalters Zuluftdruck 1,4 ±
- 0,1bar oder
laBt sich der Arbeitspunkt des Reglers 20±1,4 psi
Ober den Hand-Steildruckgeber wahrend Eigeniuftverbrauch max.100 In/h
des automatischen Anfahren einstelien. Luftleistung max. 2200 In/h
Vordruckabhangigkeit 0,15%/0,1 bar
TemperatureinfluB 5 0,03 PC
Betriebstemperatur —20... +70°C
80
BOrdeneinfluB bei 0,6 bar 3% L.Q 250
+
Hand-Automatik-Umschatter Fiachschieber
Sollrgrt Stellgrai
YIL
0• 0.6 01 1 1
III II IIIII II
Soiiwert 1 SOUveett 2
4.4 0,4 06 01 1 11
IIIIIII 11111
••••••
•rn
to
61
IT
No 2940
GHH IBUTENCIFFRIBIENESINUTTE
STERKRAIDE AKTIENGEEIELLSCHAFT
M.TM.K
Malkelchnungen
Einfach-Leitgergt
Sollwert StellgraBe
•
711111111111111■"" ml
1) 1m Zusammenhang mit Anzeigern und Schreibern
I 111111111111111 sind deren.Mindestabstande zu beachten.
Empfohlene Abstande a und b

co bei Verwendung Mat a Ma b
CJ
mehrere Leitgerate Obereinander 5 5k 5
,„
mit Anzeiger 144 x 72 5 40
mit Schreiber 144 x 144 6,5 60
alit Schreiber 192 x 288 20 20
mit Leitgerate - oder Blindstation • 118 118
No 2940
GHH MIUTEHOFFAHLINSEIHIETTE
M TM.K Blatt
MaBzeichnungen
Doppel-Leltgerat
Sollefert 1 Sollwert 2
V
11111111111
A I )
• I ll11111111.
A 1-- -
A
tel 6Be 2
-4k 144
11;21 12;22 13;23 14;24 15;25
•
011.161 411171V2
-Tinumgr-
mmill 8
Empfohlene Abstande a and b
bei Verwendung Mali a Ma b

mit Anzeiger 144 x 72 8 40
mit Schreiber 144 x 144 6,5 60
mit Schreiber 192 x 288 18 20
No ?NO
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNBBHUTTE
STERKRADE
M TM.K AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Blatt
Sastelltabelle 1
Stellgrogen- und SignalgrOBengeber
ew.
• Frontansicht Anschlusse Schaltbild Gkg Bestell-Nr
f-
Ae
v:
Sreligrtfiengeber
mitiAnzeiger , 1
5 YHStellgrOlie 5
• steucisne
.74,1•1s.n.i.n.1.11 _e) 1Zuluft 1
J
2 6 961132
• Stellgr011engeber mit
Anzeiger fur StellgrO6e
und ROckmeldesignal 5 YHStellgrOfie 1
4 Rackmeldung i
47'. 2 6 961134
steusna,
2.7.7....pe... 3. zuket 1
... J
. ,
• Doppel-Stellgr66engeber
mit Anzeiger
5 Y21.1 Handstellgraffe • 5
Mr-
i.BM
—
._
-1
I
i
Stallgroile
77errpervi.1.1
Stvacirorle
,
2 Y1H HandstellgrO8e
1ZUlUft
2
1
AIBLI
iiiilli
111111 111111
1
2 6 961232
/.
FOhrungsgrOffengeber
r 1
;' 3 W Fahrungsgralle 3 1,4 6 961832

Sollwert
? kZuluft • 1 J
0
Na
GHH BUTEHOFFNUNSIMUTTE
M.TM.K Ease
!Bestelltabelle 2
1Leitger3te ohne FahrungsgrOBengeber
Gew.
Frontansicht Anschkisie Schaitbild kg Bestell-Nr
• Leitgerat far
ReglerstatIon
5 YStellgrabe vom Leltgerat

4 VA SteIlgrafte vom Regler 2 6 962 132
Settgrone 2 ASchaltalgnal
pirptreppprpri
1 Zuluft
A-4.----3- He r i
5 ,
4
i
2 : •
1 1 •
LeItgerat far
Kaskadenregelung
mit Umschalfer
Kaskade/Festwert 5 W FOhrungsgrOBe tHilfiregler
4 VA StellgrOae v. Hauptregler 2 6 962 432
F"1"ft Z a Schaltsignal .
1Zuluft
• A ----o-
Leitgerat Kir
Reglerstation r 1
mit PI-Schaller 5 ,
5 Y Stellgrtige vom Leitgerat 4
1
4 YA Stellgrafle vom Regler i 2 6 962 532
Seellgroffe 2 '
. 2 F. Fremddruck f. Arbeitsp.
1Zuluft 1 1
HP PP
!I)
No 2910
BUTEHLIFFNISPAGSHIIITTE
M.TM.K STERKRADIE,AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
it" Blatt
BeateMabee 3
Ledgerate
Gew.
Frontanslcht AnschlQsae Schaltbild kg Bestell-Nr
Leitgerat fur
Festwertregelung
twert Stettgr 2 6 963 132

5 Y StellgrOfte vom Leitgerat
4 VA Stellgr613e vom Regler
• A
Leitgerat f8r
H 3 W Fibrungsgrofte
a
2 Schaltsignal
1 Zuluft -
Festwertregelung
• • 2 6963 732
Sothwert yenta 5 Y StellgraBe vom Leitgerat
1 I .PerN141.1•1 4 YA SteilgrOBe vom Regler
3 W Fahrungsgr68e
A 2 a SchaltsIgnal
1 Zuluft y. -
Leitgedit fur r -1
5
Festwertregelung 4 i
3
2 6 983 632
Fiihrungsgr k Stekgroae 5 Y StellOraffe vom Leitgerat 2 I N
1•NNINITINTIN 4 VA Steligr8Be vom Ropier.
3 W Fuhrungsgr88e --1 w-c-=,
.. - _
•-- H 2 aSchaltsignal .
1 Zuluft
• Leitgerat far
Hauptregler bei
Kaskadenregetung
Sokwert Festwert
.
5 W2 FOhrungsgrldie
f. Hilfsreoler
4 YA Stetlgro6e v. Hauptregler
2 6 963432
v7,..vvviv•pri
3 Wi FOhrungsgr68e
A -1-- fur Hauptregler
2 S,Schaltsignal
1 Zuluft
Leitgerat fur
Verhaltnisregelumgmit Umschalter
Verh./Hand
Ver haltnil Shinigr 2 6 963 232
0 IN NNIN.I.P17.:0 5 Y Staligrd0e vom Leitgerat
4 VA SiellgrO8e v. Verhaltnisreg.
,4 3 V Faktor far Verhaltnisrelais
2 S.Schaltsignal
1 Zuluft •
CO
rip Leitgerat h3r
Verhaltnisregelung mit Umscaalter
Verh./Festwert
5 W FahrungsgrOBe 2 6 983332
0
rhaltnn
NI•111.11.1111N
.
Festwert VOM Leitgerat
4 W Fahrungsgr.v.Verhaltnisrel.
3 V Faktor fur Verhaltnisrelais
4. 2 S.Schaltsignal..
s 1 Zuluft
No 2910
BIM BUTEHOFFNUNGSHLITTE
M.TM.K than
Bestelltabelle 3 (Fortsetzung)
Leitgerate
Gew.
Frontansicht AnschlOsse Schaltbild kg Bestell-Nr
Leitgerat far Hauptregler

-s
bel KaskadenNerhaltnisregler
5 V Faktor far Verhaltnisrelais ,
aottwert Varhaltnri 2 6 963 532
• 4 VA Stellgrafte vom Hauptregl. '.1
..- -
1.1.1,1,1.1.1.14111,1.1 3 W FahrungsgrOfte 2 ...-1-
A 11 li far Hauptregler '
•
2 S.Schaltsignal i
1-8.-L---
1Zuluft.
• .
Leitgerat far Festwertregelung.
Regler mit einseitiger 5
Strukturumschaltung 5 Y StellgraBe vom Leitgerat 4
SOltwert SteligroBe 4 VA StellgraBe vom Realer 3 2 6 963 932
3 W Fahrungsgrafte I
11;.1.114.1.1.14.1.1 2
2 F Fremddruck f. Arbeftspunkt
A $--- HF w 1Zuluft
- 1 ...--L-
Bestelttabelle 4
Doppel-Ledgerate
Gew.
Frontansicht AnschlOsse Schaltbild kg Bestell-Nr
Doppelleltgerat far
Kaskadenregelung
15 W2 Fahrungsgral3e r -1
15
zum Hilfsregler 14
14 VA.! Stellgr. v. Hauptregler 13 I
13 Wi FahrungsgrOBe 22 ,
•
zum Hauptregler s
uss.ss Solmt 2
12 SiSchaltsignal vom Leitger.
rrrrrrrrr,v
Ebene1 11 4 6 964 132
• 3.3== ,,, ,,,i, 11Zuluft lim- -1
25 Y2 StellgroBe vom Leitgerat _____i
Ebene 2
. P.A=s•-••H ii
.24 YA2 StellgrOliie v. Hilfsregler
22 S2 SchaltsIgnal v. Leitgerat
Ebene 2 22 A m
21Zuluft 21
Doppel-Leitgerat far
Verhaltnisregelung - . 1
15 Y StellgrOBe v. Leitgerat 15
Ebene 1 14
14 YA Stellgrafte v. Regler
12 Si Schaltsignal v. Leitgerat 12 I A I.
Ebene 1
11Zuluft 11
114.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1 s- - -- 4 6 964 232
25 W Fahrungsgn5Be z. Regler
33= (Feshvert FahrungsgraBez.B
vom Multiplikationa-Relais) 25
24 W FahrungsgrdBe (z.B. vom 24
, 3-a=s=H . MultIplikatIons-Relais) 23
23 Faktor (z.B.z.Multip1.-Relais) 22 14
• 22 S2 SchaltsIgnal v. Leitgerat
Ebene 2
21Zulutt 2L 4.-Iirm- - - --
No NW
GHH 11111TEHOFFNIIINSEINUTTE
STEN KRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TM K
Bestelltabelle 4 (Fortsetzung)
Doppel-Leitgerate
Gew
Frontansicht Anschlusse Schaltbild .Bestell-Nr
kg
Doppel-Leitgedit fOr
Kaskadenregelung
15 Y Stellgrdfle v. Leitgerat t 1
Ebene 1 ii '
14 YA Stellgreee v. Regler
• 13 :
12 S1 Schaltsignal v. Leitgerat 32
Ebene 1 A
SIte OAP
11Zuluft
ri•i•ri•ri•i•i•ri e\ 11
25 W Fiihrungsgrate z. Regler 4 6 964 532
A Ips.Hs„-i-- . (FestwertFithrungsgrOBe z.B.
vom Multiplikations-Relais) I- - -I
riliv•i•i•i•ri•I -
24 W Fiihrungrgrtfie (zB. vom 25
24
A-11311=-H Multiplikations-Relais)'
22 S2 Schaltsignal v. Leitgerat n
Ebene 2 A 11
I
21Zuluft i
21. _
Doppel-Leitgerat fOr •
Festwertregelung bei Reglem
mit beidsaitiger Struktur-
umschaltung and Begrenzung 15 Y SteligrOBe v. Leitgerat g
13
14 YA StellgrOfie v. Regler
12 1
13 W FilihrungsgrOBe I
Sot.eter I 5t • il 12 S Schaltsignal
•
" = 11ZulUtt 11 w•-‘-- --
4 6 964 632
• 1.21===
r A
.--. iprptervipi.i FW 25 oberer Fremddruck 25
fOr Arbeitsp. (Anfahren)
•ere Or Fre •de 1
22 unterer Fremddruck 22
- fOr Arbeitsp. (Abfahren)
All
el in
21Zuluft 21
111113 it II
No 4940
GHH
M.TM.K
OUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE OAKTIENGE'SELLEICHAFT
. Welt
9, 9, S 0

Instructions
MB 6960 b engl.
•
Pneumatic
Subpanels
J. C. ECKARDT AG. 7000 STUTTGART 50

3 Postfach 500347 Telefon (0711)5021 Telex 7254445
9, g,0, G9( e ) 2/17
1. GENERAL
• •
For sjtting the command variable - the setpoint - and
the manual correcting variable in the pneumatic signal
range from 0.2.)- Kl-kp/cm2. the pneumatic subanels have
pressure reducers with .direction of action such that
output rises with clockwise rotation'of the knob.1) The
.direction of action is indicated on the knob with a
corresponding symbol. The individual pressure reducers
are!adjustable from 0 - 1.2 kp/cm2.
The subpanels, in addition, incorporate a cylindrical .

rotary valve to change over from automatic to manual
operation. It is, therefore, optionally possible to connect
the correcting variable of the controller or the manual
correcting variable set by means of a pressure reducer to
the motor element of a final control unit. In the "manual"
position this changeover switch additionally ieleases a
pressure signal for operation of pneumatic switches, such
as starting relays and switching relays for. field.rheo-
stats.
A flat pressure gauge with two measuring units indicates

the correcting variable of the controller and the manual
correcting variable.
Special structure subpanels are used in combination with

structure controllers - cross bellows controllers with
proportional + integral switch. On these units the two
functions can be performed by means of the pressure reducer
for the manual correcting variable (right-hand knob).
1. Setting the manual correcting variable with the manual/
automatic switch on "manual".
2. Setting the external pressure for the integral bellows
in "automatic" position, to determine the operating
point in the cross bellows controller during automatic
start-up. In this case the additional pressure signal
mentioned above is omitted.
N 0 t e ! After each operation, the 'external pressure
for the integral bellows should be reset.
1) Reversed direction of action possible by changing over
the spindle.
•
For cascade and ratio control, a simple subpanel with two
pressure reducers and a manual/automatic switch is no
longer sufficient. The setpoint for the main controller
and the pneumatic factor pre-setting for a ratio relay
also require provision for pressure setting. In addition,
with cascade control systems, the command variable of the
auxiliary controller must be optionally adjustable manually,
and for this purpose a further selector switch is necessary.
For this purpose there is a double subpanel in which two
single subpanels are superimposed in an enlarged facia.
If two proportional + integral switches are used for a

structure controller, it is possible to use a suitable
double subpanel with four pressure reducers and a manual/
automatic switch. Additional pressure reducers are, there-
fore, provided for setting the corresponding external
pressures.
All subpanels permit combinations with the JCE 144 x 72 mm

indicators, the pneumatic 144 x 144 mm or 192 x 288 mm JCE
recorders in combination with plug-in controllers to form
controller. stations. In addition, the subpanel can be ex-
tended to form a so-called subpanel station in combination
with .a special air channel plate and a cross bellows cont-
roller. The pneumatic connections are NPT 1/8" tapped holes,
for compression type joints for 6 mm connecting pipes,(pre-
viously Ermeto), Series LL.
If the subpanels are intended for controller stations

with recorders,plug-in connections should be fixed in
the corresponding connections of the subpanel on site.
These plug-in connections are supplied with the record-
ers for controller stations.
9,0, 0 /1i
() 4 •
2. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF PRESSURE REDUCERS

By their function, pressure reducers are pressure cont-
rollers without external energy. With fluctuating supply
pressure (input pressure) they keep the output pressure
constant and permit adjustment of the output pressure
from 0 - 1.2 kp/cm2. The drawing in Fig.1 shows the
function and construction of a-pressure reducer. At bellows,
(4) the adjustable force of spring (3) and the force re-
sulting from output pressure by effective bellows area
are compared with one another. If, for example, the
spring pressure predominates, the plunger (6) presses
on vent valve (7) and pushes the dumb-bell shaped re-
strictor (9) downwards. The ball valve (12) for the supply
air opens. Now, supply air continues to flow until the
output pressure - compartments (5) and (10) are connect-
venting ed to one another - correspond to the spring pressure.
ilun
Output Supply air If, on the other hand, the output pressure predominates
at the above-mentioned comparison surface, the helical
tube (8) pushes the vent valve upwards. Thus, the excess
Fig. 1
air escapes to atmosphere via the helical tube spring (8).
A small auxiliary spring on the restrictor ensures rapid
positive closing of the supply air valve when equilibrium
is reached and during venting.
From the method of operation of the pressure reducer it

follows that the output pressure can be affected by means
of the spring tension. Spindle (2) is, therefore, led out
and fitted with a knob (1). The direction of action of
the pressure reducer is thus dependent on the direction
of the thread (left- or right-hand thread).
a
9,0, O .1 (e • •
Table 1
Correcting Variable and Signal Value Transmitters
Table 2
Front View Connections Circuit Weight Part Price Subpanels without Command Variable Transmitter
Diagram kg No.
Front View Connections Circuit Weight Part Price'
Correcting 5 correcting Diagram kg No.
variable variable .
transmitter Subpanel for
with 2 8001192 controller station
indicator • 1 supply air . 5 Correcting
...... variable
h ]-(0 from subpan. 2
471717$ (YA or YH) 2 2 8082 LW
4 YA correct. 1
5 correcting variable
Correcting from cont.
variable trans. variable (Correcting
with indicator 4 return 2 S,switching .
signal 2 1 variable) pressure
for correcting 1 Supply air
variable and 1 2 8081134
return signal 1 supply air ,
....... Subpanel for 5 W Command
cascade control variable
with cascade/ (setpoint)
fixed point for auxil. ____,
changeover switch controller
Double correct- 5 manual (YA or YH)
ing variable correcting 4 YA correct. 2 6962432
trans.with variable ......4.
variable
indicator Y2H . from main
2 Manual 2 0081232 cont. .
1:64
3 le correcting
variable
2
1 (Fixed point) 2 S, switching

pressure
YlH 1 Supply air
Correcting
variable 1 supply air
Subpanel for 5 Correcting
controller stat- variable
Signal value ion with pro- from subpan.
transmitter portional + (Y or YH) 2
integral switch 4 YK correct. .
3 W command variable 2 0022082
variable 1 (Correcting
. variable) from cont. ------------ ---
1.4 8081832 2 F,ext.press.
Setpoint 1 supply air for operat.
.=/41 point
(Ext.pressure) 1 Supply air
16
9,9, 0 1 e 6// • •
•
Table 9
Subpazels Subpanel for main 5 Factor for ratio relay (1A 'tit YH )
controller with 4 1A Correcting variable from main
Weight cascade/ratio controller
Front View Connections Circuit diagram Part No. Price
kg controller 3 W Command variable for main 2 6963 532
controller
Subpanel for fixed 5 Y Correcting variable from-
point control subpanel (YA or YH ) • riy-3,‘,,0 2 5,3v/itching pressure
1 Supply air
•
4 Correcting variable from

controller 2 6963132
Subpanel for fixed 5 Y Correcing
1 variable from sub-
W----7 3 W Command variable
. point control. panel A or YH )
2 S,Switching pressure Controller with 4 TA Correcting variable from
1 Supply air
BI ER KRADE
unilateral strum-
13UTEH U F FNUNISISH UTTE

controller 2 51963 932
tire switsching 3 W Command variable .
Subpanel for fixed 5 Y Correcting variable from 2 F.Ext.pressine for operating
point control subpanel (1A or YH ) ,point . 2 •
4 Correcting variable from r5a
C —1 7 •
1 Supply air ...-:-.--
controller 2 6 963 732
I
3 W Command variable
• m42)
2 S,Switching pressure
1 Supply air .
Subpanel for fixed 5 Y Correcting variable from

point control subpanel (YA or 1 H)
A KTIEN GESE LLSCHAF T

4 Correcting variable from
,
controller 2 6 963 632
431„," 3 W Command variable
2
1 Supply air
Subpanel for main 5 WICommand variable (setpoint)

controller with for auxil.controller (YA or Yu )
cascade control 4 YA Correcting variable from
main controller
...,_ 3 WI Command variable for main 2 6 963 432
w
sa
M^
-
. ,1 al
- controller
1 Supply air
Subpanel for ratio 5 Y Correcting variable from sub-

control with ratio/ panel 11A or YH ),
manual changeover 4 1A Correcting variable from
switch ratio controller 2 6 963 232
' 3 Factor for ratio relay
<5 11
.4 2 5, Switching pressure
us...,
1 Supply air
Subpanel for ratio 5 W Command variable from sub-

control with ratio/ panel (1A or YH )
fixed point change- 4 W Command variable from ratio .
over switch relay 2 6 963 332
,.=-.-
. , 3 Factor for ratio relay
2 S.Switching pressure
[Os& _. , to
4:::), 1 Supply air sT
I Q, 9416: /qe) ?m1 • •
Table 4
Double subpanels
Weight
Front view Connections Circuit diagram Part No. Price
kg
Double subpanel 15 W2 Command variable to mull,
for cascade controller Double subpanel 16 Y Correcting variable from sub-
control 14 Vat Correcting variable from for cascade panel level 1 (YA or YN )
main controller control 14 YA Correcting variable from
r — 1
13 WI Command variable to main H controller
controller . ,3 12 St Switching pressure from sub-
12 Si Switching pressure from sub- . a panel level 1 o
panel level 1 a
: - e964 132 11 Supply air
1.____ 4
Er= -4 11 Supply air
25 Y2 Correcting variable from sub-
25 W Command variable to controller
4 61364632
(Fixed point command variable for
panel level 2 example from multiplier relay) sr •
24 YA2 Correcting variable from " .. . _ J 24 W Command variable (e.g.from
auxiliary controller . multiplier relay)
22 S2 Switching pressure from sub- 22 S2 Switching pressure from subpanel
panel level 2 level 2
21 Supply air ' 21 Supply air
. , .
Double subpanel 15 Y Correcting variable from sub- Double subpanel 15 Y Correcting variable from subpanel
for ratio control panel level 1 (YA or YH ) for fixed point (YA Or YH )
14 YA Correcting variable from cont- control on cont- 14 YA Correcting variable from cont-
roller rollers with roller
1
12 Si Switching pressure from subpanel w bi-lateral struct- 13 W Command variable
level 1 4 6964632
ure changeover 12 Switchhtg pressure
11 Supply air u I and limitation 11 Supply air
C...= tv
..- 25 W Command variable to controller 1 4 13 964 232 25 Upper external pressure for Omen-
Sear:= 4"). (Fixed point command variable for c--.1 log point (run-out)
es9 H `, a
example, from multiplier relay) 21 Supply air
24 W Command variable (for example 1 1111111mmON 1
from multiplier relay) • a • ..
23 Factor (e.g. to multiplier relay)
22 S2 Switching pressure from subpanel
level 2
21 Supply air
co
9, 9, 0 1_(e) 8/12 • •
Single Subpanel
Setpoint Correcting
Variable
satin %Arm.
— 1-
3. FITTING
I, I-7-";-'1, PANEL CUTOUT
The subpanels are intended for panel mounting. When inyn! INI !T T!
fitting, we recommend the following procedure: .ii .ii
a) Provide panel cutout as per Fig.2 for single minam
subpanels, Fig.3 for double subpanels, in in- N.
.
•
strument panel and de-burr. Immuima--"
b) Push subpanel - without side fixings - into the
1111:1111:
panel cutout from the front of the instrument rZ
panel.
IRV*
,,,WkAIL 11. 4 I) When fitted in combination with
c) Engage fixing bar in subpanel. The fixing compo- t •indicators and recorders, the
nents are included with the instrument. •minimum distances of the latter
should be noted.
d) Tighten the two fixing units by turning the
spindles against the instrument panel.
Note! If the subpanel forms part of a controller
station, observe the fitting instructions
for the indicators or recorders in question. Recommended Distances a and b
when using Dimension a Dimension b
Several subpanels stacked 5 5

vertically
With indicator 144 x 72 5 40
With recorder 144 x 144 6.5 60
With recorder 192 x 288 20 20
With subpanel or blank

station 118 118
S
a
Pig. 2
• 04(e) g///
Double Subpanel
Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2
4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 Pressure Reducers
The pressure reducers themselves are to a large extent
Correcting maintenance-free because sintered metal filters are in-
variable 2 corporated in the input and output passages. In the event CB MO
•mm
of malfunctions due to dirt, it is advisable to clean the mc
filters occasionally. Otherwise, the pressure reducer
should be exchanged. x
• -1
PANEL CUTOUT m IN
/' MP
4.11 Exchanging a Pressure Reducer or Renewing the Seal Between O WM
Pressure Reducer and Air Channel Plate (Fig. 4) m CI
>9N
\III a) Pull out setting knob (55,.56) and slacken grub x9
)
screw. -4 IL
b) Pull setting knob off spindle.
m ma
c) Remove pivot screw (13) of selector arm: Z
d) Extract selector arm forwards through facia plate, o 2!
1) When fitted in combination with in doing so lift arm (11) over the pin of the driver m m.
indicators and recorders, the arm (10). ro gi
minimum distance of the latter e) Slacken the four fixing screws (48) m EN
✓ um
should be noted.
f) Remove facia plate from air channel plate by pulling r
hard. The pressure gauge is a push-in fit in the air • mn
channel plate.
A hi
g) Slacken pressure reducer by turning to the left and x sal
unscrew.
If the pressure reducer sticks, use a pipe wrench m
Recommended Distances a and b not on the hexagon but on the base of the pressure
reducer.
When using Dimension a Dimension b i) Remove old seals and fit new ones lightly greased.
With indicator 144 x 72 8 40 j) Reassemble subpanel in reverse order with new
pressure reducer. Note direction of action!
With recorder 144 x 144 6.5 60
With recorder 192 x 288 18 20
Fig. 3
1 9:9 :
0 "2 (e) 10/17 •
4.12 Changing the Spindle of a Pressure Reducer

(Reversing Direction of Action)
If it is required to reverse the direction of action
of a pressure reducer, the spindle fitted with right-
hand thread for example, should be replaced by one
,..,
j(t • with left-hand thread together with the corresponding
sleeve.
Procedure is as follows:
a) Pull out setting knob (55) or (56) and slacken
grub screw.
b) Pull setting knob off spindle.
c) Unscrew spindle with sleeve by means of socket
wrench.
N otel On units supplied until. the end of
1967 it is possible under certain
circumstances to remove spindle and
sleeve separately, i.e. with the aid
of a normal screwdriver.
Note direction of thread!
d) Screw in new spindle with sleeve and tighten sleeve.
N ote! On units supplied until the end of
1967 the sleeve can be tightened with
the aid of a normal screwdriver. When
inserting the spindle, the direction of
its thread (left- or right-hand) should
be noted).
e) Retighten setting knob.
f) Fit plate (54) corresponding to direction of action
(symbol for direction of action).
z
g, •o
O
9 (e) 11/1 2
4.2 Selector Switch

4.21 Exchanging or Freeing Manual/Automatic Selector Switch
a) Remove pivot screw (13) of selector arm. Withdraw
selector arm forwards through the facia plate.
b) Lift the selector arm over the pin on the driver
- 19 -
arm (10).
c) Remove driver arm (10) by slackening screw. 4.3 Renewing the Glass
d) Remove fixing screws (9) on cover of selector hous-
ing and lift off cover. a) Strip subpanel in accordance with Section 4.11
e) Extract selector components 2 - 7 and degrease. up to and including item f).
f) Renew any damaged parts.
b) Slacken the two screws (43) on the case of the
g) SMear all friction and bearing points lightly with
silicone grease. pressure gauge and lift off the pressure gauge
h) Reassemble selector switch in reverse order and re- itself.
fit selector arm.
c) Renew seal (42) and glass (41).
i) Check function of subpanel. Note ! Seal and glass are inserted loose.
4.22 Changing the Switching Function of the Manual/Automatic d) Reassemble in reverse order.
Selector Switch
(Structure Subpanel)
The switching function of the selector switch is depend- 4.4 Renewing the Pressure Gauge
ent solely on the design of the seal' (2 a to d) in'Fig.4.
To renew the pressure gauge proceed as in Section 4.3.
To change the swiiching function it is,therefore, only
necessary to replace this seal with another one.
5. CONNECTION
The seal necessary for.your purpose can be found in
Parts List 6 960 050. The connections of the subpanels are numbered. The sig-
nificance of the individual numbers can be seen in
Note! Change adhesive circuit diagram. Operations Tables 1 to 4. On standard model subpanels the pneumat-
for changing correspond to section 4.21. ic connections are NPT 1/8" tapped holes with compress-
ion type fitting for 6 mm connecting pipes (hoses or
The function of the modified subpanel should now be pipes), Series LL.
checked in accordance with the corresponding circuit
diagram on pages 7 to 9.
GHH IBUTENOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M.TM.K Blatt

Instructions
I
MB 6210 c engl.
Pneumatic
Indicator
J. C. ECKARDT AG-7000 STUTTGART 50

àte Postfach 500347- Telefon (0711)5021- Telex 7254662
No SW
o, 40 (e1 2/13 •
1. GENERAL
y Pneumatic indicators are understood pressure gauges
whose Measuring ranges corvesp:nd t: :he unit signal of
15 psi or 0.;.1 to 1.0 1,:p,c7 pneumatic instruments.
The scales of the indicators will therefore represent the
'mea'suring range of the measuring transducer concerned.
They can therefore he designed fcr pressure, temperature,
level, flow, etc.
The instruments are supplied with cne'or two indicator

units (dimensions 144mm x 72mm and 192mm x 96mm) and also
as ribbon-type indicators (dimensions 32mm x 137mm). It
is also possible to incorpOrate limit signal transmitters
in the 144 x 72 indicators, that is tc say ones with open
contacts - up to 2 creep or magnetic spring contacts
and ones with inductive sampling device - up to 2 contacts
per measuring unit. In the case cf the latter contact
type 1 amplifying relay.(transistor relay) will additiOn-
ally be necessary in each case.
Pneumatic 144 x 72 indicators, plus-in controllers and sub-

panels can be assembled to form contr:lier stations, Fig.1. .
On.the back of the sub7panel air channel plate
is therefore fitted which itself has self-sealing plug-in
connections for indicator and plus-in controller.
Pneumatic 192 . x 96 indicators are not suitable for this

•combination. For this purpose sub-canal stations, Fig. 2
are. available -.sub-panels and air channel plates which
only have plug in connections for plug-in controllers.
0, 9., //-10 (e) 3//3 •
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 1 4 4x7 2 Indicator

1 i 1. Make panel cutout
doe
•
J
Fig. 3 for horizontal panel Pitmen'.'
Fig. 3 Fig. Fig. 4 for vertical panel fitment
N o t e: . Fitting position NL 90 + 5c
2. Slacken panel fixings 1/Fig. 1 and disengage; they

1 can then be easily detached.
3. Insert indicator forwards into the instrument panel.
4. Refit panel fixings and brace their fixing screws

against the instrument panel.
Fig. 6 - 2.2 192 x 9 6 Indicator
1. Make panel cutout

Fig. 7
Fig. 5 for horizontal panel fitment
Fig. 6 for vertical panel fitment
N o t e: Fitting position NI, 90 4 5c
2. Slacken screws 2/Fig.2 and move fixing elements;

:4—
•:1 they are then easily detachable.
3. Further installation as described under 2.1 above.
2.3 Ribbon-type indicator

1. Make panel cutout in accordance wit.`. Fig.7
Fig. 9 N o t e: Fitting pogition NL 90'+ 5c
1) min. Dist.
9,, 4- 0 (e) 4/ 7.5 •
2. Pull off plate 1/Fig. 8 from front of instrument '
(plate is only pushed in position).
3. Screw back screws 2 and 3.
4. Engage instrument in the cutout from the back of the
instrument panel - first at the top, then at the
bottom.
5. Tighten screws 2 and 3 against instrument panel.
6. Push plate 1 on to the front of the instrument.
2.4 Controller station with 14 4x7 2

indicator
Fig. 10
1. Make panel cutout in accordance with Fig.9.
2. If necessary remove pipe or tube screw unions.
N o t e: with screw unions of the Ermeto type,unscrew
union nuts; with other screw union types re-
move the union completely.
3., Push sub-panel into the instrument panel from the front -
lower panel cutout.
4. Engage fixing elements in sub-panel in accordance with
Fig. 10.
N o t e: do not use the standard fixing elements 1
supplied with the sub-panel, but the more,
robust elements 2 which are included with
the air channel plate.
. 5. Tighten spindles 3 against instrument panel. •
6. Insert a greased 0-ring in each of the resesses:2/Fig.11.
-• 44N
The 0-rings are included with the dii-chainel plate 1
in a plastip•bag.
Fit.;.ali, channel plate 1 on to the sub-panel as shown
in Fig. 11 - with double sub-panels the top level
and secure with screws 3 and 4.
N o t e: with cascade and ratio control the centre
connection of the air channel plate 1
should first of all be sealed with a sealing
plug (accessory).
1
1 0,97/1, 4-0(e) s/ib
8. Fit pneumatic plug connections (accessory) 1/Fig.12

as described in section 3.11.
9. Push indicator into the instrument panel and secure
as described in 2.1 above.
2.5 Sub-panel station

1. Make panel cutout in accordance with Fig.13.
2. With screw unions of the Ermeto type, unscrew union
nuts; with other screw union types remove the union
completely.
3. Push sub-panel into the instrument panel from the
front.
4. Secure sub-panel as,described in section 2.4,'items
4 and 5.
5 Insert a greased 0-ring in each of the recesses 2/Fig.11z.
These 0-rings are included with the air channel plate
1 in plastic bag.
Fig. 12
6. Place air channel plate 1 on the sub-station - with
double sub-stations bottom level - and secure with
screws 3 and 4.
!-' Fig. 13
3. CONNECTIONS
mu,. Dip.
3.11 Pneumatic connections
1 2 The instruments are supplied with twin-flat or hexagon
connections and NPT 1/8" internal thread.
1. Twin-flat connections
Screw in unions (accessory) for pipe or tube connec-
tions should be screwed into the tapped holes NPT
1/8" and tightened.
2. Hexagon connections
a) Unscrew set screw (channel centre)
b) Pull off screw connection
c) Grease 0-ring if necessary.
Fig. 11
N o t e: Only use undamaged 0-rings. Screw in plug
connections (accessory) to fullest extent
and tighten.
I OM, 1, 40 (e) 6/7.5
3.12 Electrical connections
If the indicator contains contacts, these should be con-
nected as follows:
1. Remove protective caps from junction boxes 1 and 2,
Fig. 15.
2. Connect in accordance with the table below
Terminal Measuring Measuring Practical example:
marking\ unit II unit I Required: measuring unit II
I
1"r "Fill1= limit value transmit-
1=111=1111231=11 ter minimum switches
% runic CI CI ilurn relay (R)
nw-Asigiiii yams measuring unit II
NEIENIIIILIWIllg
I LIAJIII:4M-LIIMIANI
• rmirAmaiivisLI,
limit value transmit-
ter maximum switches
relay (A)
Solu- Requirement i
tion: 1 is fulfil-
A = single relay B = double led by two 11101111017
111011LP
relay arrows
Requirement
2 is fulfil-
Fig. 15 led by two
arrows
With the double relay two diagonal arrows can be combined.
1st Solution 2nd Solution
Isiessur- MUII 1 » R1 MUII 14.. R3
-(KU tion•ing
cim _ unit U NEM MUII 3.- R2 MUII 3 .6. R4
• (112:1 ■•11110 MUI -8— R3 foam. MUI 8 -• R1
*OM (". Mealur MUI 10 R4 MUI 10 * R2
Ion* log
unit I Figure 16 shows the connection terminals for indicators
Limit , Limit Limit Limit
due value value value with one measuring unit - inductive and open limit signal
maximum minimum maximum minimum
transmitter - and Figure 17 for indicators with two measuring
Fig. 16 Fig. 17
units - inductive limit signal transmitter only.
N o t e: With inductive limit signal transmitters only con-
nect to amplifier relay (intrinsically safe input
circuit). This means:
Control (4
circuit 2 21
, Contact
output
Control {
circuit I
Control {
Contact
output
per single contact
per 2 contacts
1 single relay, Fig. 18
2 single relays,Fig.18 or
circuit 11 1 double relay, Fig.19.
I lb tO tl
LT J
, 3. Refit protective caps.
220 V. 50 c/s 220 V. 50 c/s 4. With inductive limit signal transmitters connect terminals
19, 20 and 21 of the amplifying relay to 220V t 15%,
Fig.18 Fig. 19 45 to 60 c/s.
X0,9,•4-0 • •
N o t e: For double indicators with inductive limit
signal transmitters the following applies:
measuring unit 2 can either contain up to
2 contacts or 1 mechanical pointer reset
device (set point adjustment). The two
together is not possible.
Fit pneumatic connections as described under 3.11 above.
3.3 Ribbon type indicator
Fit pneumatic connections as described under 3.11 above.
3.4 Controller station with 1 4 4x7 2
indicator 1)
3.41 Pneumatic connections
1. Connect in accordance with system circuit diagram.
Symbols are as follows:
x Controlled variable (actual value)
w Command variable (set point)
y Correcting variable
yA Correcting variable - automatic
(controller output)
R Feedback
S Switching or control signal
V Factor for multiplier unit
Zul. Supply air
2. With ratio control remove sealing plug from side con-
nection V of air channel plate.
3. With cascade control pass correcting pressure of master
controller to input command variable w of the air
channel plate.
3.42 Electrical connections
Section 3.12 above is also applicable here.
F. 3.5 Sub-panel station

Pneumatic connections'as under section 3.41, but join the
side connections of the air channel plate (set point and
actual value) in accordance with Fig.20 to the appropriate
w
recording or indicating instrument. a
1)See also circuit sheets 6410
1 0, 1/-0(e) 8/ 13
4. CHECKING FUNCTION AND START UP

4.1 Pneumatic system
4.11 144 x 72 Indicator
1. Check with the indicator pressureless whether the
pointer beside the instrument scale is under zero.
If this is not the case damage has occurred during
transport. Return the instrument!
2. Run through pneumatic input signal from 3 to 15 psi
for each measuring unit once - a pressure
reducer and a test manometer are necessary for this
purpose. If the reading does not reach full scale
deflection, the connections are not airtight or
damage has occured during transport.
3. Carry out three comparitive measurements.
4.12 192 x 96 indicator

Check as stated in section 4.11.
4.13 Ribbon-type indicator

Check as in section 4.11. Zero can be corrected by
means of screw 1/Fig.21 (remove plug) using a screwdriver.
4.14 Controller station with 144 x 72 indicator

Check indicator in accordance with section 4.11
2. Connect sub-panel to supply air.
3. Set manual/automatic switch to "H" and check whether
air blows off at connection S. Then turn back manual
correcting pressure and check that the pressure at
Fig. 21
connection cap S drops.
N o t e: With standard controller stations the
pressure at connection S remains constant.
With controller stations for automatic
start up (PI switch) the pressure at con-
nection S will be affected by the manual
correcting pressure.
0,T, 4 0 (e 9/7.5 • •
4. Set manual/automatic switch to "A" position. Con-
nection "S" must be sealed on standard controller
stations. With controller stations for automatic
start up the output of the manual correcting pressure
transmitter must be connected to connection "S".
5. Corinect test manometer to connection "w" and adjust
the signal pressure over the whole adjustment range
from 0 to 18 psi oy means of the set point
— 02
adjuster.
Control •
• Control Contact circuit 1{c(1(21 6. Check double indicator of the sub-panel for synchronous
circuit 3 Contact
output output
Control furl) operation. Join connections y and yA to one another
circuit II 4 _a)
1.10 20 21 }
'Tr ( 9 20 II (bridge), set manual/automatic switch to position "H"
and adjust the correcting pressure over the whole
220 V. 50 ch 220 V. 50 Cl. adjustment range from 0 to 18 psi by means of the
Fig. 22 manual correcting pressure adjuster.
Fig. 23
7. Check cross-bellows controller in accordance with
MB 6411
8. Controller station is ready for use.

If the pneumatic indicator contains a mechanical pointer
reset device for set point indication, the pointer
Mentor
log
position can be corrected during measurement by turning
unit II the screw on the left hand side of the - front frame of
.u(P tau
Memut- (KM.
Mg the instrument (front view).
=MI
Limit Limit
value value 4.15 Sub-panel station
maximum minimum
Check as described in section 4.14, items 1 to 8.
Fig. 24 Fig. 25
4.2 Electrical system
4.21 Inductive limit signal transmitter
1. Connect terminals 19, 20 and 21 in accordance with Fig.
22 or Fig.. 23 of the amnlifier relay (transistor relay)
to 220V + 15%, 45 to 60 c/s.
2. Adjust all contact pointers to the required values by
means of adjusting screws 1,2,3 and 4, Fig.24.
1 Limit value maximum) Measuring unit II
2 Limit value minimum)
3 Limit value maximum) Measuring unit I
4 Limit value minimum)
o,.,1, o fie) 10/13 • • •
4. Check the individual switching points at the contact
of the transistor relays in question and if necessary
connect the control leads correctly - a test lamp or
similar aid is necessary.
4 .22 Open contacts as creep or magnetic spring contacts
Carry out function check similar to section 4.21 items
2 to 4 at the terminals, Fig. 25, of the indicator.
Connect cable 5/Fig. 26 to 24V AC and check whether indi- m c
cator light (coloured ribbon) lights up. m
mm
MAINTENANCE
mIN
5.
n8.27 The pneumatic indicators are maintenance-free. '
•a
Fig. 26 m 111
6. EXCHANGING DAMAGED PARTS
s 9N
6.1 1 4 4x7 2 Indicator x 9N
" mm
6.11 Changing the front plate'
m
1. Slacken panel fixings and remove. , Z
O Z
m
2. Take instrument out of instrument panel. m gi
m MR
3. Bend fixing lugs 1/Fig. 27 and 4/Fig. - 28 of the plate r
r
inwards with a screwdriver so that the plate drops out.
w
N o t e: The glass window is not cemented in and can O hi
fall out.
4. Fit new plate and bend the 4 fixing lugs outwards with > ma
m
a screw driver. ▪ nr,
6.12 Changing the glass window
1. Remove front plate in accordance with 6.11 above..
2. Renew glass window.
3. Carry out assembly in accordance with
F141.28
0,0 1-.0(e) 11/1 • •
6.13 Changing the dial
1. Slacken and remove panel fixings.
2. Remove instrument from instrument panel.
3. Set all contact pointers to zero.
(on the left with horizontal, at the bottom with
vertical mounted units.)
4. Remove screws 3/Fig.28 and case cover 2 on both sides
of the instrument.
5. Remove the 4 securing rivets 1/Fig.29 with tweezers,
Fig. 29
withdraw the front frame forwards.
6. Slacken the two fixing screws of the dial.
7. Withdraw dial.
N o t e: Right hand first of all (top), then left
hand (bottom).
8. Insert new dial, press down in the centre and screw in
position.
9. Pass through pneumatic input signal of the measuring
unit in question from 0 to 18 psi and check the
reading with a comparitive instrument; if necessary
move dial slightly - a pressure reducer and pressure
gauge are necessary.
10. Refit front frame and secure with securing rivets
1/Fig. 29.
11. Fit both case covers 2/Fig. 28 and screw in position.

6.21 Changing glass window
1. Slacken and remove panel fixings.
2. Remove instrument from instrument panel.
3. Remove screws 1/Fig. 30 and if necessary insulating
Fig. 30 strip over joint 2.
•
2 4. Remove back panel together with measuring unit.
5. Undo four, countersunk screws - behind the fixing
ridge.
6. Remove damaged glass window and all splinters.
7. Smear the edges of the new glass window on one side
with UHU-PLUS or a similar multi-component adhesive
and refit - the glass window is cemented into the
front frame.
8. Tighten the four countersunk screws.
N o t e: Eccentric washers must rest on the glass
window.
9• Reinsert back panel together with measuring unit and
secure screws 1/Fig. 30.
10. Refit sealing strip.
6.22 Changing the dial
Fig. 31
1. Proceed as in section 6.21, items 1 to 4.
2. Undo screws on the plates - four screws.
3• Renew dial.
4. Proceed as in section 6.13, item 9•
5• Reinsert measuring unit together with back panel and
secure with screws 1/Fig. 30.
6. Refit sealing strip again.
6.31 Changing the indicator light

1. Ribbon type indicator remains fitted in instrument
panel.
2. Unscrew screws 2 and 4/Fig. 31 -'captive screws.
3. Slacken screw-in union 3/Fig. 31.
4. Catch hold of case with both hands and pull to the
rear so that the tubular lamp 1/Fig.32 is accessible.
5. Change tubular lamp.
6. Reassemble in reverse order.
7. SPARE PARTS
If necessary please send for Spare Parts Lists.
Fig. 32
I a 9-1, 44-0(e) •
TRANSISTOR RELAY WITH REVERSIBLE DIRECTION OF ACTION
(Supplement)
The direction of action of the UR/Ex transistor relay

can be changed over from open circuit to closed circuit
operation.
Type of operation Control circuit Relay

Open circuit is
operation —E .--.
t 1----. r43—V
undamped , dropped
out
.4i 1
Initiator t..._. 4)-1+ •
t atraccted
damped
4a
de_..\ .
Closed Circuit kt___
operation ._2
.__....
Initiator t ' dropped
undamped out
-IE ------..
Initiator
damped ' attracted
The relay should be connected in accordance with Fig. 33

and the connection arrangement on page 11.
Open circuit
operation-- —
Closed circuit
i 6 t e 9 operation
Control Contact
Fig.33 circuit 12 output
L 19 20
T•77-
220 V. 50 c/a
The control circuit is intrinsically safe ExiG5, PTB No.III

B/E - 14 360 S.
The relay is maintenance free.

GHIA- IBUTEHOIFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT .......
M.TM.K .._.4.131an
9.9.6.01
..,
..1
Pneumatic square Relais pneumatique a Pneumatisches

root extractor and extraction de racine Radizierrelais und a.
pneumatic function Emetteur pneumatique pneumatischer
,,
generator de fonction - — Funktionsgeber
Application - Application . Anwendung

For square root extraction of Pour extraire la racine des signaux Zum Radizieren pneumatischer Signals
pneumatic signal from differential pneumatiques des transducteurs de von Wirkdruck- und Stauscheiben-
pressure and orifice plate transmitter mesure a pression effective et a disque MeBumformer bzw. zur Bildung einer
or to perform any required constant de retenne et pour constituer une beliebigen stetigen Funktion.
constant function function quelconque continue.
Principle Principe Prinzip

•
Force motion balance ' Comparaison de deplacement de forces. Weg-Kraftvergleich
This instrument consists of pneumatic Pour les operations de calcul, Das Gerat enthalt Mr die Rechenoperation
actuator with a rotating shaft on which l'appareil comporte un mecanisme einen pneumatischen MeBantrieb als
a cam is mounted to give square root pneurnatique de mesure servant d'indi- radizierenden Funktionsgeber, dessen
output function. A corresponding cateur de fonction, et dont Tangle radizierter Drehwinkelausgang spielfrei
cam follower converts, by controlling de rotation extrait sera palpe sans abgetastet Wird und einen pneumatischen
an amplifier, the output function jeu afin de commander un amplificateur Verstarker steuert.
into a pneumatic signal. pneumatique:
Special Features Particularites Besonderheiten

Maximum reliability Securite de fonctionnement GroBe Betriebssicherheit
High transmission accuracy Exactitude de transmission Hohe Obertragungsgenauigkeit
Robust construction and function Robustesse du corps et des fonctions Robust in Aufbau und Funktion:
Suitable for field mounting Approprie pour montage exterieur Fur AuBenmontage geeignet
Can be used as function generator Utilisable comme indicateur de fonction Als Funktionsgeber fiir beliebige,
for any required continuous (cam plate) a une fonction quelconque et constante stetige Funktionen verwend bar (Kurvenscheibe:
Low air consumption (came) Geringer Energiebedarf
High air output Faible consommation Hohe Luftleistung
Rendement debit d'air
'
-11
..-
,--
•• . .
...m.
02
4-
..,
a,--c,:s.:Az- #. :,-, DT Typenblatt 6191600

12.71
No 3062
• GHH
Technische Daten
BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STESKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT'
Blatt
Eingangssignal 0,2 bis 1 bard bzw. 3- bis 15 psi Ansprechschwelle .5_ gel mbar
Ausgangssignal 0,2 bis 1 bar bzw. 3 bis 15 psi TemperatureinfluB eo,03%/grd
Zuluttdruck 1,4 ±0,1 bar Zul.Umgebungstemperatur — ZQ bis + 70 °C
Anschlasse Schneidringverschraubung 6x1mm Gehause :
NPT 1/8" Form P DIN 19 212 Werkstoff Al -Gul3
Eigenluftverbrauch z. 200 In/h Lackierung grau.
Luftleistung z. 2000 In/h Schutzart IP 54-4
Linearitatsabweichung 0,5% ab 10% Ausgang Montageart Wandaufbau, AnschlUsse unten
Hysterese 0,5% ab 10% Ausgang Gewicht 2,8 kg 44
HilfenergieeinfluB 0,1 %/0,1 bar
Caracteristiques techniques
Signal d'entree 0,2 a 1 barl), 3 a 15 psi Seuil de reponse 5 0,4 mbar
Signal de sortie 0,2 a 1 bar, 3 a 15 psi Influence de la
•
Air auxiliaire 1,4 ±0,1bar temperature 5 0,03 %/degre
Raccords bague biconique Temperature ambiante
pour tube 6 x 1mm Forme R DIN 19212 admissible — 20 à +7 C
Consommation d'air 200 In/h Corps:
Debit d'air 2000 I /h materiau fonte
Ecart de linearite 5 0,5 % a partir de 10% de sortie pemture gris
Hysteresis 5 0,5 %a partir de 10 % de sortie protection IP 54
Dependance de pression Montage mural raccordements infeneurs
pression amont 0,1% a 0,1 bar Poids 2,8 kg
Technical specifitations
Input 0.2 to 1 bar or 3 to 15 psi Resolution sensitiviy S 0.4 mbar
Output 0.2 to 1 bar or 3 to 15 psi Temperature influence S 0.03 %/degree
Supply air 1.4 to 0.1 bar Permissible ambient
Connections with compression type 6x1mm fitting temperature —20 to +70 °C •
NPT 1/8" Form P DIN 19 212 Case:
Air consumption °.--• 200 In/h Material Cast Aluminium
Air output 2000 In/h Finish Grey
Nonlinearity 5 0.5% above 10% output Degree of protection IP 54
Hysteresis S 0.5 % above 10% output Mounting Vertical, bottom connection
Supply dependency IS 0.1%/0.1 bar Weight 2.8 kg
• Projektierungshinweis
Am Ausgang ist eine Leitung von mindestens 1,5 m Lange vorzusehen.
Remarque pour ('installation

A la sortie prevoir une tuyauterie d'une longueur mini de1,5 m
Installation guideline
Provide a pipe at least 1,5 m by at the output
1) 1 bar = 1,0197 kp/cm2
J. C. ECKARDT AG • D-7000 Stuttgart 50 • Postfach 50 03 47 •
Telefon (0711) 5 02-1 • Telex 7 254 662
No 3062
GHH OUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
. M ..r.K.K . Brett
Dimension Croquls cote MaBzeichnungen
wil--- 146
10,5
roll-- 100 Ilso. 83
I
O
61
r • A i MEM
•
0
0.1
CM
0
w co
(D 0,1
CM /
• I
® ® ®
)
I
E5 MI wr II
11..
6,5 1,..,
11 WI
9f 8
21. 21 ...I-
0 Supply air ® .air auxiliaire ® Zuluft

0 A = Output (5) A = softie ® A = Ausgang
© E = Input © E = entrée © E = Eingang
•
ordering table Tableau de reference Bestelltabelle
•
Funktion Signalbereich Bestell-Nr Preis . Bemerkungen
Fonction Plage de signal No de reference Prixe Remarques
Function Signal range Order No. Price Remarks
0,2...1 bar 6191611

A (%] = \FEN
- 3...15 psi 6191612
0,2...1 bar 6191621

A [%]= allgem..f (E) [%]
3...15 psi 6191622
) As function generator for any desired function, ) Indicateur de fonction you toute fonction 1) Das Swat als Funationsgeber far beliebige.stet.ge
the unit is supplied with a camplate with continue, Fappareil contient une came a via ' Funktionen entfullt eine Kurvenscheibe mit Archl-
Archimedes' spiral and it is left to user himself d'Archimede. Cutilisateur pout modifier cede medischer Spirals. Dem Amender bteibt es selbit
to modify this cam to his requirements. came en fonction de ses besoins. Oberfassen, diese Kunienscheibe entsprechend den'
Forderungen abzuandern.
Ordering text Labelle dune commando :' 'Bestelltext

Pneumatic square root extractor/ Relais pneumatique a extraction de vacinei 'Pneumatisches Radizierrelais/
pneumatic function generator emetteui*, pneumatique de fonction pneumatischer Funktionsgeber
Order No 6191 No de conirnande 6191 Bestell-Nr 6191
\
for wall mounting: pour montage mural: kir Wandaufbau: •
cast aluminium case with mounting boitier en fonte d'aluminium avec angle Gehause aus Al-Gu6 mit Montagewinkel
angle _ de montage ;
i
input signal: 0,2 to1 bar/3 to 15 psi signal d'entree: 0,2 a 1 bar/3 a 15 psi Eingangssignal: 0,2 bis 1bar/3 bis 15 psi
output signal: 0,2 to1 bar/3 to 15 psi signal de sortie: 0,2 a 1 bar/3 a 15 psi Ausgangssignal: 0,2 bis 1bar/3 bis 15 psi
Connections NPT 1/8" with compression Raccords NPT 1/8" avec raccord Anschlusse NPT 1/8" mit Schneidringver-
No 3062 type fitting 6 mm biconique pour tube de'6 mm • schraubung_6 mm
GHH IIIIITENDIFFNLINGISHUTTE
• M TM K STERKRADE' AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT

Instructions
MB 6191 c engl.

Postfach 500347 Telefon (0711) 5021 Telex 72 3838
rf)
0
No 2N0
I 9 q90,3 21i1 ( .8 )
•
1. PURPOSE
a
The purpose of the multiplication relay is to multiply
a measurable variable by a correction factor dependent
Attention I on a second measurable variable.'
1 kp/cm2 • 0,070301 pat
Input, output and factor pressure
in signal pressure range 0.2 to 1 kp/cm2.
Ermeto joint (NPT 1/8" - GE 6LL) 2. APPLICATION

The multiplication relay can be used for ratio control,
cascade ratio control, disturbance-variable feed forward
Connection 1 to 7: and for cascade circuits; for circuit layout diagrams
NPT 1/8" thread with see control loop circui with the cross bellows controller
Ermeto joint for pipe 6 x 1
6440-21 to 32.
Connections:
2.1 Ratio control and cascade-ratio control
1 Supply air: 1.4 + 0.1 kp/cm2
3 Input E: 0.2 to 1 kp/ce
5 Output A: 0.2 to 1 kp/cm2 The purpose of ratio control is to control the flow in
7 Factor pressure:PF= 0.2 to 1 kp/cm2 a pipe so that it is always in a constant ratio to the
a V= 0.5 to'2 flow in another pipe. The flow in the first pipe is the
command variable w and that in the second the controlled
2 variable x. The command variable is for example set by
4 are not connected
6 hand or determined by a separate control loop. The flow
Symbol: in the first pipe is measured, the measured value trans-
Mathematical relationship:
formed into a pneumatic signal pressure and passed as in-
Supply air
Units E; A; PF (kp/cm2) put E to the multiplication relay. There, the measured
ni
Output: A = K + V (E - K) value is multiplied by a factor 1) corresponding to the
Ratio K = 0.2 Set at
A Cascade K = 0.6 the works required ratio, it being possible to set this factor by
means of the factor pressure PF. The output A of the re-
Multiplication factor:
lay is the reference input signal for the flow controller
V = 1/8 (1 + 15 PF)+(PF - 0.2)(1.0 PF) of the second pipe.
Limits: PF = 0.2 -40 V = 0.5 -(Fig.1)
Ratio control and cascade-ratio control require that
PF = 1.0 -0 V = 2.0
command variable and controlled variable are either both
Cat.No.: Ratio : 6 191 341 to

w
1) if for example the ratio — 1 = 1:2, thus the factor
—
Cascade : 6 191 342 x 2
is 2, because w . 2 = x
9,9.,03 3/1 1 (4) • • •
0 1
Often, however, the two variables have different measur-

ing ranges.
transmitted proportional (i.e in linear ratio) to the Example:
flow or both proportional to the differential pressure. The command variable can have a measuring range
With the two forms of transfer the graduations of the
of 0 - 6 m3/hour and the controlled variable a
setting scale for the multiplication factor are differ- measuring range from 0 - 10 m3/hour. The differen-
ent. The form of transfer, whether prportionate to flow
tial pressures are transformed into corresponding
or proportionate ;to differential pressure, should be
pneumatic unit signals.
taken into account in the instrumentation. (Fig.1)
The following relationship is valid for the measur-
ing range factor:
Before installing the instrument one should make sure M Measuring range final value of command variable
that the factor scale is suitable for the form of trans- Measuring range final value of controlled variable
fer of command and controlled variables in the system: 6 = 0.6
=-75
a) Factor Scale The following relationship is valid for the
Factor scales for flow proportional signal transfer flow factor:
of command variable and controlled variable are Flow of command variable
D = Flow of controlled variable = constant,
linear, factor scales for differential pressure
proportional signal transfer have approximately
thus, the constant ratio of the rates of flow of two pro-
square spacing.
duct pipes for a pipe with variable flow.
With identical measuring ranges D = V applies
b) Form of transfer A
o1, With different measuring ranges D = V . M applies
With flow proportional fOaffsfer.Amlution of the
The factor to be set at the command unit is calculated from
measured differential pressure value takes.44,4ace:
on the transmitter side. Mechanical evolution in-
struments are generally recognizable by the evolut-
ion cam. In cases of doubt it is advisable to mea-
and should be set according to application, flow proportional
sure the pressure characteristic of the pneumatic
or differential pressure proportional transfer.
signal pressure in relation to the differential ,
pressure with a manometer. Example:
A flow factor of 0 72 is required
2.2 Factor setting with ratio control and cascade-ratio V 0.72
- 1.2
0.6
control
In the case of flow proportional transfer the factor pressure
If the-measuring ranges for command and controlled variables 0.2 to 1 kp/cm2 is used with factors 0.5 - 2, with different-
are identical the multiplication factor is set directly at ial pressure proportional transfer with factors 0.7 - 1.4. If
the command unit (factor setting knob); transmitter, evolution is omitted the flow factor can only be
•or by means of
pressure reducers (see Fig.1). altered in the range 0.7 - 1.4. It is advisable to calibrate
,the indicator scale F = y67. for root values V7TT,371.
L/r,
9, 03 VII (4) • •
Flow proportional transfer Differential pressure pro-
Fig. 1 portional transfer without
with evolution Note:
evolution
Controlled Command Controlled

I Command variable It is advisable to select the measuring ranges so that
variable variable variable
they are not above the maximum rates of flow to be ex- •
m pected, as the accuracy of differential pressure measure-
LI
AN
Or, ment decreases in the lower section of,the measuring
'nP2
range; below 10% of the measuring range final value no
further measurement is possible.
As the example shows, it is also possible by selection
of a .suitable measuring range factor to achieve any de-
sired flow factor in spite of the limitation of the factor
which can be set to 0.5 2.
2.3 Disturbance - Variable Feed Forward System--

With the disturbance-variable feed forward system the
relay is used to alter the reference input or the actual
value of a controller in a particular ratio to the dis -
turbance variable.
2.4 Cascade Circuit

Here, the relay is used where a master controller has to
adjust the reference inputs of several auxiliary control
The controller will intervene until loops. It then serves to couple the individual auxiliary
the command variable corresponds to controllers more or less to the master controller. Coup-
the controlled variable, then the -A'''.
following applies: ling is selected by means of the multiplication factor.
2131 61:12
APS Fa • V.--
mo
•gr•-• V•
Pl
mvs Ps
Taking into account theyroportional
control conditions p.--,q2 or p...,(q)2 applies. 3. POSITION OF OPERATING POINT
ma
The instrument is supplied in two different forms with
which the catalogue numbers quoted in the title corres-
qi a '12 -
mgt mqg
r112V
m
ql
-E—
qggg
12 4°1.
roqi
y mqs
pond. The two forms differ in the location of the operat-
ing point which is determined by different adjustment of
the instrument. Subsequent re-adjustment is difficult and
ql
q2 'V
21
.2L p • differential pressure qL 223L
mq2 q • rate of flow qa V" mq2 cannot, therefore, be carried out on site.
tope measuringrange differential pressure
D • V • M mq• measuring range rate of flow D •VV1M
a •
M • measuring range factor •
D • flow factor
9. P6. 0 3 piti (i) •
The operating point is the point of intersection of
the characteristic curves for various multiplication 3.2 Model for cascade circuit
factors (Fig.2a to 4a,b). It is at the output pressure Cat.No.: 6 191 342, identified on case and packing with
which corresponds to the input signal E with signal 2
a K, operating point 0.6 kp/cm .
value zero - which must not correspond to the signal
pressure 0.2 kp/cm2. This zero value must always give If, however, E comes from a controller, the signal value
an output signal with the value zero, independent of zero (= deviation zero) will normally be at a signal pre-
the multiplication factor V set; because the equation: ssure of 0.6 kp/cm2. This will also apply to the output
of the multiplication relay. The previous equation will,
0 • V = 0 therefore, be as follows here:
is applicable for any value of V. To identify the operat- 0.6 kp/cm2 • V = 0.6 kp/cm2
ing point therefore it is always necessary to quote the
for all factors of V. All characteristic curves must there-
input value and the output value. In Figs. 2a and 3a the
fore intersect at,E = 0.6 kp/cm2, Figs.4a and 4b.
operating point is at E = 0.2 and A = 0.2 kp/cm2 ; in Fig.4a
where E = 0.6 and A = 0.6 kp/cm2. The horizontal displace-
ment of the operating point, that is to'say only the change 4. CHECKING THE SIGNAL PRESSURES WITH RATIO CONTROL AND
of E, corresponds to the change of the fundamental reference CASCADE RATIO CONTROL
input on the conventional circular chart controller and
universal controller with reference input adjustment. As already mentioned under 2.1, the input values of the
controller (actual value, reference input = A) must either
3.1 Model for ratio control, cascade-ratio control and both be flow proportional or both differential pressure
reference input addition proportional, i.e. both measured values must be square
Cat.No.:6 191 341, identified on case and packing with a root or not square root.
V, operating point 0.2 kp/cm2.
The relationship between input signal and output signal
If E now comes from a transducer or transmitter, the is shown in Fig.2a for flow proportional input signals
signal value 0 will be at a signal pressure of 0.2 kp/cm2 and in Fig.3a for differential pressure proportional in-
This will also apply to the output of the multiplication put signals. In each case it is possible to read off the
relay. The previous equation will, therefore, be as follows corresponding input pressure for an input value expressed
here: in percent of the final value and by means of the factor
selected to read off the output pressure and the output
0.2 kp/cm2 'V =`0.2 kp/cm2
value in percent of the final value.
for all factors of V. All characteristic curves must, there- See example of calculation.
fore, intersect at E = 0.2 kp/cm2 and A = 0.2 kp/cm2.
Figs. 2a and 3a.
9. 9. G. 03 • VI •
Example of calculation
Below,examples have been worked out for differential pressure
proportional and flow proportional transfer (Fig.1).
Fig.2a Ratio Control
Given that: Command variable:
Flow ql = 0 to 6 m 3/h 0 to 100% . ;
Output A
Controlled variable:3
Flow q2 = 0 tolOm /h 0 to 100%
Measuring range factor M = 0.6
Required flow factor 3 = 0.72
Operating point ql =4,2m /h = 70% of flow
Required: Input E and output A as well as factor pressure
P of the multiplication relay in kp/cm2 and %
fbr flow and differential pressure proportional
transfer.
Solution: The following relationship can be derived from
Fig.1 for the output, if the proportional cont-
rol factor p q2 is taken into account.
Flow Proportional Differential pressure proportional
q1 mg 1 ql
1
q2 - V • mq2 i-
2 = mq2 P InputE
D = V . M A D = VV". M
Factor to be set V,F

V = D = 0.72= 1.2 F = D = 0.72 = 1.2
M 0.6 M 57- .
•,,i ua, Fig.2b
Factor pressure PF to be found kp/cm ; % ' 4.f.b
2,4'IS:-4,Pig.3b: F = 1.2 P - 0.61 kp/cm2
Fig.2b: V = 1.2 PF = 0.49 kP/40.10 • F = 51.3% 1,9
= 378 '4, ,-,- •
='== T---1
Input E; Rate of flow ql = 70% = 7 m3/h 110"1---

0
Fig.2a: p,
-q = 70% Fig.3a: p--q 2 = 70% 12
is
Input E = 70% Input E = 49%
= 0.76 kp/cm2 = 0.59 kp/cm2
L.
37
Output A; Factor V; F = 1.2 D6- 0 )4'40 !O to )0I IGO IV)
of
Fig.2a: A = 70% . 1.2 = 84%2 Fig.3a: A = 70% . 1.2 as 7. CO .cs 0..iixi.t0 17.
= 0.87 kp/cm = 84% Flow
= 70% Differential
pressure a
= 0.76 kp/cm2
• AN.!1;.
Mi
9,96.0.3 VII (,e) •
Fig.3a Ratio Control
Different Pres ore Proportional Cascade control

•1-7"" " ' 'I --
GE
up m arammur o fkPl•rAtr
-10
' '
f4,1 HDifferent Preuure Proponional
NM ndmnprogemp
/
. ... .A
. . ,
Ike nunro popo o r-1

•
1.- 10
Q.0 • 4
' - , ,
•
.•-• ',' 7-
,... /:,.>.1
-- ..
gropopo0 4
1.0,01401cA
.. •
g.
, -,:4-"-
L.
/../'!--•
Erpr
wow'oppoormil
Im
--cig.
45
-r T.
....L.'
7-
,
,, , ,
Ap. t; •
40 2,,,,
-(1*
.1 lc
ca
$Q /1 '
12
0 Pb P39V WHI/al'A lil
-1- i: ' 77-7 ''.- 1• . ! 1 nim
2 10 LO 50 60 . - 0 90 ' ipmd 0
..
E
Fig.3b
Fig.4b
- "' - 7
e
'
.. i.:
-1.
) 1
5. READJUSTMENT OF OPERATING POINT
The operating point is set when supplied for horizontal
5.2 Adjustment for cascau.. circuit (Figs 4a and 5)
installation of the instrument. The operating point must
be readjusted slightly for any other installation posit- Displacement of Operating Point:
ion, this being done by means of the adjusting screw
accessible from outside. 1 0.6 0.6 0.6 Zero spring 2
2 0.6 1.0 0.6 Nozzle 1)
3 0.6 0.6 0.6 Zero spring 2
If, with the model ror cascade circuit, the operating
point of the controller (output) is exceptionally not set If necessary repeat 2 and 3; then
to 0.6 kp/cm2, it will be necessary to set the operating
Altering the characteristic curve gradient:
point of the multiplication relay (input) to the same value.
Here, it should be noted that the operating point (input 4 0.8 0.2 0.7 Zero spring 1 2)
5 0.8 1.0 1.0 Compensation
and output) cannot be set over 0.6 kp/cm2. In addition, bellows 3)
the operating point must be displaced if a multiplication 4) , then
relay set for ratio control is to be used for cascade Afterwards repeat 1 - 4
carry out 5.3
circuit or vice versa. In such cases proceed as follows:
Three operating pressure gauges, class 0.5,and 2 pressure

If when altering the factor pressure to 1 kp/cm2 the
reducers are necessary. output pressure increases the nozzle must be moved
Operations: away from the flapper and vice versa.
5.1 2) In the case of excessive output pressure increase
5.1 Adjustment for ratio control, cascade-ratio control and tension of zero spring 1, in the case of insufficient
output pressure reduce tension.
disturbance variable feed forward (Figs.2a, 3a and 5) 2
3) If after altering the factor pressure to 1 kp/cm the
output pressure is less than 1, the arm between the
Op, Set Should be: mounting of the balance beam and the compensation bellows
No. Input pressure 1 Input pressure 2 Output If not, should be made smaller. For this purpose the whole measur-
kp/cm2 kp/cm2 pressure reset ing section of the multiplier unit must be withdrawn.
kp/cm2 Fine adjustment of the arm is possible by turning a
Displacement of Operating Point: cam. If this is not sufficient the point of application
of the bellows in the slot must be shifted after slacken-
1 0.2 0.2 0.2 Zero spring 2 ing the large hexagon nut.
2 0.2 1.0 0.2 Nozzle 1)
3 0.2 0.2 0.2 Zero spring 2 4) Shifting of the operating point will not produce any
change in the characteristic curve gradient. On the other
If necessary repeat 2 and 3 then: hand changing the characteristic curve gradient will
also shift the operating point. Thus, operations 1 to 3
Altering the characteristic curve gradient: must be repeated when changing the characteristic curve
gradient:
4 0.6 0.2 0.4 Zero spring 1 2)
5 0.6 1.0 1.0 Compensation
1 bellows 3)
Afterwards repeat 1 - 4 4), then carry out 5.3
•
.j
Where no measuring range changeover is available one can
5.3' Checking Stop
only start up as quickly as possible in order to leave
The stop screw A should limit the travel of the balance the critical lower section of the measuring range as soon
beam in case of overload. It should be set so that there as possible. This is best done as follows:
is a gap of 0.5 mm in the 'operating position of the beam
between the screw and the abutting point of the beam. 7.2 Starting-up by hand
a) Set command unit of controller to "manual". If a further
6. INSTALLATION command unit is available for the multiplication relay
this should first of all be set to "manual".
Installation horizontal, if not reset operating point. b) Switch on supply air for multiplication relay and cont-
(Section 5). roller.
c) Open shut-off valve in the "command variable" product
Where output pipe shorter than 0.5 metres place 500 cc pipe and control valve in the "controlled variable"
product pipe wide and as quickly as possible so that
volume tank in the line. at the required flow factor the lesser of the two mea-
sured values reaches at least 20% of the measuring
range final value. For this purpose it will be necess-
7. START-UP WITH RATIO CONTROL AND CASCADE-RATIO CONTROL ary by means of test runs under supply pressures in
the product pipes as close as possible to operating
conditions to bring the system up to this rate of
7.1 Measuring Errors flow and to mark the position of the valves or the
regulating pressure reading.
Particular care should be exercised when starting up d) Now the two flow indicators should be observed. If
mixture control where the measured values are obtained the two are in approximately the correct proportion,
then the factor is correct and the command unit of
by the differential pressure method. Here, as is well the controller can be switched over to "automatic".
known, no further measurement is possible below 10% of
e) If a second command unit for the multiplication relay
the measuring range final value of the orifice and is fitted the reference input of the controller should
between 10 and 20% the measuring error is still con- be passed through this unit before changeover of the
first command unit so that "automatic" regulating
siderable. Below 20% therefore, it is practically im- pressure and "manual" regulating pressure correspond
possible to achieve the required ratio of the mixture approximately. Then, the first command unit is switched
onto "automatic" and the reference input of the.cont-
components with sufficient accuracy. In systems where roller passed through the second command unit so that
a temporary deviation is not acceptable it is advisable the required factor is obtained as accurately as
possible. Then, the second command unit should be
to install parallel to each restrictor a further one switched over to "automatic".
equivalent to 1/5 of the measuring range. The measur-
f) Observe regulating pressure indicator of the controller.
ing range will then be altered by the shut-off fittings As soon as the pointer comes to rest slowly open the
to the restrictor of the greater measuring range being manual valve of the "command variable" product pipe
and then in steps up to the required rate of flow. After
closed and those to the restrictor of the smaller measur- each step wait until the regulating pressure indicator
ing range being opened. At the same time the correspond- has come to rest again.
ing differential pressure lines should be shut off or It is advisable to set the time behaviour of the controller
opened. differently for start-up and operating condition.
9, P6.03 t (-8)
7.3 Automatic Start-up
With automatic start-up the "command variable" product error decreases rapidly with increasing measured value
pipe should be run up by hand and the "controlled variable" but at.10% flow can still be up to 3% and at 20% flow
product pipe be allowed &) followI automatically by means can still be up to 1.3%. For the reasons stated it is
of the controller. In doing this the bottom uncertain ' often undesirable to compensate for the control error
section of the measuring ranges will be run through fully especially since it is in addition to the measuring
automatically. During the time required for this adequate error described in point 7.1.
maintenance of the required factor will not be ensured
therefore. Automatic start-up will only be considered there- Compensation is carried out by lowering the operating
fore for high-speed control loops and only when temporary point of the multiplication relay which is normally at
deviation of the factor will not give rise to any risk. an output pressure of 0.2 kp/cm2 by a small amount. By
No form of guarantee can be assumed by the suppliers. this means the controller is deceived into assuming a
lower reference input so that the valve continues to close.
In addition to the measuring errors given under 7.1 a In detail, procedure is as follows:
further slight control error will occur on automatic start-
up, this however.. only having any effect in the bottom On initial start-up
section of the measuring range as a result of the quadratic a) Note operational setting of reset time Tn of the
function of the rate of flow. This error is caused by the controller.
socalled modulation range of the controller. The modulation b) Set T = 0 on controller. The controller will now
range is the smallest permanent proportional band obtained functRon like a 2-point controller.
when the controller is operated practically as a two-point c) Set manual/automatic switch to "A".
controller by setting the proportional band to zero and d) Close "command variable" shut-off valve.
Tn 'to zero. Input E at multiplication relay will then become
0.2 kp/cm2.
If the modulation range for example is approximately 1% Check with precision pressure gauge!
this will mean with the control loop built up a maximum!
e) Switch on supply air.
permanent deviation of the differential pressure of + 0.5%
that is to say + 0.005 times the measuring range. As the f) Set multiplication factor to operating value.
rate of flow is proportionate to the root values of the ,g) Adjust zero screw - with housing closed accessible from
differential pressure a maximum deviation of the rate of the narrow side of the instrument - until the rate of
flow of the controlled variable is also zero, i.e. the
flow of 0.005 - 0.007 = 7% will occur at t, e beginning of control valve closes. This will be the case at an out-
the scale. If now on shutting off the system the manual/ put pressure of approximately 0.19% kp/cm2. Check with
precision pressure gauge! The operating point after
automatic switches of the two command units are left at this adjustment will only be correct for the multiplicat-
"automatic" and only the shut-off valve in the "Command ion factor set under f). If - as for example in the case
of cascade-ratio control - the factor is set for operat-
variable" product pipe is closed, the "controlled variable" ing conditions, carry out adjustment in accordance with
control valve can remain open up to 7%. The system is then 5.1.
endangered insofar as additional shut-off of the "controlled a
h) Set Tn to operating value again.
variable" by means of the shut-off valve upstream can be
forgotten. In addition, there is the fact that the control
9, 9,3. 03 "Ai k) •
Flow Ratios
.Output A
-Flow
pa
In addition, at each start-up:
i) Open manual valve of "command variable" product pipe - • act—H-•
slowly and in steps. Wait after each step until the
regulating pressure indicator of the controller has
come to rest.
It is advisable to set the time behaviour of the controller
differently for start-up and operating condition.
Fig.5 0 'r 0 j 910 401,Flow (%)

Input
In the characteristic curve area it ii possible to

read off for each operating point of the command variable
Zero spring 2 the ratios to be set with the multiplication relay at a
Compenta ion bellows measuring range factor of M = 1.
Annular spring
Escape nozzle
A: Differential pressure proportional transfer
I(adjustable)
B: Flow proportional transfer
Input pressure E
U
Supply restriction
Zero spring 1 r400 "1? *or Supply air

Example
Command variable: ca = 50%

A: Differential pressure proportional
11111H, Output pressure A Output A variable from 35% to 70%
Factor pressure PF
Ratio 0.7 to 1.4
B: Flow proportional
Output B variable from- • 258 to-100%
Ratio 0.5,to .
• r . 4
The flow factors can'be Extended through various measuring
ranges as required by means of the formula:
A: D = V . M
B: 5 .m
Measuring range command variable
Measuring range controlled variable a
GHH
•
IBUTEHOFFNUNIRSHUTTE
EITEAKRADE AKTIENOES.ELL8CHAFT
M.Tm.K Blatt
6
Pneumatisches -Verzogerungsretais, asymmetrisch
9.9 ' ' "
Zeitkonstante stufentos einstettbar von 0 - 50 min.
Ausfiihrung: Al - Guf3, kir Wandmontage, Montagetage senkrecht.
49+02
fto
5.3 Mont agewinket
Funkionsschema:
CO
02)
. C••••
co
Zeitfunktion:
105
Ermeto GE 6—LL/N137 Ye.
• (ALL 6 DIN 3870 )

( LL 6 DIN 3 861)
Z- Zutuft. 1,4 kp/cm2 *

E=Eingang 0,2-1,0 kp/cm2
A - Ausgang... ..... -1,0 kp/cm2
Nichtlinearitat 1*/0
o Luftverbrauch im Gleichgewichts-
zustand 10 Nt/h
max. Luftabgabe ca. 3 000 Nt/h
Amk
CO *kann je nach Bedarf bis 6 kp/cm2

01 verwendet werden.
air Gewicht ca. 0,5 kg
r.Tm.K Blatt..
9.9.3.17 Description of the high-speed throttle valve assembly
Purpose
The purpose of the throttle valve assembly is to

manually vary the tail-gas inlet volume (particularly
on start-up and rundown) and to disconnect the tail-
gas expansion turbine from the network instantaneously
in case of danger.
Construction
The assembly consists of the following components:
1.the hydraulic actuator

2.the throttle valve drive
3.the intermediate piece
4.the throttle valve and
5.the foregoing three-port solenoid valve.
The attachment of a limit switch has been provided for.
Operation
The high-speed throttle valve assembly can be operated.

only if power oil at the required pressure isavailable
to the hydraulic actuator. If this is the case, the
handwheel spindle must be turned in clockwise as far as
it will go. This causes the build up of pressure under
a gate valve and only now the actuator is functionable.
0
z Turning out the spindle slowly and smoothly (anti-
clockwise) causes oil to flow under the power piston
which then follows the spindle upward. The throttle
valve now opens; it can be stopped at any given point.
- Turning in the spindle (clockwise) causes the throttle
ctn valve to move to closing position.
Cri
01
:
No 3062
GEM BUTEHILIFFNUNGSHUTTE
m.TM.K Blatt
The lifting movement is converted by the drive assembly

into a rotating movement which is transmitted via a
spindle in. the intermediate piece to the throttle valve.
The spindle in the intermediate piece is fitted with
two spherical jdints to take up any displacement due
to thermal stresses.
The throttle valve is supported axially and radially

in ball bearings. Sealing of the shaft passage openings
is by means of glands which are fitted with extraction
connections.
The throttle valve position is indicated on a scale by

a pointer (at the drive). On its opposite end the pointer
is fitted with a cam to operate - any limit switch
attached.
In case of any danger, the three-port solenoid valve,

initiated by a safety device in the machine set, blocks
:the oil feed to the hydraulic actuator and releases at
the same time the oil drain. The power oil under the
• power piston thus beComes pressureless and the spring

presses the piston downward. The throttle valve is now
closed.
z
cq
Cl
• Ol
cn
No 3062
GHH
M.TM.K
OUTEHUFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
9.9.1.05 Hydraulic Mechanism forq2uick-acting Cut-off Valve and

Non-return Bleeding Valve
•.;
The function of the hydraulic mechanism is
to rapidly close the quick-acting cut-off
valve and, in the case of bleeding turbine
the non-return bleeding valve in the event
of any one of the following irregularities
arising:
1.If the speed exceeds a safe maximum
------(tripping speed),
2.in the event of an excessive shaft dis-
placement (thrust bearing protection),
3.if the bearing oil pressure falls below
a safe minimum.,
. Provision can be made for a further protec-
tion as e.g.-against excessive bleeding
pressure' and back pressure.
, •, -i
The quick-acting cut-off valve, which is
also a:Start-up valve, must be capable of being retained 'in any
positi6zi between 'its "fully opened".and "fully closed" positions..
Mode of operation
The piston (1) is connected to the valve plate by means of the
coupliii(2) and the valve stem (3). The accompanying picture shoWs
the valve in opehed condition.
The valve can be opened and kept open only if there is sufficient
oil pressure in the feed. pipe (4). The oil pressure forces the
slide ValVe (Olageinst'the cap (6) of the.threaded spindle (7)
the siring (8) is under tension. When the edge (9).ofthe slide '
valvel(5) clears .thebores (10), the oil can flow down under the
piston (1) When the edge (11) of the slide valve:(5)olears the
:bores(10),: theoil below the piston (1) can flow intothe free
space above the piston and from there.io the oil tank., .•
The oil pressure below the piston (1) it in- balancer:With the ten-
sion of the spring-0.2 -
No 2960
GHH
M.TM.K
BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
Blatt
Closing by hand
Turn hand wheel (13) slightly to the right and the slide valve
(5) will be forced downwards. The edge (11) cleans the bores (10)
partially and part of the oil below the piston flows off, the
piston (1). and thus the valve plate move in the.clobing direction.
,The closing movement will continue until the;edge•(11) stops the
oil flow again.
Quick-acting cut-off
In the event of any one of the above irregularities arising, theiltt
will be no more pressure in the feed pipe (4). The spring (8)
forces the slide valve (5) down to its lowest position and the
edge {11) clears the bore (10)..cOmpletely. The spring (12) closes
the valve within a short time. The valve canna be opened again
until the threaded spindle (7) has been screwed down completely
and the pipe (4) is under pressure again. When the pressure in
the pipe (4) rises without the spindle (7) having been screwed
down, the oil can flow off through the inner bore of the slide
valve (5) into the space above the piston.
Opening the valve

Screw threaded spindle (7) down entirely and the cap (6):mrill.iest
on the sleeve (14).,.The pressure oil cannot flow off thrOUgh4he
inner bore of the slido valve . (5) and forces the latter againit
the cap (6). When screwing out the . spindle'(7), the slide valvi
(5) will follow. When the edge (9) clears the bore partially,
flows down under the piston. (1) and raises the latter until the
edge (9) stops the Oil flow again.
t"
No 2960 .
77 • •
varnethe #17, B•mprjaing P71 firm
Feder Lt-43. 21 men Bedort ocalesert and Aufzotr fur holben• 300: dYr. 615402
• • ISO: 615394
Tel/Wort 44 632876 ealtra9en! • • • 160: /1r. 6u3s75.
SozeLce it-A:. 14 tine/ trup,olungSrb3s. 11.-/14 6
be, Beclorf our:Oben /one Lt.-11•5)
,t.isfulvvng nach $ralte .b. HI
Nonnalaufithe ohne Lt.-0,74 tg. Olatiauf gecko-vs&
13,3 I- 702 - irentittrub.
Befriebstellung be; dia'ruek vete Ventitharl (1cingere SthliePzeit)
—1; Mutt, Max? ItC ••65 140
it6:5•2g•i 3f513
:7
:_11 tUng 3V 27 fif 2 139'oaseri fids1
• • • ••1 ; n•-• • '• • • • • Di( hhaV fosjs.3.0 I38! tPcprie. wod.
! flai-htww OR 142-3 137,ee~ro Li7157-7.r?2
! 2 .2 _.;_ef5 36 ehswel
t 1 .1 6ewindes/7)1, zu 9 35 Dhs;;;i sS A4/01
-lam 34 Durrli SS
508 1 ! 6t-p..:ffde stilt A'8'20 zu • I,
Vend/hub ! I knebe.'hen3s67ze 5fe0_________ fez 33 1'/4'/475 6S • !
--vend/hub • 10 _
1 ,ire,-!fisfil; 5:60 Dafsoka,z‘v!? 1 37 DhY1 5,...3-0.3fD-, • I
11 1 ISit'y•urrgs•ir7p 60.2 137 Dr,v471 St j • 1
2+ il'1,45etaYe ye.-...sr•?Plz.Sarrg 130 06.334 St • !

:1 1 16er.:::',e Vevscirrout5ungDSZ5 Z.9 Ob.134 1 Sr • 1
!4 41Sechsk . mate. e•fr.2 zu lS Id DAY034-: 4P • I
1 12'2 :Sy,f;n2r-rC/71"Cr..-.6S .41/1AVO Za 27 614 91486 • I
1614-14/inoS•se/r•oul..." Afia• 10 la ea 9//1 8G 1. ;2•.,;,1
‘,
////// j14%4:Stiffschroabe
r2-121.5..,-„,i.„„„.„...
.4112‘ Jo
7,
?.5 j/43'039 SD
[2#I,Dir4'933i sD
Fai.
was
167 beigeschiattenern 14vtla 65
Weitmed
1 I
19 37 27 36
5 (6)- -- 0,
Io
16141Sechek'sch•oube M16• 40
4:4! Habenring 100/106° • 5
I !111! DruthFeceef
30 t: Dna-erecter 40 giagg
I
11 trBuchse 69/4,o0, 187
ifif Spina's/ 27 • 206 Map L • • 18- OW C3T • QS
1 1 11 11 FlOnSth fOS/431 $ 37 !AIre9.363+ I • 1,0
fill Dethel XTO • 45 176 Ass3ePS St 34 18,0
Depiei 2900 45f ;15 46531011St37 wile
ei Scheibe 130/$f • RS 1Zweiteikkli7* -.0031311901 sap::
11111 treacle 400'• 28 113. Ats.4117 SISO
! 12
if
-:11:A;i:er r66.• ei1100..- 65
; I/ ...berurfsrmater00•• 32 • SW .50 I7.9
4 i4.
xi647
5874.5
1431551 • ' 45
5-0 WM
t5
:Bilchse ' 4110 .
2 32 15 23 38 17' 25,28 2$ 39 '7 21 22 1. ea 7.
5.'reiptick 5160 1-
1 • 49
1 eippircuy-irig
Al:
: il r
:1>VP 900K ‘SizWE'iterk9iL
I 17168
2444. 60
74'j3156
!
1-7-T-rTr"— 7 sh .eber
7(.7 495
..*"'nebex&LiChSe L 18H 2,0
Z: 1
1
:" `"
i 4k !h „
h17,,, qe :550
zW1, 3 Faeed.l S2
2 fii
I !its -F• O: •7t •
t!.
. 4t1 f11%7!7 !t! Ge: 37.451 .4
70 0,64°5993:1 4
1711s:sr sea ! Fig i 80
as; S.' 1.; • L; 5,11t .ttir,.5•5! Beron.4079 A 11d. 72-'16I. N.
• ik' ?..1;.'!<•;!!!!7 &me, ung 1 777 777"76"1"."7"w” &rag '770,1:7‘74
-
; 7! .41`:Z.4 z•!?%-fj .1 •. 1114-.ItP1:4 * 1air Evecpgivs).
; ;it"; 7.;. 04 P1 Leck6:3.r.chlu(3 vret

• „r-Ti-
i li.7e Nr Lesfer.9 1 19 Noma
1 +"4•• e/ isiee4I,
. 4 • • Zt..i1- *.=34.-3 4i.;77.1A':; r. 1963_ 15! •'!-
_ Gutehoffnungshaffe
-!:;tc-:-.7,4•3.,L.-. V eriiA" Q.1.4
i t•-:.13:76•1:t .6 r . ..:eg-t... ..t; Slwkrerk Anieverallschafl
72. 6.s-. f‘.2 -;
7-11 • 410
; g ,t! al
It! I 4L,froir Turn Blatt 2
0•011••••••••••••• 71
111:3-tiL;i4 1i13
oa .1 111
it : Schneilschkeventii Af515372.-
+b, 141;,•44
3. m
71,
11 :: •7, .14 ti
BS 11Ile `.we by., •
F •7 •-$1.7; ono-, •••• I 2./s/x1 dank
• • 3 2
- ry
1 .
5
SCHNiTT A -B
23,26 27 S 14 21
17 29 11 9.,10
Rehr 12.1
Alit Fiihrun3dstellta sowie das Ritzel

mit Hatykott tett abschmitreal
f 4 of
Intghatieranbau nach i SI 024 f. 04
bz w. nosh Z chng A.(r 1463. 4'844? 9009 .. :
(. 4,7 .:• •30:(,) Pos. f-11,1r-30
Spa& far Axf.ra`z 1-14. /fits-37# IA-0111m' 2 r0 or) Pos:171.1r1. .;1'
Sp dile /S37i (K0:6(n ,-, ,Zo .77") r'roS. 1- 14
t"=: •
wv, 5po.
ANIMA
OM.* 4. .14.-at I r. r I owl...* to ..r. 52-41'"
iCT
) I
ar. I
*Ara
LI Antrieb .t •
tr7 .‘241.- 6 3a •,
etr OrosselAiappe
f;^,-t=-•;rifIf:440.sr
I ___ • - -1
k
,
!
I
I/ NW400 ASA 150 lb. Rf 9 io

t
El
1.1
1 3
I
6 4
I i
NW 400 ASA 150 lb. Rf 500 257 "N.
837
Beim Zisammenbau be0C61P-171

I. Bel ausjeth'nener kaIbensiellang Drasselnapjce aril
ass[Vars.,-4
-9e-Azn2 To-
reof nachgeit,29e.9 fi
Z. RiurnIlerlaw' kege/shNIScher 01'3 an Dpassel - per kanrery (4 I 4/•• Gner• as, dern 48143
•••••I
k/aRpen)velle verbalren. 79/2 ;4
3. ironftaX'e ab be; Nub VIM 88 mm DrOSSCAACiCe
V011yr-43407e/ '5/.
4...Wm
-.
rte
56 •14A
Iii...._
.
itW 01-51-1 T.':114 FIMUNGINUM rf
111.•
Lfria ,L,
•01.1.101..414401
t
.,!7-11
Oar. man*
Zwischenshick zur
o. 125 M61.48431003 a
Cuno Drossel klappe
410024 X•
•••., 1,101 /1/0
12 4 3 2 _ 1
Far c5chrauben M8. >* beim Zu.s.-
&ctu Qefrohrt nach dern Arusrichten
des Endschalters.
Seseindehicher fur 32
Sehratiben M6x IE hein7
--.-- 20 20 Zus.-bcru gelashrt.
28 -
10
--••••""
Novax 3802944
(Zeichnungs-Nr
des Empfangers):
Typ:
Nr der Duch-I &chef. I
Mittaunt) Oche Pernmtrorl Art der Andes. ung Tag Name Gruppe oder Efatf-Nr: 418/417
We ksfoff: t.770 Tog I Name

Deurb. u. gee. 20,10,1 1rtg-weertweww.rt, rir7
, -1 H GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
rl
Gewichf in kg: Gepr. 1.1.1i AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
STERKRADE . 7;
41 1'7— ti<
Norm. A bt.-Kur.!rch.
Mod. Nr: MaBsiab
End..5-chalieranbaa
Verwerdungebervieh
Acf:rogetber)
1:I zurn.grasseildcr,ppenanirieb ivea.#847.1001
Mahe uhee 2---NrAf61.62#1.03
Tulin-our-
ErIttondth Gus:
ang. each Fir date ftchniteet luthelten wit ens all. Astee1t roe. Ohl.
&IC!, flit':
DIN 7168 unser' washings 2uttorreung hi is nice! ;Wane, 84 la rerIelleilli
mitts/ gen, Drinee rugenelich ro reueet, odor fate cet•leg1 ru reTwerfen. Ersetrl durch:
Bel Work:not. oroonlagoeimgcrelorelat
Or 48143
",
25 24 20 6
ME
AnslchtX' 1110lilt ICE
ONE I
Probedruck siehe SfacklIste
MID
mieo,
on
Andrrung
GUTINOIMUNONUM
frffm7k..
4.7s.A.
ow* •
1/01:1 12=
Drosselklappe M62.4841.1006
dm •
Cuno NW400 ASA 150IbRf
410024 •• dre• .4 or • M6248400020
ft em Emorerft-si
7
m. Tx. Blatt
9.9.3.46 Description of the blow-off valve assembly of the

tail-gas expansion turbine
Purpose
The purpose of the blow-off valve assembly is to direct

the tail-gas still generated in the plant subsequent to
shut-down of the compressor set to the exhaust-gas pipe
of. the tail-gas expansion turbine. If required by the
process, the blow-off valve can be opened at any time
• by the hand drive incorporated in the.actuator.
Construction
The assembly consists of the following components:
the actuator
2.the intermediate piece
3. the blow-off valve and
4.the foregoing three-port solenoid valve.
The attachment of a limit switch has been provided for.
Operation
The blow-off valve assembly can be operated only if

power oil and impulse oil at the required pressure is
available to the actuator. If this is the case, the
handwheel of the hand drive is to be turned in clock-
wise as far as it will go. This causes the build up
0 of a pressure within the impulse chamber, which over-
comes the force of the tension spring upon which the
control gate valve will move upward. Power oil is now
directed to under the power piston and moves the latter
with its piston rod upward against the force of the
LO opening spring.
ai
No 3062
GHH GUTEHOFFNLINGSFILITTE
STESKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.TMK..... Bien
This lifting movement is transmitted to the blow-off

valve, via a spindle in the intermediate piece, and
the blow-off valves closes.
The spindle in the intermediate piece is fitted with

two universal joints to take up any displacement due
to thermal stresses.
The blow-off valve fitted with a pre-stroke plug is

pressure balanced to the greatest possible extent. The
drive power to be applied is, therefore, relatively low.
An overdimensioned spring caters for pressing the main'
and the pre-stroke plugs against each other subsequent
to opening the main plug, in order to avoid "chattering"
or even "beating" of the blow-off valve. A welded-in
sprung diaphragm caters for the complete sealing of the
spindle passage opening at the over of the valve casing.
In case of any danger, the three-port solenoid valve,

initiated by a safety device in the machine set, blocks
the oil feed to the power piston of the actuator and
releases at the same time the oil drain. The power oil
under the power piston thus becomes pressureless and the
• opening spring of the actuator presses the piston rod

with the spindle and valve downward. The blow-off valve
is now fully open.
Subsequent to remedy of the fault in the machine set

en
and after the three-port solenoid valve has be reset
by a current impulse, the blow-off valve changes
0
automatically to closing position, provided, however,
iV
the handwheel of the actuator has been turned in
;7
completely; otherwise no pressure can build up under
the power piston and the valve cannot close automatically.
CD
rn
No 3062
GHH BUTEHOFFNUN6SHUTTE
•
Blatt
9.9.1.38 Description of the actuator for manual adjustment
The actuator has a pressure converter provided for

manual adjustment. The impulse space (1) at the
converter is connected by the transverse bore (3)
with the control-slide impulse space (4).
From a system with a constant pressure, oil not

influenced by the safety devices flows via a
throttle (6) and plate (7) into a pressureless space.
Plate (7) creates a certain control oil pressure
the impulse spaces (1), (3) and (4), under the
influence of its effective area and the force of the
spring (9), which is determined by the setting at the
handwheel (10).
With the handwheel (10) any desired impulse pressure

can be produced below the plate (7), in impulse space
(1), and thus any desired position of the power piston
within the existing range, can be set by changing the
force, of the spring (9). When the handwheel (10) is
turned anti-clockwise, the power piston is lowered,
when it is turned clockwise the power piston is raised.
When during operation the handwheel (10) is moved

upwards by turning it out - anti-clockwise - the spring
(9) is slackened and the flow-off cross section at
Plate (7) increases with the result that the control
Pressure in the impulse space (1) decreases. This.
0 reduced pressure acts, via the transverse bore (3), on
the control slide (5) in the impulse space (4); control
slide (5) is lifted by the adjusting spring (15),
co
Wo
(7)
No 3062
BUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
M..TM.K I Blatt..
which is a draw spring. The power oil flowing via

the connection (16) and the bore (17) to the space
below the power piston (12) can flow off via the
control edge of the control slide (5). The opening
spring (19), which can be assisted by a second spring
(20) if necessary, forces the piston rod downwards.
The return spring (21), slackened to the extent of the
travel of the power piston (18), moves the control
slide (5) back to its middle position, whereby the
control operation is completed.
When the handwheel (10) is turned in - clockwise -

the opposite adjusting effect is produced.
The switching unit (22) at the side of the actuator,

which is secured by the knurled nut (23), must remain
in its lead-sealed position "manual". When the
setting of the switching unit (22) is changed, the
entire actuator becomes inoperable. The unit is
only provided for future provision of automatic surge-
limit volume control or remote adjustment.
0
rn
cv
No 3062
GHH
OE GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE STERKRADE
M.TM K • Aktiengesellschaft
Matt
•
Actuator for manual adjustment
IL) 4
•
17
(X)
(4")
AK V'
1.43;
rn
NO 3082
8.73
•fi
fr V.17 "t:' niber'l To r• it. . ,
=inP adad ,
r.
Ftte - Schinjw.R
-tatts, t • • - • • _ ' z,,- • ;li •klk
:=7 ' • !.• • atit cruzda

71i .s.-44s.*4"4.1i3A1 .` - ern e - k-,0„417MINCetifST4A
. . C,
Strom ictuitan(F .7'.77"7"" • •
• VA'
.•
-174
h Schema aberarb eitet 20.793

9 Elektrizsche Axialimefiv. eirigetr 4.9273
f Axtcdrnell•orrochtung evifernt 29.4.73
,.f.r • scot
e 'age if Ku..dannr.e q.rc 4 se~oret---Af444 i
Sch genet ci rarbglitte/ Yff. Y.7

ileenetenfritypsrh emeroc'e / mzek des
6 Schema u45er ezrhedet . . • . • •t11
,".,-.4t-ttrIWT.er‘
••• . t_
a ehem a iriSer a 46 lief 7
ltr Om 8th. -Bodge ;
t3
eiffit
Y
Miami Nal* Iteamitiv. Art der Anderang Tag
Tleikstolf
•
1.972 Tag NW* • . ....„,..,:.,-,..
Iwo.v. pa. 114 ...1-e" GUTEHoFFNut46.91
_,. u
$ a4.-Lig• - ..., '-:'::...--
,-.. -
Gewlcht in:Ag: .Geer. OHHST ERICRADE:AtiltOiSfiCiCHifi
Nom
, ;•,‘
Maggfib
41
1
we,
• v , iiinkfprkedzerner
• 1.V6.
..: • .
"'v l'eg.
extshosalatirea.;°-
410020/29
ler fothelsolw Chlorinit ttettaArt otir ens Ws Reda or OW wen &Forfar:
"WNW hitistmaty 6t re alcb1 gesleffei, it Stititifilailtig Veto
apistgaeli es stocky ait, gond toltfoct sit ttinitylla aiete ettinth # - '44,S45;:f047 4
. '27 -r -4 •J'111•$ .1:.!•• '1 • Sol

r.•-• •
gb.
.
cl AI* 17 27 • 7. "1,11, V t 647
1
I
Apparate-u. HiIkaggregate Lisle ,2/E,;°,,acre,,,,:a elektr.Daten la.earig e Druck
pressure
Temperatur
temqprolix
-.-
sw 4nschlasse
•-.. connecti6n
: Spann u ng-Frequenz
--1 l
Aus lequngstempera f.
•
Allgemeine Bernerkungen - genera/ remark s t... u
Z
Abn ahme beh arde

n
v oltage - frequent'
.*-i f illstandsdru ck
k.
Ausleg ungsdruck
system
-75
Kabelans c hlu 8
0
FOr derma n ge
L..
ca b le connection
Q; Q.;
opera/. pressure
'I
Zr; Far der dr uck

c:11 Q. ')
to;
,Schu fzar f
0
ill
E -C"
test
c •-..
Wer ksto ff
CU ZI•
pr o te cti ve
t
Aci Str
Z
tle
-....0 . cN.0, -t,4, , 7-- - --
-.... -a .z•)- t
quanti ty
t_ cl.)
E intri ft
.43 I -4-. ... C -C
•1-:cL,•-
ou
Q) --- -.- ..,...
%--i ...•,.
---., ..c 4, t., ki Zu ..
Inha It
Z.
yo/w -nen
Imai&r/C1/
c• 4.... CI' 1:, • l..1 t:I
L'
iii -- :t5 . C -Z-11 --• .ti .3.
inlet
j 0 '''- 1a L.
ahri - Air Kunden-.Nr Bezelchnung Leer Fabrdra,
•••...I P az a ..9,- Li- b LZ -c. .ct 8 --; li, k ,.
- •?,
i-i-
,
o., Q.,
'zC Q' C13 tD 1 CO
.1 Pa Pe
ti
6!-IN - N ' • A•rchaserllb designation suppler manu - Type m, Nw/N0
5,4
r
2
fOOLffer AW n
inin . h oto ala 'C "'C in kp
. , , \_ Norm Norm
1
1
1
^..,
T8200.1 Wank 01101 GHH /460.8200.
1119. S000 St 23C0
/
.
GHH I "ASA /" ASA
F8208.1 Dampfheizung Kelsktr Norm - ' *
..?00 lbs 30045S
/ J
1 0 0/16 8 0 /16
P.9310.1 01pconpe 6Hrl NeidiV NS /175 23 / 1800 70 0 42 12 12 60 /00 GG
OW 0/N
•
1
Genera( (enflame
, P48310.1 E.- Motor Kur-A& GElectrta .36511 , 1
'
, /
p8310.2 23 - 100/16 8046
3 Olpumpe Gi4k Neidig NS/ 175 1800 700 42 12 12. 60 (00 GG
OW ON
20 - 2"AsA 8' A.SA

Tit 8.325. Turbine GNii HIM Bt. 4150 27 7 1800
ale!
4,5 320
900 lbs 150 /b.s
• 1
!„., .
/ .
westing - /006- O/ / 600 36 /2 /2 60 45 /12:7 rt.; y AIR,4- -.?" ASA ,.?" ASA
1j Coo 8610.1-2 ekkihier GHH house 2 wey WCISJ F.4 .500 30 5 10 30 35 100 26,4
biciNe. 3 'MAL j. el-gAg
rA l
•
J
Ball 0- 100/AS /00,7./6
Fi .8430. t-e
•
olfdier GtfH & -
larch
161-I // 750 45 /2 /2 45 /00 rci r Nere caw t74.1
eS Ni .7ron blotter
/ -
/
7 ..-
17 .
' •
•
/ i
20
-
Art o'er Anderung Z Arl • der Anderung Munden-Nr - chenb Job Ns rag
13 H . Aultr. Nr.
oh Ale
en,-..-c
u- war i -
4/0028
•
a erneuert 20.7 1: pd 20.7. it GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE fun°

11. b e STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
tin41 IC e M63.9030. 124S. 0/ et
C I Able/N/1Q —
3inenntiA
. .
Armatureniisle list of fittings Bet riebs da ten

operating values
Regelarmaturen
control fittings
Bernerkungen
. remarks
Armajurenort - type of fithhigs Anfrieb ,- drive Atrnlinie cn, .
c ?)
fr eier Silz9u erxhn4cry,

u
&rot InicksChiogren1i1 non - return-valve V Reqelyenlil regulating valve h Handrad hand wheel coracle- t: l.,
'-?.
t1Dasenrackschlaor a sigh! glas 0 istics f.j
Auslegun9scfru cka lc:i

non -return-valve Schauglas hf Flur_sciule floor moullect cotton, 6)
I
GI
mm
C=-11 durchb.RuckschtY non- return-valve trondenstopf steam trap hk tre flenracl chain wheel . C •-.
Dore,' flu Ome d ium

-,." ---
N na c 8
Hub
4. 1 /4_,
fr ee port area
i>1 Absperryentil staight-way-valve FE -1 Blende diaphragm 0 cilhydraulisch oil herfraulical& (twen . 0
E kj .3 •It1/,
42
Absperreaveafil angle valve -1-- Drasselflonsch throlile flange p pneumafisch pneurnalicaily driven
E
. %.)
---cn
° i,.,-
-4 4-
:;., .(Z)
Dreiwegeventil three- way-valve Dir.* Sic-herh.-Edrventil e elek frisch elektricatly driven .....,_ •-. c to 1._
, -lc t... o
,, ctt 't, 0
Oil Schieber slide valve ex .., .., -c,
.. cz. •-•-
oil Sicherhellsvenfil safety valve 4i 'ZS
-c
Me di um
8,
-- .... .. 1 /.4 .
q, ,t, c,..
stro ke
.- 1/4., 1 c .....?
c,,',-„' k, --, ,,,
linear
Art der Q. 1/,
4 .4,
GHH - Nr. Ku nd en - Nr. k-mat. ripe Hersteller Lei fungi° nichtu 8 ifig;e- Antneb Werloloff material Lielerer o
ca i 1 E (i
L zz.- 4-, S .--uC-
77D
art off Gehause -5-ftz '' 8 0 ti is!! b, ,::::, ,.,
wily - N 2. PurchaserNs2 fillina type manufacturer NW pOe connections length dr Ye casing port 511 l e
_ ____, __
1
1
I F8105.1 -1>el Ms/3300 40 200 f
2 F8v05.e 1)64112m/ 3300 20 160 2
3 F8105.3 1).4d ON 3300 20 150 3
4- P8105.6 Nei 01n/3216 125 180 685 /2 4
S F8t05.5. I>4ed0im3er6 /25 180 685 to .5
6 Fe105. 6 DiN.3300 100 350 685 12
i 6
7 F81a5. 7 _li oIN.3 100 350 685 /2 7
8 Fe105.8 Regelkert 4-1- E>C3 DiN.7.V0 ' 25 150
Testae, vorr. 8
9 F.9105. 9 r>ei rov.9.100 50 160 9
to
, - 10
1/
II
12 .
Q
/3 e
13
14 F8/05. 14 pd is 130 4
...
/5 F8105, ZS Pa 15 /30
_ 15
F8105. /6 c:wc:i t5 N0I6 011v2633 130 h 06 Niro OHM rurbinendl 60 12 6
rt F8/05. /7 1><I /5 130 4 -5°E bei 50°C 17
:8 1
19
79 F8I05.22 15 130 1
1><1 - : - 19
20 F$/OS. 23 I><1 01N3300 15 /30 20
2/ F8 ,05.24 7
1><1 /5 130 2,
22 P8/05.25 ' 1><I 25 1 60 -
22
23 F8105.26 H
>< 25 160 23
- _
24 P8105.27 1>< 25 /60 2z
25 F810.4. 28 It. ill • 25 160 25
26 e8r05.29 IP- ill 15 /30 ) 26
27 . •
. 27
28
28
2.9 F6105.45 EMI RK 44 6estra 100 60 0. 8038 685 12 29
30 F8105.46 - lit-M_I RK 44 Gestra . 100 60 0.8038 685 /2 39
31 ' 31
..
32
L
33 PCY8800.1 326' Samson 50 230 460 Pordrurf 10 ofd Nochdrucl3o/o733
I I
34 PCP8310.1 .Fcsolt6-50 G! co SO 130 - 10 -
o 830 a 60 16 Yordruck Haiti Noche/ruck Iota 3t
35 . •
35
36 PS, 8890., 5errashauerg. tton FE50A-50 alyco 50 700 f°4-3 60 /6 rorcfruck /2a 1ij NachdruckIota 36
37 RSV 8890.2 " th.„„FE.50h6- so GI yCO SO • 700 li 60 /6 Vordrurf 12 at Nacho'ruck /0,17 37
-
.39 .
I I •
Art der Anderuns i Tag, Name , /1r1 der Anderung Tol,Name Ifunde - clients job. Ala Tag A>' e Aufer. Nr.
Job-NA 410 OM
a ge,;17clert 20.7. 11. d 20.7.4 GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE Nere44101
code WO! Cuno
b e t1.7M.1( STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
C _ f A bleilung . t163. 9030. tz45. II a
Betriebsd a ten Bemeris ungen
Armaturenlisie list of fi It ings •
operating values control frllmgs remarks
Armaturenort - iype of filling) Anfrieb - drive
duudr undo.Japaisf unujio

2
caP a c itY
cm
ass Riickschlagvenfil non -return-valve ce Re•elvenlil r- • ulatin. valve h Handrad hand wheel corarte-
mil pas
' enriickschlogr. tnon -relurn-valve 0 Schouglas sight glas hf
Silzp erschndt
.cunipaw only (p .m°
-
11 =11- durchb.RikkschIe. non - return-valve 0 Kondensfopf steam trap hk etlenrad ( Chan wheel y
area
t< Absperrverdil staighl -way-valve fE -1 Blende diaphragm 0 y i
°C
IImin.
•
iNTIAbsperreckverdil angle valve / Promelf !much - lhro/lle flange p I pneumafica lydriven IZ'l
/6 4,
9141 Dreiwegeventil three; way- valve t- kherh -Eckvenfil e C'ai
por e
remperaiur
Cil Schieber slide valve °- ta•teo Weep' lyemfvellt •rd-lbp ex i o"
aJn riwo
e,
Luni pak
ck Swherheilsventil [safely valve c
..4 Ni
frei er
12)Lci,
J/711-10
Meng e
free
Art der Bau- t.) -'-..
GHH - Nr. Kunden- Nr. , mat. ryye Hersteller Lei tun.s a nschluO lange - s,
.,,, art on i 2. ‘.' a
-C. 6)
GHH - N. Purchaserjr- Latin, type manufacturer pipe connections WI
• driveE , orl ••
1""86 =0-6.713 GHN IMY 20 ND16 40 - St 42 GHH 76rti. at
2 MOM - = e• v GHH NW 20. ND16 40 - St 42 GI+, p e 2
3 E8611.3 - = - Renk 60 - SI-42 GHH " ft 3
4
5 EIMIEN
t
E 8611.4
Millial
l
-
-
-
E
=0b713 GHH
Ob713 GHH
- RenkNW 20 ND16
40
tO
60 -
-
-
Sf42
St 42
SE 42
GHH
GI-H
GHN
p
o
ft
0
4
a
4
5
6
GHH ft ft ,
7 E 8611. 7 Ob713 GHHNW 70NDIG 40 - St 42
6718 - Ob 713 GI* MN 20 ND1G 40 - St 42 GHH a a 8
9 9
10 8615.1 10j] - GHH 57x2 ,9 . 00 St 37 GHH if 10
'1 - 8615.2 0 GHH57x2.9 100 . 5137 GHH " ft fl
/2 8675.3 GI-1-1 57x 2.9 100 St37 GHH ft ft .
12
'3 (9615 4 GHH 57x 2.9 100 St37 GHH a 0 13
'4 FG 8615.5 - GHH 57x 2.9 100 S1-37 GHH 41 it
1111 14
15 FG 8615.6 -(.) - GNI 57x 2:9 100 S1-37 GHH o 0- Ls
:. FG 8615.7 - (-) - GI-H • 57x 2,9 100 S1:37 - GHH ft ft MI
FG 8615.8 - R611 - GHH 57x2:9 100 .51•37 GHH 0 0 17
.3 FG 8615..9 C.) GHH 57x 2.9 100 --S7-37 GHH ft ft '8

• FG 861510 - 101 - GHH 57 x 2 9 100 St37 GHH ft ft /9
-, FG 8615.11 CO) - GHH 57x 2:9 100 .5E37 GHH ft ft 1 20
22 F8605.1 D.<3 DI 3300 KSB NW 80 AD16 310 h GS Niro GHH P P 22

.3 8605.2 1):.<1 o 3300 KSB IVWEIJ D16 310 h GS Niro GHH ft ft 23
24
o il
25 8605.3 0-.":
.. -- • < < KSB NW80 ND16 10 4541Niro l 25
26 • tyQ •N 3300 •KSB AlW8OAD16 310 ' 4541Niro l

:17 8605.5 - p4 UN3300 ICSB NW80 ND16 310 4541NiroGI-I-I 0 " 27
23 8605.6 1><I b Klein Cdf. , I Rohr 300 Ermeto NiroGHH o o 28
33 F 288Q1 "Mil ERHARD ASA 3211 1501b 470 -- 4541 NiroGHH Luftli .Ni ...t 30
3, 2880.2 350 '' 4541 GHH - 4 31
(2f1 5g0 ERHARD ASA 20 "150Ib N1.10
1 •
.3? -8523.1 >4 VDH b Klei n.Cdt. fRohr150 Ermeto 110 h 1CrNiTi Niro GHN pu 33
8523.2 ><VDH b leinDdl IRotr150 Ermeto 110 h 0CrNili Niro GHH _?4
34 -
35 8523.3 VDH b Klein Ddl tRohr150 Ermeto 110 h 10CrNiTi Niro GHH
.3. 8523.4 oM41VDH b Klein Ddt tRohr150 Ermeto 110 h 100-NiTi Niro GI-1-1 ft a 36
37 37
ef
Art der Anderung Tag, Name 9 rail , ,y tire Nun • e - chenis jOb AM N. I I 4 0 28
b e M rilt 4(
A bleilun
b. OH GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT r
a0
ae I CUNO
I. I.
_
Armafurenlisfe if., of fi flings
Betriebsdaten
operating values
Regelarmaturen
control fillings
Bemerkungen
remarks
Zia,,
16•
i ii.t. ......
Closing spring
Armaturenort - type of fithilgs An/rieb - drive e),
2
CV
fr eier Silequerschniit crn

'z
hand wheel C.'
R
leall Riickschlogrentil non -return-valve t1 Revelventil . regulating valve h . Handrad
.
(l
;-,
hi Hui-saute .5 -
Dasenrackschloor non -retUrn-valve C3 SChOuglas sight _alas floor moulted column,
E C
Durc hflu 8bei wef t

I=4- durchb. RuCkschl. Y. non- return- valve 0 Kondenstopf steam trap hk ffellenrad chain wheel
.-- flo w coe ffici en t

r
S
fre e port orea

(>4 Atuperrverdi/ staighi-way-valve FE-I Blende diaphragm 0 (Why draulisch oil hydraulically dro;en 1." - • '''E t
(z5 ..
4,
gteichproren t 4
Absperreckventil angle valve -/- ,Drasselflansch Waffle flange p pneurnalisch pneumatically driven
E
three- way -valve Di
f tv--- sicherhsEckvenfil leleklricolly driven
E ()%
Dreiwegeventil e elek frisch
ISchltealeder
...., -4c ...
slide valve r SchootiWringer t3
014 Schieber I sf•e1n!r- ex
0.4 p.,..,,, kr.,,- r,:4,c_r „ :4-- c- Z' II
au f / zu
sicherheseenbi -safety valve .,
-cl. -4c
-c c g'
!,near
Art der Bau- u .., '=',1 '7 --,'-, g ti o
GHH - Ise-. Kunden- Nr. Arinot Type Hersteller Leitun_g.sanschlue range Antrieb . Werksloff material beterer ts- 13
.s._, c (1 1. .41- E
l •S
art a,: Gehause Silz 1.3 'c
GHH - N-, PurchaserN2 fatina type manufacturer port suppi.yel (5 < Z Ei Q 4 IS,'
Pipe connections length drive casing
_
) _vonons_-_-
t>=11DIV33CeKSB NW32 ND 16 180 h 4541 Niro GHH Soilmittel - - i
I F8523.5 -
2 F6523. 6 - c.4 p11V33:10 KSB NW32 ND16 180 4541 Niro G1-1-1 // 2
3 Fi 8523.7 12:1 - Samson NW32 MD16 180 4 541 - GHH it

3
4 4
s F8523.21 - tx:i DN3300 KSB NW15 W16 130 h 454/ Niro GHH ,, • 5
6 F8523.22 - I><1 ON 3336 KSB NW15 ND16 130 h 4541 Niro G1-1-1 4 6
1
7 F8523. 23 '. - pd DIN 3301 KSB 130 h 454/ Niro GHH 4 7
NW15 ND16
8 F8524. 24 r><:j DIN 3330 KSB .NW15 ND1G 130 h 4541 Niro G1-11-1 it . 8
9 'F6'524.25 t>.<1 DIN 333C KSB NW15 ND16 130 h 454/ Nirn GH-I 9 . 9
10 F8525.26 f>.(i 01\1330C KSB NW15 ND1G 130 h 4541 Niro GH-I it 10 1
Ii ft
/2 F8523.35 1><I VDH b Klein Ddf. fRohr306 Ermeto 140 h X10CrNiTi Niro GHH it 12
1
13 F8523.36 VDH b Klein Ddf. I Rohr 306 Ermoto . 140 h X10CrNiTi Niro GHH I, . ij
r'4 14
1
15 Fc9523.41 >4 Val 6 Klein Ddf fRohr 150 Ermeto 110 h /10CrNiTi Niro' GHH ti 5
,
!•6 F6523.42 t>4 VDH 6 Klein Ddf fRohr.150Ermeto .110 h Xl0CrNiTi Niro G1-19-1' - h 6
-". F8523.43 110 h. Y 10CrNiTi Niro GHH q 17

t>4 VDH b _Klein Ddf f.Rohr 15 alErmeto
18 F8523.44 1><1 VDH 6 Klein Ddf. tRahr 15 0 Ermeto 110 h )'100-NrTi Niro GHH ,, e
..3 e
r
2^ F 2852.1 tZt1 44,61. rent GHH ASA 2411 150 lb 900 0 St37 NM GHH , Cuff 20
2. F 2862.1 I.<3 iintbI,VenrGHH ASA 12'l 150 lb 650 0 454/ N440 GHH ' NO Gas ..,./
4- r
22 F 4852 ,1 , 1:::1 Umbl.Yeni- GHH ASA 12" 150 Lb 650 0 4541 NIRO GHH NO Gas _ a'
23 F4841,1 .....fe kag-kLaaa, GHH ASA 16" 150Lb 400 0 454/ NIRO GHH NO Gas 23'
t. 24
24
25 251
16 26
27 27
-,-
28 • ea
• .-
2.9 ' 23
30 30,
3! ' .91
.12 • 3?
•
33 • 33
34 . 34 i
35 . . _ - 35
.36 36
37 -77
35, 38
Kunde - chen t j j ab . vs: Tay
Aufir -Kb-
Art der Anderung Togs Name . Art der Ancierung Tao, Name Job-No 410028
'a
b
C _
e
I
. ti i
Ableilunq
.
,.,,,
,, 9.11.
1972 / . GH GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE
SIERKRADE AKTIENOESELLSC Hj T
)
(ernworj
CUNO
0301245. 3
.1.
Geroie-iSte list of Instruments tontroGng one locleing
9dluttare 142.--.--
. faro& Plouritentrl9O Schaller*lp Ma" • *Iret 9/4m9sort
colour of kap d" r wee *dem/
,4119erneine Semiotic-anger, Protect ive SYSIetra d
baring
e eleletristh eleciricalr 94;0 Veen "Did' TurWne f'il€P r. 14"-**illifs- IA't iks#4414 g ("4"9. 41".11"4" etectricat
r4
general remarks ep- T orouvaark.elee mob ova device e elakftisa, 1
ex er.-gesch. expt. proof rot tee?' 01 P ireeunfafisell Pneunnallc •
Alaltjl iellIII7 9 l/P7 Ilekv? es eigensieher 4.... 4/6 -k
. treiltwitile G al -... `^ 0 --
•••• a .S.
a 3., :3
I. a 0 614 drew/. elf hydr.
.. eh
seek. yellew Sr' ... 0 4 ...... ..,..- 2 ,-
..fleuerspahhung; ge0 1/ d'a,
z oP sch
u
II -2 .s a 11 e n.." $. 6,-
, e ., ,s. 1. -
1
4 .$t$Z$Z$1 t) ...
$
lc t
h Hand manual
P40 AGOVII. z :.:.: :a -1!
Iron/aVe. : Wechsler
kinfox/schoining
"Wei/ COPP* 1:11
-,-,i.,1- k ,
it lit 4 la
... s.
MeAlstalle tirthouor , litetenint Great txatilion ,,
... .1.- ,S. a, .. aa % a Bemerkungen lb b
measuring point tocat1.9(7 1!„..E _supplier instrument Kind of conivel mar. men * ...-iz ti , L'kr `4-*' zit' le % 4 lk.
... 4 gi,
pos./11-. Pos.Alr. Beeeichnung
.rt! ••& es
ae. ,g Pobrikv I Type rfestereide Elefriensaverl AnschlviS SekarbeelvenjoScIatelp. $ 45 6 6 ---
,,, h . ft; i .t a ..4 a
cyr i u 0 lt
_ u. .... ; t .4 4ilk 1.1 m •-•t C remarks
0 Q.,
,a, 4.
'.
.1 manage,' range operat. value connection ili•OV‘ e l* "- t'- a•-3-- v•!; t. 4 tt
designation 00 9 3 iliP "10 ...., o ‘,1,-,-; t) ti 0 051101)0 613 *at to
4112"36 't ' 4 ,
1 TE nosh tlIkiiker Pt -foe
9851.1 lien or/coder X 6//I Jon,,. -Jtair." -ksv°C geJ °C .1.$1
1"‹90nin X--10 a._Ali Tr Ie.
9 t•- Th• uch4
TE nogley.-K•rd, Tauchlrefr . 14' 10 ,rn/y,
.. ii II II
St. r- 1-- ‘ 00 °C kY31' / 9 f770 ea_b'e_t_cbar prli__) Apdt r8ii_t6rePPIZI-. l/elsc4,
S TE Ta/g-Illuthi-ki . i) TaatheleAr IV pron.,
ti - ii 11 , 96 0 x, m r ',ad' ezrsclyreb6ar. Yersck-r.
.98St 3 _granny Oif -Ow
Te 7011,1Chtale 4'60 #77,77
Druck& Merd • y il li II
tI II 190mrr , ',We re'r$04.iftbar. kirsc6.-.
9161.9 granny ati-reopif
TE Aix'''. 6ei',. 1670/77pn totuch ere, fe
u ii if it 11 If
98515 _Pull r• I gear 471/2 23007 71 ' _S")1? _r_RtscAr-itihae• kerscle4.
c TE 77 Re/or windaef It
...9.851.1 6767 7 eito/or-ntindA•yii i: Wk.
TE 77 ii
gest/ 67C.2 X I, it
Petroqui:o - FlIfiR Co_olixt_Near•Le.- 0117?
8
TE 77 h II el is
98518 676.3 X 4-crc'P.r .1.07p.Plet
/Pip ar . Ilrycj Attrivier: I. ; - WOO
•
sit TE 77 If -. 11 if n .
geSf.9 676.4 roster Wheeterabb Rep./I.:VI/iv pc.rnitor .. ,,,? 0_,/-1,72-fP/8
to re 7/ n it If ii
AF'Stfe 676.5 X _PC .atetzr2zer 3170 -1,12`1' OY_IV i ..1..__, •
TE 7/ tr 0 it
? X
ge51.11 676.6 " _Pela,cp./1-ka N_unaik?t z Pa -3172D . 13/1,-8,
TE /gala flag er I/ it .
la It is
gesi 12 ow /or -,4e,2,49 rt Perrrar ?act. Nrerzher - - 641 -SI: 4 .21.531
tt TE ir it u '
S X u
n, 7 E .
Aril.. de r.
b 7c.17154, 2Z ,er7rr7
7;
,98Sfri Oullei gear X 6/ 98. .70E3/7.5 11 'I.' 0 06 R' z75;„,,, ,___,_.Paniet baz-lien : arboicto .Sris Attack ,i yetschtehher. ilerschr
i7rivat.-/110-14 7 lracce14.rfe
. a .."0/'.1
1.5 TE II II il It // le 1,9 OThne mr7 1,FaM
. i Atoar.virsorer.
9851.IS .8ear4ail NO-coal
,b-h.-iag./20-Y v Tarichitiie 4 it7rn rin .
31 re ii ii ii !I 1/ il 160rnni , •
gellSlit‘ _learine wro- erg, A relcive•Mt cart& at n-n't rersc4iibbater Ai•csdfrau..‘e
11 re Teriep, no- 4/. v if rouchrS.ile IC5 """
if u If // l' 205-ni,-7
last 4 Boa flay A'A -atA" ."7/7. yrrsav 4e 66. rerschrauife
fiek- ,,tr..g...d. ,,, ..
10 re I, I, -1-SS °C u 250'71,71
.98.5-1- AP ' laid - 41d - co.ip a1 -lse
7;zinihu x10 Cl.A/17
ri TE 4ash .- .ro -ren y it If II II 1- MS °C 4 '001r7 77 II
y8'51.19 Qulkii -ile-eoup"
1 TE /.n/i. .00 -7ar6•
sips/. Ze i0 -turb.
It if if u -2-
zza ac . II 2001nr.1 a
7/ /e/r
Ale /A
/AI writhing y
1 TE II 11
919Stikt 679 1&afar winding ^ r iih,
zz re 7/
n X u u (
2151.14 6732
, -
23 TE Tr
If
.51,9S1.45 679.3 ( if II I(
74, T2 1/ n li II
X It
.914:rt 1V 672-4,
21 re n ,,
X 1, I, it . • .
gestas 673.5 --- r
zg TE 7/
9,41S1.16 67.9.6
u (I it u
Holm/ lull.* .
2P 71 •' X et t
9851.27 lie /or -bParmq 'I k
A/ofor/. laic/rev:
28 re
985128 N7Arr-bearm3 Y . I, ,
n TE Rush. &dirt& •
385(.23 X ' VII" Jocns Pt 1009- A
in re
9851.30
)in Art der Ondenref
Rush-. NOliu-b.
a -.CC4Prria iibere2h3P1 e
b
C
..
n
sr
I,
X
ra
76./1
2,4.7/
• If
Name
•
,Yd.
4
Art der A
,,
ndental
o
e noel? Irgna'enivurtsp5 30.7ciert

./ r Axicd,o,,,chiung enifer:if
rt. 107°C RI/2' 450r,,,,
7nie
.24 it
.29.1. 73
10.87,7 leri 9 Eleitiv;eohe Aeabne4.•• eingetralen 4G2.13
1/6,e4
c I i enls Jab. .
4912 rag
diebb a goz• itc_
Gepr.
- --
.,05.4,444,06.4 a ,
GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE
Worrowftirl
ode ,....a.
. Pe's. - -,
fob -ilr,
#61.
Cti,
70
4q10 020421.2.,
9030.12#5- 21h
ueratei Ivey tar or insrrumenrs ---- - controUng and locking
'5chuttort Lonren farbe floaetantrisb StIottlholp "Ili"' kirr 'eq Amps*,I
colow.„, ear mom drive tube *apt,'" , ClAgeilf°": iockin? system
Allgemeine $erherk 4,iogen Protective Syelern
rill strewn motor rwwne inisp.r. Neup1 &Ifs - sal NMI-latlfe louring
general remark's e elek-frisch electrical e eleklmoto, electrical
ex Ex:-gesch. expl. Proof EV - r derniatun- MP ono 41,47 device
roi red pp.!'" rn critic .
.1
111111e#W79 //77 PreVe
. ,7 es eigepasicher wei/ivekiie t _
es. .4.
.1....;.5: 4.: ,
-... 0 3. 0
r taxy
0,
p
0
imesaballiba.
a/hydrant/. oil hydr.
gels yellow .8' , t ..i : -... v .‘ ... - . $ 1
fie&Or$R0170,/,P., : f.Fa , ia& 'r ea
h Hand manual
l•Insw. 76.3 - al-4 Z11. -- ! a ., x. g z t z: .!. : -s I t -s, 0
Kan &fie : Wechsler -: 4 k 1
i 4
eand nu.te te.-1' I i
4 Fwvklioo a z. , b ic. 3
... I.-.,,,-e-I %,
kuoverschoilung - . t..
Me$stelle sinactuort tieferant acrid
ve.,.,e, of convect mot. q,4. ...r
I. ••• t; Bemerkungen 4, b
mossaring point locattn Supplier instrument' V*. Z. it .'' t 4 Qs
3". :, :: ti et tt 0.
robriAv t type Belriet•swerl 'frisch/L./3 S a
SrhatoednigunrScasitp. i li t6 kok
e - :1
1 -.4. 1,1XL ,t
. . 1 II ii.s '11 ,3 Lc.-,' 1 1 . 1, .s 4; .c. 01 .t 11 ,c 1 t •es 'il
pas. lb'. POS. Nr. SereChnung ;:s 6.
11 it ,I 11e13bereich
.s 3 remarks •,..la
t.
designation sl oe a
,
mcfnatoci range opera . Value connection AC lb 0.1:04 6 a 0 0, •2 aJ.,..9013 a r1 /4.4 t 0 0 qz
-‘
TI Ti- orbehoue. -
°(
9852.1 -65 3 0 /1 - fan* X ,..671/V ii'lieger 1/1I 00 0 - i2o€ 5S R i 5>004„.,
77 77 - var e?,fUekt v '
2 0 II ii ii
.98.52.2 65f- /de./ of/cool', It S ..CY RI Z A. crOmovz
3 TI r/ - n ath- ivki:hletr v ii II II // 410 °C //
-94,52.3 655 Ouftef infroolorA
77 Ti- 7?. -10.8. tuttliee, II II mil iinsokebbar.,VerseArb.
a I/ 6' 0 °C
96:52.q 656 Acdon"3 " air -cood X Ifirm c9 0 R1 d 1.00rrin mogrilkl , n• n-_,fze-yiceri Tacccbb:ek 44 4'0,,,F.,
77 ri. Ti,*. log, Zutirmel. II It // Mil *rSCh/ei• &Ir. rerSC4frb.
S II li Ii 16Orrm rad, chbi'le
9852,5 657 Bearing aireo,..“ if -1-17?enm
c 7? n 2i lay. Lufford
If II I/ I/ ,"it Ye'relm),.66 ,1#': i<ersch,..b.
94s2.6 658 RAolheal • .2-ir-c X II II '190mm 1 Tx zec 4f-file ..../4,0,,,,,,.
77 Ti - Aaflei./,. Vera. , u id
7 Il
9852? 659 /d7k/ air -CONgi II all 00 0 — 6.a 0( 35°C fN xl•som.,
Es 77
n - • eve., bur, mv
9852.6' 671 Aeoringetotio I ii , Y.- kilk
7/ T/- ria/0/70.ge1 NO v mit" 1rsc6.eb.e.cdr. re,sciie.
9 I/ 14 0,,i,"
9852 9 661 Bratioy/rolof A r" OkifCa tr._,C OfrIaeC0e. race eA 74‘..e4,
10
7
, 17" ' p,,,e. .tig -livid, n-v?` Verse'',le 6 bar. l'srse4r:
9,52,10 6152 Theca/hear, 4'0 X 688 fziegfr a
* 11/p, eo il - 72w"16 0 °C R 4d /go'nr" - - -r- IL //-r/e ..-13"Orn
7/ Ti- .7r.-77. log. NO y /771? Versebrebbar Verschr.
77 •
.98.52.11 663 Bearing #0 -coip.
If II ii It YI ii 160s07m i
7raweblirj-e f55 /27171
12 77 , 77- Tirrglog. /TO-itexil y II II i/ // /1 " 205,nn'
aft
.98S2.12 664 lieeday NO-amp P _. A.-- 4.--m-
73 7/ 7-/- Sosete., Mat v •
t/ Sieniens . 4d 41 172 2 20 C
_915413 665 /h/e/ ,gas lull'. A 17 - 340 °C °.
7# T/ • Ti - eas awl',• 7-04. t, u ii -1016.6.
9852114‘ 666 0/..//e/ 005 1,41X 0 - 240 2 ,
-;;, ), p- malt f Gear Pr,/ ti KO-schv.ebbar. V......5.0.4...0
aS •,9652t5t
. 66 7 Moir. artioiltii I I, Rtieger HDArn610 0 - -120°C '''' 65°C 12 h'‘'230 mr, . • T,catoR1 r ton •
/noir Edr cno
o novic rictr7 ,,eie .w4..mr1
)4 T/ I.,- X
rm,.- ka es .4" te bbor r Vag sic A o-b .
• I, ft 0 le le . 275,nry t , re,clehliz'Ae 225mrn
9852.16 670 r
7 .4.. HC .632 .
77 Ti Y •
94621% 66.6' le2"i'.9 441°" C.W4.
i
ig n r/- 0
945 218 66 9 X II
.
Pt T/.4117 ri- mach 17kla.;;Wer
. K.sr.o.olii2 4 50°C ee ,e e
e7854`.1 6 7 1 oul/r1 caeca/eq. X 6- 49 Siemen' ...e ale X 72 0 - laa°6 410°C rem, max zss-c e e e
za rufAh ri - Tieglog .1carirr,ci, 11
70'.i... max Z • 7.5Z e e e -
985Y.2 672 Seardy air-a,v.. X /1 it li
• 4- ‘I0 °( 0• 9 . 1/70C/Alic ? sst e e
7;"30 _e_ . e p e
z ,7 -4.7h1, 77- 71.-ai.-leg.tufliwid. 7?o,aot rma,r Z ?VC e P e,4 f' •
X II It ii it ' ii
.98-544.3 673 Awning an' c-om.. 7,o,p. veadona.?- eTsr P e e . p e e,
N T/iN7 Ti- Ace,. lufbera, 7.1rwil• Of •47,r ? 75°C P e P e. e
9,31.S4W 5744 -WeislAw. 124--eily,. X - If ii • II II II
Tirep• igadoELZALL St_e_e,._ I' e e
I
13 7%941) TI - 6,-/4-
.4,- •
ii II I1 - iLlopp. Alva% Z 75% e e e l
el e
geS44.S- 675 6tri x ii 11 7-, v • 14,a diyis•z gr_e_e_____A e e e .. ,
?4, TS /1/ TS X - acted,. ‘Zef..C.4a4
9,42.54:4" 6 76 4itlam. Jr/re/A X I/ 7aens No/fa 7r-ov,•mox ?,.. C e e e
2s 7/8h* 77- 011/0 ,-*;tte&Ar x 92 )i,q6- 0 -Zoo t 7,-- ..fp. incv/-
98C41.7 676 aolorkidodiny
• // tt
1:51 idle e e el '
,...„.- e e e
24 T/,4'4* 77 - dad,. izatiliedl 7.41/R,P. "wax 2 e e e e
II Siemens
,9,esv.e 677 Ou/le/ al/ -co•FP , X 41111X 72 0 7_1507 '‘• 6' Z 06 2ebot,o• load.sis,e, e e e e e e
2p7ahh T/-/fah.,to et #0 v 4 - 7,-..vp• wax ?_ ee e e
678 _A /°i _Seel Avg A It ll 0 -100 t e
98Sd. 9 77".v.:4100"..., ?....• e e C
za 77.5W 74k- Walcomr• a...win y
‘IdS(1.10 679,2'u/dm • fete e li:, A 11 30 en_s Nofia 7?...,i. 0,aA• a e:1---- e
pp Tan* 77 .. /fininovinniu..9 y 0 - 200! 7?wv,o. in - ---I
II e ,
9.P.IY.11 675 me(oled4c/i4y A 8 492 )(96' a.640.,:s.sille, — ee e, e e
3,, 7%14* ri- / Soo / saasre / ,W v 7-eolP• .wax 7- ee p
el e
7 ' 6f0 dolor bear. ,ye _A
„fril_...
- II Siemens ,e1 44ian 0 — 100 t - 2? AW49 • /1/ (74440V:$ • e e, -1 _ _p _ , e _ _ - _ _ _e_ - .
art''/ irn Tag , Name An der .4"nderun3 rag, Nome'cii elpfs Job. a*. 1.972 Tag Name levonnwovi
a armiie ode r L117 0
e n le 2 .fl. b.a.p2 i . 6- . 05,....„,064'
b P
" Amolmsavovrt 29.173
0 GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE .•-Mr. -
-Alper:. r.
02 /on
c is VA% 72 fatal 9 Etekfrische Axialmollv eingetrarn 15.21.1 Gepr. STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
/1163. 9030. 92 41 . 22h
Gerdtetiste list of instruments r arn rruny
ouov ixItOGJVwfaly •• • .r. • I Irv. 1...., • y
eontrotirty (trod locein9
SChottert LOnren f6tb riaipio4r,JO ..s•Wonierolp "'Li"' • Piro' 'ere/Jasper/
IIII9emeine Sem& r {-anger) colour d Mei n drive ierbP °atom", dtatonoort:
Pro ective .)•'e ie'n 6M?
jacking system,
e elekt „.50,, eleciricoi riff rem motor roroine &lisp r. wcupiAlfs- ,wt Itoei-kthiberring
general remark's
ex er-gesch stmt. proof EAP. r froinauxii-noo loom god device e el"'ir1444 ecfti cal i
• rot rel.?' .6. KL 9eici P
/las/el/lay 1,7 Freien es eigonsicher KL
2g -42s
.- I- 02 0 ie
jir : aii.
ciret
l inan n✓7
i .4 ta
Pirhyfri
da r.iliC.
Siellief$P00171.1,79 : -f10 V ill Ilz ... .s h ane manual
° P la*
Fteireapir:Yefr#
2. t e
:: --
-i 'itItI1
--:: --::, 4'
:
e -gtE
: :: 4-03 q! •3 -cit•S g
...leplakk : lifechsler "MO kW* 131 14 tj • k
..t
lll
I C
Maisie/le
rneosurinst point
Einbouort i Liefensnt aerial
locot gp,1: t supplier inst r ,,men i
Kontalttschaliang
wove of contact
Futkii0a a -_ 71
tow, iroa. e ,...-- :4,..3 c
•
ar
t
v t' INt
1„
.6 0
l
ta
.0
3
Be m erkungen bb
., .e. ,
.,_ 4 4,,
pos. Nr. Post& tiezeichnung 0 46 4 roo-do21 Type Aleissereici. Beiriebsamre Anschlui6 srodoestbsyssfS,40Iip ii:: ii riiiN
40 .! vi Z i..s ::
.. .! I , .i
i. ; t 7 .t . 1c 7, ii,tk 1
Cl.
desisuu, tion " pi
e mom/fact ron9e oPerat. Woe ContleCtion at
fr fr i. 5.. .. .s.
Sg‘atS. Ib a .r 4* 4) 41): t 4
t r e mar k s `... 4.,
ii. 0 1/4.
0 a t a i at; 2 i; 2 ' ii a 3t tt
, T/9417 77 - 6e.li,e.ie #o -a—
Temp. nfax a 7st e e
9R59.13 66f .5'&01 X0 X 688 Siemens IV4IA'12 0-100°C '1" ‘06( „Teel". idadddia 5S ICe L te. .._
TM 4 I? 77- 0,1C4/0g. #0 if ii Thm,o. mox ..? isT e e P
1 9854.14 662 MIA's/leaf AV X ii It 6.0 °C
- ,..Throp, ioadme. 55T_e P _..t .e. .E.
3 77444 77- it -Tr. -by. 4'0 it ft 1, ii
Temo• oroX z. 7st e e p e
5,9544..1,5- 653 .5soriny 4'0 X 't- ‘Ot Tesp_dnzdtgo2,67
r ee e
4, T/Ahh TI 77-ogIo9. 4'0 X r, ii 4 II
7-es ov. mar -' 7..Scr P. e
9854.16 6644 Wearing 4'D A 4- 6" 0 c1C Thai,. inedetes.?eit e e P e
5 T/017 77- Easei.r/r. 4'0 y It it 4 i, Temp. /nay 7 - ee
_9<fesq.17 &PS 6os - /isle/ 4'0 t` 4- 55 . °C. Thot,p. loaciwi ee A _e e
c 7-41, h n- bas cash. "ro I, ii 1, 4 7- 0,p. imox Z f P.
_.90P.S-q.1cP 66PC 16as -ou/bier0 A 0- ,f10c6- ,2,cs-t Tem,. ii.,;60 e-. ,E,
7
71,91-oh TI - ' Hofer/. Liglirpr v
1. Terry max ! e e
_e
96'54.19 66'7 tYotor *oaring A 4 A 0- f00 °C Zemp.rhooirosZ _e_C g e e
Them 6 7 -/ .... Ifofor/ Ad/perd i Temp. max --? e f CiI e
8 9550.20 6Rei liokr-bearmq .. . I. 1. Temp./ism! ,....t_ 9 e _,....s1 e
A
9 •
,.....____
10
71
12 19/5 Pr- &Beta/in/4. ,, hidip 4'6 0 - 16 --Et, , •

98511.1 664cooiroloi( .. X 64117 Mira 4G0 fl 4 0 -to ma 10 4cim R Ai e
zy PIE PT- Schorierti? 0 - 6" c,
-8;1
..e 4, kP
ti II // di 4
9,42#1 2 665 Labe oil Iv - lo.+A rf A
•
Hi
75, 'PIE Pr-luffousb. Vevai y 6h Lty /05 416 0 —4gt„,05-k,cy R 14

9,941i. 4' 666
01../A-1 aii- cull,. II 1114a -MO, ore ' w' 1 _____
K PtE Pr- t/P11.. /10 -X•e. ‘,1 II 0 -0,q. E 1 ... 0 is- A...PA , p y4,
9,94,1,s 667 /NI./ da-Verrl. /t II II Or 2 ...
o -AI.,..4"
S -1 ...._ .
n ifye PT- etas'''. /10- Owl. 1( 0 - 1 o..., ,,. q /f7Y r
gy4ii,4 668 ifollef 80 -MO. // 0 0
0- 40 mA I6
„....1s '.1
le PIE , .
yr- ,k,;?//, 4V -7;4. y a it 0 - 6- ffeel n_.• 3 lere....4 Alriz
ti
.941V1.? 669 /0/r/ it0-te/4`' 0 - 1. e7 soli "4
ii, P/5 pr- /fad, /ra-Ta4A y 0 -.01 .6"-P
ii 1, If .,,,,e "`-' 0 06' 1 7 R1 -1``.
.9,4'1.8 6PD Ouzild AO -44 '' o - i 0 ..n-,4 I °.1.
10
.
k
11 1
a .
Z3
NI '67 RI - ,40-9,-(6,1 • 140 o -16

22742.2 664.4 _co iilioaill 61/11 Siemens Ivoir ii o o -.400,4_
ZS PI PI - .s7,...../A.,/,.-4.
884,2.3 9 ' 1
. Kic
671 44,0,.. Di( 1 X ii IlViAtZ 232. WO .6 0 - 6- hy„....
1 ù .."4q ,
zg Pt PI - .5,-.o.m.;4,67194 144P 0 - 6- le4., ,u. 3 kpi
.913541. 9 665.4 1,..6e oil X it Siemens A-,
- rigeI X_i2 40 -20.1P
n pi Pt- Scir.o..4.'67/4 - ,.1._ 3 lesy
0 II It
4 .951.11.5 6658 .6.4e oie 10••••
Ze AY P, - - o y
/I
9502.6 672 Bear/. ini complfl
c Ifika 23 2, 10o .4 - 0 -45A q?-f,5-gs R< <
21 P/ PI 77oglroofd. Yerat _-
If ii II If a , F64 C
.
9842. ? 6.Ye leafing c,mar X
so 0/ PI tc;',?/,. 6e rrate y
,. cf0V•ce 6 Is/el oral " It • it 132.100.q 0- „-f-c
q•Zs O- A L -RPL _ _ -- - .. - - --
41 Art der gnderrq repc, heamc 144 Art der X ndenalS Tag, Warner cheniS Job. Air 4.971 Tag Name )(Vow..•or I
0 Schema i:Aetorheifei ?• I e /lock ifkootorw sch sifort ,200Y -?..2 OH (i,. Ca/10
,, ,, amoituriz. hrs. ......sreorciaz GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE -fo..s. - p.
f Amtalreseenvarn ws ,23.4.V3 ob -elp, 1/ 10 020/029
. o 121.S 9 Elektrischo.dointonefix e;tIneteaaen 16.2.7.9 0e,or. • STERKRAOE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT Afg4 gn gel 4, p ac. 5 V h.
RIW ITS-L•TUI7y geaCrWEIGIT•••1 •• •
••••1-, i c-7 c a •••• y
era e is e ist o ins ruments Locking COA grO i ift9 one
Sonatzart Levy:en Lathe tleuetarernob ,gooniertilp Welklo • Verregeherfteri
Ailgerne irIe Berr>e ricanger> Protective SYelerfr7 colow alin ,, mem drive lobe Oil pwrr. anevorr Locking ay •Nikft
- ' Motor Turtine foispr. N4oiltitis- ,b1 loopl.4Allstoirr'nf
(general remark's e eiektrieth electrical ene Veen e elektriasit electrical
exp. r „,2 ,,412,.11. 0,1, nwA, ow device
ex ev.-s•esr-n erni. proof rat red
A tits/es/hies; im f '9/9,1 ,., .., !a.
4: 3
Oki P Pneknratalia Pneumatic .
es irigeKT,sicher Weifiwyde t „„, c
0% ••• , S
G. .• r. 4. 0 CI) 0 6114ydne.S. oil h ydr.
gels yeliew .6. ". 42
SziaaewRoon11,79 • .1!O Y 10112 "'S ...- h Hand manual
°P
Poi 4c4
iiii•fltv. 1-32 -2. AO ell." , 0...„: 1 .0
• ..S ' 2 ti ti 5. t„ g
iftlI710 kile : lilleChs /et AC • 4 41 2
1.07111 C
eleilstelle Einbatiortl; tkofen2nt Gerrit kentatersehaitung runkkon _a
.'• CI Z
•!'.. '''.'" t 1i ttb
3t 3
o-,„„ of ce„h„.= mot. mot E- °,, I- „, er 1. .t., t v Bemerkungen lt t
measurtery point loCatian•„ k soiortie, instrument E 4.• .1G, t i .
--' ag
W '''-'-.... q't ..e rDi 42.
0
PoSNr. Pos.iVr. 8ezeihnung t. i - ii Cobriket ryPe tlefitereich 8etrietrwerl Anschl4n3 SehatteeentenyScialtp• 5 6 5 6 li to •lit t ul !il 1,
1
4:4 -. 1 1
',., 111
desig nee ;en 00 manufe.4 range operateolue connection Ili! -S 1"1,- t '
,:ot ..,b
g i s - te
1
t -t . c . -c IS"
e e t.v .E.0 *
;4 Iogt;,-,b.t6g illekijuticio..6 0
remarks Oil
•....
4
...
0 't Cr '..
P1 P1- Zatriaush. feirf, ' 141fP • o- 4 JEE
98412.9 66'6 Da/Zel aitcom X GHH genie" 4414 X7Z a - Isin7r 1. -1" a/ S- A2L
t-
P/ P/- iYozlo'lager- , it
Z
_984410 675 //dot -tea& • --Mlika. .1.32. gia, • 0 - 2;_s A.e. , R "11"
P1 1;7- ifelt466e.-if v II -}f4
3 9cP4e2. // n II II 0--1/ 6
8" .. Z '1 4 '5 •.,.0•2 b .
676 year
,. la/ P1" 1/ark/age/ -40 v
o
.9sier,12 677 Titus/Z1, -h'0 i"
II it II
0 - 4 Ski 0, J.- 1,-5,' '1 ,
1'/ P1- 77ag layer -4', it
s it it it it
_94'1141.3 678 8t4oriii ., -. r/•o .. ..,,
P/- 6,75,-,16, -4/0 4414, o- o,‘ SE, , 0 is- kp
G "V
-9ecizl' 667 6os- 41e1 - n'0 X if Siemens i44,1Y1 0 - to,.•`4 ' c.z '
7 "9/ P1- 15as 0036 . "' NO 1/ ii If 0- 6. BP, A., 41 Hp
..9cP411.4.5" 669 adlef pas-/ra K 0 - A:1mA ear i i
I
P/
8 9:91, P1- ern 6. No-told y ti II II 0— 6"t ,l• 3 If P
1
11.f6- 669 /ole1 4v-6,k 4' o -...e'" I
•
9 P/ P/ - lust,. rY0-liinS. v
II II • C-- 0,6.y., 0,06 if P
WW2. fir 670. flaw ire - /ad. . IN I1
0 - 20 rtel c..., L
P1- laxxpleint• . v *
10 P/I 1f
.9ePV.,. IT 679 /gel s/ro.n A _.: _1111110 232. 200 0 "'G-as ^-3,.5-#:,.. R *"
P1 p/ .. &amp/ Oath.
11 II It d •
AWN 680 Outf(tql skarn X --'t• • - -IL 40 "Iola.
,
P1 Regelo? laefP CO - 1:6*-fL r •
12 P/ II Siemens y_
.941112,20 6648 car./re! oil A 4 Vci ,02
'''
0 - LOocif
40 e,...
° .z
, _
7 r P/ /Toter, lahlee •
I R fi it
- ' 3642.21 68 ' Molar- bean f l II Wil< a. 232.100 0-Z5 c1
-4 ? j
Fs , . P1 5,0...r3a5/...., /s . r
7 41 n 232,100 0-1 cilia .v0, It atd
9042.22 682 ll
Pi p1 P-634,4 2
2.0 '
9842.23 683 ourzEr X WI' ka 232.10016' 0-16 kp/cm iflip/erril R. "
IG Pi P/ P-634.13
it t it " n
98412.24 684 OUTLET X 14
E,-. L- .
11 P/C/ . PS -Sinru/MrleiA2. helze... Oltiattk min A.
ii4i-oil o1pet
.967 qq.,i 685 x 6f/f/ ......70.9 " '' -4f., z
0,1-51 3 lqic z ' 19-3,,,,, ,
-
...
0,pess, 10./hr
.qs_e-
GANA
PP
s- s- e e
4
e ee
19 PAZ PSL ,Schowerol id/ li oldratk uort."..21fx
.
y ft ,, il il I,
gdmile. 2 686 Leered air tow.. iipe.o. imidtvi ____5„.4 e e e . ... 1
71 981
NZ PsL" 1442.tirtil /r0-ye,.
1143 652 /..Neil No X II ,, II if 17 5. 218 ..„,, re?.1 e e e e e
20 .
1., p41/2 PS tregersi. 40- • 21 iiiciraek vorh. .,., 4, 0
VAS" 60.9 .4,21-1,02. A/0-. GHH ti ari.
tl.teltgl
. F9 5 1:14 ...5 tr$ ' 0
op
R 7,3 oapressure 2-1.,:z L- k"- 1
,11 e e e e e
I
„ poyo/7 PD1 cleftlier 82 - zip 43 p ,P2a,r 1
" 984111.6 690 Oil kare X" m
144a 002,100 4 0-g Arc,41 0 5'(/..,1 . :R 1/2 a _._ "
...,i e e e e
23 -
.
26
as UAL L/ d'aehailer . ivw10 64 lized 0,,:,
9%9154.4 64 3 CVZ /took 1615/61 hini,C ilia,k lIE -:. I 000 _rvs_va Level Anis - e e e1 e ..
x NE Ge be r
1442%1
3863.1 Axial m ei0i1„ A GHH AEG 83911
201 RriI, -475...o...+ 4 75~ „,
NX II u
9863.2 X . li VE
VE 0-20mA
28 NIAhh . Anxesse -0,7S- 0-44:479rans Axialapiel 4, 1r
9864.1 Axle:gime& X '1 Sielnens 444 x72 o -20mA - unzjil. -(14 se e e e e
-T---,--
24 4/ VS ,2‘1121...../ 3 you . , MC2.3063. +0 c 4-
0 - 44404.4n • wiikl Ara'', owl ftifh 9cP44S-
ms- 1 635 41nOt oreastai• 's GHH 61114 4 002 I'm"' •
30 '
-
Art der kfroierfete To9 mem,. Àrt der Nndersteg r09, Nom e c Ii en t s Job. M.
.
,19?! Tog Name
- ..-- Keno ait,or 1
C _path_ littitLientytozx 4 gainoetrer` 13 oeie ...,..
As; rl./00
43 5r ha• rot a ir'hear 0the / LH •6 2f.f/.21/ , asteee per. d'S . "5,7404,0&1-- GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE ..fie..tfèf. woofs/02,1
b er f .,43“met2vorrichtur5 ereitrni 29.47.2 06 -11/r.
If v.6! ' x2
f
9 Etekb-ische Axicantat eineettra9. 46:214 &pr. AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
C M
• ./ I Me 7,_/ • L....P.r.......•• .•14......... m• 11. ATM,' Alarm_
STERKRADE
ti.T tn-K /fa .90.30. los. zq -
erate iste at 0 instruments
Lia”..,,--ti Centre
Conitoiin9 orte
Houplahtrieb
iocilrinir""
st•lortitridp
Schutter( Wish- *re efelertfidri
ceio,,,. ot r t,„,/ , moln drive iI,Ibe oilpuivr &ohm": tocking ay•tem
Allgerneirte Berne ricue9du, Protective system
9,00 fr,era HolC.r rum.he Fn hp.r. .waritsifs• Abt libyd-itlfs barring
e elek-frIsch elecirical or Exp. r iste&stied• Me mein (vol
e elsA-Orieely electrical
general remark's device
ex eyr.-4esch aria[. proof ibt red a 9144 P pnetheafiseA Pneumatic.
A..... r —
A1./21.5/Pii Ulla //77 Freien es eigeh Sicker Well? While to. $ a .t. —3 at 0 Cilloy dram/. eel hydr.
Stlet/Pcil) af2/1/71117Q 120 Y 10 Hz
: , 9.0
yell. :1;. ... :." . s. 1 h fond monual
7Ci1:0... 1 '
x ,s11- .
I!..' • *••
.s 3 .c 3 c 1 t •S 0
H0n1a4 le : Wechsler Peas/ CORO. 0:: `5 .; t la;
*v X it
mepstelle Embower+ liiefeeant acrid lantaktachallung
seine of conloce
Fuolltrion .4
%
012t. OW X 11*-
Z..
' -a-•I ,,.. 44,
1.% I' I, Bemerkungen b 6
measuring point locat left •t Supplier instrument 42 ta zr t 0 4.
ic 11, —
ScheleedimpaujeSelloPp. S 6 s s -t- bl t...
I oI
: s, o 4.
poskr. Pos. Ale Beeekhnung
0:
,ii i; 4 ... rebrikat rypie tlel3berefch Betriebsoverl Anschlt,,S .6 :
, , to c 40 vi c• t " • (.1 remarks .41...
---
iIiI.s S 3 t; 6
$. 4 - a .... a 4 ia
desi9 nai ion 0091 tvenefe4 ran 9e epeat.frolue connection E 4 :Ork to. 41. a t011eajwbah.0 0
P4eh,o2 o re,t2 mertofe/.POP 26.475 2 ..rif ,h/Clie•if 4',
. ••• ell•Zif 0 Ifef Od"- COalp re,..rs or
FS C PC- ogler kraeczbal9- Ofoenckft Am Reglerschraak
2 14g113/ I.0 .E f4,3 io, III f000.r 1200 x goo Ewi cy eb aai
9232.-I 604 co,71ral(er X
FE Sou ,blemYe ll, . 47/4' 0-153.nr,711S 32 6 4.5/1
X li .-;//.../ i 06 .i5-0 ar 1111111
9227.1 Orifice
F Sle Ifwe, k ti
0 X 6 AI
. 2852.7
F SV Fa' /166lose teenAZ 24f d 15,4
X 4
/8S 1.1 64* flkaW -0/(- 1,016e 6H8 450 465,
PE Endo/rack - , h
Lc.effverckhirin /,CE 6 132 131 0,3-0.7aiii
gt 31. 3
PE „Saa9bleneee 0 -100,
h 4 6152 222 o -sooAmpsis
9231.54 la (1 re, c1,77‘e,II
8
? Pfigrewzmengenre &lam" 4/0 -t reffri.
Sure Ii.wil Combo /!pr 410 - costptessor
Sarno/el,' /m geglerso6rook
ft, FS c fic /Peg ler Krvarbal9
9232.2 6es can Liro /ler X 6,fr/fr/ IC .E regier .0(70)c-1200 x -goo. e.hge.5ood
„ PE 'Pr ' Druck — .....,
0- 6- AE
" .9231,1 697 Tigosmdlier Y II Ecnord 6132 41S- Ort -1 ir,f4..z
la
PdE x-r- 4P ti 0 - laa,...ir
9231.1 645 7soak, X
77.9, 11 61S2 221 a, 2 - 4 loy,,..1
Yougaenafe ti jt . Di& 19206 0 -10Orrhhh8 36a 144
73 'L-5
5228,-1 oritrice • i.naler Aro LACS
• siteiVveplk „.
. F . q
2861,1 A 08
Fs V F Cr - k'b dose wmid v il //
42 LI IlS4
2861.1 64,5 Slow-aft- bwiel 4 I iSO its.
26
78
—2ryROSS /r0 -4 Tivi6ine
ri F k X
1.(6's2.4 Siellwe/ , j 47/1/ 61/11
101 Ps i/ ;Cy ehoe 6/ose2yertifit. 42 a itsif
It ti 450 i 6,s
• 4851.1 6.46 hi,- pes$ - rave X
ii .
zz
F FCV- Sceeegs,41.-geRev. 16 wEIS/4
3
4'144.4 647 .;nert/OSutr- flop" 61-11/' 61/1/ 750tbs.
n 4;4'4 %S Eha'se-halifor Voppe 2 a
ee
" 418417.1 636 swilsh X 618 !/op .shui oil
23
420 Y 60Hz .
IC r XS Y /1909/7Piltreoni v
- 9886.1 641 eleci,. - leolw 6 V 611
18 HP/106 21/ 03350.1601 R a
_2?
r• xs v it
X
9886 2 642
II V It If f11 a
_re F XSV „
I, kI / t/ li VO 35 3' 0 .1501 :I R.-#44.
986 . 3 643
2?
30
4, Art der Lerw.2 rag , Name Arf der 111. naferuesq
2ixel Tog, Nome clients Job Nr, ,igv_ Tag+
—
Mama
Were"
Previv•.• art
ode I r 1.1/7 0
42 Schesret i.;defo/britlef .s. e noch
. kiersolehivsch etttr 2(kft.?2 ....i.),....o44 GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE 1.-romms.- r.
GHH
ieueb.e gsz. za .
b *, If alynefivorneltema re i 21173 e•-Yr. 410 020/0/ q
C je P
146.n 9 EleldreSte kri . ein en IS! 73 .,19H__ STERKRADE AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
M.O. 9030.12445: 2.5A:
RIIIITrirc-narry IOW" •PIONT .0 Fy %V . Im.•-• • wrice.w.tr
Gereitel iste list of instruments centre:4;ns, and loNrinsi
. ScItutect•I isopenforbe ilbuplantribb Sews/etc:I" WI"- Pirriegefentsart
Aligerneine 8-erne tic-anger) protective system csioa,. eiti,„„ mein drive Luse oiirony dnetvcri: lockiny system
e Vex-frisch efeciricsa pii, 94 .,:,7- Maur Turbine fnisp.r. tabfinfis,. bbt liseptitih ben-Mg
general remark's e elf*/ Had* cIer tri cal
. ex eu.-9ersch. eirpl. peyo te rot reel' E•p• r toemsatff- ems rota ape deriCe
' tr, .
- ,r .2..
- P Peetfonsiieti. Pneumatic.
nubile/lung //0 Freien es else., s ;thee wewwwe e,
rA.v.-
... 3
, k ..- .c. . en o idhydrood. ail h ydr.
Odd pram,r i 5 ..i 'a 1 ,;
flielle/SP00/1&119 : 170 I/ 10 Hz ~mat
74 .1
4,06r. r;
.g. -1- S. 11 V -5.11. 4 -1 / .i. .S I .S. I
c'
S
. 3
. SI 1 h Hand
firer/74A* : Wechsler sibdc,og D.:i t it 11 t i4
>e
3
Melt steilet 6 in&wort -- ieferant Gera/ IranIaktschalfung F•arklier .1 a -0.***I IL Bemerkungen
meosertng point lacedI - Supplier in ecru men, sand of contact mete. In* -- Z ,:i • 4!
ii
" " t" '
V.
1-
t i
1e t ee
0 Q.
' A s. t ... " t ..
SchoetedingsniS:ealip. 5 66--11Pa.,ii c inZi t ti. i 4! ..; g remarks 0 Q.
pos 'tr. Po.£ Mr. Seteichmelf? is
designation
..lt
Ftrbribbi Type
wowiegi
Where:cif
range
Befriebssfere Anschltd3
optnt.volue connection
111 e ..4 .
t I i 1134k't .. -6 I)4 **4 4116 1 ti a
.c..cl.cle....tc v .gi
".e,%4...
009 . . i -a bitkO 4 ••••-
-mw
.1 PC V PLY lege/ lieitilli NH' 50
86'00.4 659 Schmierii X tj 681/ "'unson 2-$k/„! '-'3 Ar_, 4'! -te
2 d0 c v PcY - ffc,greve4/./ i NW 50
8810,1 6 6o Re.:96.16Y. X II II 640C.0 8 -12 14, '10 '''..,‘ 4, 46 •
3
3 - .
I .
4. - .
s .
•
C 6 riaiP ,11/ifak pail 1 ihi ree,.. „il
(1.9941.4 C /oral pawl arc-Tope 44711P fihr,rf . _i____H
7 '
•
8
9
to
n . .
12 6 TR IP 9efihrpa/ /10-, rad. . .
9A9T.2 D lace/Feet/ tre - rens, 611/8 Ahrens ,. -
,, 6=" rii4P iiitidtit;wit,cr.bceSovnl. Fvvil
9,994. 5 E 4foril-fla/sp- ou zi•CenalVe ' • -
Y. •
.
YS
t
11 '
• .
PS V - RSV Druckeicher-
NY heitsventit X ," GHtf Glyco FE 50/48-50 NW 50 . ,
6890.1 Oa • - ,
711 -TY
P FSY a
X V " ir .• it
6'890.2 OCti
to
4-
11
a PI • P/ /Voss tron -
A942:25 691 Sprihung X Gill Wik q 232.100 0- fOatit'i ti 4ara R1/8 P
-
13 Pi ' PI It
X 4 4 i II I 0
9907.26.692 il 1
NI PI P1 * II 1
.9942.2 693 X * 1, if h
o/ • Pi . .
?S u 1 0 0 q
9842.28 69* X 0 a
76 0"/ ' PI.
"
.
990.29 695 • X 4 II II ,,
I,
PI Pi • Sperrgasledg •
9842.30 696. X I, P 232.400 0-4 crect- tea, 4 oteci 111
4" .
ta
2,
30 .
- ..
..,14 Art der tfeerws, Tog . Nome p Art der...Indent," T.2 9, Warne Clle41.5 Job. AM. 1.2.172
-
Wiliftywarg
0 Scheopa
0 a ,
idieratheiting
,
it
...
'./. / /
. e.-nqpN klenaltiwun 4 9eii ,weire
f Awcamelharri errird
2 .1f. ?2
4 s ,----_
41"1"7.6..
Tog N12/170
AT-ft/1.a 113 '
.
GUTEHOFFNUNGSHOTTE 1.f.u.erV.
-we,. •b
ode
I/10 0LO/624
ravre
$. T, , mot ?.? 9 ElektaiseleArialmdkeeeinseircwri asp. STERiRADE AKTIENGESEOLSCHAFT._
N61, 90J0.-124‘S. I.i.4f
+.447.i..t xrd.r..0 .. n,..,...,.... Laiserelsboas..t All .
I.
, •:-'1: •
-•4
*P
a .p.
:F n
"..isy..-...-: ,.
:7-;
4 . 4 -..
'!.. z x. -. ..- ..4.'.4-: - 7 .r...- +.471/ 4 "., --.--
. 7 --?.:,• :I. • n -.;7V. - •-•
1..,14i71:,.4....; . .2.. 4:, .-73!*!: -:.4::::•
,..2_ •... •.. *0....A.‘
4 ;17t
At .--4t4''
...,4::: -M,,
,„.- " .;..i.:,. 4:-.- zwf....' ••••••• ''-
.. ___„ _s..i--,7.;
. . •• .1•.• _„
• _ ...k,.• ,... • .:.; kt _
It.**111"
..7" it.: 14-Or
.11 ,441
:-7 :-:
: :_ -'41
:
--
• 4 •No 7: .......z. .. „. .....:
.F..._ -•-• ,.t..

-
- 7i
i .. Ar
'' 2 4.tt.Ffrit-Ve
.!:76._•,...;:ili-
14...
,--r-7 ••':;:71-t:
'4..r '.•- •!7.-5:---e.:-
.....t..4,ityiri ..-:;7. 4' ' t's. Meek
v.
illAitsv
.• _
"ft
,,Pewi4
• . t.;1. •
pg..00UtSA 7. AFER .CONTRACT NUMfIER:.., ,:-.st. ..',.r.A•T '4447 -7-g

- •-••
t.' FOSTER -,AilHEUE1 4--Ltii4 : CONTRACTIPPMBE '-l::'.11' •••-'9. A7.tot
7. .7 .FCSTER - WHEELER- ostitda- f'• -REQUIW1p _.
-NUM t3 -•-•
....
AIR-COMPRESSOR .-c , ' '-- , ,,, '--...-..-
,ms '- • 1278
w. Rev. 1
-4..:,. 4). ..,- 3 tgi -,•,:,
NO -i GAs:-- Clit4E),F2EtSiikte ' - -.4.2 k,. ? ..4t
c ",
A Ree- 1
,
4.--4
,.
,..• ..- 7.7-f .-.
444.1.7....-it,%., .- _ .„... ..,
v it pETROduisA-60isiciithzfilt-w: '.±-- - f- 7,..4*---47,..' . .. O . 533/71
. ' -• 107.4.t—i•
`:-;;' -CLIENT:7-NAME PETROOUISA --PETRO6RAS • 1.1
LOCATION1:-. -
itor
•;•;,1,„-' CUBATAO SAC) c. PAULO ).41.7k•._•-•'. A' .
e: •
- !air.♦-•, •".• .e.f44%.41$41. ,
:1- 7 ••at'..
• tfc=$•%
47 ` 044.:* —
• *.i.•
•-
.+:4W5014::, •••4..jt o•
S - A-14 .• • - ' .•-• •
M-t.. NUMBER ' - 1•1• ecit.ipRESOR4`';`•'''‘ • ‘.
`1?"•.1._
ftrcittiodie
43 :. " -er t.11311t1-
NUMBER --AIR, COMPRESSOR": I- •• 'tt 532-

Ix 141 -,if '
ITt:14, NUMBER .--,E X PA N$144,1, TURBINE.:_:':;-!7 -:;.7 -, . 7k•f":1..?•• • ;;:j ib",7,--..10 - 631' - '
;2 JT Erm-:: N1.1MBER' . _MOTOR-4W -- GAS---COM PRESS 7.?„4`.1•341'..';' -'..ci -' r„‘..- 631
.;,-." , ,eSitz:.4.-..er_44
•- ' !TEM. NUMBER . MOT:CiR *RT. COMPRESSOR.- • :L • • ",. •,,,,,..;,*...1-P-4.• pt, • :-.: -632 „..4,.
g.--;•77-•.:Ns-a.?.-1,,.--,.-4:. -..--4-,..• - %. •
(2 . -° •••' ut:••• ' • 1- ."13.•A 2

'des° O h • r• 'A.,- • -
Q.
Bath- Backsf.
loilow;n9 Pelosio47 14tdq goof 791ax 2 711.72 A /1.101
-. '
;
-;'-'4411-•••4r
-ea. All der Arderuog m. •IGniPP1'#10100$##1.

'10191*S/ off: • 1972 Tag , ,• -
11491119.11.1/91. mt.a. G.vtEHoFRiuNcsouTT
CTi
kg :
.1, ,
OEAKRADE AKTtENO 111:1; VIA _
Nr:
•"7
,
- ;•4' .;.,
47...4.
-/001110044/4birt4/4 -
.01Ieitun en
Oil pipes
lar 411ara =Ux1444494 Moho 44. mob Ii4e9k .4.0949 tarn Enleonden au! : ,
:EifeltiAll• •
414049: itr Ad s alaltroadaltd, aY trsindallf1Pli &Ow • -'
•9.409v191 rs goober War 4440ale0l m 444444..fif
2 :
'I 7111/4
St. M. No..-172 7 a .2iii9 ntrnoavordtoekadinCariiakliage
. 4:0" don illsehlo4i+999400
••
• vt
01
01
rn
NO COMPRESSOR
PANEL 2(Zeichnungs-Nr
des Empfangers
n/eizeiig niu¢
Typ:
a ix:eh ireindenheansrh ff .1/6F-(1
Nr der Ouch- Bache.
,161 Mang .slabs home V. Art der Ant/prang Tag Name Gruppe oder Blatt Nr:
Werkstoff: ?9VE Tai Name
Bearb. u. get. 28.9. Xiotai OFFN TT
Gewieht In kg: Gepr. 13,HHsGTu
ERIxERAHD° AKTIEuNN
,DEGsEnucHAFET Ntei.
Norm. : 4 AOlturz4a,
Mod. Nr: Manta:,
berwachungen
Vemendungsbereich
(1dr Adiroggeber1
. . CONT_ROL M64.9060.1038
C1.4 n o Nu& ohne
Tolerant-
ang. nach Fur diesel technische Unterlage bolnettan Or= alb Rechte Vu Olens unser, Entilakten aus:
414002o/o29 DIN 7168 votherige stationnung Lit es nicht wheat, tie to ecrviellargen, Oaten
zugbnalieh to inaehen oder roost unbehigt zu verearten.
Ersatz liir:
mitts! •Ersetak: —
C•
ts-
•
:15
05 03
"N ••.'4:1
;1
1, (;I•t ,%- (_?Q11
tC1 7.? Ct. •,..t
-a it'o
k' a IZ) "Cr
• • o
(14
k4)
('*q
rs • 'q
rl 2 A
;1- Et
.s.‘• '• 94 ",
O (4.) A 0,
•in 1) ‘
1/4 -4 • , NO COMPRESSOR
()I I
" ‘ k
tr- k 6 PANEL
(Zeichnungs-Nr
2
Z
(.0 i
A ml 27. I • des EmplAngers):
t rsierott9 /toed cerlig..ael1om9 ;
Typ:
%t a /71:107 k'tdna/el? tYLIOSC4 Q;t4/7(Afr4i f
Nr der Bach- &Wel.
MItfolluni elate kaaind v. Art dei-Andesung Tag Name Gruppe oder Blatt Nr:
(4? V
• s) Wetkstoff: 99.72 Tag Name
•(/)
N. • Gmeicht in kg: Gear.
Norm.
28.9. sgeao
H GUTEHOFFNUNGSHUTTE
STERKRADE AKTIENOESELLSCHAFT
M Ty
Abt -Kurzzch.
Mod Nr: istaBst4,!
l l;iidilingen
"Attar
Erillverkw1;assW79
jfar studtraggebtri
eMV/Ari goaii ahoy
/464.9060.1038.0f b
5 eipettri
Cuno !fade alum
Ong. Owl, Entstanden out:

far diem tectuairlie Uotertge &Oohs oar ens age heckle vat. Ohne onsets
410020/02ff 0/N 7168
MOW ,
vorhertge EsaltSoinag k1 es Wahl gestattit
. ira zu vervirtfaltigen, Dritten
,zugEfiglIcO rs 'Ochre ofOr.Nrietlia*N44 s• ovoert•"-.
EFSSiI far:
Ersetzt dutch:
12
a qairtderil if
&eh- Dwobe '
Nr der Tog
AN( state koaunf Att*AtIOTOg rio or Bititt Nra
we, toff:
Gowichtid
r pUTgHOFIFNUNGSHOTTE
ERKFiADE AKTIEt4GESE1LSCHAFT titTht.771(
Norm. AU- Klifilr h,
Nr: inaastilb
V Witrigiliiiefeli
Nis AvItiNgeskr) 1 64,19460..038.02 b
i4iNsv
Telerais-
mtg. !MO. Fur Eastartdonieus
bekisNW wii uns efistRocine tte: Ohne ware Erhis his t.
DIN 110 vo4N6NZtAiiwerw IN sit Welt oestisfiel, sie 1iti vendelNitigen, !kitten
mIliet c *Or?sorrel}unbelugt Erietzt Arch:
u Ali
1 1. . 01
• •k
Z-AL7.SZA:3 •
1.0'. •
• j I
'11
7
•• .
tb1r1 •
1
Q1 •Q •
.0
4 N
rk, 7k-k
Ca; .0 1 la"
1
kl‘
des £mpI
Ant/erg/is navy reef rn9 .
, • . T :
r4; nrach Kw,clearicrilacI t9romorra(4%r
prihrt. Arf dart Mane oiler Nr:
Nlitiniag Aran* r: Iry
`1972 "To — NMI* - t I.
ernin.41:9;:. qUTEHOFFNU OFIUTTF
4:
.;,.
STERK•RADE A1, TIENOESEL4SCHAFT
/if
., A
1'644101
• Ooor.
Norm. ' ' t ' ' A .-Kurszon
tiaZtob
pp/. isiekelanFert
riiiiirrromorkh
IIAr'eaeru
'Cuno k.
Rani, Or
!Tot,,ani-
ant. nanh ror d4. ifachnkcnoÙninrbse penation 000 !Pah, VO1 Ohntuaidr.
, En/Italian Our
Eli for.
*yoga* 0114 fie
• I in&
whin* lintiniinrg , *Ai instiffiii, tie ni'verneinnten,
1,?-wg#410,ri,,,iscimc«frr,minti nnt;.10/0 4r1V0,4" t
pOs421
roSe4OR
stort-114>bf ;it' sk
CoW/701-CItr
cem-2oa 1640 /44- cawortuan 444 Ozo•fP
HP-64.7I 43,
017675 ' N.
os.22
0
o 0*5/6 Pos.19
Pos. 20
(3'6):
O
N ?/12 P26)
N
N
IN
,•C'••
NO.GOMPRES50
,
PANEL .2
(Zoichnungs-Nr
ifezi pypfIngor.OkL___
inglerang ifo4ìrivq4C141/41;44
TYh.: ¶ I I
erot-4. Attermtvitie. eti4704Aet i flree474
Nr der Birch- 18**,41. 'Tag Nome GiSpni 4r Skit Nr:
*fltiollung Naha **rangy. r
•Art der Anderong
Workitoff: . 4972:' Tag
844.cf: pez 1.'to. hOr dUTEHOFPNU
, NGSFOTTE
I
Gowicht In kg: kw. 0E02 DE' AKTIENOEtELLSCHAFT
Norm. t '
Mad. Nr: Moliitob
vor444.rkinioe44-oto
irar*Ykrownrafer)
u no 1 Entztandenr tun
1
Wit?
4 410O 0. 1. )
69
P17.668 P_-664A .64.51.BL

1?1..442.
Pt 9842.f6..
.1?eirdquisa
. fare17..antirkElYtertOr.01 12::___,..i.
r..--$513:100
.Fosier. keheeler4ida-030,tract*t.m
0-intM ber:,iffqa--132?,4
Fositer-iv`heeler - acIa:ice4a-011/6
PC. 3/00 - 1321-0.747:zrf. .,.v
..
piiiii4:4,6.6,.DiVii Neinibei ypoala0.7.1 - ______...
- - . :1.-..--...— :e
1
../leth.or.1.49.....,.t.i,974erj:_c_ra-31 it. .::±---— —m---. **"''
peniS Notr?e ,./f-equ',#4:::.: 00117•Fq440 ?1T ,s14. 1 - -- _

Provier4,-.',zoccieiiiri- -,Lg& ifici:Pritai • -;
-., t,
3 2 I
PO- Flehseelko Nr. a eisichrsorri MbeneSSsi 0 9 Rasschn
35 aVnension
measurincrooOti desigholiorr C4.tt out
teachtfekter Meldetableau
3°Nei 1/ .0lecl panels
zgax 144
annunciac6a, board
PI 99;2.2 Regelialatruck
2 p/-664A con/nal 144 72
I I smyssate
P19942.5 Schrnien5lcIruct
PI-6558 lupe erasion
019842.14 Einfr. hp- Nerd.
600
4 ley e67. - corrvoessor
819842.15 Gas - Rustr. 11.7-v4rct.
APT 5 P/- 669 •
_gas ou /16.1 - NOcomaresser
liecomechier PI 9842.16 Clos- finer Ao. Tura .
6 PI -669 gas /rile/ - Ala who..A
14 9842.17 6o5 No-rurt±.
7 PI-670 gas cuffs/ - taeo,n•
ri 9852.13 • Gas - Eontr. No - holy.
-8 rit665' - ' gas ,,,4/ - NO
17-91352.14. Gas-Rusty No - Tufo: .
9 rf-666 gas au - NO hohre
IrlAhh 9854-.47 - Gas-Einfr, No-Ye/cf.
11-585- - - - gas oi/r! - N1. cohloresSor •
T/Ahh le 6os- Rases:110 -beta.
• 11 11-606 gas etalot - NO coo- pressor
I7A hlt S954.-9 floforlager
.12 27, 6.78 maeor •
17;9hh 9854.12 Motorloger

13 17,680 motor tearing
nAhh-9854:13 - &ousts. Gelnebe
14 or? outlet: - secretly
•
77Ahh 9854.14 Drucktager Ab-etrof.

•
27,682 hioriryq- M7 coo••oreSSor
nA-nh-9854,15 Druck- Trogicrger Ab•Yerct.
16 11-683 - theasf/pfa,n Seanni-A6 ce.nonsse•-
•
77Ahh 9854.16 Tro9lager Ab-ibrd.
•
77- 684e p/o”, burin q -AO coovosersor-
TIA517 9854.11 Motorwicklang
75s-573136:679 a"ofor Waasf,;,, 192.96
-175•rnpe Motor HilfOlOurripe therrntschain
19 `.(one • ;2474:17 "" ".";:fo
c„! ""4"" - • 341E34.
ol Motor ifiefsO(cooinpe edr
•
16. Lton:ho artaYlary ore Pump 0/ motor On
Lamp Motor ArliscilPuMpt acts
lamp. auairr 0/1r-ro7P con/re( Ill'I
Hdrzepornpe ctrl
2P1«»
je*L
.".-0"*.
..t.,. sit aa,a4;2,70,7suoros a/0'4300r as
ffexi9lasiensief' 612741W 'Ur _
rosier tornperaprztfung Tableau

•l`s-
24 pus1/60A4m, lb 5 lamp civet-krDc. Ctermetrcrillor beard 34534
Taster Mf/X Was
C Z5 Asts# 4...11•0
161/ horn off C
fictsspirnoior Our
26 Lampe
Lamp "howl onolor CAW •
swilAf - htesptrnotor acts

27 •
on-off 1b 3 smarri ovrior OW
350
•
475 Lampe- -._..- fisupttnotor ern
tome Own, on
r • A. •
Taster
29 Dash button 2
30 Lampe
lamp
ilamptmotor bin
hyorh •••0105 on
SteuersPatirloneem
canna/ refAssrs on
oquaa-referCoahact Number 41/70 31 schtasseisdrett

kw _moo-rail& SteUeroPonnuf79 elm
A err'tch lb 4 oar, Aro/ rrifele ars
&stir itheeer lida.0seract Narrater S5 3*
774th 9854.1 tl[ temDeratur noch tfilhier
rosier.Wheeler I kis. PkgaisMien number 31791012110 32 rl-67f 144x 72
oritnniaeratup• Ars/ 1/re ceo/•,-
PC. Afienber.31170- 1321 .17/71 I
*frorenia Itamber: 3230,
132(43
.
Res. 8'
liernrarkig Number , 3 sioirn a.&,
[Duds Nome t Pelraquaa- ,eirObres 00'405171 iii EihrchzdAbcreil •
Pnviet‘occeicon: Cabattlie 1gir69 . 34 re
p Moor ofrioe rectd, dos sforf 34 • 34
L.- PANEL 2 - C mach hoiden risen srh kaincierf .2..1172 ..410.6/ (Zeishnungs-Nr•
des EmptangerS).,
6 nooh Kander nouns(/' artirxbrt at, -Gide/
a noC/7 k'Ut-rcitn•runsch sender/ oft.Z
M. are D•rs. 11.ast.
Art der An0P-arg 7.9 Nam
If a.*** arool • [moo. oder Btrttio:
&saw WerlataM: 1377 Teg
- •
_oa th Salon 163 emergersc "ten - ars . 21.6 ..itisZt GUTEHOFFNUNGS-OTTE

,s,,•=•rels.easkr GwAr5 is ip G. ba Li la SIERRRADE AIiIEMGESEILSCNAF1t M AK_
A 37 fer- oferooloi Nam.
-01? sr.!** 268 inferfoch crWrit 1•111r C-632, -
s Med. Mr: Made*
E1ibreriqui1terun9
:47.rmio•4 P66 .--iieknow .!edging :beetroot fast
34$34
Now•••••••••
1.5 Mel3-ILSfruerschrank
••••••••.)
35 rester fairiegeiong
to, on/oche-42 34!i.3.# Caine 'Na. pp NO-Verohibler M62.9854.f058c
• Todarrl-
Ars ffeSslellon Nr Bezerchnung . r labrnesaung 410 020/25 •••• ••••••••••••••••••• •ow./ *Me s 01/••••• Y me:
nusschridi Sam. pp* e•••••• wIt F.S*4•1. ••••••••r.CMS/
(net,
measarMg pant designabirn a•barerrsien Cul Due .401 ••••••mop 01••••••••••••••••• En•Uf *ad:
I •
8 7 ... 5 : 3 I 2 I I
6* WA" -7•40•••rwoosots• e.e s. tr.nrYinh N.-F;-shy. free • vs
PL
Iv
t.• f E - r.,
'
Ii*
>
3
CD
A
I
1
w.
a
C i _ 2.
C VC
3) i =
.1
. x.
Pas. f 4/A711bl-trier A 1 -P-o 4 . .3 .. X spv Alonl.p/.
Pos. 7 ..r . sw Anz
icbs,S 2 sw Por'p/
Pas 3 Yir s w Mont. pl.
Pos. S S sw Atom' .pl.
Pos. 3 y sw Manz' pl.
icbs . 3 Y,4 siev il-lone. b/

Pos. 3 R sw Aione.pl.
Pos. 6" , r s A z.
Pos. 9 X sry Alo In.pl,

Pos 16 111111 Pas. /4 . 4 sw .4ionzi. pl.
'os• ,-... .3 spy 44ord.pe:
El Pos . .-fg -2" sw Ar?,.
I Pos 9 I 5 Manz'. pi.
Pos. 44 S sw Alont. pl.
Pos 7 sw Anz
Pos. 12 I E sw RacV. Pe!
Pas .12 I A spy Rod Rel.
Pas. 6 27. Sw Anz.

cs. 9 111111 Alon6.
P
Pos 9 YA sw frione. pi.. .
I Pos. i :f 4 sw Mont'. pl.
" Pas. 11 '5 sry Alcnt•124

Pos. • 9 • I? sky Alone'. 1
Pcs. 15 Z. sw Yerz . Re/
Pent; Pos. .15 A sw verz. Pe I.
Res. Pos 19 77 sw A z.
.. _ . .
Fbs. 22
Zalu.CEvereeder 1 Pos. 3 Zu/ 4/ /Void pl.
Zu la feverth;ler 2 Po s. 5 1 6/ Mond.pl.
Zialt2Feveri-eder 3 Po s.1.4 I .6/ Mont. p/.
ZalaRverfe. ler 4 Pos. 12 Ad. 6/ Rack; Re/
r rPos. .9 za, kV ItIon4*

2"2/cilit/eet‘e; ler
Zu/uCe verc4e;ler Pos. .11 ( 6/ 1VOni. pi.
Zeiitieverteller •
7 Reserve
Zi2/. Al 1/err. Re/.
Laireverlaler 8 - Pos..
--___ /5
(4, . . i
II1II
--f
to)
....-
..
--......-
I
11111

Manual C-631 - Searcheable

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual C-631 - Searcheable

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual C-631 - Searcheable

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIM

Turbo Compressor Set

Foster. Wheeler Ltda.

Rio de Janeiro / Brazil

Petroquisa Fafer Contract Number: 01/70

GHH Job No.: 410 020/29

Survey of Units Described

4 Tail-Gas Expansion Turbine

8 Lube/Control Oil System

0.0.1117 List of Attachments

0.8.0.01 General plan M60.9030.1245

1)SpUlung von 1-2 Std. Dauer wahrend kritischer Betriebspunkte,

Stetige, kontinuierliche SpUlung wegen zu groBen VerschleiBes

2)Stellungnahme zum Schaufelschaden

AV.A, M.TM., M.TM.S 4x, M.TM,K, M.TM.KV, .KA, MO.M,

0.0.0.1117 Index to Unit 0

0.4.0.05 Checking the set before start-uo

0.4.3.13 Steam piping for oil-pump drive turbine

0.5.0.04 Start-up of set.

0.6.0.03 Operation and maintenance

0.6.5.05 Tail-gas expansion turbine

0.6.6.03 Compressor (purging while in operation)

0.7.0.78 Shutdown of set

The wording of the instructions, including the layout

GutehoffnungshUtte cannot assume any responsibility

For incorporation into the production plant system of

Machine No. 4730

Tail-gas turbine Design Maximum Reduced(purging)

Machine No. 4717

Main drive motor (furnished by purchaser)

Mail oil tank

Pluir-in heater for oil tank.

Main oil DUMP set

a) Main oil pump

b) Steam turbine driving the main oil pump

Auxiliary oil pump set

A) Auxiliary oil pump

B) Electric motor driving the auxiliary oil pump (furnished

Twin oil cooler with change-over valve

Manufacturer Boll & Kirch, Cologne

Each filter is rated to handle the entire oil volume being

0.).0.76 Description of the NO Compressor set

The radial compressor takes in nitrous gas from

To avoid surging the compressor is equipped with

A manually operated, oil-hydraulically driven bypass valve

The compressor set is driven by an. electric motor the speed

The set is equipped with the measuring, control and alarm

Moreover, the main switch of the drive motor is connected to

• an interlockingchain by which the compressor set is automatical-

In this case the blow-off valve of the compressor is opened,

HARD CHECK VALVE.

• Materials: According to the application, body and valve disc are

Design with Oil Brake: If a reflux of.the flow is expected to occur

Design with Full-Opening Device: If the pressure loss must be kept

Einbaubeispiele der ERHARD-Rucksablagklappe Installation Examples for ERHARD Check Valves

. Vertika e Leltung Vertical Main

Fig 7 I Fig 8 Flg. 9

Vor dem Einbau der ERHARD-RUckschlagklappe miissen die Leitungen von

Beim Einbau in das Rohrleitungssystem ist darauf zu achten, daB die

Die dellen aus nichtrostendem Staht sind in . selbstschmierenden